Professional Documents
Culture Documents
om
ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ
.c
ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﻨﻭﻱ
ik
ﻋﻠﻭﻡ ﺘﺠﺭﻴﺒﻴﺔ – ﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ – ﺘﻘﻨﻲ ﺭﻴﺎﻀﻲ
aw
ﺇﺸﺭﺍﻑ ﻭ ﺘﺄﻝﻴﻑ
af
ﺍﻝﻤﺅﻝﻔﻭﻥ:
.m
om
ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ ،ﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺍ ،ﻷﺎ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺴﺒﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ،ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲡﻨﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ .
ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻬﺎ .ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺘﺴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺬ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻬﻢ ﻫﻮ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺳﺔ ﻭ ﺣﺴﺐ ،ﺑﻞ
ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﻨﻴﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﻭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ،ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﲝﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ :ﲟﻌﲎ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺴﲑ
ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻕ ﻭ ﺍﲣﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺽ .
.c
ﺇﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﰐ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ،ﺑﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﻠﻪ .ﻓﺒﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﲏ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺬ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﻓﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ﻣﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻤﻴﺬ ،ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺇﳚﺎﺩ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﳏﺪﺩ ،ﺑﻞ ﻳﺘﻌﺪﺍﻩ ﺍﱃ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻭﺟﻴﻬﺔ ﲡﺎﻩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺇﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺷﻜﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ik
ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﲣﻤﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﲣﻤﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ،ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﲡﺮﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ .
ﻭ ﺣﱴ ﳒﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺬ ﻳﺪﺭﻙ ﻣﻌﲎ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﰐ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺗﻪ ،ﻻ ﻧﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻣﻦ ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺼﻮﺩﺓ ،ﺑﻞ ﻧﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ) ﻧﺴﻤﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ -ﻣﺸﻜﻞ (
aw
ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺬ ﰲ ﺣﻠﻪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ،ﺇﻻ ﺃﺎ ﻏﲑ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﲎ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ،ﻭ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎ ﳋﻄﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ،ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﱪ ﻭ ﺍﳉﻬﺪ
ﻓﺎﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﰐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﻴﺬ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﳍﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ " ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﲔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ " ﺍﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ " ﻣﻨﺘﺠﲔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ " ﻭ ﻧﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺪﺍﻏﻮﺟﻴﺔ
ﺍﻹﻟﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ .
af
ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳚﺐ ﺑﻨﺎﺀﻫﺎ ﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ .ﻭ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺎ ﻭ ﻻ ﳑﻜﻨﺎ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻫﻜﺬﺍ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺘﺴﺎﺀﻝ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ
ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﺎﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﻴﺬ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻧﻔﺴﻬﻢ .
ot
ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﱘ ،ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺬ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ :
-ﺍﺳﺘﺤﻀﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﻓﻪ ﻭ ﲡﻨﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻛﺄﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﳊﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﻧﺺ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻡ ﻻ .
-ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ .
.m
ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﻛﺄﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﻀﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻤﺒﺬ ﻭ ﳚﺮﺏ ﺩﻻﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﺴﺠﺎﻣﻬﺎ ،ﻭ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻣﻌﲎ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ .ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ
ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﻻ ﲢﻞ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ،ﻓﻬﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺎﺋﻘﺎ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻬﻮﻥ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ،ﻷﺎ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﲑ .
-ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ) ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ ( ﻏﲑ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ .
w
-ﻭ ﺣﱴ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻀﻮﺭﻫﺎ ،ﻓﺎﻥ ﲡﻨﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﳝﺮ ﺑﺴﲑﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﻫﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ " ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺴﻬﺎ " ﻟﻠﺘﻼﻣﻴﺬ.
ﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﳉﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺬ ﻗﺼﺪ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺬ ﺑﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻣﻜﺘﺴﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﳊﺎﺟﻴﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .
w
ﻭ ﰲ ﻫﺪﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﻨﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﺎﺫ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﲡﺴﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
) ء ا
ه (
w
ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﺼﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ :ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ – ﺩﺭﻭﺱ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺋﻖ – ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ – ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﳏﻠﻮﻟﺔ – ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺧﲑﺍ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ
ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ .
ﻛﻤﺎ ﺣﺮﺻﻨﺎ ﻭ ﳓﻦ ﻧﻌﺪ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻟﻸﺳﺘﺎﺫ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺃﲨﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺎﺝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ .
ﻭ ﻟﺴﻨﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻡ ﺑﺼﺪﺩ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﻭﺻﻔﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﺎﺫ ،ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳛﺼﺮ ﰲ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻤﻨﺘﻪ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﱃ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﺎﺫ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻮﻳﺔ .ﻭ ﻟﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﻧﺮﺳﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻃﺎ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﱪﺍﺳﺎ ﻟﻪ ﰲ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻤﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻫﺞ .
ﻭ ﺇﺫ ﻻ ﳜﻠﻮ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﺋﺺ ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﺮﺣﺐ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﳍﻢ .
ﺘﻘﺩﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻜﺘﺎﺏ
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
om
ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ
.c
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ ﻤﺩﻋﻤﺔ ﺒﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﻔﺎﻫﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺭﺭﺓ ﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ
ik
ﻝﻠﺤل ﻭ ﺒﺘﻌﺎﻝﻴﻕ ﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ. ﻭ ﻤﺩﻋﻤﺔ ﺒﺒﺭﺍﻫﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ.
aw
af
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
om
-ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﻻﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ.................. -ﺇﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭ....................................
-ﻤﻔﻬﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ................................ -ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ.................................
-ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ......................... 20 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ......................................
-ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺌل...................... 22 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ......................................
-ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ................................... 24 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ......................................
126 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ..................................... ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ.............................................
26
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ.....................................
.c
128
130 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ..................................... 35 ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ
131 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ............................................. 36 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ..............................................
38 ﺩﺭﻭﺱ ﻭ ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ik
143 ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ -ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ...................
-ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ...................
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ144 .............................................. -ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ.................
146
aw
ﺩﺭﻭﺱ ﻭ ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ 46 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ.......................................
-ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ.............................. 48 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ......................................
-ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ........................ 50 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ......................................
52 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ..............................................
ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ…………………………………..
-ﺇﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ...................... 61 ﺍﻹﺸﺘﻘﺎﻗﻴﺔ
af
-ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ............................ 62 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ..............................................
-ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﺔ............................. ﺩﺭﻭﺱ ﻭ ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
64
-ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ .......................... -ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ...................................
-ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﺭ ........ -ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻤﻨﺤﻥ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ........................
ot
162
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ.......................................... 78 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ.....................................
166
80 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ......................................
82 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ.............................................
177 ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
91
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺸﺘﻘﺎﻗﻴﺔ
w
178 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ............................................
180 ﺩﺭﻭﺱ ﻭ ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ 92 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ.............................................
-ﺘﺫﻜﻴﺭ ﺤﻭل ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ...........................
w
-ﺤﺼﺭ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ.....................................
-ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻨﻘﺎﻁ.............................
-ﺍﻝﻌﻨﺎﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺓ.................................
188 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ....................................
98 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ.......................................
190 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ...................................
100 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ......................................
192 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ...................................
102 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ......................................
193 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ........................................ 103 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ.............................................
ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ
om
-ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺘﺤﺎﻙ................ -ﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺠﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ...............
-ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﺔ........................... -ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ...............................
-ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ................................. -ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ..............................
-ﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ.............................. 222 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ.......................................
320 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ.................................... 224 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ......................................
322 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ................................... ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ.......................................
226
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ....................................
.c
324 227 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ..............................................
327 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ............................................
237 ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺔ
337 اء
ik
ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ
359
-ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ..............................
-ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ........................
367 ات -ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ............................
268 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ.......................................
270 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ......................................
w
-ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎل..............................
-ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ
ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎل.......................................... 280 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ...............................................
-ﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ........................... ﺩﺭﻭﺱ ﻭ ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
w
282
-ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ............................ -ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ..................................
-ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ.............. -ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺴﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ.............
378 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ.................................... -ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ.........................
380 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ.................................... -ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍل ﻭ ﺃﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ.................
382 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ.................................... -ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ....................
389 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ........................................... 292 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ.......................................
294 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ.......................................
296 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ.......................................
298 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ...............................................
1
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
y
3
om
2
.c
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 x
-1
ik
-2
-3
aw
ه أ ا ن
أ
ا و ،و
ارزم م 973م و ! 1050م .ﻻ ﻴﺅﺭﺥ
ﻤﺅﺭﺥ ﻷﺒﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺤﺎﻥ ﺇﻻ ﻭﻴﻘﺭ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻅﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻡ ،ﺒل ﻭﻴﺼل ﺒﻌﺽ ﻤﺅﺭﺨﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻐﺭﺒﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ
af
ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻋﻅﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻌﺼﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﻤﺎﻥ .ﻗﺩ ﻋﺎﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺭﻭﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﻴﺩ ﻤﻥ ﻤﻠﻭﻙ ﻭﺴﻼﻁﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩ
ﻭﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻡ أ*ل أ ا (س ا &ن ﻭﻗﺩ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺒﻴﺭﻭﻨﻲ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺒﻤﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﻋﺼﺭﻩ ،ﻤﻥ ﺃﻤﺜﺎل
ot
ﺍﺒﻥ ﺴﻴﻨﺎ ﻭﺍﻝﻔﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻬل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﺼﺭﺍﻨﻲ .ﻝﻘﺩ ﺃﺘﻘﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺭﻭﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﻴﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺎﻨﺏ
ﺍﻝﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻤﻴﺔ – ﻝﻐﺔ ﺒﻠﺩﻩ -ﻭﺍﻝﻌﺭﺒﻴﺔ ،ﻓﻘﺩ ﺃﺘﻘﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺭﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺴﺭﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻨﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﻤﺎ ﺴﺎﻋﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ
.m
ﻓﻲ ﻜﺘﺒﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻝﻐﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﺩﻤﺎﺀ ،ﻭﻨﺎﻗﺸﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﻝﻴﻬﺎ،
ﻓﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﻝﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ،ﻤﺜل ﻭﺼﻔﻪ ﻝﺼﻭﺭﺓ
w
7
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 1
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
y ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﻫﻭ
f
om
ﺍ( ، f ( x ) = −1ﺏ( ، f ( x ) = 0ﺠـ( . f ( x ) = 3
1
.3ﺤل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ:
ﺏ( . f ( x ) = − x ﺍ( ، f ( x ) = − x + 1
-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 x
.4ﺤل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ:
.c
-1 ﺏ( . f ( x ) ≥ − x + 1 ، ﺍ( f ( x ) < 0
ik
.5ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
[ − 4 , 3ﻤﺤﺩﺩﺍ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ] .6ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﺭﻯ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻅﻤﻰ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ
aw ﺘﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﺎﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ.
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
af
) (Cﻨﺼﻑ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ] [ ABﺤﻴﺙ . AB =1 :ﻨﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ) ، (Cﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ ، A
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻤﺴﻘﻁﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ) . ( ABﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل (
ot
( )
.5ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ . O , i , j
w
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
w
8
1 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
ﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ: ] [ − 2, 3 ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
1
f ( x) = x + 1ﻭ . g ( x) = − x + 2
2
( )
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﻭ ) ( D ′ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O , i , j
.1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ g؟ ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ) ( Dﻭ ) . ( D ′
om
.2ﺒﻘﺭﺍﺀﺓ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﻭ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) ( Dﻭ ) . ( D ′ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ.
ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ: ] [ − 2,3 .3ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل f3 ، f 2 ، f1ﻭ f 4ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
) f3 ( x ) = −2 f ( x) ، f 2 ( x ) = f ( x) × g ( x) ، f1 ( x ) = f ( x) + g ( xﻭ . f 4 ( x ) = g ( x) + 1
.c
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ xﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ) f3 ( x ) ، f 2 ( x ) ، f1 ( xﻭ ) . f 4 ( x •
( )
ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ) ( D3ﻭ ) ( D4ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ f3ﻭ f 4ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O , i , j •
ik
)f ( x
= )h ( x .4ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
)g ( x
1 2
aw
. h( x ) = − − ﻋﻴﻥ Dhﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . hﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ Dhﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
2 x−2
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺨﺎﻤﺱ
af
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ،ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ( O , OI , OJﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ
J
ot
.3ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ xﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ tﻭ yﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ، xﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻭﺭ ﻤﻥ tﺇﻝﻰ yﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ
t → x →y
w
f g
ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
h
1
= ) h (t ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ1 + 2500 t 2 :
2
ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ hﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺒﻭﻋﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻴﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ g fﻭﻨﻜﺘﺏ h = g fﺤﻴﺙ:
) ) h(t ) = g ( f (t
9
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 1
om
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) f ( xﻤﻤﻜﻨﺎ.
.c
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ f :ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻭ Dﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻔﻬﺎ.
ik
( )
ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ( ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ O , i , jﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ،ﻫﻭ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ
) M ( x , yﺤﻴﺙ x ∈ D :ﻭ ) . y = f ( x
aw
( )
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O , i , j ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( C ﻓﺈﻥ ) y = f ( x ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ ) ( C ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻤﺯﻨﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
ﺘﻌﺎﺭﻴﻑ
fﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Iﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ Iﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ Iﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ f
.m
ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ x1ﻭ x2ﻤﻥ ، I ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ x1ﻭ x2 ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ x1ﻭ x2
) f ( x1 ) = f ( x2 ﻤﻥ ، Iﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x1 < x2ﻓﺈﻥ: ﻤﻥ ، Iﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x1 < x2ﻓﺈﻥ:
) f ( x1 ) > f ( x2 ) f ( x1 ) < f ( x2
w
2
-1 0 1 2 x -1 0 1 2 x
w
-2 -2
-1 0 1 2 x
fﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ − 1:1.5 fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ − 1:1.5 fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ − 1:1.5
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺇﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺇﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Iﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل.
10
1 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
om
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ) ( −8ﺴﻭﺍﺒﻕ ﺒﺎﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f؟
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ αﺒﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺩﺴﺘﻭﺭ ﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) f (αﺃﻤﺎ ﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻭﺍﺒﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ
.c
ﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ βﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل f ( x) = β : x
ﺤــل:
ik
f (−2) = −6 ، f (1) = 9ﻭ . f ( 3) = 5 + 6 3 .1
f ( x ) = 2 .2ﻴﻌﻨﻲ x 2 + 6 x = 0ﺃﻱ x( x + 6) = 0ﺃﻱ x = 0ﺃﻭ x = −6ﺇﺫﻥ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 2ﺴﺎﺒﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ 0ﻭ .-6
aw
f ( x) = −7ﻴﻌﻨﻲ x 2 + 6 x + 9 = 0ﺃﻱ ( x + 3)2 = 0ﺃﻱ x = −3ﺇﺫﻥ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ -7ﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ ﻫﻲ .-3
.3ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ f ( x ) = ( x 2 + 6 x) + 2 :ﻭﻤﻨﻪ f ( x ) = ( x + 3) 2 − 9 + 2ﺇﺫﻥ . f ( x ) = ( x + 3) 2 − 7ﺇﺫﻥ . a = 3
f ( x) = −8ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ( x + 3)2 − 7 = −8ﺃﻱ . ( x + 3) 2 = −1ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻻ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻭﻻ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ -8ﺴﻭﺍﺒﻕ.
af
.2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻹﺩﻻﺀ ﺒﻪ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻴﺨﺹ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f؟
.3ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ x1ﻭ x2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
.m
ﺤــل:
.1ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺠﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) f ( xﺘﻅﻬﺭ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ : f
w
2 2
11
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 1
ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﻌﻴﺔ
ﻨﻠﺨﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺘﺫﻜﻴﺭﺍ ﺒﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺩﺭﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺜﺎﻨﻭﻱ
ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
y
4
]]−∞, 0 fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ •
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a < b ≤ 0ﻓﺈﻥ a 2 > b 2
3
om
f : x ֏ x2
[∞[0, +
2
1
fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ •
.c
y
[]−∞, 0 fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ •
1 1
ik
1 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a < b < 0ﻓﺈﻥ >
a b 1
֏ f :x
0 1 x fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞]0, + • x
aw
1 1
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ 0 < a < bﻓﺈﻥ >
a b
af
y
3
2
f :x ֏ x
1 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ 0 ≤ a < bﻓﺈﻥ a < b
.m
-1
y
1
-1
y ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ
f : x ֏ sin xﻭ g : x ֏ cos x
1
f : x ֏ sin x
ﺩﻭﺭﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﻫﻤﺎ 2π
0 3 x
g : x ֏ cos x
12
1 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
om
ﺤــل:
.1ﻨﻨﻁﻠﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻰ ﺜﻡ ﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺸﺭ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
( )
)− ( x + 2 ) + 5 = − x 2 + 4 x + 4 + 5 = − x2 − 4 x − 4 + 5 = − x 2 − 4 x + 1 = f ( x
2
.c
[ ∞ [ − 2; + .2ﻝﻨﻌﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ aﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ −2 ≤ a <b :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ) 0 ≤ a + 2 < b + 2ﺒﺈﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ( 2
ik
ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ " ﻤﺭﺒﻊ " ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ [ 0; +ﻓﺈﻥ ) ( a + 2 ) < ( b+2ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ) − ( a + 2 ) > − ( b+2
2 2 2 2
1
= )f ( x .1ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ [ ∞ ] − ∞ ; 2 [ ∪ ] 2; +ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ+ 3 :
x−2
.m
.2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻝﻴﻥ [∞ ]2; +ﻭ [. ]−∞ ; 2
ﺤــل .1 :ﻨﻨﻁﻠﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻰ ﺜﻡ ﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺘﻭﺤﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﻤﺎﺕ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ [ ∞ ] − ∞ ; 2 [ ∪ ] 2; +ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
w
13
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 1
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﺃﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ Dﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل
f =g ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ: ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ Dﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎf ( x ) = g ( x ) :
om
.2ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭﻴﺔ
fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ D fﻭ Dgﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ λ .ﻭ kﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ.
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﺯ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
.c
Df ( f + k )( x ) = f ( x) + k f +k ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ fﻭ k
D f ∩ Dg )( f + g )( x ) = f ( x) + g ( x f +g ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ fﻭ g
ik
Df )( λ f )( x ) = λ f ( x λf ﺠﺩﺍﺀ fﺒﺎﻝﻌﺩﺩ λ
)( f × g )( x ) = f ( x) × g ( x
D f ∩ Dg
aw f ×g fﻭg ﺠﺩﺍﺀ
f )f ( x f
{ x∈D } ∩ Dg : g ( x) ≠ 0 = ) ( x g
ﺤﺎﺼل ﻗﺴﻤﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ g
f g )g ( x
ﻤﺜﺎل f :ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ f ( x ) = x 2 :ﻭ g ( x) = x + 2
af
.3ﺘﺭﻜﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل
w
ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ gﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﺫﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻌﻲ ) ( x ֏ x ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻf ( x) = − x + 3 :
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ − x + 3 ≥ 0ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل x ≤ 3ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ g fﻫﻲ D = ] − ∞ ,3 ] :ﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
= ) ( g f )( x − x+3
14
1 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 5
fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x ) = x + 2 :ﻭ g ( x) = x 2 + 2 x
f
.1ﻋﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل f × g ، − f + 2 g ، f + gﻭ
g
x2 − 4
= ) . h ( xﻫل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ fﻭ hﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺘﺎﻥ ؟ .2ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] 2; +ﺒﹻ:
x−2
om
ﺤــل:
(− f .1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ + 2 g )( x ) = 2 x 2 + 3x − 2 ، ( f + g )( x ) = x 2 + 3 x + 2 : x
( f × g )( x ) = x3 + 4 x 2 + 4 x ﻭ
f x+2
.c
1
x 2 + 2 x = 0 ) ( x ) = 2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل x = 0ﺃﻭ ( x = −2 ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل x ≠ 0ﻭ = : x ≠ −2
g x + 2x x
.2ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ fﻭ hﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻷﻥ ﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ.
ik
aw ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 6
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ [ 0; +ﻭ [ ∞ [ 1; +ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﹻ f ( x) = 2 x 2 + 1 :ﻭ g ( x) = x − 1
.1ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ fﻭ gﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﻜل ﻤﺭﻜﺏ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﺠﻌﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩﻫﻤﺎ.
.2ﻋﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ f gﻭ g f
af
ﺤــل:
x
u2
→ x − 1
v2
→ x −1 x u1
→ x 2 v1
.1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ→ 2 x 2 + 1 :
ot
g f
ﻭﻤﻨﻪ f = v1 u1ﺤﻴﺙ u1 : x → x :ﻭ v1 : x → 2 x + 1
2
ﺃﻱ [ ∞ f ( x) ∈[ 1; +ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ g fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ [ 0; + ﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ [ ∞ f ( x) ≥ 1 : [ 0; +
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ [ ∞ [ 0; +ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ: ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ [ ∞ [ 1; +ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
w
(
= g 2 x2 + 1 ) = f ( x −1)
( 2x + 1) − 1 (= 2 x −1) + 1
2
= 2
15
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 1
ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭ
.1ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔf + k :
om
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻝﻴﻜﻥ aﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﺤﻴﺙ. a < b :
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﻓﺈﻥ ) . f (a ) < f (bﺒﺈﻀﺎﻓﺔ kﺇﻝﻰ ﻁﺭﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺒﺎﻴﻨﺔ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ:
f (a ) + k < f (b) + kﺃﻱ . ( f + k ) ( a ) < ( f + k ) ( b ) :ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f + kﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . I
.c
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻨﺘﺒﻊ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻨﺎ ﻤﻤﺎﺜﻼ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . I
ik
aw
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Iﻭ λﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ. ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:
ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . I • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ λ > 0ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ λ f
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ λ < 0ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻫﺎ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ λ fﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . I •
af
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﻭ ﻜﺎﻥ λ > 0ﻓﺈﻥ f ( a) < f (b) :ﻭ ) λ f ( a ) < λ f (bﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ:
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ λ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . I )(λ f )(a ) < ( λ f )(b
.m
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Iﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Jﺤﻴﺙf ( I ) ⊂ J : ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ g fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . I •
w
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻫﺎ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﻴﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ g fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . I •
w
16
1 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 7
ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺘﻴﻥ:
3
f (1ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ]−∞ ; 0ﺒﹻf ( x ) = − + 2 :
x
g (2ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [1.5; +ﺒﹻg ( x) = (−2 x + 3) 2 :
om
ﻋﻨﺩ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺤﺎﻭل ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل λ u ، u + kﺃﻭ v uﺤﻴﺙ: ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ:
uﻭ vﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺭﺠﻌﻴﺘﺎﻥ.
ﺤــل:
.c
1
= ) h( xﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ. f = −3 h + 2 : .1ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺭﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ]−∞ ; 0ﺒﹻ:
x
ik
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ −3 hﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﺎﺘﺠﺎﻫﺎ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ hﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﻴﻥ.
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ hﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ]−∞ ; 0ﻓﺈﻥ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [. ]−∞ ; 0
aw
.2ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺭﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ uﻭ vﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [1.5; +ﻭ ] ]−∞ ;0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﹻ:
u ( x) = −2 x + 3ﻭ v( x) = x 2ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ [∞ u ( x) ≤ 0 ، [1.5; +ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ. g = v u :
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ uﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [1.5; +ﻭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ vﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ]−∞ ;0ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ
af
ﺤــل:
w
ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﺎﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) ( f × gﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ]−∞ ; 0ﻭ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [0; +
ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻕ :ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﻋﻁﺎﺀ ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﻋﺎﻤﺔ ﺘﻤﻜﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ) ( f + gﻭ ) ( f × gﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ
ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻝﻙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻀﻴﻔﺕ ﺸﺭﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ . g
17
<
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 1
ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ
.1ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔf + k :
( )
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) ( C fﻭ ) ( C f + kﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻴﻨﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ O ; i ; jﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ ) ( f + kﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
ﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﺈﻥ ) ( C f + kﻫﻭ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( C fﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ . k j
om
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) ) M ( x, f ( xﻤﻥ ) ( C fﻭ ) ) M ′ ( x, ( f + k )( xﻤﻥ ) . ( C f + kﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ: ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ:
( f + k )( x ) = f ( x) + kﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ MM ′ﻤﺭﻜﺒﺘﺎﻩ ) ( 0, kﻭ . MM ′ = k jﺇﺫﻥ M ′ﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Mﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ . k jﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C f + kﻫﻭ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ . k j
.c
y
Ch
ik
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل g ، fﻭ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ:
g ( x ) = x2 − 1 ، f ( x ) = x2ﻭ h ( x ) = x2 + 2
Cf
aw
ﻝﺩﺒﻨﺎ g = f − 1ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ) ( C gﻫﻭ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( C fﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ . − j
1
ﻝﺩﺒﻨﺎ h = f + 2ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ) ( Chﻫﻭ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( C fﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ . 2 j
0 1 x
Cg
( )
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﻭ ) ( Cλ fﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ O ; i ; jﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ ) (λ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺤﻴﺙ λ
ot
y
Ch ( C fﻓﺈﻥ ) ) M ′ ( x, λ f ( x ) ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ) ) M ( x, f ( xﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ:
w
ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ
0 1 x ﻝﺩﺒﻨﺎ g = − fﻭ h = 2 f
، ( C− fﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻤﺎﻥ ) (Cﻭ ) f ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ λ = −1ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﻥ
18
1 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
om
y
ﺤــل:
x 1 1
Cf .1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل x ≠ 0ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ+ = 1 + :
= )f ( x
.c
x x x
1
.2ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺭﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]−∞ ;0[ ∪ ]0; +
1
ik
ﺒﹻ h( x) = :ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎf = h + 1 :
0 1 x
Ch x
( )
ﺇﺫﻥ ،ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ، O ; i ; jﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻭ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ
aw
ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﺌﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ j
) (Cﻭ ) (C
g f ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x) = x 2 − 4 :ﻭ ) . g ( x) = f ( xﻨﺴﻤﻲ
( )
ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i ; j
ot
( C fﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ) ( Chﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ h ) h : x ֏ x 2ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ " ﻤﺭﺒﻊ " ( ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) .1
( C fﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻤﻪ. ) .2ﺒﻴﻥ ﻜﻴﻑ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ) ( C gﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ
.m
y ﺤــل:
Ch C fﻫﻭ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( Chﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ ) −4 jﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ(1 ) ( .1
w
−f g
( C fﺍﻝﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ،ﻭ ﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻅﻴﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ) ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻨﺤﺘﻔﻅ ﺒﺠﺯﺀ
( C fﺍﻝﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺘﺤﺕ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل . ) ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻝﺠﺯﺀ
19
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 1
5
4
Cf ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺭﺍﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺘﺤﺼﻠﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل
om
( C fﻭ ) ( C gﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ) ﻋﻠﻰ
3
Cg fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
g ( x) = ( x − 1) + 1
2
2 ﻭ f ( x) = x 2
Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) (
.c
C fﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ x ﻝﺘﻜﻥ
1
' Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Cﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . x + 1
g ﻝﺘﻜﻥ
ik
-2 -1 0 1 aw 2 3 x ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ' MMﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺜﺎﺒﺕ
.2ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﺔ
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ Dﺤﻴﺙ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ Dﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ g ( x) = f ( x + b) + k :ﺤﻴﺙ
( C fﻭ ) ( C gﺇﻝﻰ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ )
bﻭ kﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﻠﻭﻤﺎﻥ.ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﹻ:
af
(
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O , i , jﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) ) M ( x , f ( xﻤﻥ ) (C fﻭ ) ) M ′ ( x − b , g ( x − bﻤﻥ ) ( Cg
)
ot
ﺃ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ MM ′ = − bi + k j :ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . M ′
. (C f ) ﺏ( ﺤﺩﺩ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C gﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
.m
ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ،ﺒﻴﻥ ﻜﻴﻑ ﻴﺘﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ g f
f g
.4ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ gﻭ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ∞ [ − 1; +ﺒﹻ:
w
20
1 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ
y Y .1ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ
ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ ) ( x0 , y0 ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ Ω ( O ;i , j )
( Ω;i , j ) ( )
ﻫﻲ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i , jﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
j
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺠﺩﻴﺩ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ ) ( x , y
om
ﻫﻲ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ
j Ω i X
ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ( O ; i , jﻭ ﺤﻴﺙ ) ( X , Yﻫﻲ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ
O x
i ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ: ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ( Ω ; i , j
.c
x = X + x0
ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ
y = Y + y0
ik
.2ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل ﺃﻭل
( )
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x ) = x 2 + 4 x + 3 :ﻭﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ O ; i , j
aw
( )
ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ Ωﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ) ( −2, −1ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻠﻡ O ; i , j
( )
ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( C fﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ Ω ; i , jﻫﻲ Y = X 2 :ﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻤﻪ.
)( f
C ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍ O ; (
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ i , j )
af
= Yﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻤﻪ.
X
1
( )
ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( C fﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ Ω :i , jﻫﻲ:
.4ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﺔ
( C fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ﺤﺩﺩ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺍﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x = aﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻝـِﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ
w
ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ . O ; i , j ( )
w
( )
( C fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i , j ) Ω(a, bﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻝـِﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ﺤﺩﺩ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺍﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ
.5ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ( O;i , j ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) Ω(2,3ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ )
f
3x
= )f ( x [∞ ]−∞, 2[ ∪ ]2, +ﺒﹻ:
x−2
21
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 1
x+2
= )f ( x ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ Dﺠﺯﺀ ﻤﻥ ℝﺒﹻ:
x +1
.1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥD = ] − ∞ ; − 2 ] ∪ ] − 1; + ∞ [ :
.2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ f = g h :ﺤﻴﺙ gﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ " ﺍﻝﺠﺫﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻌﻲ " ﻭ hﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩﻫﺎ.
1
. h( x) = 1 +ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐ ﻴﺭ hﻋﻠﻰ ] ]−∞; −2ﻭﻋﻠﻰ [∞]−1; + .3ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ Dﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
x +1
.4ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ] ]−∞; −2ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞] − 1; +
om
.5ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل .4
.1ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ [ ∞ D = ] − ∞ ; − 2 ] ∪ ] − 1; +
.c
x+2 x+2
ﻭ . x + 1 ≠ 0ﻝﻨﺩﺭﺱ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻗﻴﻡ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ≥ 0 :
x +1 x +1
x ∞− -2 −1 ∞+
ik
x+2 - 0 + +
x +1 - - 0 +
x+2
+
aw0 - +
x +1
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺃﻥD = ] − ∞ ; − 2 ] ∪ ] − 1; + ∞ [ :
.2ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ h
af
1 1
֏x h( x) = 1 +ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ hﻫﻭ ﻨﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ: ﻤﻥ
x +1 x +1
1 1
֏ xﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ x + 1 :ﻤﺘﺒﻭﻋﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔx ֏ : ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ:
w
22
1 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ . 2cmﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ N ، Mﻭ Pﺤﻴﺙ N ∈ [CD ] ، M ∈ [ AB ] :ﻭ ] . P ∈ [ AD
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﺘﺤﺭﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ABﻤﻊ. AM = CN = DP :
ﻨﻀﻊ AM = xﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﹻ ) f ( xﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . MNP
.1ﻋﻴﻥ Dﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ fﺜﻡ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥf ( x) = ( x − 1) + 1 :
2
ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ]. [ 0; 2ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ fﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ Mﺍﻝﺘﻲ
om
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ MNPﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ.
( C fﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﹻ fﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ y = x 2 :ﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻤﻪ. ) .3ﺍﺸﺭﺡ ﻜﻴﻑ ﻴﺘﻡ ﺭﺴﻡ
.c
ﻭ AB = 2ﻓﺈﻥD = [ 0; 2] : ﺘﺘﺤﺭﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ AB .1ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ Dﻭ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) : f ( xﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ M
ik
1 1
ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ MNPﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ PﻭﻤﻨﻪMP 2 = x 2 + ( 2 − x ) = x 2 − 2 x + 2 :
2
= )f ( x
2 2
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ( x − 1) + 1 = x 2 − 2 x + 1 + 1 = x 2 − 2 x + 2 :ﻭﻤﻨﻪf ( x) = ( x − 1) + 1 :
2 2
aw
.2ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ ( x − 1) :ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ 0;1ﻭ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ 1; 2ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔx ֏ ( x − 1) + 1 :
2 2
ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ) x ֏ ( x − 1ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ 0;1ﻭ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ] . [ 1; 2
2
af
) (C
f .3ﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻫﻭ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = x 2
w
y
ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ )u (1;1
2
w
f
1
( C fﻗﻁﻊ ﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺫﺭﻭﺘﻪ ﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﺫﺭﻭﺓ ) ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
y=x 2
ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = x 2
-1 0 1 2 x
ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ ) . u (1;1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ) ( C fﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ). (1;1
23
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 1
om
ﺤﻀﺭ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻤﻤﺎﺜﻠﺔ ﻝﻠﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﺔ:
.c
ik
aw
af
ot
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ:
ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺒﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ kﻴﺘﻡ ﺍﻝﺤﺠﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ C 5ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ= 2F 4 * B 5 :
.m
ﺍﻷﺴﺌﻠﺔ:
.1ﻗﻡ ﺒﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﻗﻴﻡ kﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ . B 2ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟
w
ﻝﻤﺎ k = −1؟ ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻴﺤﺩﺙ ﻝﻤﺎ k = 0؟ ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ) (C fﻭ ) (C kf .2
.3ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻫﻲ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ fﻭ kfﻝﻤﺎ k > 0ﺜﻡ ﻝﻤﺎ . k < 0
w
.6ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﺄﺨﺫ ﺩﻭﺍل ﻤﺭﺠﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻤﻊ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻕ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ .ﻫل
ﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻨﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺃﻡ ﺘﺘﻐﻴﺭ ؟
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺒﺎﺴﺘﺨﺩﺍﻡ ﻤﺠﺩﻭل Excelﺃﻭ ﺒﺄﻱ ﺭﺍﺴﻡ ﺁﺨﺭ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ،ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
. x ֏ f (x + a ) + b ) ، x ֏ f (x + a ، x ֏ f (x ) + b
24
2 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺇﻜﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ
.1ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل
π
. g ( x ) = cos fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ f (x ) = sin x :ﻭ − x
2
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺘﺤﺼﻠﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ) (C fﻭ ) (C gﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻲ fﻭ . g
om
ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺍﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل .ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ g f
π
ﻨﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ cos + x = − sin x : ℝ
2
.2ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ
.c
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺭﺍﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ fﻭ gﻭ ﻀﻊ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﺭﺓ:
• f (x ) = sin xﻭ ) g (x ) = sin (π − x • f (x ) = cos xﻭ ) g (x ) = cos (π − x
ik
.3ﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ) cos ( 2xﻭ 2cos x
aw
f (x ) = cos ( 2xﻭ . g (x ) = 2cos x ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ) : fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ
(C fﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺴﻡ )
ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻴﺔ .ﻀﻊ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﻭل ﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻨﺎ ﻴﺅﻜﺩ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ.
af
) (
(C fﻭ C gﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ . gﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟ ) ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ
ﺜﻡ" " verticalﺜﻡ PRGM ﺜﻡ 2nd ﻭﺼﺎﺩﻕ ﺒﺎﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ . ENTERﺃﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ
w
.ﻓﻲ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﺤﺠﺯ ) Y 1 (1ﺜﻡ ﺨﺯﻨﻬﺎ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ENTER ﺼﺎﺩﻕ ﺒﺎﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ
ﺜﻡ . MATHﺃﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ TRACEﺜﻡ ﺍﻨﻘل ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻝﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ .Y 2 ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ
w
ALPHA → STO
. ENTER ﺜﻡ " ." Horizontalﺜﻡ ﺼﺎﺩﻕ ﺒﺎﺍﻝﻤﺴﺔ PRGM ﺜﻡ 2nd ﺃﺤﺠﺯ Aﻭ ﺼﺎﺩﻕ ﺒﺎﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ . ENTERﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل
.2ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺸﺔ ) (C hﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺤﻴﺙ . h = g fﻴﻤﻜﻨﻙ ﺤﺠﺯ ) Y 2 (Y 1ﻓﻲ .Y 3
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻭﻀﻌﻪ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻴﺨﺹ ) (C hﻭ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ؟ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺼﺤﺘﻪ.
25
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 1
ﺃﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][ 0, 7 v (4
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 3ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
v (5ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 0, 7
][0;4 ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 1
v (6ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][3, 7
y
ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ .
3
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ . 4 .ﺇﻝﻰ . ..7 .
2
ﺃﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺭﺍﺤﺎﺕ : 1
om
-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 x
f ( x) = x 2ﻭ g ( x) = x − 2 -1
x( x − 2 x) (3
2
, x − 2 (2 , x + 2 x (1
3 3 2
.c
gﻭ hﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﺒـ : .5.
g ( x ) = 2 x − 1ﻭ h( x ) = x 2 + 3
fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][ 0, 2 (1
fﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][ 0, 2 (2
ik
( g h)( x) = ...
2 x 2 + 2 (3 , 2 x 2 − 1 (2 , 2 x 2 + 5 (1
aw fﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][1, 3 (3
(4ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x ) = 0ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻴﻥ
fﻭ g ) (C fﻭ ) (Cgﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ .6.
( −2) (5ﺤل ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x ) = 4 :
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺯﻭﺩ ﺒﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ) (O, i, jﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل (
f 2ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ ]0; +ﺒـ :
y 1
f ( x ) = − x 2 + 3ﻭ = )g ( x
af
3
x
2
cg f 22
( )( x ) = − x 3 + 3x (2 ، ( f + g )(5) = − (1
ot
-1
26
1 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
2x + 3 ﺒـ : . 8ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ
f ( x) = 2 . 15 1
x −4 f ( x) = x 2 − 5 x + 3
2
5 (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺼﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ 3 ,- 2 , 0 , 1 :
= )f ( x . 16
2x + 1
2
17
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺴﻭﺍﺒﻕ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ , 3 :
x2 2
= )f ( x . 17 . 9 .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][− 2;2
x−3
om
) (C fﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ
2
x
= )f ( x . 18. ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
x −3 y
3
f ( x) = x − x − 1 . 19
.c
2
x−2
= )f ( x . 20. 1
ik
2x − 6
f ( x ) = sin x − 3 cos x . 21. -2 -1 0 1 2 x
aw
-1
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ . 22 .ﺇﻝﻰ . 27 .
ﻭ g ( x) = x = )f ( x x 2 . 23 fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
x2
= ) f ( xﻭ g ( x) = x . 24. f ( x ) = x 3 − 2 x + 5 . 10 .
x
w
x2 − 3
x +1 1 = )f ( x . 11 .
= )g ( x = ) f ( xﻭ . 25 7
w
27
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 1
1
= )g ( x f ( x ) = x 2 + 2 xﻭ − 3 36
x f . 28ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ :
f ( x ) = x 2 + 1ﻭ g ( x) = x 2 + 2 x − 3
k , h , g , fﺩﻭﺍل ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﺒـ : . 37
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل:
h ( x ) = x + 1، g ( x ) = x 2
، f ( x ) = 2 x (1 f ×g ، f +g ، g ، f
k ( x ) = x2 + 1 (2ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ) ( f + g )( xﻭ )( f × g )( x
f . 29.ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
om
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ : 4 2x − 1
g (x ) = 1 − = ) f (xﻭ
f + k = g h (2 k = h g (1 x +1 x +1
(1ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ g
k h = g + 2 h (4 f k = 2k (3 3fﻭ −2 g (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :
.c
k k = g 2 + 2 k (6 g k = gk + k (5 ..30.ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
f ( x ) = 2x 2 − 1ﻭ g ( x ) = 4x + 3
ik
• ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ . 38 .ﺇﻝﻰ . 43 .
(1ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ :
ﻓﻜﻙ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺭﻜﺏ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ( f + g )( x) = 2( x + 1) 2
aw
(2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ 2f + g :ﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ .
)f ( x ) = ( x − 1 . 38. fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]0; +ﺒـ: . 31.
2
af
−3
f ( x ) = ( x + 2) + 1
2
. 39. = )g ( x f ( x) = 5 x − 2ﻭ
2x
ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل : (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ 5 ، 2 ، 1
ot
3
= )f ( x . 40
x +1 −2 g ، 3 f ، f + g
1
f (x ) = x +1 (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ 3 ، -1 ، −ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل :
.m
. 41
2
)f ( x ) = cos ( x − 1
1 f
. 42 f −g ، ، f ×g
2 g
w
= )f ( x
2x
−1 . 43 • ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ . 32 .ﺇﻝﻰ . 36 .
5 ﻋﻴﻥ f gﻭ g fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ
w
−1
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f + gﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل I = ) f ( xﻭ g ( x) = 2 x 35
x +1
28
1 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
.
ﺤﻴﺙ : f ..49ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ℝ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] ]−∞;0ﺒـ : . 45
1 f ( x) = x + x
2
. g ( x) = , f ( x ) = x 2 + 1ﻨﻀﻊ h = g f
x ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. ]−∞;0
y f . 46ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ ]0; +ﺒـ :
5
1
4
f ( x) = x −
3 x
2 ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞[ 0; +
om
1
f . 47ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] ]−∞;3ﺒـ :
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 x
-1
f ( x) = 3 − x
-2
-3 (1ﻓﻜﻙ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺭﻜﺏ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﺠﻌﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ
.c
-4 ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ .
-5
[]−∞;3 (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
ik
(P ) .48.ﻫﻭ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ "ﻤﺭﺒﻊ"
ﻨﺭﺴﻡ ) (C 1ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) (Pﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ 2i
y
4
aw ﻭ ) (C 2ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) (C 1ﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ − j
3
y
4
2 )( P
af
3
1
2
ot
y
2
) (C 1
y y
4 ) (C 2
w
4
1 3
3
2
w
1
w
29
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 1
..53.ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺯﻭﺠﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ][− 3,3 ) (Cﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) fﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل( 50
ﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [0,3ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ : 5
y
ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل : -1 0 1 2 3 x
om
-1
.c
ﺍﺘﻤﻡ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {2ﺤﻴﺙ: f ..55 . 51.ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺤﻴﺙ :
ik
x 2 + 3x f ( x ) = x 3 − 3x 2 + 3 x + 1
= )f ( x
2− x ) (Cﻤﻨﺤﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ b ، aﻭ cﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل
aw
) (O, i , j
c
f ( x ) = ax + b + ﻋﺩﺩ xﻤﻥ } ℝ − {2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ : (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ αﻭ βﺒﺤﻴﺙ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل
2−x
(2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ) (C fﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ f ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ f ( x ) = ( x − α ) 3 + β :
af
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = − x − 5 : (2ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ x 3 :
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ }ℝ − {−2 .56.ﻝﺘﻜﻥ f (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ot
2
1
w
) (A, i , j
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ (1ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C f
ﺃﻨﻘل ﻫﺩﺍ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺘﻙ ﺜﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺜل
(2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ) (C fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ
ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ f 1ﻭ f 2ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
) . (A, i , j
f1 ( x ) = x 3 − 3 x 2 + 2
(3ﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل Aﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C f
f 2 ( x) = x3 − 3 x 2 + 2
30
1 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
..64.ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {0ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ: (C ) ..57.ه ا ا
7ا : 8 f
x 2 − 2x + 3
= )f ( x
f ( x) = x 2 + 2 +
1
(x − 1)2
x
y
6
1
= ) h (x ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ g ( x) = x 2 + 2 :ﻭ
4
x 3
om
(2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻊ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ f 2
(3ﻫل ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻊ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ .
.c
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ [∞. ]0, + ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ..58..ﺇﻝﻰ ..62.. •
ik
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
.65ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻀﺭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠـﺎﻩ
ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
aw
f ( x) = (x 2 + 1) x (1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞[0,+ − x2 + 2x + 3
[I = ]− ∞,0 ، = )f ( x ..58.
f ( x) = (− 3x + 2)x 2 (2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل []− ∞,0 X −2
f ( x) = x 3 ( x − 1) (3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][1,8
[∞I = ]0,+
1
، f ( x) = x 2 − + 2 ..59
af
x−2 x−2
g ( x) = x 2 ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ:
[∞I = ]0,+
1
، = )f ( x x− ..61
) (Cfﻭ ) (C gﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﻋﻠﻰ
.m
x
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ )ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ (: I = ]− ∞,−3[ ، f ( x ) = 2 x 2 +
1
.62
x+3
f ..63ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [0,+ﺤﻴﺙ :
w
f ( x) = x 2ﻭ g ( x) = − x 2 − x
w
) (Cﻭ ) (C
g f (1ﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻋﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ h
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ xﻭﻀـﻌﻴﺔ ) (Cfﺒﺎﻝﻨـﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻘﻁـﻊ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . h
. y = x2 ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ
31
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 1
(Cfﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . x ) ﻝﺘﻜﻥ M 1ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ [∞[0,+ (1 .67ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Ch ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ ) . f ( x ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞[0,+ ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
f 69ﻭ gﻭ hﺩﻭﺍل ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ : ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺤﻴﺙ :
1 1
g ( x) = 1 − ، f ( x) = 3 x − x ≥ 0ﻓﺈﻥ f ( x ) ≥ 0
3x 3x
om
h( x ) = 3 x − 1
ﺤﻴﺙ [∞[0,+ (2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
(1ﻓﻜﻙ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ g ( x) = −1 + 1 + x :
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻝﻴﻥ [∞[0,+ ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
.c
[ ]− ∞,0ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ، ]0,+ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ xﻤﻭﺠﺒﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ g ( x ) ≥ 0
[∞]0,+ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻝﻴﻥ [ ]− ∞,0ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ
ik
(3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻤﺠﺎل ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ g f؟
)f ( x
(3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻭ ﺒﺴﻁ ) ( g f )( x ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
)g ( x
aw
f (4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻤﺠﺎل ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f g؟
ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺘﺎﻥ ؟ (4ﻫل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ hﻭ
g ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) . ( f g )( x
70ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
af
..68ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Cfﻭ ) (C gﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ
[∞ I = ]0,+ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
fﻭ gﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺤﻴﺙ h = g f :
ot
5 ) (Cf
(2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ uﻭ vﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ .I 4
w
1 1
) (C g
(4ﺒﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ g = ( S + D) :ﻤﺜل ﺒﺩﻗﺔ ،ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ
2
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . g 0 1 2 3 4 x
32
1 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﻤﺴــﺎﺌل ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −3;3ﺍﻝـﺸﻜل 71
( )
75ﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﺯﻭﺩ ﺒﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ، O; i, j ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﻴﻤﺜل ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ.ﻤﺜل ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = xﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ f1 ( x) = − f ( x ) (1
y
Aﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻴﻬﺎ )(2;0 ) f 2 ( x) = f ( x (2
y 1
f3 ( x) = f ( x) + 1 (3
0 1 x
1
M . f 4 ( x ) = f ( x + 1) (4
→
j
om
→ 0
i1 A x f 72ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) (Cﺍﻷﻗﺭﺏ f ( x) = 2 x 2 − 1ﻭ g ( x) = 4 x3 − 3 x
ﻤﻥ . A ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ f g = g f :
.c
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ xﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﻭ Mﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ 73ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
ﻤﻥ ) (Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . x f ( x) = x − 2 − 3 x + x + 2
ik
(1ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ AMﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . x
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺯﻭﺠﻴﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺍﻜﺘﺏ ) f ( xﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺭﻤﺯ
(2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [ 0; +ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻘﺔ.
3 7
2
aw
f ( x) = x − + (2ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ
2 4
ﺃ( ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﺒﻴﻥ AMﻭ ) f ( x؟ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ.
ﺏ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞. [ 0; + (3ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ، fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ g
af
ﺠـ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ )g ( x) = − f ( x
AMﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ .
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞]−1; + ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f 74
ot
b
f ( x) = a + xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ ]−1; +ﻴﻜﻭﻥ:
x +1
(4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞. ]−1; +
w
33
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 1
f m ( x) = mx 2 − 4mx + 4m + 2 ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻁﻭل ﻭ ﻋﺭﺽ
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) M ( x; yﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) ( H ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل MNPQﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺤﺎﻁ ﹰﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABC
ﻭ ) ( Pmﻓﺈﻥ xﻴﺤﻘﻕ: ﻭ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ.
( E )...... mx 3 − 7 mx 2 + (16m + 1) x − 12m − 2 = 0 18 − 3x
= MQ - (1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ
2
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ x = 2ﻴﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( E
-ﻨﻀﻊ ) A( xﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل MNPQﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . x
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ bm ، amﻭ cmﺤﻴﺙ:
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥA( x) = −3 ( x − 3) − 9 :
2
= mx − 7 mx + (16m + 1) x − 12m − 2
3 2
om
) = ( x − 2)(am x 2 + bm x 2 + cm (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . A
(4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ mﺒﺤﻴﺙ : (3ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ 0;6
(4ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ Aﺘﻘﺒل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻅﻤﻰ.ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ؟ ( Pm ) -ﻭ ) ( Hﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻭﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ..
( Pm ) -ﻭ ) ( Hﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ. (5ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﺎﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ
.c
ﻼ .ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ
79ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴ ﹰ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ.
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ، ( ABﺘﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ، Bﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (CMﻴﻘﻁﻊ f 77ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـf ( x ) = ( x + 1)( x − 4) :
ik
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ADﻓﻲ – (1ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ:
. Nﻨﺴﻤﻲ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ
aw
2
3 25
] [ MN ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ f ( x) = x − −
2 4
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ -ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ( O; I , Jﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( Pﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل
ﻫﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ) (Γﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﺃﻱ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ x 2ﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل
af
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Iﻝﻤﺎ Mﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ). ( AB
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ.
( )
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ A; AB, ADﻭ ﻨﺴﻤﻲ tﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ
g (2ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ g ( x) = f ( x ) :
ot
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . M
-ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ g ( x) = f ( x ) : x ≥ 0
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . t
-ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ gﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺯﻭﺠﻴﺔ.
.m
x
=y (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) (Γﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ (3ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ gﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ . f
2x −1
1
(3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ − ﺒـ:
O; i, j 78ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ( )
2
w
34
2
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
om
اف
دا آ
ود و
در.
.c
ﺤل ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﺘﺴﺘﺨﺩﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ
ik
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ.
aw
) (a + b ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ ﻝﻨﺸﺭ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺒﻜﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ )ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺠﻲ(
n
af
ﻫﻭ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺒﻜﺭ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺒﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ .ﻭﻝﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻜﺭﺥ ﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﻀﻭﺍﺤﻲ ﺒﻐﺩﺍﺩ ،ﻭﻻ ﻴﻌﺭﻑ ﺘﺎﺭﻴﺦ
ot
ﻭﻻﺩﺘﻪ ﻭﻴﻌﺩ ﺃﺤﺩ ﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺏ .ﺍﻫﺘﻡ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻤﹰﺎ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﹰﺍ ﺒﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭ
ﻻ ﻻﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺒل ﻜﺎﻥ ﻴﺜﺒﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻤﻜﺘﻭﺒﺔ ﺒﺎﻷﺤﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻨﺎﻨﻴﺔ.
ﺇﻻ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻝﻡ ﻴﻜﻥ ﻤﻴﺎ ﹰ
.m
ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺅﻝﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻤﻲ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭ ﻭﻝﻜﻨﻪ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻜﺜﺎﺭ
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﺍﻫﻴﻥ ﺴﻭﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻁﻭل ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ .
w
ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﻪ ) ﺍﻝﺒﺩﻴﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ ( ﻁﺭﻗﹰﺎ ﺠﺩﻴﺩﺓ ﻹﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻸﻋﺩﺍﺩ
ﻭﺍﻝﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺭﺍﺝ ﺠﺫﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﻓﻲ ﺫﻝﻙ ﻁﺭﻗ ﹰﺎ ﺠﺒﺭﻴﺔ ﺘﺩل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﻜﺭ ﻭﺴﻌﺔ
w
ﺍﻝﻌﻘل ﻭﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺘﺎﻤﺔ ﺒﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭ ،ﻭﻤﻥ ﺃﺸﻬﺭ ﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ ﻜﺘﺎﺏ ) ﺍﻝﻔﺨﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ (
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺍﺸﺘﻤل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺠﺩﻴﺩﺓ ﻝﻡ ﻴﺴﺒﻘﻪ ﺇﻝﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﺤﺩ ،ﺘﺩل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺼﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻔﻜﻴﺭ ﻭﻤﻨﻬﺎ
w
) ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻝﻭ ﺃﻀﻴﻑ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻝﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺘﺞ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﹰﺎ ﻭﻝﻭ ﻁﺭﺡ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﻪ ﻝﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺘﺞ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﹰﺎ (
ﻜﻤﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺒﻁ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻨﺎ ﺠﺩﻴﺩﹰﺍ ﻹﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﺠﺫﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻌﻲ .ﻭﻓﻲ ﻜﺘﺎﺏ ) ﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ( ﺃﻭﺠﺩ
ﻻ ﻤﺘﻨﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﻓﺭﻴﺩﺓ ﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ .ﻭﺘﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ 1020ﻡ.
ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ ﺤﻠﻭ ﹰ
35
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 2
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
xﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ.
(x 3
() )
.1ﺃﻨﺸﺭ ﻭ ﺒﺴﻁ ﺜﻡ ﺭﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ+ 2 x + 1 x 2 + 1 :
.2ﻫل ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 103121ﺃﻭﻝﻲ ؟
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
om
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ f ( x) = x 2 + 6 x + 5 :ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ
( )
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O, i, j
.c
.1ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
f ( x ) = ( x + 3) − 4 ﻭ ) f ( x) = ( x + 1)( x + 5
2
ik
.2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) f ( xﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﺠـ( f ( x) + 3 = 0 ﺏ( f ( x) = 5 ﺍ( f ( x ) = 0
aw
ﻭ( f ( x) + 20 = 0 ﻫـ( f ( x) = −4 ﺩ( f ( x) = x + 1
ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺤﻠﻭل ﻜل ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ؟
af
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
ot
y y = ( x − 1) − 3
2
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( Pﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ: ( O ;i , j ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ )
5 ) ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل (
.m
)( x − 1
2
2 −3 = 0
w
36
2 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
ﻭﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻜﺘﺎﺏ " ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺼﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ " ﻝﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﻭﺴﻰ ﺍﻝﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻤﻲ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
" ...ﻭ ﺃﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺠﺫﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻌﺩل ﺍﻷﻤﻭﺍل ﻓﻨﺤﻭ ﻗﻭﻝﻙ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﺠﺫﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺃﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﻴﻌﺩل ﻤﺎﻻ ﻓﺒﺎﺒﻪ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻨﺼﻑ
ﺍﻷﺠﺫﺍﺭ ﻓﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻓﺎﻀﺭﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﺜﻨﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺭﺒﻌﺎ ﻓﺯﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﻓﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺴﺘﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺒﻌﺎ ﻓﺨﺫ
om
ﺠﺫﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺜﻨﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻓﺯﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻷﺠﺫﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻓﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﺠﺫﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل
ﺴﺘﺔ ﻋﺸﺭ .ﻭ ﻜل ﻤﺎ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺎل ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗل ﻓﺎﺭﺩﺩﻩ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺎل ﻭﺍﺤﺩ " ...
.c
.1ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﺹ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﻴﻌﻨﻰ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺎل x 2ﻭ ﺒﺠﺫﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل xﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻝﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﺹ ﻫﻲ
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل " bx + c = ax 2 " :ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺫﻜﻭﺭ ﻫﻭ" 3x + 4 = x 2 " :
ik
.2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻭﺯ ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ 3x + 4 = x 2ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺩﻡ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻤﻲ – ﻜﻼﻤﻴﺎ –
.3ﺃﻋﻁ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﺔ ﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻝﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜلbx + c = x 2 :
3x + 20 = 2 x 2 ﻭ
aw
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ4 x + 5 = x 2 :
.4ﻝﺘﺒﺭﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺩﻡ ﻜﻼﻤﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ 3x + 4 = x 2ﺍﺴﺘﻌﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻤﻲ ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ .ﻜﻴﻑ ﺃﻨﺠﺯ
ﺫﻝﻙ ؟
af
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ:
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ
ot
AB = x
EC = 3
Fﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ EC
.m
EFGHﻤﺭﺒﻊ
GI = BE
w
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺨﺎﻤﺱ
w
1
= 2x +1 .1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ )∗ ( ﻴﺅﻭل ﺇﻝﻰ ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
x
) (H ( )
.2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻭﺭﻕ ﻤﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺭﻱ ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ O, i, jﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = 2 x + 1ﻭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﺌﺩ
1
=y ﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
x
.3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ )∗ ( .ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ.
37
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 2
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ) ﺃﻭ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ( ﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ: ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:
f ( x ) = an x n + an −1 x n −1 + ... + a1 x + a0
ﺤﻴﺙ nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ an ، ... ، a1 ، a0ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ.
om
ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ:
ﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ. x ֏ 0 : ) ( k∈ ℝ ﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔx ֏ k :
.c
ﻫﻲ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ. x ֏ x5 )، x ֏ ( x + 2) ( x2 − 2 ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل، x ֏ 0,3 x 2 + x − 2 :
ik
aw
ﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ fﺘﻜﺘﺏ ﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل: ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻭ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:
f ( x ) = an x n + an −1 x n −1 + ... + a1 x + a0ﻤﻊ an ≠ 0
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ، fﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ an ، ... ، a1 ، a0ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ a p x pﺍﻝﺤﺩ
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺩﺭﺠﺘﻪ . p
af
ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ:
ﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ( a0 ≠ 0 ) x ֏ a0 :
ot
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ.
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:
w
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻜل ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺘﻪ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ. •
w
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ،ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ ،ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ •
ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ.
38
2 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
om
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺠﺒﻨﺎ ﺒﻨﻌﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍﻝﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ: ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ:
(1ﻫل fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ؟ (2ﻫل ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ) f ( xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل an x n + an −1 x n −1 + ... + a1 x + a0 :؟
ﺤــل:
f ( x) = 2 x3 − 2 x 2 + 3 x − 3 ﺍ( ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ : x
.c
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ.
ﺏ( ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻷﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ x 2 + 1 ≠ 0 ، x
ik
(x )
2
2
+1
= )g ( x ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ : x
= x2 + 1
aw x +1 2
ﺤــل:
w
a + b = 1
ﺃﻱ b = 0 :ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ f ( x ) = ( x + 1) ( x − 4 ) : x
2
ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ
c = −4 b + c = − 4
c = −4
f ( x ) = 0 .2ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ( x + 1) ( x 2 − 4 ) = 0ﺃﻱ x + 1 = 0ﺃﻭ x 2 − 4 = 0ﺃﻱ x = −1 :ﺃﻭ x 2 = 4ﻭﻤﻨﻪ
ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻫﻲ ، -2 ، -1ﻭ 2ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻫﻲS = { − 2, − 1, 2 } :
39
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 2
om
.3ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﻱ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ ﺩﺭﺠﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ nﻭ pﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻫﻭ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺩﺭﺠﺘﻪ ) . ( n + p
ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻤﺔ ﺤﺎﺼل ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ fﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ gﻝﻴﺱ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ: ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:
.c
)f ( x
֏ h : xﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻨﺎﻁﻘﺔ.
)g ( x
ik
aw .2ﺠﺫﺭ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ fﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺩﺭﺠﺘﻪ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ 1ﻭ αﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ. ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ αﺠﺫﺭ ﻝﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ fﻴﻌﻨﻲ . f (α ) = 0
af
ﻤﺜﺎل:
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ fﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﹻf ( x ) = x3 − x 2 − x − 2 :
ot
( ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ f (2) = 0 :ﻭﻤﻨﻪ 2ﻫﻭ ﺠﺫﺭ ﻝﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ fﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 0ﻝﻴﺱ ﺠﺫﺭﺍ ﻝﻪ ﻷﻥ f (0) = −2 ) f (0) ≠ 0
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ fﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺩﺭﺠﺘﻪ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ 1ﻭ αﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ. ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ α ) f (α ) = 0ﺠﺫﺭ ﻝﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ( fﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ gﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
w
)f ( x) = ( x − α ) g ( x
w
ﻤﺜﺎل:
w
40
2 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
om
ﺤــل:
.1ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭﻱ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ:
• ( f + g )( x ) = f ( x) + g ( x) = −3x 2 + 3x
• ( 2 f − 3g )( x ) = 2 f ( x) − 3g ( x) = 9 x 2 + x + 5
.c
• ( g f )( x ) = g [ f ( x)] = −12 x 2 − 10 x − 3
f × gﻫﻲ .3 ( f × g )( x ) = f ( x) × g ( x) = −6 x 3 − x 2 − x − 1ﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺩﺭﺠﺔ .2
ik
aw ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 4
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻf ( x ) = x3 − x 2 − 4 x + 4 :
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2ﺠﺫﺭ ﻝﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ f
af
)f ( x) = ( x − 2 ) g ( x ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ gﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ : x
ﺤــل:
ot
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ f (2) = 0 :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2ﺠﺫﺭ ﻝﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ . fﺇﺫﻥ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ gﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل
)f ( x ) = ( x − 2) g ( x ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
.m
ﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ) g ( xﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻓﺭﺽ g ( x) = ax 2 + bx + cﺜﻡ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ b ، aﻭ cﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ:
w
ﻜﺜﻴﺭﻱ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻨﺸﺭ ﻭ ﺘﺒﺴﻴﻁ ﻭ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) ( x − 2) g ( xﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ.
w
41
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 2
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ،ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ، xﻜل ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜلax 2 + bx + c = 0 :
om
ﺤﻴﺙ b ، aﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻤﻊ . a ≠ 0
.c
a a
2 2
b b b2 b b b2
x + x =x+
2
− x +ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ = x + x + 2
2
ik
a 2a 4a 2 2a a 4a
b
2
b2 c b b 2 − 4ac
2
)( a ≠ 0 ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔax 2 + bx + c = 0 :
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺠﻲ ﻨﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
w
2a ∆=0
ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﺤﻠﻴل ax 2 + bx + c ﻻ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﺤﻠﻭل ∆<0
ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ. ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ax 2 + bx + c = 0 ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ∆ = 0
42
2 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 5
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺜﻼﺜﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﹻf ( x ) = x 2 + 3 x − 4 :
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺠﻲ ﻝﹻ )f ( x
25
. f ( x ) ≥ −ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ fﺘﻘﺒل ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩﻫﺎ. .2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
4
ﺤــل:
om
2 2
3 9 3 25
x + 3x − 4 = x + − − 4 = x + −
2
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ: .1
2 4 2 4
2
3 25
f ( x ) = x + −ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺠﻲ ﻝﹻ ). f ( x ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
2 4
.c
25 25
.2ﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ) f ( xﺒﺎﻝﻌﺩﺩ − 4ﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻕ f ( x) − − 4
ik
2 2
25 3 25 3
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻷﻭل f ( x ) − (− ) = x + :ﻭﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ x + ≥ 0ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ f ( x) − (− ) ≥ 0
4 2 4 2
aw 25
. f ( x) ≥ − ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
4
3 3 25 25
f ( x ) ≥ −ﻭ f − = −ﻓﺈﻥ f ( x ) ≥ f − ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ
2 2 4 4
af
3 25
−ﻭ ﺘﺒﻠﻐﻬﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ −ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ. ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺼﻐﺭﻯ ﻫﻲ
2 4
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 6
ot
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻋﻨﺩ ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ( a ≠ 0 ) ax 2 + bx + c = 0ﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻴﺯ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ
w
ﺍ( x 2 + 2 x = 0ﺘﻌﻨﻲ x ( x + 2 ) = 0ﺃﻱ x = 0ﺃﻭ x = −2ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻫﻲ }S = {−2, 0
w
ﺏ( ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ b = 1 ، a = 1ﻭ c = 1ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ∆ = (1) − 4 (1)(1) = −3ﺇﺫﻥ ﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺤﻠﻭل ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ∅ = S
2
ﺩ( ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ b = 1 ، a = 1ﻭ c = −6ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ∆ = (1) − 4 (1)( −6 ) = 25ﺇﺫﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺤﻼﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺍﻥ:
2
43
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 2
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ،ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ، xﻜل ﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺸﻜﻠﻴﻥ
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ ax 2 + bx + c > 0 ، ax 2 + bx + c ≥ 0 :ﺤﻴﺙ b ، aﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻤﻊ . a ≠ 0
om
)( a ≠ 0 .2ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺜﻼﺜﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩax 2 + bx + c :
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ∆ > 0 :1
x ∞− x1 x2 ∞+ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ) ax 2 + bx + c = a ( x − x1 )( x − x2ﺤﻴﺙ:
.c
x − x1 - 0 + +
∆ −b − ∆ −b +
= . x2 = x1ﻭ
x − x2 - - 0 + 2a 2a
ik
) a ( x − x1 )( x − x2 0ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ) 0 ( − aﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ aaw ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ a ﺒﻔﺭﺽ x1 < x2ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ∆ = 0 :2
−b
= x1ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ax 2 + bx + c = 0ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل x = x1ﻭ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻪ ﻫﻲ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ) ax 2 + bx + c = a ( x − x1ﺤﻴﺙ:
2
2a
aﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل . x ≠ x1
af
x + + − 2 > 0 ax 2 + bx + c = a x +ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ +− ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
2 a 4a 2a 4a 2
ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ، xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ax 2 + bx + cﻫﻲ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ . a
.m
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ
∆<0
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ax 2 + bx + c = 0ﻻ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻭﻻ
w
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ax 2 + bx + c = 0ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﻴﻥ x1ﻭ x2 ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ax 2 + bx + c = 0ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ x1
w
ax 2 + bx + c 0ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ) 0 ( −aﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ a ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ a ax 2 + bx + c ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ a 0 ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ a
<
44
2 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 7
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﺠـ( x 2 − x + 4 < 0 ﺏ( − x 2 + 10 x − 25 ≥ 0 ﺍ( 2 x 2 + 4 x − 6 ≤ 0
om
ﺤــل:
x ∞− −3 1 ∞+ ﺃ( ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ∆ = 64ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
2x2 + 4x − 6 + 0 - 0 + 2 x 2 + 4 x − 6 = 0ﻫﻤﺎ -3 :ﻭ 1
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥS = [ − 3; 1 ] :
.c
x ∞− 5 ∞+ ﺏ( ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ∆ = 0ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
ik
− x 2 + 10 x − 25 - 0 - − x 2 + 10 x − 25 = 0ﺤﻼ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ ﻫﻭ .5
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥS = { 5 } :
aw ﺠـ( ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ∆ = −15ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
x ∞− ∞+ x 2 − x + 4 = 0ﺤﻠﻭﻻ ﻷﻥ ∆ < 0
x2 − x + 4 +
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥS = ∅ :
af
.1ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺃﺤﺩ ﺭﺍﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻf ( x ) = − x 2 + x + 2 :
.2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ − x 2 + x + 2 ≤ 0
.m
y ﺤــل:
2 .1ﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل.
w
-2 -1 0 1 2 3 x ﻓﻭﻕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ] x ∈ [ − 1; 2ﻭ ﻴﻘﻊ ﺘﺤﺘﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل
[ ∞ . x ∈ ] − ∞ ; − 1 ] ∪ [ 2; +ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ:
w
-1
45
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 2
om
2a 2a
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻀﻌﻨﺎ S = x′ + x′′ﻭ P = x′ × x′′ﺤﻴﺙ Sﻫﻭ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻴﻥ ﻭ Pﺠﺩﺍﺅﻫﻤﺎ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
c b
=P ﻭ S =−
.c
a a
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :1ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﹼﻴﻥ ﺒﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻵﺨﺭ
ik
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺠﺫﺭﻴﻥ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺫﺭ ﺍﻵﺨﺭ ﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ Sﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ P
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻲ :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ 2 x 2 + α x − 3 = 0 :ﺤﻴﺙ αﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .
aw
ﻋﻴﻥ αﺤﺘىﻴﻜﻭﻥ ) ( −3ﺤﻼ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﺤل ﺍﻵﺨﺭ.
a a
b c
−ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (1ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻴﻥ ﺴﺎﻝﺒﻴﻥ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ. .3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ > 0ﻭ ∆ > 0ﻭ < 0
a a
ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻨﺎ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ.
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻲ :ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
( m − 1) x 2 + 2 ( m + 1) x + m = 0
46
2 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻊ
.1ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻊ
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻊ ،ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ، xﻜل ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜلax 4 + bx 2 + c = 0 :
ﺤﻴﺙ b ، aﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻤﻊ . a ≠ 0
om
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ax 4 + bx 2 + c = 0ﻴﺅﻭل ﺇﻝﻰ ﺤل ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ:
X = x 2
2
aX + b X + c = 0
.c
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل Xﻤﺠﻬﻭﻻ ﻤﺴﺎﻋﺩﺍ.
ik
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ax 4 + bx 2 + c = 0 ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ a X 2 + b X + c = 0
aw ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
2 x 4 + 5 x 2 + 2 = 0 (3 x 4 − 5 x 2 + 4 = 0 (2 x 4 + x 2 − 6 = 0 (1
.2ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻊ
af
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻊ ،ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ، xﻜل ﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺸﻜﻠﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ:
ax 4 + bx 2 + c > 0 ، ax 4 + bx 2 + c ≥ 0ﺤﻴﺙ b ، aﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻤﻊ . a ≠ 0
ot
.m
47
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 2
S1 = 1 + 2 + ... + nﻭ S2 = 12 + 22 + ... + n 2ﺤﻴﺙ nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ. ﻨﻬﺩﻑ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ:
.1ﺤﺴﺎﺏ S1
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ fﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ f ( x + 1) − f ( x) = x : x •
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ S1 = f (n + 1) − f (1) :ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ S1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n •
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻝﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ. •
.2ﺤﺴﺎﺏ S 2
om
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ gﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ g ( x + 1) − g ( x ) = x 2 : x •
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ S 2ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻝﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ. •
.1ﺤﺴﺎﺏ S1
.c
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ f ( x ) = ax 2 + bx + cﺤﻴﺙ b ، aﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻤﻊ a ≠ 0 •
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎf (x + 1) = a (x + 1)2 + b ( x + 1) + c = ax 2 + ( 2a + b ) x + a + b + c :
ik
ﻭﻤﻨﻪ f (x + 1) − f (x ) = (ax 2 + ( 2a + b ) x + a + b + c ) − (ax 2 + bx + c ) = 2ax + a + b
aw
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ f ( x + 1) − f ( x) = xﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ:
1
=a
1 1
ﻨﺠﺩ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ f ( x ) = x 2 − x + c :ﻭﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻤﺜﻼ ﺃﺨﺫ . c = 0
2a = 1ﺃﻱ 2
2 2 b = − 1 a + b = 0
af
2
1 1
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ f ( x) = x 2 − x
2 2
ot
2
.2ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) S 2ﻨﺘﺒﻊ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ(
w
6
48
2 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
] [ AB ﺤﻴﺙ M . AB = 4ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ] [ AB ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ
ﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﻫﻤﺎ ] [ AMﻭ ] . [ MB
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﹻ Sﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻴﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﻠﻭﻥ ﻭ ﺒﹻ aﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺹ
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻗﻁﺭﻩ ] . [ ABﻨﻀﻊ AM = x
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ Sﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . x
1
= S؟ .2ﻫل ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎa :
om
2
1
.3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ. S > a :
4
.c
.1ﺤﺴﺎﺏ Sﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ x
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻤﺯﻨﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻗﻁﺭﻩ ] [ AMﺒﹻ a1ﻭ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻗﻁﺭﻩ ] [ MBﺒﹻ a2ﻓﺈﻥ:
ik
S = a − a1 − a2
4− x
2 2 2
x 4
a2 = π ﻭﻤﻨﻪ:
1
ﻭ ) = π (4 − x
2
aw 1
a1 = π = π x 2 ، ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎa = π = 4π :
2 4 2 4 2
1 1
) S = 4π − π x 2 − π ( 4 − x
2
4 4
π
(−x )
af
=S 2
ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﺸﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺴﻴﻁ ﻨﺠﺩ+ 4 x :
2
1
.2ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ Mﺤﻴﺙa :
=S
ot
2
π
ﺃﻱ − x 2 + 4 x − 4 = 0 :ﺃﻱx 2 − 4 x + 4 = 0 :
2
( 1
)
S = aﻴﻜﺎﻓﺊ − x 2 + 4 x = ( 4π ) = 2π
2
1
2
.m
1
= Sﻫﻲ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AB ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎa :
2
w
1
.3ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎS > a :
4
>
>
π
( )
w
1 1
ﺃﻱ− x 2 + 4 x − 2 0 : − x2 + 4x S > aﻴﻜﺎﻓﺊ ) ( 4π
2 4 4
ﻝﻨﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ − x + 4 x − 2
2
w
ﻭ x′′ = 2 + 2 ﻴﻘﺒل ﺠﺫﺭﻴﻥ ﻫﻤﺎx′ = 2 − 2 : − x2 + 4 x − 2 ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ∆ = 8ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
x 0 2− 2 2+ 2 4
− x2 + 4 x − 2 0 - + 0 -
1
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻗﻴﻡ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ S > a :ﻫﻲ. 2 − 2 ; 2 + 2 :
4
49
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 2
om
h3 h2 h1 h0 ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ h2 ، h1 ، h0ﻭ h3ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﻫﻭﺭﻨﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺩﺩ . a
.2ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) f (a
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ f ( x ) = (α 3x + α 2 ) x + α1 x + α 0 :ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥf ( a ) = h0 :
.c
(x .3ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴل ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤل ) − a
ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺘﺤﻠﻴل ) f ( x ) − f ( aﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥf ( x ) = ( x − a ) ( h3x 2 + h2 x + h1 ) + h0 :
ik
.4ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﻫﻭﺭﻨﺭ
aw
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻf ( x ) = 2x 3 + x 2 − 5x + 2 :
ﺘﻨﻅﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ
ﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺤﺠﺯ ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ) f ( xﻓﻲ ﺨﻁ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﺜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ B 1ﺇﻝﻰ ﻏﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ E 1ﺜﻡ ﻨﺤﺠﺯ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ aﻓﻲ
af
ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ A 2ﻭ ﻨﺤﺠﺯ 0ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ . A 3
ﻨﺤﺠﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ B 2ﺍﻝﺩﺴﺘﻭﺭ = $A $2 * A 3 :ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ B 3ﺍﻝﺩﺴﺘﻭﺭ= B 1 + B 2 :
ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﻫﻭﺭﻨﺭ ﻨﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺘﻴﻥ B 2ﻭ B 3ﺜﻡ ﻨﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﺯﺍﻝﻕ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻏﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ . E
ot
50
2 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺒﺭﻨﺎﻤﺞ ﺤل ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ
.3ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻨﺎﻤﺞ
ﻤﻊ A ≠ 0 ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔAx 2 + Bx + C = 0 :
ﻨﻀﻊD = B 2 − 4AC :
A,B,C
om
ﻻ ﻨﻌﻡ
D=0
ﻻ ﻨﻌﻡ
.c
D>0
( )
ik
X 1 = − B − D / 2A ﺤل ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ
51
2
ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ
أ دة ا رات أ
أم ؟
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ.
ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ f ( x ) = 3 x − 1 − 2 x 3ﻫﻲ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ 1
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ . P ( x) = x − 3 x − x + 3
3 2
10 ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ .
(1ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2ﻫﻭ ﺠﺫﺭ ﻝـ . P ( x ) :
( )
2
= ) f ( xﻫﻲ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ x−3 ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ 2
(2ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 3ﻫﻭ ﺠﺫﺭ ﻝـ . P ( x ) :
y P ( x) (3ﻻ ﻴﻘﺒل ﺠﺫﻭﺭ . ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ .
2
−2
fﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ 11 3ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ f ( x) = 4ﻫﻲ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ .
om
1
x
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ،ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ
-1 0 1 2 3 x 4ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) f ( xﻭ ) g ( xﻜﺜﻴﺭﻱ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ
-1
ﻤﻭﻀﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل.
ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ) f ( x ) + g ( xﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﺒﻌﺔ .
(1ﻤﻤﻴﺯ ) f ( xﺴﺎﻝﺏ .
-2
.c
-3
ik
(4ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ) f ( xﻫﻲ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺤﺩﻩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻝﻪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺠﺔ
ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ؛ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺩﺭﺠﺘﻪ.
y ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل 12 1
3
aw
ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ـ :
f : x ֏ 2 x 2 + 1 − x (2 f : x ֏ − (1
2
2
f ( x ) = 2 x 2 − 3 x + 1 (1 x −9
2
1
֏f :x (4 f : x ֏ 2 x 2 + − 3 (3
x−3
1
f ( x ) = x 2 − 3 x + 3 (2 x
f ( x) = x 2 − 3 x + 2 (3 f : x ֏ x cos x − 3 x + x sin x − 3 (5
2 4 2
af
0 1 2 3 x
f ( x ) = − x 2 + 3 x − 2 (4 ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ x0ﻫﻭ ﺠﺫﺭ 7
ﻴﻌﻁﻰ f ( x ) = 3 x + 4 x − 7
2
13 ﻝﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ) . P ( x
ot
3
P( x) = x 4 − x 2 + 2 x + 6 (3ﻭ x0 = 3
f ( x ) = ( x − 1)( x − 7) (2
f ( x) = ( x − 1)(7 x − 3) (3 ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ 8
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ) (O ; i ; j ) P ( xﻴﻘﺒل ﺠﺫﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﻴﻥ .
w
14
ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = − x 2 + x − 3ﻫﻭ P( x) = x 2 + 571x − 6 (1
P( x) = −7 x 2 + x − 6 (2
w
52
2
اوال آ ات ا
ود
ا #ت "! آ ات ا
ود fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ . D f 15
ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ) P ( xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺴﻁ 20 ﺍﺸﺭﺡ ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ ) f ( xﻝﻴﺱ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ
ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺭﺘﺏ ﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺩﺭﺠﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ : ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ .
)P ( x) = ( x + 3)( x + 2 2
°1 f ( x ) = −2 x3 + 3x − 5 (1ﻭ ∗D f = ℝ
)P( x) = ( x − 5)( x 2 + 2 x − 1 °2
− x2 + 1
P ( x) = ( x + 5)( x − 3)2 °3 = ) f ( xﻭ }D f = ℝ − {−1 (2
x +1
)P( x) = (3 x + 2) − 9( x + 2
2 2
°4 − x2 + 2x − 3
om
= ) f ( xﻭ D f = ℝ (3
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) P ( xﻭ ) Q( xﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ. x2 + 3
21
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ :
( )
2
= ) f ( xﻭ D f = ℝ | x| −5 (4
) P( x) + Q( x؛ ) P( x) − Q ( x؛ )2 P( x) + 3 Q ( x
ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ. 16
.c
P( x) = −3x 2 + x − 5 (1ﻭ Q( x) = 2 x 2 + 4 x − 1
f : x ֏ ( x + 3)( x − 2) (1
2
ik
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﻭﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ 22
ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : 5 x 3 + 10 x
֏f :x (3
x2 + 2
aw
P( x) = (2 x 2 + x)(5 − 3 x 3 ) (1
f : x ֏ 2 cos 2 x + sin 2 x + 1 (4
Q( x) = (−3 x + 1)3 ( x − 3) 4 (2
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻜﺜﻴﺭﺓ 17
R( x) = ( x 2 + x )( x3 − 2) − x 2 (2 − 2 x 2 + x3 ) (3
ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ :
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ 23
af
fﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ . (1
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ αﻫﻭ ﺠﺫﺭ ﻝﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ). f ( x
fﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ . ℝ − (2
f ( x ) = x 3 − x 2 + x + 3ﻭ α = −1 (1
ot
f ( x ) = −3 x + 2 x + 1
2
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ) P ( xﺤﻴﺙ : 24
(1ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ) f ( xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜﻠﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ:
P( x) = x 3 − x 2 − 4 x + 4 2
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ c ، b ، aﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ،ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل 1 4
) ( x − 1)(−3 x − 1؛ −3 x − +
w
) P ( xﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺤﻴﺙ : 25 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ 19
P( x) = 4 x − 4 x − 15 x + 18
3 2
53
2
(4 x − 3)2 − (3x − 2)2 = 0 ، 2 x 2 - 2 2 x + 1 = 0
b ، aﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ ) f ( xﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺤﻴﺙ : 26
ﻤﺎﻫﻭ ﻤﻤﻴﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ (67971 x − 31527)2 = 0؟ 31 f ( x ) = −2 x + ax + b
3
ﺒﺭﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل : x 32 ﻋﻴﻥ aﻭ bﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ − 2ﺠﺫﺭﺍ ﻝـ )f ( x
1962 x + 110364 x − 2007 = 0
2
ﻭ . f (0) = 5
ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﻴﻥ .
c ، b ، aﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ) f ( xﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺤﻴﺙ : 27
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ 33 f ( x) = ax3 − 3( x − b) x + cx 2 + ( x 2 − 3) x
f ( x ) = 0ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺘﺤﻠﻴﻼ ﻝـ ): f ( x
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ c ، b ، aﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ
om
f ( x ) = x 2 − 3 x + 2 (1
ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ ) f ( xﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺎ.
f ( x ) = 3 x 2 − 5 x + 2 (2
f ( x) = −9 x 2 − 3 x + 2 (3 ا#دت & ار %ا $
f ( x ) = −5 x 2 + 8 x − 3 ( 4 ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ) f ( xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺠﻲ ،ﺜﻡ 28
.c
f ( x ) = 2 x + 3 x − 3 (5
2
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ، f ( x) = 0ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ
34ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ :
ik
x + 3 x − 10 = 0 (1
2
f ( x ) = x 2 − 6 x + 8 (1
−3 x 2 + 5 x − 2 = 0 (2 f ( x) = x 2 + x − 6 (2
aw
2 x 2 + 7 x + 8 = 0 (3 f ( x ) = − x 2 + 3 x − 5 (3
x 2 + 5 x + 5 = 0 (4 f ( x ) = 3 x 2 − 7 x + 2 (4
− x + 18 x + 19 = 0 (5
2
4
f ( x) = x 2 − 2 x + (5
af
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Eﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : 35 5
ax 2 + b x + c = 0 f ( x) = −5 x 2 + 15 x (6
ﺤﻴﺙ c ، b ، aﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ aﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ. ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺃﻜﺘﺏ 29
ot
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ∆ ،ﻤﻤﻴﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ، ( Eﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . c ، b ' ، a x ' = 2ﻭ x " = 3؛ x ' = −1ﻭ x " = 5
∆
= ' ∆ ،ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ' ∆ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . c ، b ' ، a (2ﻨﻀﻊ 1
= ' xﻭ x" = −
1
= ' xﻭ x " = −3؛
1
4 3 2 2
w
(3ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ∆ ' ≥ 0ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Eﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻴﻥ −3
= ' xﻭ x" = 0 x ' = 0ﻭ x" = 3؛
' ∆ −b ' + ∆ ' −b ' − 2
؛ ﻫﻤﺎ
w
2
a a = "x ' = x ؛ x ' = x " = −2
) ' ∆ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻴﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺼﺭ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( ( E 3
30ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻴﺯ ،ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ
w
54
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
2
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ : 37
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) ( x − x1 )( x − x2؛ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺘﺤﻠﻴﻼ ﻝـ
t − 5 t + 6 = 0 (1
2
om
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( E
12 m ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ،ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ 45 (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ mﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ 0ﺤﻼ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Eﺜﻡ
ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯ.
.c
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﺤل ﺍﻵﺨﺭ ﻝﻬﺎ.
2 cm
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺭ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ
ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻠﻭل 39
ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ
ik
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ.
x 2 − 2mx − 5 = 0 (1
A ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ
aw 46 mx 2 + (2m − 3) x + m − 3 = 0 (2
ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﻪ ، 3 m (m + 1) x 2 + (2m + 1) x − m + 2 = 0 (3
ﻤﺤﺎﻁ ﺒﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺎﺕ. (m − 3) x 2 + (2m − 1) x + m + 2 = 0 (4
(2m − 1) x 2 + 4mx + 2m + 1 = 0 (5
) (1 + 3
B C 2
af
1ـ ﺃﻨﺸﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ،ﺤل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ 40
2ـ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ،ﻋﻠﻤﺎﹲ ﺃﻥ
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
( )
ot
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺸﻤﻠﻬﺎ 5 x 2 + 2 10 x + 2 = 0 −3 x 2 + 3 x − 1 = 0
ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺤﺫﻓﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ m 41
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻴﻁ ،ﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ 4ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ ؟ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﻠﻭل ﻓﻲ : ℝ
w
.#/ع و%اء *+د & ار %ا $ −2 x 2 + 3 x + 2 − m = 0 − x 2 + 3x − m = 0
3x 2 + 2 6 x + m = 0 2x2 − 5x + m − 1 = 0
w
55
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
2
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ y ، xﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ: 55 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Eﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ : x 49
ax + bx + c = 0ﺤﻴﺙ c ، b ، aﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ
2
x + y = 17
3 ﻭ aﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .
x + y = 1241
3
om
(1ﺒﺭﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Eﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻴﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ ﻻ ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻴﻥ ' xﻭ " x 50
ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ . ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
1 1 x ' = 0ﻭ x" = 3 x ' = 4ﻭ x " = −7
ﻭ (2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻴﻥ
.c
' x" x 2 1
x ' = 1ﻭ x" = − x ' = 3ﻭ = "x
ﺤﻴﺙ ' xﻭ " xﻫﻤﺎ ﺤﻼ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) . ( E 3 3
ﺘﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) . 3x 2 − 2 x − 5 = 0 : ( E x ' = 1 − mﻭ x" = 1 + m
57
ik
(1ﺒﺭﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Eﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻴﻥ ' xﻭ " ، xﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻥ x ' = 5 + 2ﻭ x" = 5 − 2
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻻ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ . ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻴﻥ ' xﻭ " x 51
aw
1 1 ﻴﺤﻘﻘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻁﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ x '+ x " = 7 :؛ x ' x " = 4
؛ ( x '− x ")2؛ + (2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ x ' 2 + x " 2؛
"x ' x ﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ' xﻭ " . x
x ' 4+ x" 4
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ aﻭ bﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ 52
af
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻘﻲ mﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ 58 ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺤﻼﻥ ' xﻭ " xﻴﺤﻘﻘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ.
a+b = 4 a + b = −25 a + b = 14
؛ ؛
ot
21
(m + 1) x 2 − (1 − m 2 ) x + m = 0 (3ﻭ x '+ 2 x " = 1 ؛ a × b = − 49؛ 3
a × b = 1 + 4 a × b = 1
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Eﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻭﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ 2
59 21
ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﺤﻴﺙ x − (2m + 3) x + m − 2 = 0 :
2 2
53ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ aﻭ bﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ
w
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ mﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ 1ﺤل ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) . ( E a−b = 4 a − b = 5
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
(2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ mﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻭﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺤﻠﻭل a × b = −1 a × b = 8
w
56
2
ر ـ
. P( x) = 5 x − 2 15 x + 3 (6
2
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ، mﺇﻥ ﺃﻤﻜﻥ ،ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ 61
. P( x) = − x + 12 x − 36 (7
2
ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﻼﻥ ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺎﻥ:
. P ( x ) = − x 2 + 2 3 x − 3 (8 x − 9 x + 3m − 4 = 0 (1
2
. P ( x ) = x 2 + x + 9 (9
2 (m − 1) x 2 − 2(m + 2) x − m − 1 = 0 (3
ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ 66 (1 − m) x 2 + mx − 3m − 4 = 0 (4
ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : ﺤﻘل ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ 28 m2ﻭﻤﺤﻴﻁﻪ 62
om
. P ( x ) = 2 x 3 − 3 x 2 + 2 x − 3 (1 23 mﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻁﻭﻝﻲ ﺒﻌﺩﻴﻪ .
. P ( x ) = − x 3 + 2 x 2 − 6 x + 5 (2 ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ m 63
. P ( x ) = x 3 − 4 x 2 + 5 x − 2 (3 (1ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ m = 3 cmﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻁﻭل ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺒﻌﺩﻱ
. P( x) = −3x 3 + 11 x 2 − 12 x + 4 (4 ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺤﻴﻁﻪ ﻫﻭ ﻨﻔﺱ ﻤﺤﻴﻁ ABCD
.c
. P ( x ) = x 4 − 3 x 3 − x 2 + 3 x (5 ﻭﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ . ABCD
ﺤﻠل ) P ( xﺜﻡ ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻪ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ 67 (2ﻫل ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﻝﻪ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻴﻁ ﻝﻠﻤﺭﺒﻊ ABCD
ik
ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : ﻭﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ . ABCD
. P ( x ) = x 4 − 3 x 2 + 2 (1 (3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ mﺒﻌﺩﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻝﻪ ﻨﻔﺱ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ
aw
. P ( x ) = x 4 + 3 x 2 − 4 (2 ABCDﻭﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ ﻫﻲ ﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ . ABCD
. P ( x ) = 3 x 4 − 2 x 2 − 8 (3 إ0رة آ ات ا
ود
P( x) = 2 x − 7 x + 9 x − 21x + 9 68
4 3 2
af
ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ 64
1
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) P(3ﻭ P ﺜﻡ ﺤﻠل ) P ( x ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
2
. P( x) = ( x − 2)(2 x + 1) (1
ot
. mx 2 + (m − 1) x + m + 2 = 0 (3
(m + 1) x3 − (5 + m) x 2 + (6 − m) x − 2 + m = 0 (4 P( x) = −2 x 3 + 3 x 2 (7
w
(C f ) 70ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ .ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ 65
ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ،ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ، xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ )f ( x
w
. P( x) = 2 x 2 + x − 6 (1
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜﻠﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ :
y y
4
. P( x) = −3 x 2 + 8 x − 4 (2
) (C f
. P( x) = −6 x 2 + x − 2 (3
4
3
-1
-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 x
-2
-1
57
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
2
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ: 77 ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : 71
x2 − 4 | x − 2 | = 0 x2 + 3 | x − 1 | = 0 2 x + 5x − 3 ≥ 0
2
(1
−3 x 2 − 5 x + 2 ≥ 0 (2
x 4 + 4 | x 2 − 1 | + 3 | x + 2 | +1 = 0
2 x 2 + x − 15 < 0(3
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ: 78 −3 x 2 + 11x − 10 < 0 (4
( x − 2) 2 − 3( x − 2) + 2 = 0 −2 x 2 + x − 5 < 0 (5
−2 x 2 + 2 x − 4 > 0 (6
x−5 x +6 = 0
4x2 + x + 9 ≥ 0 (7
x+ x −6 = 0
om
x 2 − 3x + 7 ≤ 0(8
3 7
− +2=0 9 x 2 − 6 5 x + 5 ≤ 0 (9
x2 x
79ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Eﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل : x
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : 72
x3 − x 2 + 3x − 3 < 0 (1
( E ) . . . 3x 4 − 7 x 3 + 8 x 2 − 7 x + 3 = 0
.c
−2 x 3 + 2 x 2 − x + 1 ≤ 0 (2
(1ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 0ﻝﻴﺱ ﺤل ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( E x3 − 2 x2 − x + 2 > 0 (3
(2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Eﻤﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ x4 − 5x2 + 6 > 0 (4
ik
ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ )' ( Eﺤﻴﺙ :
aw 3x 2008 + 11x1962 + 1964 ≥ 0 (5
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) P ( xﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺤﻴﺙ : (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
80
(2ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل . f ( x ) = 0 ، x
P( x) = 4 x 3 − 4( 3 + 1) x 2 + (9 + 4 3) x − 9
ot
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Eﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل : x 81 x+7 x−4 4x − 1 5x
+ =2 − =1
ax 2 + bx + c = 0 x−4 x+7 2x + 1 2x − 1
ﺤﻴﺙ c ، b ، aﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ aﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ. 1 1 2
+ =
w
a
5 5 x + 4 + 2 x − 6 = 11
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻋﺩﺩﻱ 5 x + 7 x − 3 = 0 : ( E ) :
2
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل x 76
ﻤﺎﻫﻲ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ( x '+ 4 x ") + 7 x '+ 28 x "− 15؟
2
3x + 7 > x + 3 ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ:
aﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ،ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻀﻔﻨﺎ ﻝﻪ 82 2x − 3 < x − 1
ﻤﻘﻠﻭﺒﻪ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ . 3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . a −x − 2 < x + 2
58
2
ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ) S ( xﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ 6ـ45
ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻠﻴﻥ MBRNﻭ NPDQﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ. [ AB] 83ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻁﻭﻝﻬﺎ .5
(2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻡ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ xﺘﻜﻭﻥ ) S ( xﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ :
ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل . ABCD MA2 − AB . MB = 0
ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ Pﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ : 88 ﻓﻲ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺭ . AB = 8
84
P( x) = 2 x 2 − 6 x + 3 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﺴﻘﻁﻬﺎ
M
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (γﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ Pﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ABﻫﻭ H
om
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O ; i : j ﻭ . MA2 + 3MH 2 = 18
3 3
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Sﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ . ; − A B
2 2 H
3
= ). f ( x 85ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻜل :
(1ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ) P ( xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل P( x) = a ( x + b)2 + c
.c
x
ﺤﻴﺙ c ، b ، aﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ. ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ) (hﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ
(2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (γﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( S ; i : jﺜﻡ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O ; i : j
ik
ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ) . (γ (1ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﻋﺩﺩ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ
(3ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ Pﺜﻡ ﻭﻀﺢ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
aw ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (hﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ Pﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ . y = 2x + m
(4ﺃﻋﻁ ﺤﺼﺭﺍ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ) P ( xﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ]. x ∈ [−2 ; 3 (2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﹻ ) (hﻭ ) ( Dﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ
(5ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ . P( x) ≤ x ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺘﺎﻥ ' Mﻭ " ، Mﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ I
af
(6ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) (O ; i : jﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ]" . [ M ' M
A E ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل B
y = xﺜﻡ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ . P ( x) ≤ x 86
ot
h ، g ، fﺜﻼﺙ ﺩﻭﺍل ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ : 89 H I F ﻀﻠﻌﻪ I ، 1ﻨﻘﻁﺔ
)| g ( x) = f (| x؛ ؛ f ( x) = x 2 − 2 x + 3 ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺭ ] [ BD
.m
2
ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O ; i : j ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻌﻴﻥ EBFIﻭ HIGDﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ .
3
w
59
3
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
om
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻨﻪ.
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﻌﻴﺔ
.c
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ، f + g
f 1
x ֏ f ( ax + b ) ، ،f ×g
ik
،
aw g g
∆y ) f ( x + h) − f ( x
lim ∆x = lim
∆x → 0 h →0 h
af
"
رد أو" أآ ا ء ا ا ر ،ا"! َ
ot
ا)ا( ِ$ـ " ن "$رق 1 23 1741 (+" $ ,أس
.m
ا (")+ا; ، (Iورا GH $ا Lو ا B3 ، ;Kب
F1ات ا
ت ،ا 3 Bت ا ، (...(Aد( أو
w
EULER Leonhard ه أ B"M )3ا GHا ;Kو ا دOت ا; .(I
Suisse, 1707-1783
61
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 3
om
.ﻝﻠﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﻤﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) v(2ﻨﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﺤﻅﺘﻴﻥ t = 2ﻭ t = 2 + h
) hﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ﻗﺭﻴﺏ ﻤﻥ ( 0ﺍﻝﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁﺔ vmﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﺤﻅﺘﻴﻥ t = 2ﻭ t = 2 + h
)d (2 + h) − d (2
= . vm ﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ
h
.c
(1ﺘﺄﻜﺩ ﺃﻥ . vm = 20 + 5h
(2ﺃﻜﻤل ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
ik
h -0.2 -0.1 -0.05 -0.001 +0.00001 +0.0001
aw +0.005 +0.01
vm
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
af
ﻤﻔﻬﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ:
( ABﻴﻤﺜل ﻫﻀﺒﺔ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ )
O ; i , jﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ − 1,3ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ : ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺱ
ot
4
ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . xﻨﻀﻊ h = x − 2
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ،ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ، hﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( LM
w
N 2
أ ـ ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻴﻤﺜﹼل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( LEﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻘﻭﺱ
AB؟
M
w
62
3 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
y
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
ﻨﺴﻘﻁ ﺠﺴﻤﺎ ﺴﻘﻭﻁﺎ ﺤﺭﺍ ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍﺌﻴﺔ .ﺒﻌﺩ tﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺠﺴﻡ ﻗﺩ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ) d (tﻤﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺘﺭ.
ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل tﻤﻥ ] . d (t ) = 5t 2 : [ 0,5
) (C
) ( Cﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ dﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ
( )
). O ; i , jﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ( .
om
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻥ ﺠﺩﻴﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻤﻠﻤﻴﺘﺭﻴﺔ.
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁﺔ ﻝﻠﺠﺴﻡ ﺨﻼل ﺨﻤﺱ ﺜﻭﺍﻥ ﻤﻥ
ﺴﻘﻭﻁﻪ .ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺘﻔﺴﻴﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ؟
(3ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AMﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( 2, 20
.c
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ Aﻭ ﺘﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ، ( C
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺒـ . t ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ
ik
• ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . M
• ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AMﻫﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ
aw
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ dﻋﻨﺩ . t0 = 2
• ﻜﻴﻑ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻠﺤﻅﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺩ t0 = 2؟
af
• ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻠﺤﻅﻴﺔ .ﻫل ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﺘﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﻔﺴﻴﺭ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ،ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﻤﻌﻴﻨﺎ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ:
w
x
f : x ֏ x (3ﻭ [∞ . I = ]0; +
w
63
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 3
ﺍﻹﺸﺘﻘﺎﻗﻴﺔ.
.1ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ.
1.1ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺭ.
om
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ) f ( xﻴﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻗﺭﻴﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ lﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ .ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ . lim f ( x ) = l
x →0
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ f :ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل D fﻤﻥ x0 . Rﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﻥ . D fﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ x0
.c
) f ( x0 + h) − f ( x0 ) f ( x0 + h) − f ( x 0
lim ֏ g : hﺘﻘﺒل ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ lﻋﻨﺩ . 0ﺃﻱ = l ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ :
h →0 h h
ik
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ lﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . x0ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒـ ) . f '( x0
aw
ﺘﻌﺎﻝﻴﻕ:
) f ( x0 + h) − f ( x0
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ x0ﻭ ، x0 + hﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒﹻ ) g ( h؛ ﻭﻫﻭ .ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ
h
af
.D f ﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ hﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ x0 + hﻋﻨﺼﺭﺍ ﻤﻥ
) f ( x0 + h) − f ( x0
. lim ) = f '( x0 ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ
h →0 h
ot
ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ D fﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ . D f
ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل xﻤﻥ D fﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ) f '( xﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ . D f
ﻭﻴﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﺎ ﺒﹻ ' .. fﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ
w
lim
h →0 h h →0 h h →0 h h →0
ﻭﻤﻨﻪ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ِـ . f ' ( x ) = 2x
64
3 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﺒﹻ. f ( x ) = x 2 + 2 x − 1 :
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ . x0 = 2
ﺤــل :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ hﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ 0ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
f (2 + h) − f (2) (2 + h) 2 + 2(2 + h) − 1 − 7
=
h h
4 + 4h + h + 4 + 2 h − 8
2
om
=
h
h + 6h
2
=
h
= h+6
.c
)f (2 + h) − f (2
lim )= lim ( h + 6
h →0 h h →0
=6
ik
aw ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ 2ﻭ . f ' ( 2 ) = 6
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ x0ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﺩﺍﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ
ot
) f ( x0 + h) − f ( x0 ) f ( x0 + h) − f ( x0
. lim ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﻴﻥ x0ﻭ x0 + hﺜﻡ ﻨﺤﺴﺏ
h →0 h h
.m
ﺤــل:
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . f ( x ) = − x 2 + 2ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . R
) f ( x0 + h) − f ( x0
ﻫﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ x0ﻭ x0 + hﻤﻊ h ≠ 0 ﻝﻴﻜﻥ x0ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .
w
h
f (x 0 + h ) − f (x 0 ) −(x 0 + h ) + 2 − (− x 0 + 2) −2x 0 h − h 2
2 2
65
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 3
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . x0ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ . O, i, jﻤﻤﺎﺱ
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ )) A( x0 , f ( x0ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل Aﻭ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﻪ ) . f '( x0ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ ﻫﻲ
om
) y = f '( x 0 )( x − x0 ) + f ( x0
y ) ( C ) (T
f ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻫﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﻪ ) f '( x0
.c
0
)f(x ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Tﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل y = f '( x 0 ) x + bﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
A
) ) A ( x 0 , f ( x0ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) (Tﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﻭﺒﺎﻝﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ
ik
1 . b = f ( x0 ) − f '( x0 ) x0ﻭﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ) y = f '( x 0 )( x − x0 ) + f ( x0
aw
0
0 1 x x
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﺎﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺔ gﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . (T f ( x0 ) + f '( x0 )h E
ﺃﻱ ﻨﻌﻭﺽ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ) f ( x0 + hﺒﺎﻝﻌﺩﺩ
.m
1
xﻗﺭﻴﺏ ﻤﻥ x0ﻓﺈﻥ ) f '( x0 )( x − x0 ) + f ( x0
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﺎ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺎ ﻝـ ) f ( xﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ . x0
0 1 x
x0 x0 + h
w
66
3 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 3
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﺒﹻ. f ( x) = − x 2 + 2 :
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Cﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ( O, i, j
f
ﺤــل:
om
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻷﻭل ﺭﺃﻴﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ xﻤﻥ Rﻭ f ' ( x ) = −2x؛ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 1ﻭ f '(1) = −2ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ -2ﻫﻭ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ A
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . f (1) = 1
.c
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻫﻲ . y = f '(1)( x − 1) + f (1) :
ﻭ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻫﻲ . y = −2 x + 3
ik
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 4
aw
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﺒﹻ. f ( x) = x 2 + 2 x + 1 :
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( O , I , J
af
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Tﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . 0
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﺎ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ . 0
ot
ﺤــل:
.m
• ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺘﻤﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ xﻤﻥ ، Rﻭ ، f ' ( x ) = 2 x + 2
ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ 2ﻫﻭ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C
f ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ 0ﻭ f '( 0 ) = 2 ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ .0ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ f (0 ) = 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻫﻲ . y = f '( 0 )( x ) + f ( 0 ) :
w
) (1.00004
w
67
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 3
om
) f ( x0 + h) − f ( x 0
limﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ. =a
h →0 h
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:
* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a = 1ﻭ b = 0ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ xﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ . f ': x ֏ 1 :
.c
* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a = 0ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) f : x ֏ bﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ(ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ f ': x ֏ 0 :
ik
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :2ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ n ) f : x ֏ x nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ( ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ :
f ': x ֏n xn−1
aw
1
ﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ : [ ] − ∞ , 0ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] 0, + ֏ f : xﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :3ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
x
af
1
. f ': x ֏ −
x2
ot
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ):5ﺘﻘﺒل ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ( ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ sin xﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ :
w
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ):6ﺘﻘﺒل ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ( ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ cos xﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ :
w
68
3 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 5
1
fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ] − ∞ , 0ﺒﹻ f ( x) = x 2 :ﻭ = ). g ( x
x
( )
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﻭ ) ( C gﺭﺴﻤﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O, i, j
( C fﻭ ) . ( Cg ) ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ
ﺤــل :ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺘﻴﻥ 1ﻭ ، 2ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ fﻭ gﻗﺎﺒﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [ . ] − ∞ , 0ﻭﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
om
1
. g '( x) = − f '( x) = 2 xﻭ
x2
) ) A ( x0 , f ( x0ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( C fﻭ ) ) B ( x1 , g ( x1ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) . ( C g
( C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭ )' (Tﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) ( C gﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . B ) ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Tﻤﻤﺎﺱ
.c
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝـ ) y = f ' ( x0 )( x − x0 ) + f ( x0 ) : (Tﺃﻱ y = 2 x0 x − x02
1 2
y=− 2
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝـ )' y = g ' ( x1 )( x − x1 ) + g ( x1 ) : (Tﺃﻱ x +
ik
x1 x1
1
2 x0 = − x 2
aw
1
) (Tﻭ )' (Tﻤﻨﻁﺒﻘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ
= −x2 2
0 x1
1
ﺒﺤل ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ x0 = −2ﻭ . x1 = −
af
2
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Tﻭ )' . y = −4 x − 4 : (T
ot
1
ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ fﻋﻨﺩ .0ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝـ f
( )
h ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ) O, i, jﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل(
w
ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﻓﺄﻜﺜﺭ .ﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻗﺘﺭﺏ hﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺭ ﺍﻗﺘﺭﺒﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ ﺃﻱ ﻫﻭ
h h h
ﻨﻘﺭ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( OMﻫﻲ ﺤﺎﻤل ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ .
( C fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﺤﺎﻤل ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ . ) ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻏﻴﺭ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ 0ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ
69
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 3
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ u :ﻭ vﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Dﻤﻥ . Rﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) (u + vﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Dﻭﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ:
' . (u + v) ' = u ' + v
om
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ hﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ . 0ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
.c
= +
h h
) v( x0 + h) − v( x0 ) u ( x0 + h) − u ( x0
= ). g 2 ( h = ) g1 (hﻭ ﻨﻀﻊ
ik
h h
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ uﻭ vﻗﺎﺒﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Dﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل x0ﻤﻥ lim g1 (h) = u '( x0 ) Dﻭ ) lim g 2 (h) = v '( x0
h →0 h →0
aw ) (u + v)( x0 + h) − (u + v)( x0
limﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ. ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ) = u '( x0 ) + v '( x0
h →0 h
ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ:
af
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ uﻭ vﻗﺎﺒﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ D ) Dﻫﻭ ﻤﺠﺎل ﺃﻭ ﺇﺘﺤﺎﺩ ﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻤﻥ .( Rﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) (u.vﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ
ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Dﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ . ( u.v ) ' = u '.v + u.v ' :
ot
h
) u ( x0 + h) − u ( x0 ) v( x0 + h) − v( x0
= v( x0 + h) + ) u ( x0
h h
w
70
3 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 6
1
. f ( x) = x 3 + ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]0, +ﺒﹻ+ x :
x
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ﺤــل:
om
1
ﻭ . w: x ֏ x ֏ v:x ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺩﻭﺍل v ، uﻭ . wﺤﻴﺙ، u : x ֏ x3 :
x
1 1
֏ . w': x v': x ֏ −ﻭ 2
ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]0, +ﻭﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ، u ' : x ֏ 3 x 2 :
2 x x
1 1
. f ' : x ֏ 3x2 − 2 + ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ . ]0, +ﻭﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ :
.c
x 2 x
ik
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 7
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]0, +ﺒﹻ. f ( x) = ( x3 + x + 1) x :
aw
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ﺤــل:
af
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ uﻭ . vﺤﻴﺙ. v : x ֏ x ، u : x ֏ x3 + x + 1 :
1
֏ .v': x ﻫﺎﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]0, +ﻭﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ، u ' : x ֏ 3 x 2 + 1 :
ot
2 x
1
. f '( x) = (3 x 2 + 1) x + ( x 3 + x + 1) ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ . ]0, +ﻭﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻫﻲ :
2 x
.m
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل8
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﺒﹻ. f ( x) = −7 x3 + 4 x 2 +3 x − 2 :
w
ﺤــل:
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ) Rﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ( .ﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﺤﻴﺙ :
w
71
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 3
om
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ hﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ 0ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
.c
h h
v( x0 ) − v( x0 + h)
=
v( x0 + h).v( x0 ).h
ik
1 v( x0 + h) − v( x0 )
= −
v( x0 + h).v( x0 )
aw h
1 1
) ( x0 + h) − ( x0
lim v
v ) v '( x0
=− ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ vﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Dﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل x0ﻤﻥ Dﻭ
) ) ( v ( x0
h →0 2
h
af
ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ.
ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ:
ot
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ uﻭ vﻗﺎﺒﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ D ) Dﻫﻭ ﻤﺠﺎل ﺃﻭ ﺇﺘﺤﺎﺩ ﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻤﻥ ( Rﻭ vﻻ ﺘﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ . D
'
' u u '.v − u .v u
= . ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Dﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ :
.m
1 u
× uﻭ ﻨﻁﺒﻕ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻤﻘﻠﻭﺏ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻭ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ . ﻴﻜﺘﺏ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ
w
v v
ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔf : x ֏ u (ax + b) :
w
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ):ﺘﻘﺒل ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ( uﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Dﻤﻥ a . Rﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ E .ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ
ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﺤﻴﺙ ax + bﻴﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ . Dﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) f : x ֏ u (ax + bﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Eﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ
w
' fﻫﻲ . f ' : x ֏ au '( ax + b) :ﺤﻴﺙ ' uﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ uﻋﻠﻰ . D
72
3 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 9
3x + 5
= ). f ( x ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
2x − 4
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ﺤــل:
om
• ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ . 2 x − 4 ≠ 0
2 x − 4 = 0ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ x = 2
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ D fﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ [∞ . D f = R − {2} = ]−∞ , 2[ ∪ ]2, +
.c
u
= . fﺤﻴﺙ. v : x ֏ 2 x − 4 ، u : x ֏ 3 x + 5 : • ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ uﻭ vﺃﻱ
v
ﻫﺎﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻝﻴﻥ [ ]−∞ , 2ﻭ [∞ ]2, +ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ، u ' : x ֏ 3 :
ik
.v': x ֏ 2
ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻝﻴﻥ []−∞ , 2 ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ v( x) ≠ 0ﻋﻠﻰ D fﻭﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
aw
)3(2 x − 4) − 2(3 x + 5 −22
= )f '( x = ﻭ [∞ . ]2, +ﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ:
)(2 x − 4 2
(2 x − 4) 2
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 10
af
ﺤــل:
π
• ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 0 , ﻷﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . cos x ≠ 0
2
w
u
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ uﻭ vﺃﻱ = . fﺤﻴﺙ. v : x ֏ cos x ، u : x ֏ sin x :
v
π
w
ﻫﺎﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ 0 , ﻭﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ . v ' : x ֏ − sin x ، u ' : x ֏ cos x :
2
π π
w
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ v( x) ≠ 0ﻋﻠﻰ 0 , ﻭﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ . 0 ,
2 2
ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒـ :
)cos x × cos x − sin x × (− sin x 1
= )f '( x 2
= = 1 + tan 2 x
cos x cos 2 x
73
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 3
:ﺠﺩﻭل ﻤﻠﺨﺹ
x ֏0 R x ֏a
om
x֏a R x ֏ a x +b
x ֏ 2x R x ֏x2
.c
x ֏ n x n −1 R x ֏ xn ( n ∈ℕ )
]0, + ∞[ ] ﻭ−∞ , 0[
ik
1 1
x֏− x֏
x2 x
n ]0, + ∞[ ] ﻭ−∞ , 0[ 1
x ֏ − n +1
x
aw x ֏
xn
( n ∈ℕ )
x֏
1 ]0, + ∞[ x֏ x
2 x
af
x ֏ cos x R x ֏ sin x
x ֏ − sin x R x ֏ cos x
ot
u' 1
−
u2 u
w
u ' v − uv ' u
v2 v
w
x ֏ au '(ax + b) x ֏ u (ax + b)
74
3 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 11
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . f ( x) = 2 x − 6 :
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ﺤــل:
om
• ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ . 2 x − 6 ≥ 0
2 x − 6 ≥ 0ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ x ≥ 3
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ D fﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ [∞ . D f = [3, +
.c
• ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ v : x ֏ 2 x − 6ﺘﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . u : x ֏ x
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ vﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ . v ' : x ֏ 2
ik
1
֏ .v': x ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ uﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] 0, +ﻭ ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ
2 x
[ ∞ ] 3, + ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ vﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ . ] 3, +ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ
aw
1
× f '( x) = 2 ﻭﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎ ﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) x ֏ u (ax + bﻨﺠﺩ ﺃﻥ :
2 2x − 6
1
=
2x − 6
af
ﺤــل:
w
ﻭﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎ ﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) x ֏ u (ax + bﻨﺠﺩ ﺃﻥ f '( x) = (−4) × [ − sin(−4 x + 3)] :
)= 4 sin(−4 x + 3
75
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 3
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . 0; i , jﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Pﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ :
1 2
֏ f : xﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Pﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ .( a ≠ 0 ) a x
k
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ aﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( Pﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل .
om
• ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) . (T
( )
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . 0; i , jﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Pﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ :
.c
. f : x ֏ − 3x 2
• ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ) . ( P
ik
• ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (T 1ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( Pﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ .1
• ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (T 2ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( Pﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . −2
aw
1
. − • ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (T 3ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( Pﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ
3
af
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ :2ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺯﺍﺌﺩ.
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ 0; i , jﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Hﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﺌﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ :
ot
1
ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ .( a ≠ 0 ) a ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( H ֏ . f : xﻝﺘﻜﻥ M
x
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
.m
76
3 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﺄﻝﻭﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ:0
om
.1ﺃﻨﻘل ﺜﻡ ﺃﻜﻤل ﻤﻠﺊ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
1
= ) f (x
1
) (1 + x ) (1 + x
2 3
1+ x
.c
) (1 + x cos x sin x
2
1+ x
ﺍﻝﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ
ik
1 + 2x 1
ﺍﻝﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻋﻨﺩ0 aw
.2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
1 1
0,99 ، 1,004 ، ( 0,99 ) ، (1,002 ) ، ( 0.98 ) ، (1,003) ،
2 2 3 3
،
0,98 1,003
1 1
af
. ،
) ( 0.99 )(1.01
2 2
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ:
ot
( )
1
(C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i , j ) = ) f (x
.m
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
x +1
(C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . 0 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺼﺭﺓ ﻝﹻ ) ∆ ( ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ )
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ gﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) ∆ ( .ﻋﻴﻥ ،ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ،ﻤﺠﺎﻻ ﻤﺤﺘﻭﻯ ﻓﻲ
w
1 1
.f ( x ) − g ( x ) ≤ 10−3 ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل − ; ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ:
2 2
w
1 1
ﻋﻴﻥ ،ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ، ، (1ﻤﺠﺎﻻ ﻤﺤﺘﻭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل − ; ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ:
2 2
. f ( x ) − g ( x ) ≤ 10
−2
77
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 3
( )
1
ﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ f ( x) = x 2ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i , j
2
ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﻴﻥ.
y
) (T ) (Cf ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺭﺴﻡ
om
ﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﻴﻥ ﻭﻨﻀﻊ ) M ( x0 , y0
.c
Q ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Qﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺱ ،ﻨﻀﻊ b
× ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ a ) . Qﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ(.
a 0 b 1 x
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' f
ik
M
ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . f ' ( x ) = x :
aw 1
ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ. y = ax − a 2 :
2
1 1
ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ )' (Tﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = bx − b 2 :ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) (Tﻭﻤﻨﻪ y0 = a x0 − a 2ﺃﻱ . a 2 − 2ax0 + 2 y0 = 0
2 2
1
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ )' (Tﻭﻤﻨﻪ y0 = b x0 − b 2ﺃﻱ . b 2 − 2bx0 + 2 y0 = 0
af
2
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ) (Tﻭ )' (Tﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻲ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﻬﻤﺎ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ -1ﺃﻱ . a × b = −1
ot
1
.y=− ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ
2
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ M x0 , − 12 ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = − 12ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Tﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝـ ) ( C f
w
1
ﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ aﻭ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ، Mﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝـ ) . y = ax − a 2 (T
w
2
1 1
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) (Tﻭﻤﻨﻪ − = a x0 − a 2ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ) a 2 − 2ax0 − 1 = 0ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ( a
2 2
w
ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻴﺯ x02 + 1ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻴﻥ ﻭﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﻥ ﻴﺸﻤﻼﻥ ، Mﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻴﻥ
ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ -1ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻴﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻲ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ .
1
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = −
2
78
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 3
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ f . O; i; jﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ 0, 2ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
y ( C fﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ )ﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل( ) . f ( x) = 4 − x 2
2
1 (1ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺨﻤﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ :ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ ، 0ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ 2ﻭ ﻝﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ.
0 1 2 x (2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [. [ 0; 2
om
• ﺘﺄﻜﺩ ﺃﻥ ) f ( xﺘﻜﺘﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل f ( x) = 2 − x × 2 + x
[[0; 2 ﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ' fﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
ﺍﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝـ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . 0 •
( C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ .2 )
.c
(3ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ xﻏﻴﺭ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ، 0ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝـ
( C fﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ ( D) ، xﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . y = xﻨﺴﻤﻲ ' Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) (4ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ
( C fﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﻬﺎ . xﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ Mﻭ ' . M )
ik
ﻤﻥ
. (C f ) ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) ( Dﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ]' [ MMﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) ( Dﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
aw
(1ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ
af
• ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺩ 0ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ،ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺩ 2ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ،ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ.
[∞]0; + (2ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ uﻭ vﺤﻴﺙ u : x ֏ 4 − x 2ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭ v : x ֏ xﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ
[[0; 2 ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ f = uﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [ [ 0; 2ﻷﻥ 4 − x 2 > 0ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
ot
ﻭﻤﻨﻪ f ( x) = 2 − x × 2 + x
−x
= )f '( x • ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ): f '( x
4 − x2
w
( C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ 2ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ . ) (3ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝـ
(
M '( x '; x) ، M x; 4 − x 2 ) (4
w
]' [ MM ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ' OMMﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ) ( Dﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ •
( C fﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻜﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ . ) ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
79
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 3
ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﹻ ) f (1ﺜﻡ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ 0;1
ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ hﻗﺭﻴﺒﺎ ﻤﻥ 0ﻓﺈﻥ . f ( a + h ) ≈ f ( a ) + hf ′ ( a ) :ﻴﻤﺜل ﻫﻨﺎ hﺍﻝﺨﻁﻭﺓ.
om
ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺨﻁﻭﺓ hﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﺒﺎﻝﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﻤﻥ aﺇﻝﻰ bﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻓﻭﺍﺼل ) ( x kﻭ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ) ( y kﻭ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ
fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻲ: ﻝﻸﻋﺩﺍﺩ ) ( x k
b −a
= hﺜﻡ ﻨﻀﻊ: ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ nﺤﺩﺍ ﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﺍﻝﺨﻁﻭﺓ:
.c
n
xk yk
x0 =a f (a ) = y 0
ik
x1 = x 0 + h = a + h ) f ( x 1 ) ≃ y 1 = y 0 + hf ′ ( x 0
x 2 = x 1 + h = a + 2h
aw
) f ( x 2 ) ≃ y 2 = y 1 + hf ′ ( x 1
...
...
x n = x n −1 + h = a + nh = b
) f (b ) = f ( x n ) ≃ y n = y n −1 + hf ′ ( x n −1
af
ﺒﺄﺨﺫ h = 0.01ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﺔ .ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) f (1ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ .C 102
ot
.m
w
w
w
80
3 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻻﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻭ ﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ
om
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻf ( x ) = x 2 + 2x − 3 :
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ a = −3ﻫﻭ . −4
2x − 1
.c
= ) g ( xﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ .0ﻋﻠﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ. ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ:
x 2 +1
ik
.2ﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻥ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻨﻪ
• ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺤﺠﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
aw
ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ 2nd ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻶﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ Ti83 plusﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ
ﻭ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ .5ﻨﺤﺠﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻭﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺜﻡ ﻨﺼﺎﺩﻕ. PRGM
af
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻf ( x ) = x 2 + 2x − 3 :
ﻨﻤﺜل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ ) ( −2
ot
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﻤﺜل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ g
1 3
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ g ( x ) = x − x − 3x + 1 :ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ .1
2
.m
3
ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ •
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻶﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ Ti83 plusﻭ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﻤﺜﻴل ا)ا(
$
w
81
3
ﺍﻻﺸﺘـﻘـﺎﻗـﻴـﺔ
أ دة ا
رات
ﻴﻨﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 21
ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ.
أ
أم ـ
fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ . f ( x) = x 2 − 3 : 13 ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ : 1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل h ≠ 0
f ' (1) = 2 f ' (1) = −3 f ' (1) = 0 ، f ( x) = x 2 + 1ﺒﻴﻥ 3ﻭ h + 3ﻫﻲ . h + 6
fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x) = ( x − 1) :
2
14 2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل −1ﻓﺈﻥ
hﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ. )f (h − 1) − f (−1
ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻫﻭ :
)f (2 + h) − f (2 h
= h2 + h − 1 3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ
om
h
)f (2 + h) − f (2 )f (1 + h) − f (1
= h+2 ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ = 2h 2 − 3h − 4 ، h
h h
)f (2 + h) − f (2 ﻓﺈﻥ f ' (1) = −4
= −h
h 4ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ f (−2) = 0ﻭ f ' (−2) = 2ﻓﺈﻥ
.c
f (1 + h) + 1 )f (h − 2
lim f 15ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ f (1) = −1ﻭ = 2 lim =2
h →0 h h →0 h
. f ' (1) = 3 ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ . 1 fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ . f ( x) = x3 : 5
ik
)f (−2 + h) − f (−2
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ . 1 . lim ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل = −8 ، h ≠ 0
h →0 h
fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {1ﺒﹻ :
aw 16 6ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﺤﻘﻕ f ' (3) = 1
1 )f (3 + h) − f (3
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ) f ' (2ﻫﻭ : = ). f ( x . lim ﻓﺈﻥ = 1
x −1 h →0 h
ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ . −1؛ 0؛ 7ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ y = 3ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A(0 ; 3ﻓﺈﻥ . f ' (0) = 3
af
fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [0 ; +ﺒﹻ f ( x) = x : 17
f ' (0) = −1 ) f ' (0ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺭﻑ f ' (0) = 1 f 8ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x) = x 2 − x :
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨىﺎﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ f (0) = 1 :ﻭ . f ' (0) = 3
ot
y = 2 x − 3ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ 19 ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . 1
.0 2 ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) . A(1; − 1ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ) f ' (1ﻫﻭ 6 : 10ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ
fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x) = x 2 + x : 20 x
ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ ، −2ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ = y
w
2
2x + 1 1
0 1 x
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ' ( x) = 0ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ֏ xﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ 12ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ֏ xﻭ
x x
. f ' (−1) = 0 ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ . ℝ
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ ]. f ' ( x) ≥ 0 : [−1; 2
82
3
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
27ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ : a اد ا ا ! f
1
. f ( x) = − x 2 + 1
2 ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ aﻓﻲ
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ، 2 23 ، 22: ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻨﻴﻥ
ﻭﻋﻴﻥ ). f ' (2 f : x ֏ x 2 (1؛ . a = 0 22
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ : 28 f : x ֏ − 3 x + 5 (2؛ . a = 3
. f ( x) = 3 x − xﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ 2
a = −2 f : x ֏ 3 x 2 + 4 (3؛
ﻋﻨﺩ −1ﻭﻋﻴﻥ ). f ' (−1 1 23
om
a = −1 ، f : x ֏ − (1
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ x − 5 x + 3ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
2
29 x
3
، ℝﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ 3ﻭ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ . ֏ a =1 ، f : x (2
x
−4
֏ f : xﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ ، ℝ 30ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ֏ a = −3 ، f : x
1
(3
x
.c
2x
ﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ −2ﻭ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ . a = 4 ، f : x ֏ 2 x (4
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {−1ﺒﹻ : 31 a = −1 ، f : x ֏ −3 x (5
ik
1 1
= ). f ( x =a ، f : x ֏ 3 − x (6
x +1 4
aw
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ، 2ﻭﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ : 24
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ . 2 f ( x) = 4 x − 6ﻭﻝﻴﻜﻥ hﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {−1ﺒﹻ : 32 (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ −1ﻭ . −1 + h
af
1 (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ، −1
. f ( x) = 3 +
x +1 ﻭﻋﻴﻥ ). f ' (−1
ot
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ، 2ﻭﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ (3ﻫل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل 0؟
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ . 2 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ . f ( x) = x :
3
25
33ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {2ﺒﹻ : (1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ : h
.m
= ). f ( x
x (2 + h)3 − 8
x−2 = h 2 + 6h + 12
h
(1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ، 3ﻭﻋﻴﻥ (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ، 2
w
83
3
3
ﺍﻻﺸﺘـﻘـﺎﻗـﻴـﺔ
= ) f ( xﻭ . a = −3 (3
x +1 34ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {2ﺒﹻ :
x+2 x
= ) f ( xﻭ a = −2؛ ﺜﻡ a = 3 (4 . f ( x) = 1 −
x x−2
x+2 ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ، 3ﻭﻋﻴﻥ
= ) f ( xﻭ a = 2؛ ﺜﻡ a = −3 (5
x−3 ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ). f ' (3
ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ) f ' (a ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل 40 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [ −3 ; +ﺒﹻ : 35
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
. f ( x) = 3 + x
f ( x) = x − 3 (1ﻭ . a = 4
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ hﺤﻴﺙ :
om
f ( x) = 2 x + 5 (2ﻭ . a = 2
)f (1 + h) − f (1 h+4 −2
f ( x) = 1 − x (3ﻭ . a = −2 . = h > −4ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
h h
f ( x) = 3 − 2 x (4ﻭ . a = −11 )f (1 + h) − f (1 1
= (2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ :
f ( x) = − x (5ﻭ . a = −4 h 4+h +2
.c
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ، 1
a ! f ا('& %ا "#$ا
−−− −−− ﻭﻋﻴﻥ ). f ' (1
ik
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺃﺤﺴﺏ 41 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [ 2 ; +ﺒﹻ : 36
) f (a + hﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ، hﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . f ( x) = x − 2
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل . a
aw ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ، 7ﻭﻋﻴﻥ
f : x ֏ x + 2 (1؛ a = 6ﺜﻡ . a = 0 2
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ). f ' (7
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ]−∞ ; 1ﺒﹻ :
1
f : x ֏ x 2 + x − 1 (2؛ a = 2ﺜﻡ . a = − 37
2
. f ( x) = 1 − x
af
f : x ֏ −3 x 2 + 6 x − 5 (3؛ a = 1ﺜﻡ . a = 0
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ، −3ﻭﻋﻴﻥ
f : x ֏ x 3 + 2 x − 5 (4؛ a = 0ﺜﻡ . a = 2
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ). f ' (−3
ot
2
ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ | . | h 39ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ) f ' (a
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
w
84
3
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
(2ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Cﻫﻲ ، y = − x 2 + 4 :ﻭ x0 = 2 1
ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﺤﺴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 45
(3ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Cﻫﻲ ، y = x 2 − 3 x + 2 :ﻭ x0 = 1 3+ h
x −1 ﻴﺅﻭل hﺇﻝﻰ . 0
= ، yﻭ x0 = −2 (4ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Cﻫﻲ :
3x (2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺠﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ
y = x 2 − 2 x 51ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (Cﺃﻜﺘﺏ 1 1 1
. ؛ ؛ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ :
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . −1 3,1 2, 99 3, 02
−4 (1ﺠﺩ ﺃﺤﺴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻝﻠﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ (1 + h)3ﻝﻤﺎ h 46
= yﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (Cﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ 52
x ﻴﻘﺘﺭﺏ ﻤﻥ . 0
om
ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . 2 (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ :
1
y = 2 − x 2 53ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C (1, 04)3؛ . (0, 96)3
2
ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ (1ﺠﺩ ﺃﺤﺴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻝﻠﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ 5 + h 47
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ،1
ﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ hﺇﻝﻰ . 0
.c
ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . B ; 0
5
2 (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ :
(C ) 54ﻭ ) ( Dﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ : . ؛ 4,83 ؛ 4, 97 5, 01
ik
y = x 2ﻭ . y = −4 x − 4 fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ aﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ℝ 48
(1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) (Cﻭ ). ( D ﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ f ' (2) = 4 ، f (2) = 3 :ﻭ f ' (2,1) = 2
aw
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) ( Dﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﹻ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ (1ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺃﺤﺴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ، 2ﻋﻴﻥ
ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ . ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ). f (2,1
) (Cﻭ ) ( Dﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ : 55 (2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺃﺤﺴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ، 2,1
af
y = 3x3 + 2 x 2 − 7 x − 6ﻭ . y = 2 x + 2 ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ). f (2, 2
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ c ، b ، aﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل د اس
ot
ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ : x ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 49ﺇﻝﻰ 57ﻴﻨﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺇﻝﻰ
)3 x 3 + 2 x 2 − 9 x − 8 = ( x + 1)(ax 2 + bx + c ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O ; i ; j
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) (Cﻭ ) ( Dﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ، ℝﻭ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ
.m
49
ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ . ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ) . (C
(3ﺍﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) ( Dﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ . ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﻪ ﻫﻭ a
w
(C ) 56ﻤﻨﺤﻥ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A(2 ; 4ﻭ )∆( ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ A(−1 ; 3) (2ﻭ a = −2 A(2 ; 0) (1ﻭ a = 1
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = 3 x + 5 3
w
85
3
ﺍﻻﺸﺘـﻘـﺎﻗـﻴـﺔ
(2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Pﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻪ
). E (0 ; 4
اوال اـــ(ـ
(3ﻫل ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ) (Pﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻤﺎﺴﻪ ﻋﻨﺩﻫﺎ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ . f ( x) = 3 x − 1 : 58
1 (1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ، aﺒﺭﺭ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . y = x
2 fﻋﻨﺩ aﻭﻋﻴﻥ ) . f ' (a
a (4ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (P (2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ mﻭ pﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ .ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ
ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . a ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ . x ֏ mx + p :
(5ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Pﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ . f ( x) = x3 :
om
59
ﻴﺸﻤل ﻤﺒﺩﺃ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O (1ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، a
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ 62 ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ' fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ،ﺜﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ . f ' ( x) = 3 x 2 :
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) f '( xﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
.c
(2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ
. f : x ֏ 2 x + 5 x − x + 1 (1
3 2
ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . 1
π π
ik
. f : x ֏ x 2 (cos ) − x + sin (2 60ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ :
3 6
1
. f : x ֏ x − 1 (3 g ( x) = − x 2 + 2 x
2 x3 + 5 x 2
aw 2
֏. f :x (4 (1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ℝ
x2 + 1
ﻭﻋﻴﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ.
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ x xﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ 63
(2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺤﻴﺙ :
ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]0; +ﻭ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ). f '( x
af
f ' (t ) = 2 − tﻭ . f (0) = 1ﻨﻀﻊ ϕ = f − g
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ 64 ﺃ ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ، aﻭﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ot
x +1
. f : x ֏ 2x + 1 − (3 (1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭﺃﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ
x−3
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ . f ' ( x) = 2 x − 5 :
2 x 2 + 3x − 1
֏. f :x (4
x2 − 3
86
3
ﺍﻻﺸﺘـﻘـﺎﻗـﻴـﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺤﻴﺙ f ( x) = x3 : 66
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . ω ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) f '( xﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ) g '( xﺤﻴﺙ gﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
f : x ֏ x + 3 x + 4 (1ﻭ . x0 = 0
2
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ g ( x) = f ( x − 3) :؛
f : x ֏ 2 x − x + 3 x (2ﻭ . x0 = −1
3 2
) g ( x) = f (2 x + 5؛ )g ( x) = f (−3 x + 2
x+3 ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﺤﻴﺙ f ( x) = x :ﻭ g
֏ f : xﻭ . x0 = 1 (3 67
1 − 2x ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ .
f : x ֏ 2 − x (4ﻭ . x0 = −2
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺘﻲ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ . g
2
om
y = − x 2 + 3 72ﻭ = yﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) (C1 (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ . g
x
ﻭ ) (C2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜﻠﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ. (3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) f '( xﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ). g '( x
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆( ﻴﻤﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ؛ )g ( x) = f (2 x + 5 ؛ )g ( x) = f ( x − 1
.c
(2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆( . ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ 68
(3ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ) (C1ﻭ ) (C2ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ik
. f : x ֏ (3 x − 2) 2 (1
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆( .
. f : x ֏ 3 x − 2 (2
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ، 73
aw ֏. f :x x − 3 (3
) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ :
. f : x ֏ 2 − 3 x (4
3x 2 + α x + β
= ) f ( xﺤﻴﺙ β ، αﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ . f : x ֏ (2 x − 3) x (5
x2 + 1
. f : x ֏ ( x 2 + 2 x − 3) − x + 3 (6
af
.
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ). f '( x ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ 69
(2ﻋﻴﻥ αﻭ βﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ot
3− x
70
ﻋﻴﻥ αﻭ βﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻁﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﻥ : 1
. f ( x) = x +
f (2) = 1ﻭ . f '(2) = 0 x +1
w
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ، 75 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ،
ﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ؛ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ
w
ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﺕ ) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ 71
ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ، (C fﺫﺍﺕ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ . ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ω ،ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) (C fﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . x0
87
3
y ﺍﻻﺸﺘـﻘـﺎﻗـﻴـﺔ
B ـ.ـ-ـ,
5 cm ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ ، mﺤﻴﺙ ABC 76
m ∈ ℝ ∗+؛ ﻴﺤﺼﺭ ﺩﺍﺨل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ،ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼ
O A x DEFGﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ .ﻨﻀﻊ BD = x
ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻑ Aﻴﺘﺤﺭﻙ ﺒﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ . 2 cm / s A
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻠﺤﻅﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺨﺭ Bﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ
ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻑ Aﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻌﺩ 3cmﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺩﺃ Oﻝﻠﻤﻌﻠﻡ ؟ E F
om
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . R 79
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﺎﺫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻀﻴﺔ ﺘﻌﻁﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ xﻤﻥ ﺴﻁﺢ B D G C
R2 (1ﻋﻴﻥ xﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ .
× ، g = g 0ﺤﻴﺙ g 0ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺒﹻ :
( R + x)2
(2ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل DEFG
.c
ﺍﻝﺠﺎﺫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻀﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﺒﺤﺭ .
ﻫﻲ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABC؛ ﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﺤﺴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ
) .( g 0 ≃ 9,8 ms −2
ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل . m = 4, 002
ik
1
× . g = g0 (1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ : −4
2x x
2
= yﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﺌﺩ ) ( Hﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻓﻲ 77
1+ + x
R R
aw ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ M ،ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Hﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ m
(2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻗﻴﻡ ﻗﺭﻴﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺭ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ hﻨﻀﻊ :
ﺤﻴﺙ mﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .
،ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ g ≃ g 0 1 − :
2x 1
≃ 1− h
R 1+ h Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺤﻴﺙ
(3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ gﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ x = 4800 mﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ Mﻫﻲ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ]. [ AB
af
R ≃ 6370000 m (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . m
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ 80 (2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻫﻭ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . ( H
ot
−12 − 4h
(1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ، 81 = )T ( h ﺃ ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ :
16 − 12h − 4h2 + 4
w
88
3
ﺍﻻﺸﺘـﻘـﺎﻗـﻴـﺔ
t : x ֏1 82
j
ﺃﻋﻁ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﻭل ) lim g ( xﻭ ). lim h( x
x →0 x →0 M T
S
(5ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ sin xﺜﻡ
x
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ) f ' ( 0ﻭ ). lim h( x i I
x →0
O C
ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ. 83
ﻨﻘﺫﻑ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻜﺭﺓ ،ﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻤﺘﺩ ﺇﻝﻰ ) ∆(
om
ﻭﺘﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ d (t ) = −5t 2 + 60t :
ﺒﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) C ، (O ; i ; jﻭ S
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻅﻤﻰ ﻝﻼﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺘﺒﻠﻐﻪ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ .
ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ،ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻝﺤﻅﺔ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ؟
Tﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (OMﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ )∆( ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ
(2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ؟
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ). I (1 ; 0
.c
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ 84 (1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ xﺍﻝﻁﻭل . I T
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ x0ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺎﺕ Α1ﻭ Α 2ﻝﻠﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﻥ OIMﻭ OIT
ik
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ (T ) ، Aﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ، xﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ Αﻝﻘﻁﺎﻉ
ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺹ . OIM
aw
Bﻭ Cﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ) (C f (3ﺒﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ Α1 < Α < Α2 :
C
ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ x0 − hﻭ x0 + h -ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺤﻴﺙ : sin x π
A ≤ . sin x ≤ x 0 ; ﻓﺈﻥ :
af
h > 0ﻭﻗﺭﺏ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺭ . cos x 2
B
D Dﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ ) ( BDﻴﻌﺎﻤﺩ -ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
π
ot
ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ 1ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ g : x ֏ cos x
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . −1 sin x
֏ h:x
x
89
4
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
om
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ.
.c
ﺤل ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﺘﺴﺘﺨﺩﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﺍل ﻨﺎﻁﻘﺔ
ik
aw ﻭ ﺩﻭﺍل ﺼﻤﺎﺀ.
91
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 4
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
h ، g ، fﻭ kﺩﻭﺍل ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
f : x ֏ x + 5ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
g : x ֏ −2 x + 3ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
h : x ֏ x 2ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
om
1
֏ k : xﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ . ]0, +
x
(1ﺫﻜﺭ ﺒﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ h ، g ، fﻭ . k
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ' h ' ، g ' ، fﻭ ' kﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﻭﺍل h ، g ، fﻭ kﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
.c
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ' h ' ، g ' ، fﻭ ' kﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ .
(4ﺘﺄﻜﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺘﻬﺎ ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ،ﻭ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ
ik
ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺘﻬﺎ ﺴﺎﻝﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل.
aw
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
) (C
g
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
) (C
g ( x ) = 3x 2 − 2 x − 1ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C gﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ
f
.m
( )
) O, i, jﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل (.
(1ﺤل ﻓﻲ Rﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ : x
w
g ( x) = 0
1
(2ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
w
92
4 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﻴﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
( )
y ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O, i, j
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] . [ − 1, 2
) (Cf
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺼل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ
ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝـ ) ( C fﻓﻲ Mﻤﻭﺠﺒﺎ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .
om
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺼل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ
ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝـ ) ( C fﻓﻲ Mﺴﺎﻝﺒﺎ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ﻤﻥ ] [ − 1, 2ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' f
.c
1
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ.
0 1 x (4ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ﻤﻥ ] [ − 1, 2ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' f
ik
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺴﺎﻝﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ.
(5ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ
aw
ﻝﺤﺎﻤل ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ؟ ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻓﻭﺍﺼل ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ؟
af
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
ot
) f ( x2 ) − f ( x1
=. T ﻨﻀﻊ ][ −1 , 5 ﻝﻴﻜﻥ x1ﻭ x2ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
x2 − x1
w
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) . T = 2 ( x1 + x2 − 2
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ Tﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −1 , 1
w
93
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 4
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺸﺘﻘﺎﻗﻴﺔ.
ﺇﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ:
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ):ﺘﻘﺒل ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ( ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل D fﻭ ' fﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ .
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ' fﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ) ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ' fﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻗﻴﻡ ﻤﻨﻌﺯﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ( D fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل D fﻓﺈﻥ
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . D f
om
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ' fﺴﺎﻝﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ) ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ' fﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻗﻴﻡ ﻤﻨﻌﺯﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ( D fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل D fﻓﺈﻥ
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . D f
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ' fﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل D fﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . D f
.c
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺇﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺇﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل D fﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ
ik
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . D f
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . f : x ֏ − x 3 + 2 :
aw
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﺤﻴﺙ . f ' : x ֏ −3x 2 :
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ' fﺴﺎﻝﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ * ℝﻭ ﺘﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺯﻭﻝﺔ 0ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . R
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ):ﺘﻘﺒل ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ( ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Iﻭ ' fﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ .
ot
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻨﻌﺩﻤﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻋﻨﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ cﻤﻥ Iﻤﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻤﺠﺎل ﻤﻔﺘﻭﺡ ' Iﻤﺤﺘﻭﻯ ﻓﻲ Iﻴﺸﻤل c
ﺘﻘﺒل ﻓﻴﻪ fﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ) . f (cﺘﺴﻤﻰ ) f (cﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ .
.m
94
4 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
1 3 1 2
= ). f ( x ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﺒﹻx − x − 2 x + 1 :
3 2
(1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻤﻥ Rﺘﻘﺒل ﻓﻴﻬﺎ fﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻌﻴﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﺄﻜﺩ ﻤﻥ ﻭﺠﻭﺩﻫﺎﻭ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻬﺎ ﺜﻡ ﻨﻠﺨﺹ
om
ﻜل ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺠﺩﻭل ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ .
ﺤــل:
(1ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺓ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ . Rﻝﺘﻜﻥ ' fﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . R
.c
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ f '( x ) = x 2 − x − 2 Rﻭﻫﻲ ﺜﻼﺜﻲ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﻤﻴﺯﻩ . ∆ = 9
-1ﻭ 2ﻫﻤﺎ ﺠﺫﺭﺍﻥ ﻝﻪ ،ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻪ ﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻵﺘﻲ:
ik
x ∞−
aw -1 2 ∞+
)f '( x + 0 - 0 +
• f '( x ) > 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ] − ∞ , − 1ﻭ f '( −1) = 0ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. ]−∞ , − 1
af
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ . ] − 1, 2 • f '( x) < 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ] − 1, 2
ﻭ f '(2) = 0ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ∞ . [ 2, + • f '( x) > 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ∞ ] 2, +
ot
)f ( −1
)f ( x
)f (2
w
7 13
= ) f ( −1ﻭ
f (2) = −
w
3 6
(2ﻤﻥ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ' fﺘﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ -1ﻤﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﻤﺜﻼ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −3, 0ﺇﺫﻥ
13
= ) f ( −1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ -1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −3, 0
6
7
f (2) = −ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ 2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [1, 4ﻤﺜﻼ . ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ
3
95
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 4
ﺤﺼﺭ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ:
ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل ] [ a , bﻭ ' fﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ .
] [ a ,b • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ a , bﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
) f ( a ) ≤ f ( x ) ≤ f (b
] [ a,b • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ a , bﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
) f (b ) ≤ f ( x ) ≤ f ( a
om
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ −3,1ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . f : x ֏ x 2 + 2 x − 3 :
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻫﻲ . f ' : x ֏ 2 x + 2 :
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ' fﺴﺎﻝﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ −3, − 1ﻭ f ' ( −1) = 0ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [. [ −3, − 1
.c
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ' fﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ]−1,1ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ
ال ]. ]−1,1
ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ:
ik
x -3 -1 1
0 0
aw
)f ( x
-4
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] f (−1) ≤ f ( x) ≤ f (−3) ، [ −3, − 1ﺃﻱ −4 ≤ f ( x) ≤ 0
af
f ( −1) ≤ f ( x ) ≤ f (1) ،ﺃﻱ −4 ≤ f ( x) ≤ 0 ][ −1,1 ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
ﻋﻨﺼﺭﺤﺎﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ – ﻋﻨﺼﺭ ﺤﺎﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺴﻔل :
ot
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ • :ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺒﺭﻯ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ D fﺇﻥ ﻭﺠﺩﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻨﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻨﺎﺼﺭ
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ.
• ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﺭﻯ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ D fﺇﻥ ﻭﺠﺩﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻨﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺴﻔل ﻭﻫﻭ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻨﺎﺼﺭ
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺴﻔل.
96
4 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 2
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ −5, 0ﺒﹻ. f ( x) = 2 x3 − 9 x 2 + 12 x − 100 :
• ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −5, 0
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﻨﺼﺭﺍ ﺤﺎﺩﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺭﺍ ﺤﺎﺩﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺴﻔل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −5, 0
ﺤــل • :ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ . Rﻝﺘﻜﻥ ' fﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . R
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ f '( x) = 6 x 2 − 18 x + 12 Rﻭﻫﻲ ﺜﻼﺜﻲ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﻤﻴﺯﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺼﺭ
om
1 . ∆ ' = 9ﻭ 2ﻫﻤﺎ ﺠﺫﺭﺍ ﺜﻼﺜﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ،ﻓﻬﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻴﻨﺘﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ] . [ −5, 0ﻭﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
] [ −5, 0ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] . [ −5, 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ:
.c
)f '( x +
-100
ik
)f ( x
-635
aw
• ﻤﻥ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﻴﺘﺒﻴﻥ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −5; 0ﻓﺈﻥ . f ( x) ≤ −100
ﺇﺫﻥ -100ﻫﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺭﺍ ﺤﺎﺩﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −5, 0
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ -100ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺒﺭﻯ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −5, 0
af
• ﻤﻥ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﻴﺘﺒﻴﻥ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −5, 0ﻓﺈﻥ . f ( x) ≥ −635
ﺇﺫﻥ -635ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺴﻔل ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺴﻔل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −5, 0
ot
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ -635ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﺭﻯ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −5, 0
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x ) = 0ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺍ x0ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل ] . [ a , bﻨﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
] [ a , bﻭ ﺃﻥ ) f (aﻭ ) f (bﻤﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ .
w
) f (aﻭ ) f (bﻤﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ x0ﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﺘﻘﺭ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﻴﺘﻪ.
ﺤــل • :ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ 0,1ﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﺤﻴﺙ . f '( x) = 3 x 2 − 6 x + 4
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ' fﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ 0,1ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ] f (0) = −1 . [ 0,1ﻭ f (1) = 1ﺇﺫﻥ ) f (0ﻭ )f (1
ﻤﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ ﻭﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩل f ( x) = 0ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺍ x0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ 0,1
97
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 4
ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ:
ﻤﺜﺎل ﺃﻭل ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺭﺍﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ :
y
4 ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺭﺍﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺘﺤﺼﻠﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل
( C fﻭ ) ( C gﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ) ﻋﻠﻰ
3
fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
) (C
f
2
f ( x) = − x 3 + 2 x 2ﻭ g ( x) = − x 2 + 2 x
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) (C
om
1 f
ﻭ ) . (C g
-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 x
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﻀﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) (C
f
ﻭ ) . (C
-1
.c
g
ik
-3 ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ.
) (Cg (4ﻫل ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ) f ( xﻭ ) g ( xﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﺠﻭﺀ
aw ( C fﻭ ) ( Cg؟ )
-4
ﺇﻝﻰ
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O, i, j
ot
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ . f ( x ) − ( x − 4) = ( x − 1) 3
(3ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D
w
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ:
w
( )
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i , j
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺘﺎﻥ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ] ). [ f ( x) − g ( x
ﻭ ) . (Cg ) (C
f (3ﺇﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ
98
4 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
A
K B
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﺍﻹﺴﺘﻤﺜﺎل:
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﺃﻭﻝﻰ:
M
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ . AB = 2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Γﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Dﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 2
L ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺱ
، ACﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ A
ﻭﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ . Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Γﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M
om
ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻓﻲ Kﻭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ BCﻓﻲ . L
D C
ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ Mﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ ﺍﻝﻁﻭل KLﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ .ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻫﺫﺍ ﻨﻀﻊ :
.c
KB = xﻭ . LB = y
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ . KL 2 = x 2 + y 2
ik
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ . KL = 4 − x − yﻭﺃﻥ . KL 2 = x 2 + y 2 − 8 x − 8 y + 2 xy + 16
− x2 + 4x − 8 4x − 8
= KL = . yﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ
aw x−4 x−4
− x2 + 4x − 8
= )f ( x (5ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ 0 , 2ﺤﻴﺙ :
x−4
ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻁﻭل KLﻴﺄﺨﺫ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل . x = 4 − 2 2
af
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ:
ﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻲ ﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﻪ 30cmﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﻪ 10 cm
.m
r
10cm
99
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 4
3 9
3 x +ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻹﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ. ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ≥ :
2x 2
3
. f ( x) = 3 x + ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ
2x
(1ﺃﻭﺠﺩ D fﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ . D fﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' . f
3 x3 − 3
= ) . f '( x (3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ
om
2 x2
(4ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
9
≥ ). f ( x (5ﺇﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ D f
2
.c
y
ik
. D f = ] 0, + ∞ [ (1
(2ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] 0, +ﻓﻬﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ
aw
ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ . ] 0 , +
3 3
= ). f '( x −
2 x 2x2
af
3
ﻨﺎﻁﻕ ﻭ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ : (3ﻨﺠﻌل ﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ
2 x
1 3 x 3
= ). f '( x − 2
ot
0 1
2x 2x
x
3x x − 3
= )f '( x ﻨﻭﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﻤﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺤﺩ ﻫﻭ 2 x 2ﻭ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ
.m
2x2
3 x3 − 3
= ) . f '( x 2
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ x > 0ﻓﺈﻥ x = x 2ﻭﻤﻨﻪ
2x
(4ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ x3ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] 0 , +ﻷﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﺭﻜﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ x3ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] 0 , +
w
ﺘﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ xﺍﻝﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ . ] 0 , +ﻭﻤﻨﻪ u : x ֏ x 3 − 1ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] 0 , +ﻭ u (1) = 0
w
ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ 2 x 2 > 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ∞ ] 0 , +ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ f '( x) < 0 :ﻋﻠﻰ [ ] 0 ,1ﻭ f '( x) ≥ 0ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ . [ 1, +
)f ( x
9
2
3 9
.3 x + (5ﻤﻥ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ≥
2x 2
100
4 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
v2
5 +ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﻗﻭﺩ . ﺸﺎﺤﻨﺔ ﺘﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ 200kmﺒﺴﺭﻋﺔ vﻤﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺒـ ، km / hﺍﻝﺸﺎﺤﻨﺔ ﺘﺴﺘﻬﻠﻙ l / h :
320
ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﻗﻭﺩ ﻫﻭ 16 DAﻝﻠﹼﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻭ ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻀﺎ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺌﻕ ﺃﺠﺭﺘﺎ ﺘﻘﺩﺭ ﺒـ 100 DAﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺔ .
(1ﻨﺴﻤﻲ tﺯﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺤﻠﺔ .ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ tﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . v
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻔﺔ ) P (vﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . v
36000
(3ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ] 0 ,120ﺤﻴﺙ
om
. f ( x ) = 10 x +
x
(4ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺤﻨﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺤﻠﺔ ﺃﻗل ﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ؟
.c
200
ik
=. t
(1
v
36000 v 2 200 200
. P (v) = 10v + . P (v) = 5 +ﺃﻱ × × × 16 + 100 (2
aw 320 v v
v
36000
. f ( x ) = 10 x + (3
x
] . D f = ] 0,120
af
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ D fﻷﻨﻬﺎ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﺠﻌﻴﺘﻴﻥ :ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻘﻠﻭﺏ .
10 x 2 − 36000
ot
ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ
w
(4ﻤﻥ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺤﻠﺔ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﻗل ﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺤﻨﺔ . 60 km / h
101
4
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺩﻭﺍل ﻝﻬﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ g ، fﻭ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
h ( x ) = x 2 + 2x + 3 ، g ( x ) = x 2 + 2x − 3 ، f ( x ) = x 2 + 2 x
ﻭ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ( D ) : y = −2x − 7ﻭ . ( D ′ ) : y = −2x − 1
.1ﺒﺎﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻨﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺠﺯ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺜل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ
ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل h ، g ، fﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( Dﻭ ) . ( D ′
om
.2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻤﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( Dﻭ ) ( D ′ﻤﺤﺩﺩﺍ
ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺱ.
.3ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺠﺒﺭﻴﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ.
.c
.4ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺠﺭﺍﺀ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺭﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ ) . ( −2
ik
ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ
aw
1 1
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲf ( x ) = x 3 − x 2 + x − 2 :
3 2
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) f ′ ( x
.2ﺃﺤﺠﺯ ) f ( xﻓﻲ f ′ ( x ) ،Y 1ﻓﻲ Y 2
af
3
ﻨﺤﺠﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﺩﺍﻴﺔ ) f ( xﻓﻲ Y 1ﺜﻡ ﻨﺤﺠﺯ ) nDeriv (Y 1 , X , Xﻓﻲ Y 2
w
102
4
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ
أ دة ا رات أ
أم ـ
ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ. ﺒﹻ f ( x ) = 3 x − 4 : 1ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 15 ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
] [ a ; bﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x ) = 3 x 2 + 5 : 2
]: [a ; b ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]. ]−∞ ; − 1
. f ( x) ∈ [ a ; b ] (1 ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x ) = 3 x 3 + 12 : 3
om
. f ( x ) ∈ [ f (a ) ; f (b) ] (2 ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
. f ( x ) ∈ [ f (b) ; f (a) ] (3 ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x ) = 3 x 3 + 12 : 4
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ℝﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل 16 ﺘﻘﺒل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ، x0ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ : 5
.c
ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل . ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ : x0 f ( x ) = x − 3 x + 5ﺘﻘﺒل ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ ﺤﺩﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
3
ﻤﺎﺌﻼ . ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ . ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺜﻼﺙ ﻗﻴﻡ ، 6
ik
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ 12 x 3 + 33 x − 55 = 0ﺘﻘﺒل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 17 ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺜﻼﺙ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ .
]: [ 0 ; 2 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ، fﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ 7
aw
ﺜﻼﺙ ﺤﻠﻭل . ﺤﻠﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﻴﻥ . ﺤﻼ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ . ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺘﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ .
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ −x 3 − 233 x + 5 = 0 18 fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x ) = x 2 − x : 8
ﻻ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][0 ;3 (1 ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ
af
1
ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][−5 ; 0 (2 ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل .
2
ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][0 ;1 (3
9ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][ 2 ; 3
ot
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ 3 x5 + 7 x 3 − 1ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ 19 ﻓﺈﻥ . f (3) − f (2) > 0
ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ . ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ . ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ 10
.m
f : x ֏ −x − 7 x − 3 x + 4ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ
5 3
20 ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [−1 ; 2ﻓﺈﻥ . f (2) − f (−1) < 0
ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﺤﻘﻕ f (a ) − f (b) = 0ﻓﺈﻥ 11
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][−7 ; 4
fﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] . [ a ; b
w
103
4
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
) (C3 ) ، (C2 ) ، (C1ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼﺕ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻝﺩﻭﺍل ، g ، f 27
ا "#$وا دا
hﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﻝﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻴﻤﻥ. fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f 22
y
y -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 x
-1
)( p
om
-2
1 -3
) (C1
0 1 x ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ) f '( xﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ . x
.c
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ ' fﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
2
0 1 x
1
ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
ik
-2 -1 0 1 2 x
y y
-1 ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
-2
)( R
aw -3
1
1
y
) (C 3 0 1 x
y
.m
1
ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
0 1
1y
1 ) (Q ) ' (C fﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﻤﺘﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ 25
a b
w
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺘﺒﻠﻐﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Dﻓﻲ 28 ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ ) f (aﻭ ). f (b
w
104
4
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Dﻓﻲ ﻜل 29
ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ) (Cﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A(2 ; 1ﻭﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ
ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ ) ، (−1 ; − 3ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﺤﺎﻤل
f : x ֏ x 2 − 3 x + 2 (1؛ ]. D = [ −3 ; 2
ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل.
f : x ֏ −2 x 2 − 4 x + 6 (2؛ ]. D = [ −4 ; 2
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ a > 0ﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
f : x ֏ x 3 − 3 x 2 + 1 (3؛ ]. D = [ −5 ; 7
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ ax + bx + c
2
36
f : x ֏ x 4 − 2 x 2 + 3؛ ]. D = [ −2 ; 2 (4
ﺤﻴﺙ c ، b ، aﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﻭ a ≠ 0
4x + 3
om
ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ) (Cﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A(1 ; − 1ﻭﻴﻘﺒل ֏ f : x؛ ]. D = [ −1 ; 2 (5
x+2
ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ ) ، (−1 ; 0ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ x −1
f : x ֏ 2؛ ]. D = [ −4 ; 6 (6
13 13 x +3
. y = − x −ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ . c ، b ، a
f : x ֏ 3 x + 1؛ . D = − ; 16
1
2 2 (7
.c
37ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺒﺎﺨﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 3
ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Dﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ. f : x ֏ 2 − x؛ ] . D = [ −7 ; 2 (8
ik
f : x ֏ x 2 − 2 x + 2 (1؛ ]. D = [−3 ; 2 ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﻴﻥ ﺒﹻ : 30
f : x ֏ 2 x 2 − 3x − 1 (2؛ ]. D = [0 ;1 (5, 012013014015016) + 3 2
=A
aw 3, 012013014015016
f : x ֏ −3 x 2 + 3x − 2 (3؛ ]. D = [0 ; 2
(5, 012013014015017) 2 + 3
f : x ֏ − x − 6 x + 3 (4؛ ]. D = [−4 ; 0
2
=B
3, 012013014015017
f : x ֏ −2 x 2 − 4 (5؛ ]. D = [−1 ;1
ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﻴﻥ ﺒﹻ :
af
31
f : x ֏ x 2 − 3 (6؛ ]. D = [−2 ;1 2, 01401414
=A
ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺒﺎﺨﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 38 (1, 01401414)2 + 2, 01401414
ot
f : x ֏| x 2 + 5 | (4؛ ]. D = [−3 ; 2 ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ aﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
w
ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ | ) ، g : x ֏ | f ( xﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ aﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ
f : x ֏ ( x 2 + 3)( x + 1) (3؛ ]. D = [−2 ; 2 ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ aﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ
105
4
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ
(C g ) (2ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺃﺩﺭﺱ 40
ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﻭﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ
ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ، (O ; i ; jﺤﻴﺙ gﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ :
. g : x ֏ sin x ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x) = 0ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . I
f : x ֏ 2 x 3 − 3 x 2 − 1 (1؛ . I = ; 2
3
) ∆ ( ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C gﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . 0
2
ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C gﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ f : x ֏ − x 3 + 3 x 2 − 3x − 2 (2؛ ]. I = [ −1 ;0
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆ ( .
f : x ֏ 2 x 3 − x 2 − 2 x + 1 (3؛ . I = − ; − 1
3 1
om
(1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ : 45 2 2
3
4x − 1 2
֏ f : x؛ I = 0 ;
1 x
+ x 2 + 4 x − 1 (4
֏. f :x
x2 + 1 2 6
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ f ( x ) − 4ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﺼﺭﺍ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ )f ( x 41ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﻭﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
.c
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ . x ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x) = 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ، I
ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺠﺩﻭﻝﻲ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ g : x ֏ x 2 : 46 ﺤﻴﺙ f : x ֏ x 3 − 5x 2 + 3x + 2 :ﻭ ]. I = [ −1 ; 2
ik
ﻭ h : x ֏ − x 2 + 2 xﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Dﺒﺎﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ 42
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ f ( x ) = | x | + | x − x | :
2
ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ .ﺃﻋﻁ ﺤﺼﺭﺍ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ). f ( x
aw
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Eﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ : x 47 f : x ֏ x 2 − 3 (1؛ ] . D = [ 0 ; 2
x 3 + 2 x 2 − 4 − λ = 0ﺤﻴﺙ λﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ . f : x ֏ 2 x 3 − 6 x + 2 (2؛ ]. D = [ 2 ;8
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ λﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]، [ −4 ; − 1 2
֏ f : x؛ ]. D = [ 0 ; 2 (3
af
ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺍ ﻴﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][ 0 ; 1 ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( E x−3
−4
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ : ֏ f : x؛ ]. D = [ −1 ;1 (4
48 ( x − 2) 2
ot
f ( x ) = x − 3x + 3x − 1
3 2
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Dﺒﺎﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ 43
) ( C fﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ .
.m
( )
ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i ; j ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﺼﺭﺍ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ). f ( x
( C fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ؟ ) (1ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ f : x ֏ x 2 + 4 x + 5 (1؛ ]. D = [ −4 ;0
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . f ' ( x ) = 0 f : x ֏ −3 x 2 + 6 x + 5 (2؛ ]. D = [ 0 ; 2
w
(2
ﻓﺴﺭ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ . f : x ֏ x 3 − x 2 − 2 x − 1 (3؛ . D = − ;
3 5
2 2
( C fﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ )
w
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ
f : x ֏ 5 −؛ . D = 1 ;
3 3
(4
ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 3 2 2x − 1
w
106
4 1
= (T1 ) : y x +1
4 fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ ℝﺒـ :
(T2 ) : y = 8 x − 16 6
49
1 1 f ( x ) = ax + b −
(T3 ) : y = −x+ x
16 2 aﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ ؛ ) ( C fﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ
ﻭﻝﻜﻨﻪ ﻝﻡ ﻴﺘﺫﻜﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .ﺴﺎﻋﺩ ﻋﻤﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻜل ﻤﻤﺎﺱ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ .
ﺇﻝﻰ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ .
ﻋﻴﻥ aﻭ bﺤﻴﺙ ) ( C fﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( 2 ; 0
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . 52
ﻭﻴﻘﺒل ﻋﻨﺩ Aﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = x − 2
) ( Pﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = x 2ﻭ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ
om
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺤﻴﺙ: 50
ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ) . (1; − 2
f ( x ) = x − 3x + 2
2
.c
(2ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ :
1
aﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ . F . y = −ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
ik
2
ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Taﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝـ ) ( Pﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ 3
ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ . ; 0
ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . a 2
aw
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻡ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ aﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻴﺸﻤل ) (Taﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺭﺍﺴﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ) ( D ) ، ( C f (1
ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﺕ ﻝـ ) ( Pﻭﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A ﻭﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . F
ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . M 0 (2ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( C fﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ x0ﺘﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ
3
،
af
2
(1ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ xﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ 53
H 0ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝـ M 0ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( Dﻭ A0
ﺒـ P ( x ) = x 3 − 3 x 2 + 3 x − 3 :
ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ FH 0
ot
0, 2
f ( x) < − [ ]2 ; 2, 2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . y=−
1
ﻴﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
( x − 2)2 4
w
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺩﺩ a > 0ﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ ﺏ( f 51ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺤﻴﺙ f ( x ) = x 2 :؛
[ ]2 ; 2 + aﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . f ( x) < −5 1
= ) g ( x؛
gﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ ℝﺤﻴﺙ :
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Mﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ،ﻫل ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺕ( x
hﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [ 0; +ﺤﻴﺙ . h ( x ) = x :
b > 0ﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل [f ( x ) < − M : x ∈ ]2; 2 + b
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻋﻤﺭ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻜل ﺭﺴﻡ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﻭﺍل
-ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ] ]2;5ﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ
h ، g ، fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ 4ﻭﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ:
ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
107
5
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
om
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ x 0ﺃﻭ ﺇﻝﻰ ∞ +ﺃﻭ ﺇﻝﻰ ∞. −
ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ x 0ﺃﻭ ﺇﻝﻰ ∞ +ﺃﻭ ﺇﻝﻰ ∞. −
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻨﺎﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ aﺤﻴﺙ aﺤﺩ ﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ.
.c
ﺍﻝﺘﻔﺴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ . x 0
ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺸﺭﻁ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﺤﺩ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ.
ik
ﺘﺒﺭﻴﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻌﻠﻭﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ.ﺍﻝﺒﺤﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻤﺎﺌل.
aw
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻴﺔ) ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ،ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ،ﺍﻝﻤﻘﻠﻭﺏ ﻭ ﺤﺎﺼل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ( ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ.
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺒﺈﺯﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ.
af
y
ot
.m
w
1
w
109
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 5
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
1
= )f ( x ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − { 3ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
)( x − 3
2
.1ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) f ′ ( xﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
.2ﺃﻜﻤل ،ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ،ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ:
om
x 2.9 2.99 2.999 2.9999 3.0001 3.001 3.01 3.1
)f ( x
.3ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟
.4ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ f ( x ) ≥ 108ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ xﻋﻨﺼﺭﺍ ﻤﻥ 3 − 10 ;3 ∪ 3;3 + 10
−4 −4
.c
1 1
x ∈ 3 − ;3 ∪ 3;3 + .5ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ Aﻴﻜﻭﻥ f ( x) ≥ Aﻝﻤﺎ
A A
ik
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
1
aw
= )g ( x ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − { 1ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
x −1
.1ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) g ′ ( xﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . g
.2ﺃﻜﻤل ،ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ،ﺠﺩﻭﻝﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﻴﻥ:
af
x 0.9 0.99 0.999 0.9999 x 1.0001 1.001 1.01 1.1
)g ( x )g ( x
ot
.3ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟
.4ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ:
.m
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x ∈ 1;1 + 10−10 ﻓﺈﻥ g ( x) ≥ 1010ﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x ∈ 1 − 10−10 ;1ﻓﺈﻥ g ( x ) ≤ −1010
.5ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ : A
1 1
w
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
w
110
5 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − { 0ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
2x +1
= ) h( x
x
b
aﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ. ﺤﻴﺙ h( x ) = a + .1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ
x
om
.2ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) h′ ( xﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . h
.3ﺃﻜﻤل ﺠﺩﻭﻝﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﻴﻥ:
x −10 −103 −105 −107 x 10 103 105 107
.c
) h( x ) h( x
ik
.4ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟
.5ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ:
aw
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x ≥ 106ﻓﺈﻥ h( x) ∈ 2 ; 2 + 10−6 ﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x ≤ −106ﻓﺈﻥ h( x) ∈ 2; 2 − 106
.6ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ eﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ Bﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x ≥ Bﻓﺈﻥ ] h( x) ∈ ] 2; 2 + e
af
.7ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ eﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ Bﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x ≤ − Bﻓﺈﻥ [ h( x) ∈ [ 2 − e ; 2
ot
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺨﺎﻤﺱ
.m
x2 − x − 2
= )f ( x ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − { 2ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
x−2
w
.7ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟
ﺒﺴﻁ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ )f ( x x2 − x − 2 .8ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﺤﻠﻴل ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ
.9ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ eﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ αﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
0 ≤ f ( x) − 3 < e ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ 0 < x − 2 < α
111
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 5
ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ
y
.1ﺃﻤــﺜــﻠﺔ
6
5
4
ﻤﺜﺎل :1ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − { 3ﺒﹻ :
1
3 = ) ) f ( xﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻭل (
)( x − 3
2
2
1
ﻴﺒﻴﻥ ﻝﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺃﻥ ) f ( xﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺸﺭﻴﻁﺔ ﺃﻥ
om
ﻴﺄﺨﺫ xﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻗﺭﻴﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 3ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻲ.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 x
-1 ﻨﻘﻭل ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ fﻫﻲ ∞ +ﻋﻨﺩ ) 3ﺃﻭ ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ (3
ﺍﻝﺸﻜل1 ∞lim f ( x) = + ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ:
x →3
.c
y ﻤﺜﺎل :2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ gﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − { 1ﺒﹻ :
3
1
) ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ( = )g ( x
ik
2 x −1
1
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ g1ﻭ g 2ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]1; +ﻭ [ ]−∞;1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
ﺤﻴﺙg1 ( x ) = g 2 ( x ) = g ( x ) :
aw
-2 -1 0 1 2 3
ﻴﺒﻴﻥ ﻝﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺃﻥ ) g1 ( xﻴﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺸﺭﻴﻁﺔ ﺃﻥ
x
-1
ﻴﺄﺨﺫ xﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻗﺭﻴﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻭﻤﻨﻪlim g1 ( x ) = +∞ :
-2 x →1
af
ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﺒﻴﻥ ﻝﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺃﻥ ) ( g 2 ( x) < 0 ) g 2 ( xﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ
-3
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺸﺭﻴﻁﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ xﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻗﺭﻴﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 1ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻭﻤﻨﻪ:
ot
ﺍﻝﺸﻜل2 ∞ . lim g1 ( x ) = −ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ gﻫﻲ ∞ +ﻋﻨﺩ 1ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺃﻥ
x →1
ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) gﺍﻝﺸﻜل ( 2ﻴﻘﺘﺭﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . x = 1ﻨﻘﻭل ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ
w
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x = 3ﻫﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x = 1ﻫﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . g
( C fﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ aﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ. ) ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ) ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻴﺴﺎﺭ ( ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ aﻫﻲ ∞ +ﺃﻭ ∞ −ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
. (C f ) ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x = aﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
112
5 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
( C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ. ) 1
f ( x ) = −1 +ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ −2; −1[ ∪ ]−1;0ﺒﹻ:
)( x + 1
2
(C f؟ ) .1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ) . ( −1ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
. (C f ) .2ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) f ′ ( xﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
1
limﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ∞ . lim f ( x) = +ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺤــل (1 :ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ∞= +
x →−1 x →−1 ( x + 1)2
. (C f ) ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x = −1ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
om
2
f ′( x) = − (2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ ] [ −2; −1[ ∪ ]−1;0ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
)( x + 1
3
y
x −2 −1 0
.c
7
∞+∞ +
5
ik
4
)f ( x
3
0 0
aw
2
1
. (C f ) .2ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) f ′ ( xﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
ﺤــل:
.m
1 1
، lim limﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ∞f ( x ) = − = +∞ ، lim .1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ∞= −
x
x<0
→0 x
x>0
→0 x x
x<0
→0 x
. (C f ) .ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x = 0ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ lim ∞f ( x) = +
x →0
w
x>0
1
f ′( x) = − .2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ ] [ −1;0[ ∪ ]0;1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
x2
w
y
4
x −1 0 1
)f ′( x - -
3
w
2
0 ∞+
1
)f ( x
-1
-1
0 1 x
∞− 2
-2
113
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 5
5
ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻤﺎﻻﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ
y
6
.1ﻤــﺜــﺎل
5 ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − { 0ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
1
) ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﺒﻊ ( h( x ) = 2 +
4
x
3
ﻴﺒﻴﻥ ﻝﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻷﻭل ﺃﻥ ) h( xﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻗﺭﻴﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2
ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺸﺭﻴﻁﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ xﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺠﺩ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ.
om
2
ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﺒﻴﻥ ﻝﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ) h( xﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻗﺭﻴﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2
.c
-1
ik
lim h( x) = 2 ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ:
∞x →−
6
1
5
= MP ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ MP = f ( x ) − 2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
4
x
.m
ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ:
3
M 1
2 lim = 0ﻓﺈﻥ MPﻴﺅﻭل ﺇﻝﻰ 0ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞+
P x →+∞ x
1
0 1 2 x 3 4 5 6 7 8 x ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = 2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( Chﻋﻨﺩ ∞. +
w
ﻤﻥ ﺨﻼل ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ ﻤﻤﺎﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل
w
114
5
ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
( C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ. ) 1
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − { 0ﺒﹻ:
f ( x) = −2 +ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
x2
(C f؟ ) .3ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻔﻬﺎ .ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
. (C f ) .4ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) f ′ ( xﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
ﺤــل:
. (C f ) ∞ . lim f ( x) = +ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x = 0ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ .1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
x →0
om
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ lim f ( x) = −2ﻭ . lim f ( x) = −2ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = −2
∞x →− ∞x →+
y
6 ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ +ﻭﻋﻨﺩ ∞− ) ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
2
f ′( x) = − .2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ } ℝ − { 0ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
5
.c
4 x3
3 x ∞− 0 ∞+
)f ′( x + -
ik
2
∞+∞ +
1
2x −1
( C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ. ) = ) f ( xﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − { − 1ﺒﹻ:
x +1
ot
( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞+ ) ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = 2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
.m
ﺤــل:
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ -1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
w
ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = 2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞+
−3
lim ( f ( x) − 2) = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ lim f ( x) = 2 ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭ ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ = 0
lim
∞x →− ∞x →− x →−∞ x + 1
( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞− ) ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = 2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
115
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 5
ﻤﻔﻬﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ
ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺎﺭﻴﻑ
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ x0ﻫﻲ lﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ، eﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:1
0 ≤ f ( x) − l < e ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ αﺒﺤﻴﺙ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ 0 < x − x0 < α
ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏlim f ( x) = l :
x → x0
om
0 < x − x0 < αﺘﻌﻨﻲ [ x ∈ ] x0 − α ; x0 [ ∪ ] x0 ; x0 + α ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:
0 ≤ f ( x) − l < eﺘﻌﻨﻲ [f ( x ) ∈ ]l − e; l + e
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ +ﻫﻲ lﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ، eﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:2
.c
0 ≤ f ( x) − l < e ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ Bﺒﺤﻴﺙ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x > B
ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏlim f ( x) = l :
ik
∞x →+
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:3
aw
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ +ﻫﻲ ∞ +ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ، Aﻴﻭﺠﺩ
f ( x) > Α ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ Bﺒﺤﻴﺙ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x > B
ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏlim f ( x ) = +∞ :
∞x →+
af
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻫﻲ ∞ +ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ، Aﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:4
ot
f ( x) > Α ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ Bﺒﺤﻴﺙ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x < − B
ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏlim f ( x ) = +∞ :
∞x →−
.m
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ x0ﺒﻘﻴﻡ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻫﻲ ∞ +ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:5
f ( x) > A ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ، Aﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ αﺒﺤﻴﺙ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ 0 < x − x0 < α
w
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ x0ﺒﻘﻴﻡ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻫﻲ ∞ +ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:6
w
f ( x) > A ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ، Aﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ αﺒﺤﻴﺙ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ 0 < x0 − x < α
lim ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏf ( x) = +∞ :
x
x< x
→ x0
0
ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻙ ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺎﺭﻴﻑ ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺩﺃ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ . ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:
116
5 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻf ( x) = 2 x + 1 :
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥlim f ( x) = 3 :
x →1
ﺤــل:
ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ، eﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ lim f ( x) = 3 ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ
x →1
om
0 ≤ f ( x) − 3 < e ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ αﺒﺤﻴﺙ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ 0 < x − 1 < α
ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻝﻴﻜﻥ eﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ0 ≤ f ( x) − 3 < e :
0 ≤ 2x − 2 < e ﻴﻜﺎﻓﺊ 0 ≤ (2 x + 1) − 3 < eﺃﻱ 0 ≤ f ( x) − 3 < e
.c
0≤ 2 x−2 <e ﺃﻱ 0 ≤ 2( x − 2) < e ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ
e
< 0≤ x−2 ﻨﺠﺩ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ
ik
2
e
0 ≤ f ( x) − 3 < e ﻓﺈﻥ < 0≤ x−2 ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ
2
aw
e e
≤( α = ) αﺃﻭ ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ 0 ≤ f ( x) − 3 < eﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﺨﺫ
2 2
lim f ( x) = 3 ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺇﺫﻥ
x →1
af
x
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥlim g ( x) = +∞ :
x
x >0
→0
.m
ﺤــل:
ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ، Aﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ∞lim g ( x) = + ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ
x
x >0
→0
w
g ( x) > A ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ αﺒﺤﻴﺙ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ 0 < x < α
ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Aﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﺒﺤﻴﺙg ( x) > A :
w
1 1
<0< x أي > A > 0
g ( x) > A
A x
w
1
< 0 < xن g ( x) > A و إذا آن
A
1
=α ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ g ( x ) > Aﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﺨﺫ
A
∞lim g ( x) = + ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺇﺫﻥ
x
x>0
→0
117
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 5
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ
.1ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ
ﻴﺘﻡ ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻤﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﺤﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻔﻬﺎ. •
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ aﻤﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ ). lim f ( x) = f (a •
x→a
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺒﻠﺕ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ a •
ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺘﻘﺒل ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻨﺫﻜﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺴﺒﻴل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﺎل •
om
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x → sin x :ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺘﻘﺒل ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞. +
.c
• ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ:
)lim f ( x l∈ℝ l∈ℝ l∈ℝ
x→a ∞+ ∞+ ∞−
ik
)lim g ( x l′ ∈ ℝ
x→a ∞+ ∞− ∞+ ∞− ∞−
) )lim ( f ( x) + g ( x ﺡﻉﺕ
x→a l + l′
aw
∞+ ∞− ∞+ ∞−
• ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ:
)lim f ( x l∈ℝ l >0 l >0 l<0 l<0 0 0
x→a ∞+ ∞+ ∞−
af
)lim g ( x l′ ∈ ℝ
x→a ∞+ ∞− ∞+ ∞− ∞+ ∞− ∞− ∞+ ∞−
) )lim ( f ( x) × g ( x l × l′ ﺡﻉﺕ ﺡﻉﺕ
x→a ∞+ ∞− ∞− ∞+ ∞+ ∞− ∞+
ot
lim 0 0 ∞+ ∞− ∞− ∞+ ﻉ ﻉ ﻉ ﻉ
)x→a g ( x
l′
ﺕ ﺕ ﺕ ﺕ
w
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺒﺤﺎﻻﺕ "ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ "
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺭﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻf ( x ) = 2 x 2 + x :
w
118
5
ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
om
∞lim (−5 x + 3) = − ﻭ ∞lim 2 x 2 = + ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ +ﻷﻥ •
∞x →+ ∞x →+
.c
∞lim f ( x) = + ﻓﺈﻥ lim 1 − ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ∞ lim 2 x 2 = +ﻭ + 2 = 1
∞x →+ ∞x →+
2x 2x ∞x →+
ik
x2 + x + 1
= )g ( x ﻝﺘﻜﻥ gﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]−∞; −1[ ∪ ]−1; +ﺒﹻ:
x +1
aw
1
g ( x) = x + .1ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ [∞ ]−∞; −1[ ∪ ]−1; +ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
x +1
.2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻔﻬﺎ.
af
ﺤــل:
x ( x + 1) + 1 x + x + 1
2
= ). g ( x = .1ﺒﺘﻭﺤﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﻤﺎﺕ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ:
x +1 x +1
ot
1
limﻓﺈﻥ ∞lim g ( x) = − • .2ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ∞ lim x = −ﻭ = 0
∞x →− x →−∞ x + 1 ∞x →−
.m
1
limﻓﺈﻥ ∞lim g ( x) = + • ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ∞ lim x = +ﻭ = 0
∞x →+ x →+∞ x + 1 ∞x →+
1
ﻓﺈﻥ ∞lim g ( x) = − lim • ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ lim x = −1ﻭ ∞= −
x →−1 x →−1 x + 1 x →−1
w
1
ﻓﺈﻥ ∞lim g ( x) = + lim • ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ lim x = −1ﻭ ∞= +
x
x > −1
→−1 x
x > −1
→−1 x + 1 x
x > −1
→ −1
w
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ :ﻜﺎﻥ ﺒﺎﻹﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ) g ( xﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ [∞ ]−∞; −1[ ∪ ]−1; +ﻭ x ≠ 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل:
1 1
w
119
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 5
om
2
1 1
1 M = (∆) : y ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻜﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﺒﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ x −
P 2 2
-1 0 1 x 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 x ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( C fﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ xﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ P
.c
ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) ∆ ( ﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ ). xﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل (
1 1 1 1
lim =0 = MPﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ MP = f ( x ) − x − ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
ik
∞x →+ x x 2 2
ﻓﺈﻥ MPﻴﺅﻭل ﺇﻝﻰ 0ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞ . +ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻴﻘﺘﺭﺏ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞. +
aw
( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞. + ) 1 1
ﻨﻘﻭل ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ( ∆ ) : y = x −ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
2 2
( C fﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔy = ax + b : ) ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:
af
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ ) +ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞ ( −ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ:
) lim f ( x) − ( ax + b ) = 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ( lim f ( x) − ( ax + b ) = 0
ot
ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻓﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = ax + b :ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞. +
w
( C fﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ∞ −ﻭ ∞. + ) ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = −2 x + 3ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
120
5
ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
3
f ( x) = − x + 2 + ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] − ∞ ;3 [ ∪ ] 3; +ﺒﹻ:
x−3
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ .ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = − x + 2
( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞+ ) ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ( ∆ ) : y = ax + bﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞) +ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞( − ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ:
om
ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) lim f ( x) − ( ax + b ) = 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ( lim f ( x) − ( ax + b ) = 0
∞x →− ∞x →+
.c
ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = − x + 2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞+
ik
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 2
2 x2 − 3x + 3
= ) g ( xﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Cgﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] − ∞ ;1 [ ∪ ] 1; +ﺒﹻ:
aw
x −1
c
g ( x) = ax + b + .1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ b ، aﻭ cﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ : 1
x −1
) ( Cgﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ) ∆ ( .2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) ( Cgﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻤﺎﺌﻼ ) ∆ ( ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ .ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ
af
ﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( Cgﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ( ∆ ) : y = ax + bﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ:
ot
c
ax + b +ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ −a + b = −3 : ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ،ﻤﻥ ﻜل xﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ = g ( x) ،1
−b + c = 3 x − 1
w
2
g ( x) = 2 x − 1 + ﻨﺠﺩ b = −1 ، a = 2ﻭ c = 2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ : 1
x −1
w
limﻭ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ( ∆ ) : y = 2 x − 1ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﹻ ) ( Cgﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞. +
2
.2ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ = 0
x →+∞ x − 1
2
= )g ( x ) − ( 2 x − 1 ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ :1
x −1
• ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل [ g ( x) − ( 2 x − 1) < 0 ، x ∈ ] − ∞ ;1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻴﻘﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( Cgﺘﺤﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ (
)∆( ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل [ ∞ g ( x ) − ( 2 x − 1) > 0 ، x ∈ ] 1; +ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻴﻘﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C gﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ •
121
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 5
om
∞x →+
.c
x x x x
)f ( x b 1
lim ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ lim × g ( x) = 0ﻭ lim = 0ﻓﺈﻥ = a
ik
∞x →+ x x ∞→+ x x ∞→+ x
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ f ( x) − ax = g ( x) + bﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ lim g ( x) = 0ﻓﺈﻥ lim [ f ( x ) − ax ] = b
∞x →+ ∞x →+
aw
ﺍﻝﺨﻼﺼﺔ :1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ( a ≠ 0 ) y = ax + b :ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞+
)f ( x
limﻭ lim [ f ( x ) − ax ] = b ﻓﺈﻥ = a
∞x →+ ∞x →+ x
)f ( x
limﻭ lim [ f ( x ) − ax ] = b
af
=a .2ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ:
∞x →+ x ∞x →+
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺍﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ lim f ( x) − ( ax + b ) = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = ax + b :ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ
∞x →+
ot
( a ≠ 0 ) y = ax + b ( C fﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ: ) ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ:
w
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ ) +ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞ ( −ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
w
lim [ f ( x) − ax ] = b
)f ( x
ﻭ lim =a
∞x →+ ∞x →+ x
)f ( x
limﻭ ( lim [ f ( x ) − ax ] = b ) ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ = a
∞x →− ∞x →− x
122
5 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
x + 3x − 3
3 2
= )f ( x ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]−∞; −1[ ∪ ]−1;1[ ∪ ]1; +ﺒﹻ:
x2 −1
( C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ. ) ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻔﻬﺎ.
. (C f ) .2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
ﺤــل:
om
3 3 3 3
x3 1 + − 3 1+ − 3
lim f ( x) = lim × = lim x
x x x x • .1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
2 1 1
∞x →− ∞x →− x ∞→−
x 1 − 2 1− 2
.c
x x
1 3 3
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ lim 1 + − 3 = 1 :ﻭ lim 1 − 2 = 1ﻭ ∞ lim x = −ﻓﺈﻥ ∞lim f ( x) = −
∞x →− ∞x →− ∞x →−
x ∞x →−
x x
ik
ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥlim f ( x) = +∞ :
∞x →+
1 1
(x )
lim
aw
= )f ( x lim 3
+ 3x2 − 3 • ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
x
x < −1
→−1 x
x < −1
→−1
x −1 x + 1
1 1
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥlim ( x 3 + 3x 2 − 3) = −1 :
1
lim x ﻭ ∞ = −
lim x ﻭ = −
x
x < −1
→− 1
x +1 x < −1
→− 1
x −1 2 x < −1
→−1
af
lim ﻓﺈﻥ ∞f ( x) = −
x
x < −1
→−1
lim f ( x) = +∞ ، lim f ( x ) = −∞ ، lim ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥf ( x) = +∞ :
ot
x
x >1
→1 x
x <1
→1 x
x > −1
→ −1
• .2ﻤﻥ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻠﺫﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ:
.m
123
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 5
ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ
ﺘﻤﻬﻴﺩ
ﺒﻌﺩ ﻤﺎ ﺘﻁﺭﻗﻨﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺘﻡ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ
ﻭ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻁﺭﻕ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻝﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﻲ ﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺃَﻀﺤﻰ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻥ ﺠﺩﺍ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ
om
ﻭ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ .ﻨﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ﻤﺨﻁﻁﺎ ﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﺠﺭﺍﺀ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺠﺯﺌﻲ ﻋل ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺡ
ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﻝﻐﺎﺀ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺍﺤل ﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﺭﻭﺴﺔ.
.c
ik
.1ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ
ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻝﻡ ﺘﻜﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺃﻋﻁﻴﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﺹ. •
aw
ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺸﻔﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﻴﺘﻬﺎ ) ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ( ﻗﺼﺩ ﺘﻘﻠﻴﺹ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ •
ﻭ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﻤﺭﺍﻜﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ.
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻘﺒل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ •
ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ. •
.m
ﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺨﻼل ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻨﺫﻜﺭ ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ •
ﻭ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ.
ﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻤﻁﻠﻭﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﺹ. •
ﺍﺴﺘﻐﻼل ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺇﻥ ﻭﺠﺩﺕ. •
124
5 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
( )
= ) f (xﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ . O ; i ; j
1
sin x
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fا
ا
ا
ِـ:
π
= xﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ .1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ . fﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺸﻔﻌﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﻴﺘﻬﺎ .ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
2
π
ﻝﹻ ) . (C fﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . 0;
2
π
. (C f )
om
limﺜﻡ ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . 0; ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ>
.2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) f (x
2 x →0
ﺤــل:
• .1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ } D f = ℝ − { k π / k ∈ ℤﻷﻥ sin x = 0 :ﻴﻜﺎﻓﺊ x = k πﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ
.c
• ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻜﻭﻥ D fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ 0ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ sin ( − x ) = − sin x : x
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ − x ∈ D f : D fﻭ ) . f ( − x ) = −f ( xﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﺭﺩﻴﺔ.
ik
• ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ sin x :ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻴﺔ 2πﺩﻭﺭ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺩﻭﺭﻴﺔ ﻭ 2πﺩﻭﺭ ﻝﻬﺎ.
π π
(
• ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎ ﺠﺩﻴﺩﺍ Ω; i , jﺤﻴﺙ Ω , 0 ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻫﻲ x = X + :ﻭ y = Y )
2 2
aw
π
ﻷﻥ sin + X = cos X
2
= Y
1
cos X
( )
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (C fﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ Ω; i , jﻫﻲ:
π 1
֏ Xﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺯﻭﺠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x = :ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻝﹻ ) . (C f ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺍﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ ا ا:
af
2 cos X
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ 2πﺩﻭﺭ ﻝﹻ fﻨﻜﺘﻔﻲ ﺒﺩﺭﺍﺴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻁﻭﻝﻬﺎ 2πﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ [ ]−π ;0[ ∪ ]0; +πﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﺔ ﻨﻘﻠﺹ
ot
>
limﻷﻥsin x = 0+ :>
f (x ) = lim
>
= +∞ .2
→0 x →0 x → 0 sin x
5
y
4
w
3 π
x 0
2 2
w
-4
-5
125
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 5
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . f ′ ( x ) = 3 ( x 2 − 1) :ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ،ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ، xﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ . f
om
ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ .0ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C f
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −1; + 1
.c
ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻴﺨﺘﺭﻕ ﻤﻤﺎﺴﻪ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ .0ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ،ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻨﻌﻁﺎﻑ
ik
aw ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C f
ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) f ( −2ﻭ ) f ( 2ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﻭ ) (C fﻤﺤﺩﺩﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) ( −1;3ﻭ ). (1; − 1
( )
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ Ωﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ) . ( 0;1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (C fﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ Ω ; i ; jﻫﻲY = X 3 − 3X :
ﺜﻡ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ g : X ֏ X 3 − 3Xﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﺔ .ﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ؟
af
ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻓﻲ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻓﻭﺍﺼﻠﻬﺎ ﺒﹻ β ، α :ﻭ . γ
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ f (0) = 1ﻭ f (1) = −1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . f ( 0 ) × f (1) < 0ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ αﻴﺤﻘﻕ. 0 < α < 1 :
ot
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ βﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ 0.1ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﺼﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . β
.2ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ
ﻨﻌﺘﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]−∞ ; +ﺒﹻf (x ) = x 3 + 3x 2 − 4 :
w
( )
(C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i ; j ) ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
w
126
5 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﻴﺔ
.1ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:
ax + b
֏ xﺤﻴﺙ c ، b ، aﻭ dﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﻴﺔ ﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل:
cx + d
ﻤﻊ c ≠ 0ﻭ ad − bc ≠ 0
om
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ c = 0ﻭ d ≠ 0؟
ﻓﺴﺭ ﻝﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻴﻔﺭﺽ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻁ . ad − bc ≠ 0
ad − bc
= ) f ′(x ﻋﻴﻥ D fﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ : D f
) (cx + d
2
.c
.2ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل
2x − 1
ik
= ) f (x ﻨﻌﺘﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ:
x −1
( )
(C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i ; j ) ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
aw
ﻋﻴﻥ D fﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
b
f (x ) = a + ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ aﻭ bﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ : D f
x −1
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ . D fﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ
af
(C fﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ .ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ
ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ. y = − x :ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻫﺩﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f
.m
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) . Ω ( 1; 2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Ωﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f
.3ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ
w
(C fﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ .ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f ) ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f
ax + b
֏ xﻤﻊ c ≠ 0ﻭ ad − bc ≠ 0 ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل:
cx + d
a d
ﻗﻁﻌﺎ ﺯﺍﺌﺩﺍ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﺎ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ x = − :ﻭ = y
c c
127
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 5
( )
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O ; i ; jﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) C ( 0; 2 ) ، B ( −1; 0 ) ، A ( −1; 2ﻭ ) M ( x ;0ﺤﻴﺙ . x < −1
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AMﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . N
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ xﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Nﻭ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ CAN ، OMNﻭ . ABM
( )
f (x ) = −ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i ; j
x2
x +1
.2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fا
ا
ا
[ ِ ]−∞ ; − 1ـ:
• ! ا % &'()* +,- OMNا$اد ا " b ، aو 4,5 " cن * %أ +1آ]−∞ ; − 1 [ %* x +
om
c
f (x ) = ax + b +
x +1
أدرس −1 ) f 6!5(78و ) ∞ . −أدرس >=ات 1 +,@ A ]−∞ ; − 1 [ fول >=ا>.(7 •
( * % !* +C 5 (C fر ( D1 ) %و ) 5"> &E5 ( D 2ه( .أر' آ ( D 2 ) ، ( D1 ) %* Fو ) . (C f >" Bأن ) •
.c
(* .3ه x G 6ا
!4,> 6ن * %أ H(* (71ا
OMNأ%,5 (* =M؟ أ JK) &Hه Iا
(.H
ik
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AM
.1ﺒﻔﺭﺽ ) N ( 0; αﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ N
ﻭ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺜﻼ ﺸﺭﻁ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻝﺨﻁﻲ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ AMﻭ AN
aw
2x
=α ﻨﺠﺩ:
x +1
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻤﺯﻨﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ CAN ، OMNﻭ ABMﺒﹻ:
af
a2 ، a1ﻭ a3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻭﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻨﺠﺩ:
1 x2
a2 = −ﻭ a3 = −x − 1 ، a1 = −
x +1 x +1
ot
y 1
f ( x ) = −x + 1 − ﻨﺠﺩ:
6 x +1
)x ( x + 2
f ′(x ) = − ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل : ]−∞ ; − 1 [ %* x
w
)( x + 1
2
5
4
)f ′( x - 0 +
3
∞+ ∞+
w
128
5 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
1 2
= ) f (x x +1+ f .1ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ D = ]2; +ﺒﹻ:
2 x −2
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ.
ﺍ( ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ Dﺜﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) (C fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ
) ∆ ( ﻭ ) ( ∆′ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ.
ﺏ(ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ . fﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ ﺜﻡ ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ) ∆ ( ٍ ( ∆′ ) ،ﻭ ) . (C f
.2ﻤﺜﻠﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁﺎ ) ( Γﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﻪ ، hﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﻪ r
om
ﻭ ﻤﺤﻴﻁﺎ ﺒﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 1ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ H ، I ، O ، A
ﻭ Jﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ ) (OI ) ⊥ ( AJﻭ ) . ( AH ) ⊥ ( HJ
1
ﻨﻀﻊ ) g ( h ) = V ( hﺤﻴﺙ ) V ( hﻫﻭ ﺤﺠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ) . ( Γﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ h > 2
.c
2
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) V ( hﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ hﺜﻡ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل 1ﻋﻴﻥ hﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ) V ( hﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ.
ik
1
'0 1203رب ِـ ) (C f . limﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x = 2 limﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ∞f ( x ) = +
→2 x − 2
= +∞ .1
aw x →2 >
x
>
x 2
) f ′(x - 0 +
∞+ ∞+
) f (x
w
1
.2ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ﻴﺤﻴﻁ ﺒﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﻪ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻀﺭﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . h > 2
w
129
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 5
om
.1ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ BMN
ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ BNﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . x
.c
x2
= ) f (x ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ BMNﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ ) . f ( xﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
)2 ( x + 1
ik
.2ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺩﻭل
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Cﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ.
aw ﻤﺜل ) (Cﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ.
ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺒﻘﻴﻡ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻭﻀﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺃﺴﻔﻠﻪ.
af
ot
.m
w
130
5 ا
!(ر%5
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ +ﻭ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) (C fﻴﻘﺒل 9 أ
أم
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 5ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
3
ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = − :ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ ...
2 1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ x
3 2
f ( x ) = − x (1 > ) f ( xﻓﺈﻥ lim f ( x ) = 0 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x > 0ﻭ
2 ∞x →+ x
lim f ( x) = −∞ (2 ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ x 2
3
x →−
3 3
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x > 0ﻭ 1 − ≤ f ( x ) ≤ 1 +ﻓﺈﻥ
2
3
(3
lim f ( x) = − x x
∞x →+
2 lim f ( x ) = 1
om
∞x →+
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 10ﺇﻝﻰ 12
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ x 3
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻔﻬﺎ
5 5
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x > 0ﻭ 1 + ≤ f ( x ) ≤ 2 +ﻓﺈﻥ
x x
10 1 ≤ lim f ( x ) ≤ 2
.c
∞x →+
∞− -1 2 ∞+ 4ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ lim f ( x ) = −2ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ
x ∞x →−
ik
)f '( x + 0 - 0 +
)f ( x 0 1 fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {1ﺤﻴﺙ: 5
∞− -3
aw g ( x) = x + 2 +
4x
f ( x) = x + 2 −ﻭ
4
x −1 x −1
11 ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆( ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = x + 2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻤﺎﺌل
ﻝـ ) (C fﻭ ﻝـ ) (C g
∞− 0 ∞+
af
x
ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
)f '( x - -
2 ∞+ ﺇﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ
)f ( x
ot
lim f ( x) = ...
∞x →−
x -2 0 1 ∞+ 0 (3 2 (2 −
1
(1
4
+ 0 + +
w
x+2
k ، h ، g ، fﺩﻭﺍل ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 13 ) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ:
[∞ . ]−∞; −1[ ∪ ]−1; +ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ :
w
131
ا
!(ر%5 5
3 ﺃﻨﺴﺏ ﻝﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ
f 14ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺤﻴﺙf ( x) = − x + 1 :
5 y
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ 2
1
lim f ( x) (2 lim f ( x) (1
x →0 x→2
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 x
-1
lim f ( x) (4 lim f ( x) (3
∞x →+ ∞x →− -2
f 15ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺤﻴﺙf ( x) = x :
2 -3
-4
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ -5
lim f ( x) (2 lim f ( x) (1
om
-6
x →3 x →−3
.c
4
lim f ( x) (2 lim f ( x) (1 3
∞x →+ ∞x →−
2
lim f ( x) (4 lim f ( x) (3
ik
x→ 3 x →1 1
lim
>
f ( x ) (6 lim
<
f ( x ) (5 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5
x → 0 x → 0 -1
f 17ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [ 0; +ﺤﻴﺙf ( x) = x :
aw -2
-3
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
-4
lim f ( x) (2 lim f ( x) (1
x →3 x →0
af
lim f ( x) (4 lim f ( x) (3
∞x →+ x →9
y
18ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ aﻓﻲ ﻜل 2
1
ot
4x + 3
= )a = 0 ; f ( x (4
2 x2 y
w
3x 6
a = −2 ; f ( x ) = 2 (5
x −4 5
x +1 4
a = 1 ; f ( x) = 2 (6
w
3
2x + x − 3
2
19ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞ −ﺜﻡ 1
ﺇﻝﻰ ∞ +ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
-7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
f ( x ) = − x 3 + 1 (2 f ( x ) = x 2 − 3 x + 1 ( 1 -1
-2
f ( x) = 10−3 x 2 + 4 (4 f ( x) = 2 x3 + 4 x − 2 (3 -3
f ( x) = x 7 − 15 x5 (6 f ( x) = − x 4 + 2 x3 − x (5 -4
-5
132
5 ا
!(ر%5
1 20ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞−
f ( x ) = x + x (2 = )f ( x + 1 (1
x
1 1 ﺜﻡ ﺇﻝﻰ ∞ +ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
= )f ( x − 3 (4 f ( x) = − x (3
x x 5 x3 − 1 x2 + 2 x − 1
= )f ( x = ) (2 f ( x (1
= )f ( x
1
− 3 (6 = )f ( x
1
(5 2x − 3 x3 + 1
x +1 x+2
2x2 + x −1 −2 x 2
1 = )f ( x ( 4 f ( x ) = (3
−2 − x2 − x2 − 3 2 x3 + 5x 2 − 1
1
f ( x) = x (8 f ( x) = 2 (7
1
+1 x +3 fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ .ﺍﺤﺴﺏ )lim g ( x) ، lim f ( x 21
∞x →+ ∞x →+
om
x
1 ﻭ ) lim ( f + g )( xﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
−4 ∞x →+
1
f ( x) = x (10 f ( x) = x 2 + 1 (9
2 x f ( x ) = 2 x − 1 (1ﻭ g ( x ) = − x
2
+1
x
f ( x ) = x 2 + 3 (2ﻭ g ( x ) = − x 2
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) lim f ( xﻭ ﺃﻜﹼﺩ ﺇﻥ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ 25
.c
∞x →−
1
fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﹰﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل f ( x) = x +ﻭ g ( x) = −3 x (3
x
ik
1
f ( x ) = x 3 − x + (2 f ( x ) = x 2 + 2 x − 3 (1 f ( x ) = 2 x 2 + x − 1 (4ﻭ g ( x ) = − x 3 + 2 x + 4
x
1 1 x 22ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) lim g ( x) ، lim f ( xﻭ )lim ( f × g )( x
f ( x ) = 1 + + 2 (4 = )f ( x
aw
(3 ∞x →+ ∞x →+ ∞x →+
x x x
2x 1 ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
= )f ( x (6 = )f ( x − 1 (5
1 x
1− 2 1
x = )g ( x f ( x ) = x 2 (1ﻭ
af
x
2x + 3
2
−1
= )f ( x (8 f ( x) = 2 (7 1
x+
1 x + 4 = ) f ( xﻭ g ( x) = x (2
x x2
ot
1
f ( x) = ( x − 1) (10 f ( x) = x 2 + 2 (9 1
3
= )g ( x 3
f ( x ) = 2 x 3 + 1 (3ﻭ
x x
26ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) lim f ( xﻭ ﺃﻜﹼﺩ ﺇﻥ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﻘﺒل
.m
1 1
f ( x) = x 2 + (2 f ( x ) = x + (1 1
x2 x = )g ( x f ( x ) = x (1ﻭ
x −1 1 x
w
ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ) lim f ( xﻭ ﺃﻜﹼﺩ ﺇﻥ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ
∞x →+
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﹰﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل
133
ا
!(ر%5 5
x2 + 2 x − 1
x2 + 1 = )f ( x (1
= )(∆) : y = x + 1 ; f ( x (3 x2 + 1
x −1
4 x5 − 3x 2
(∆ ) : y = x + 2 ; f ( x ) = x + 1 +
x
(4 = )f ( x (2
x−2 2 x5
32ﺃﻨﺴﺏ ﻝﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ −2 x 4 + x 3 − x + 1
= )f ( x (3
1 1 x4 + 1
g ( x) = 1 − 2 ، f ( x) = 1 − 2x2 + x −1
x x f ( x) = 3 (4
x −1
4
x −1
2 − x + 2x −1
= )، h( x
om
k ( x) = 2 2 x2
x x f ( x) = 4 (5
x −1
3
x −1 x −1
= ) m( x ، l ( x) = 2
x x ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ
y 28ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
.c
5
4 ) ( O; I , J ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ
3
f ( x ) = 3 x 2 − 6 x + 3 (1
ik
2
1 f ( x ) = x 2 − 5 x + 6 (2
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 x 30ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﻼﻨﻬﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
-1
-2 ) (C fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
-3 x+2 2x
= )f ( x (2 = )f ( x (1
w
x
3 2 x + 10
= )f ( x (6 = )f ( x (5
y x−2 x −5
w
2
31ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆(
1
ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻤﺎﺌل ﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 x
-1 ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
-2
x2 + 5x −1
-3 = ) (∆ ) : y = x + 5 ; f ( x (1
-4 x
2
-5
(∆) : y = x − 1 ; f ( x) = x − 1 + (2
x
134
5 ا
!(ر%5
x +1 − 2 y
; x0 = 3 = )f ( x (7 4
( x 2 − 9)2 3
x3 − 1 2
= )x0 = 1 ; f ( x (8
x −1 1
x 2 − 3x + 2
= )x0 = 2 ; f ( x (9 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0
-1
1 2 3 4 5 x
x3 − 8
-2
x +1 − x
= )x0 = 0 ; f ( x (10 -3
x2 − x
om
-4
x +1 − x -5
= )x0 = 1 ; f ( x (11
x2 − x
34ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ fﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞ +ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ
y
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: 1
.c
1 1
f ( x) = 2 − (1 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0
-1
1 2 3 4 5 x
x −1 x −1
-2
x
f ( x ) = −2 x + 3 + 2 (2
ik
-3
x −1 -4
f ( x) = x 2 + 3 + x (3 -5
f ( x) = x + 1 − x (4
aw
f ( x) = 4 x 2 − 3 x − 1 − 2 x (5 5y
1 1
= )f ( x − (6 4
x −1 x −1 3
af
f ( x) = x − 8 x + 16 x − 9 (3
4 3 2
x2 − x
3 ; x0 = 0 = )f ( x (1
f ( x ) = − x 3 − x 2 − 1 (4 3x 2 − x
w
135
ا
!(ر%5 5
42ﺒﺤﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ f
38ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ D = [ 0; +ﺤﻴﺙ :
ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞ −ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞+
f ( x) = x + 3 − x
) ﻓﻲ ﺤﻠﺔ ﻭﺠﻭﺩﻫﺎ (
1 + cos x (1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ Dﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
= )f ( x (1 3
x = )f ( x
x sin x x+3+ x
f ( x) = 2 (2 (2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ : D
x +3
f ( x) = cos x - x (3 3
≤ )0 ≤ f ( x
5 + cos x x
om
= )f ( x (4 (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ fﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞+
x
2 39ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ D = ]0; +ﺤﻴﺙ:
f ( x) = 3 + ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ :
x −1 x+ x
= )f ( x
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ x2 + x + 1
.c
[∞]−∞;1[ ∪ ]1; + f 43ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ (1ﺃﻤﻠﺊ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = 3ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ x 10 4 106 1010 1012 1020 1040
ik
ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ f )f ( x
(2ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ) (Cﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )( D (2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
aw
f 44ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } D = ℝ − {2ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ: x 2 ≤ x 2 + x + 1 ≤ ( x + 1) 2
2x −1 x ≤ x2 + x +1 ≤ x +1 ﻭ
= )f ( x
2− x (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺍﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ aﻭ bﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل
af
1 1
1− ≤ f ( x) ≤ 1 +
f ( x) = a +
b
ﻋﺩﺩ xﻤﻥ Dﻴﻜﻭﻥ: x +1 x
2− x 1 1
ot
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆( ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = −2ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ lim 1 + lim 1 −ﻭ (4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ
∞x →+ x x →+∞ x + 1
ﻝـ ) (Cﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ )lim f ( x
∞x →+
.m
x x
(2ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻲ ﻝـ ) (Cﻭ )∆( . (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ )lim f ( x
∞x →+
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } D = ℝ − {3ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ: 46 f 41ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ D = ]0; +ﺤﻴﺙ
w
2x −12
x 2 + sin x
= )f ( x = )f ( x
x −3 x
(1ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ b ، aﻭ cﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ( (1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ Dﻴﻜﻭﻥ:
c x2 − 1 x2 + 1
f (x ) = ax + b + ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ Dﻴﻜﻭﻥ: ≤ )≤ f ( x
x −3 x x
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆( ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = 2 x + 6 (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ )lim f ( x
∞x →+
ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻤﺎﺌل ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
136
5 ا
!(ر%5
47ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻴﻘﺒل ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ) (d1
(2ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) (Cﻤﻊ ) (dﻭ ﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻻﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ) (d 2ﻭ ) (d3ﻓﻘﻁ ﺤﻴﺙ:
ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ y
7
f 49ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {−2ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ: ) ( d3
6
) (d 2
4 x2 5
g ( x) = x − 2 − = ) f ( xﻭ 4
( x + 2)2 x+2
3
(C f ) (1ﻭ ) (C gﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜﻠﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ g 2
) (d1
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O; i, j 1
om
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) (C fﻭ ) (C gﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 x
-1
)ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺌل ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ(. -2
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) (C fﻭ ) . (C g -3
-4
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ : 50
.c
-5
. f ( x) = x − 3x − 5 x + 4
3 2
aﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ
) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ
(1ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ؟
ik
ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O; i, j
2 x 2 + ax
(1ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f = )f ( x
x2 + x − 2
aw
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) S (1; −3ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C 4x + a
= )g ( x
(3ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) . (C )( x + 2)( x − 1
g (4ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {−1ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
a 1
= )h( x + +1
x + 2 x −1
5
af
g ( x) = −1 + (2ﻋﻴﻥ aﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) (Cﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) (d1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل x = 1
x +1
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Hﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ 48ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ
ﻓﻘﻁ ) (dﻭ )∆( )ﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل (
ot
6
(5ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ) (Cﻭ ) ( Hﻴﺸﻤﻼﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) ، A(0; 4ﺜﻡ ﺍﺩﺭﺱ 5
4
ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) (Cﻭ ) . ( H 3
) (d
(6ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) (Cﻭ ) ( Hﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺘﻴﻥ 2
w
(7ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ) (Cﻭ ) ( Hﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 x
w
-1
f 51ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺤﻴﺙf ( x) = x3 + 3 x : -2
1 -3
ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {0ﺤﻴﺙg ( x) = 5 x − :
w
x -4
-5
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ) (C fﻭ ) (C gﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ g
(1ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل h ، g ، fﻭ . kﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ
) (Cﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ؟
ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O; i, j
2x +1 x+2
(1ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) (C f = )g ( x = )، f ( x
x2 − 1 )2( x + 1
(2ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . g 2x + 1 2x2 + 1
= )k ( x ، h( x) = 2
(3ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺌل ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C g x +1 x −1
137
ا
!(ر%5 5
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ MNﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . x
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (dﺜﻡ ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻲ
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ MNﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞ +؟ ﺇﻝﻰ ∞ −؟
ﻝـ ) . (d ) (C g
(5ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ) (Cﻭ ) . ( P
ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) (C gﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ
(6ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) (Cﻭ ) ( Pﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ .
(4ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) (C fﻭ ) (C gﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ B
54ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O; i, j
1 ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻴﻬﻤﺎ .
.ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﺌﺩ ) ( Hﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ = yﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ
x -ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ) (C fﻭ ) (C gﻴﻘﺒﻼﻥ ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﻥ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ
3 3
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M . A ; − ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Hﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . x ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ.
om
2 2
ﻨﻀﻊ. f ( x) = AM 2 : ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ
(1ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ) f ( xﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . x f 52ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
(2ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f − x2 + x − 1
= )f ( x
.c
1 x
=( x ) ﻻﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ' fﺘﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ
2 ) (Cﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ
(3ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O; i, j
ik
= )g ( x (4ﻝﺘﻜﻥ gﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓf ( x) : - (1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) (Cﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻤﺎﺌﻼ )∆(
-ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . g ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = 1 − x
aw
(5ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ M 1ﻭ M 2ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﺌﺩ ) ( H
-ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻲ ﻝـ ) (Cﻭ )∆( .
ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ x1ﻭ x2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ AM
(2ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻡ )∆( ﻭ ) . (C
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺼﻐﺭﻯ.
m (3ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ mﻋﺩﺩ
af
(6ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝـ ) ( Hﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M 1ﻴﻌﺎﻤﺩ
ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . f ( x) = m
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( AM 1
(4ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = mﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) (Cﻓﻲ
-ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝـ ) ( Hﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M 2ﻴﻌﺎﻤﺩ
ot
4 x
3 ) (Cﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ
ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O; i, j
w
2
1 (1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺯﻭﺠﻴﺔ.
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 x [∞]0; + (2ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ
-1
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) (Cﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
-2
ﻝﻪ.
-3
-4
( P ) (4ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ M . y = x + 2ﻨﻘﻁﺔ
2
138
5 ا
!(ر%5
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C
60ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } D f = ℝ − {−2ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ: (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
2x + 3x + 1
2
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ.
= ) f (x
x +2
(3ﻤﺜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ . -2
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒـ 56
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ b ، aﻭ cﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ
x + cos x
c f ( x) = 2
f ( x) = ax + b + ﻤﻥ : D f x + x +1
x+2
(1ﻋﻴﻥ D fﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
(3ﺠﺩ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻤﺎﺌل ∆ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل
om
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ : D f
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ ∞. +
x −1 x +1
(4ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ∆ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ ∞. − . ≤ f ( x) ≤ 2
x + x +1
2
x + x +1
(5ﺤﺩﺩ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ∆ . (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ )lim f ( x
61ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } D f = ℝ − {−1;1ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
∞x →+
.c
57ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
x3 + 3
f ( x) = 2 x ∞− -3 1 4 ∞+
x −1
ik
)f ( x -1 ∞+ 3
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ c ، b ، aﻭ dﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ
2
c d -2 ∞−
f ( x) = ax + b + + ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ : D f
x −1 x + 1
aw (1ﺃﻋﻁ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻌﻠﻼ ﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C (2ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ،ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻤﻤﻜﻥ ) (C
ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﻜﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ﻝـ ) . (C
-ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺍﻝﺫﻱ 58ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒـ:
af
ﻼ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ
(4ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻤﺎﺌ ﹰ
ﺏ( ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = 2 ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻪ.
-ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ). ( D
w
139
5
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ . ]1; + 66
(2ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ fﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞+
ﻨﻌﻁﻲ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ : f
f 64ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺤﻴﺙ :
x 1 3 ∞+
1 3 1 2 13
= )f ( x x − x − 2x +
)f '( x - 0 + 3 2 12
)f ( x ∞+ ∞+ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ ∞ −ﻭﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ ∞. + (1
5 ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ) f ' ( xﺜﻡ ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ (2
om
2
ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f (3
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل f ( x ) ، x > 1ﺘﻜﺘﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل
b 1
b ، a ، f ( x ) = ax +ﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ I ; 0 ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻝﻠﺭﺴﻡ (4
x −c 2
) ( C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ( )
.c
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ .ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ O ; i ; j
(
. O ;i ; j ) ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x ) = 0 : (5
ik
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) ( C fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f (6
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ .ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . c
aw ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻭﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻠﻭل (7
(2ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) ، f ( xﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . f ( x ) = m
. 6a + b = 5
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ . f ( x ) = x − sin x 65
(3ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) f ' ( xﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ 4a − b = 0
af
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﺔ
(4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) f ( xﻭﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺫﻱ
(2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] ، [ 0 ; 2πﺃﺤﺴﺏ
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x − 2 y = 0ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . ( C f
ot
) k ) f ( x + k 2π ) ، f ( x + 4π ) ، f ( x + 2πﻋﺩﺩ
(5ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻲ ﻝـ ) ( C fﻭ ) . ( D ﺼﺤﻴﺢ( .
.m
(6ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ) ( C fﻭﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ . ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ 0 ; 2π (3ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
x2 − 1
(4ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
) ( C fﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ
. x − 1 ≤ f ( x) ≤ x + 1
w
(
. O ;i ; j )
(5ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Aﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل
w
(1ﻋﻴﻥ D fﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ xﺤﻴﺙ x ≥ 1 + Aﻴﻜﻭﻥ . f ( x) ≥ A
(2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ D fﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ : ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ∞. lim f ( x) = +
∞x →+
5 4
f ( x) = x + − (6ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ). lim f ( x
x −1 x + 1 ∞x →−
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) ( C fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ (7ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] . [ −6π ; 6π
ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ .
140
5 ا
!(ر%5
x (4ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻲ fﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ ∞ −ﻭﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ ∞. +
= ). g ( x g (IIﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ
1− x ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ( C fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻤﺎﺌﻼ ) ∆ ( ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ
) ( C gﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ .
(5ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ، D fﻭﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ :
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . g = ) f '( xﺤﻴﺙ ) P( xﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ
)P( x
(x )− 1
2 2
om
ﻤﺒﺴﻁﺔ ﻝـ ) . g ( x
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ 3ﺠﺫﺭ ﻝـ ) P( xﺜﻡ ﺤﻠل ) P( xﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ.
. lim
<
(3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ )g ( x
x
→1
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ) f '( xﻋﻠﻰ D f
(4ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) g ' ( xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [. [ 0;1
.c
ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ gﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل . 0
x
= ). f ( x f (Iﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ 68
ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [. ]−1;1
ik
x +1
ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = xﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ N ﺒﺴﻁ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) f ( xﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] ]−∞ ; 0ﻭﻓﻲ
af
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ]−1;1ﺇﺫﺍ (2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﺭﺩﻴﺔ .
ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( C gﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ xﻓﺈﻥ Nﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ M
(3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ). lim f ( x
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) . ( C f
.m
∞x →+
(5ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ) . ( C f
w
141
6
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
om
ﻭﺼﻑ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ.
.c
ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ )ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ(.
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ )ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ(.
ik
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ pﺤﺩﺍ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﺎ.
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ.
aw
af
ﺒﺎﻴﻁﺎﻝﻴﺎ .ﺴﺎﻓﺭ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍ ﻋﺒﺭ ﺤﻭﺽ ﺍﻝﺒﺤﺭ ﺍﻷﺒﻴﺽ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﺒﻬﺩﻑ ﺘﻌﻠﻡ
.m
ﺒﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺒﻴﺔ ﺒﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 0ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﻜﻠﻤﺔ . sinus
w
1240 / 1170 Fibonacci ﻤﻥ ﺨﻼل ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻤﻪ ﺒﺘﻜﺎﺜﺭ ﺃﺭﺍﻨﺏ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺒﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ
ﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﺎﺴﻤﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺤﺩﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻫﻲ... ،144 ،89 ،55 ،34 ،21 ،13 ،8 ،5 ،3 ،2 ،1،1 :
w
ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻴﺘﻡ ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺤﺩ ﺒﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﻴﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ
ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺤﺩﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﻴﻥ ﺘﺅﻭل ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻫﺒﻲ ﺒﻘﻴﻡ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻭ ﺒﻘﻴﻡ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻓﻤﺜﻼ:
55/ 34 = 1,6167...ﻭ 89 / 55 = 1,6181...ﻭ ... ، 144 /89 = 1,6179...
143
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 6
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ...، 20 ، 15، 10 ، 5 ، 0 : 5ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒـ ...، u4 ، u3 ، u2 ، u1 ، u0
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ u8 ، u7 ، u6 ، u5ﻭ ﺒﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ u120 ، u18ﻭ ﺃﻜﺘﺏ unﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
om
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻻ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) . ( Dﻝﺘﻜﻥ n Bn ،.......، B3 ، B2 ، B1ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
) . ( Dﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ nﻨﺴﻤﻲ unﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺒﺭﺒﻁ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺇﻝﻰ nﻨﻘﻁﺔ
.c
. Bn ،.......، B3 ، B2 ، B1
• A u1 = 0 ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻪ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل n = 1
ik
u2 = 1 ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل n = 2
u3 = 3 ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل n = 3
aw )( D
• • • • • u4 = 6 ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل n = 4
............... B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 (1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . u8 ، u7 ، u6 ، u5
(2ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ u5ﻤﺜﻼ ﻨﻀﻴﻑ ﺇﻝﻰ u4ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺃﻀﻼﻋﻬﺎ ] . [ AB5ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻤﺔ
af
ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ un +1ﻨﻀﻴﻑ ﺇﻝﻰ unﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺃﻀﻼﻋﻬﺎ ] . [ ABn +1
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ un +1ﻭ . un
ot
(3أ
u13
.m
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
w
. An +1 An = 2ﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ :
ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ، O A3 A4 ، O A2 A3 ، O A1 A2 ، O A0 A1
w
144
َ
6 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
( )
ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i , j ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C
g ﻭ
) ∆ ( ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = x + 1
om
ﻭ ) ∆ ( ﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻲ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻬﻤﺎ . (1ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) ( C
g
( )
(2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) . O '( 0 ,1ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ) ( C gﻭ ) ∆ ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ O '; i , jﺤﻴﺙ )' y ' = f ( x
( )
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( C gﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O '; i , j
.c
(3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( C gﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ u0ﺤﻴﺙ
3
= . u0ﻨﻀﻊ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . un +1 = f ( un ) : n
4
ik
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭ ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ∆ ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . B
• ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ Bﻫﻲ . u1
aw
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ E ، D ، Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﻭﺍﺼﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ . u4 ، u3 ، u2
u (4ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ . un
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ 0 < x 2 < x < 1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ uﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ] [ 0 ,1 ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
af
ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .
ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻫﻲ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ . u
ot
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺨﺎﻤﺱ
.m
. Aﺘﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﻤﺅﺴﺴﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻘﺩﺍ ﻝﻠﺘﻭﻅﻴﻑ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :ﻤﺭﺘﺏ ﺸﻬﺭﻱ ﺒـ 10000 DAﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭ ﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺴﻨﻭﻴﺔ
ﺘﻘﺩﺭ ﺒـ 10 0 0ﻨﺴﻤﻲ u1ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ .ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ unﻝﻠﻤﺭﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭﻱ ﺨﻼل ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ . ( n ≥ 1) n
w
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . u7 ، u6 ، u5 ، u4 ، u3 ، u2 ،
w
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭﻱ ﺘﻘﺩﺭ ﺒـ 1200 DAﺒﻌﺩ ﻜل ﺴﻨﺔ ﻨﺴﻤﻲ v1ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ .
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ vnﻝﻠﻤﺭﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭﻱ ﺨﻼل ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ . ( n ≥ 1) n
. v7 ، v6 ، v5 ، v4 ، v3 ، v2 (1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ vn +1ﻭ . vn
(3ﻴﺭﻴﺩ ﻤﻭﻅﻑ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺘﻌﺎﻗﺩ ﻤﻊ ﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻜﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻤﺩﺓ 7ﺴﻨﻭﺍﺕ .ﺃﻱ ﺍﻝﻌﻘﺩﻴﻥ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﻓﺎﺌﺩﺓ ؟
145
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 6
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ.
.1ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ.
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ uﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺘﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، nﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n0ﻤﻌﻁﻰ ،ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ )u (n
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ nﺒﺎﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﺒـ unﺒﺩﻻ ﻤﻥ ). u (nﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﻤﻴﺯ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻴﺩ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﻤﻴﺯ ﺒﺩﻝﻴل . ﺘﺭﻤﻴﺯ:
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﻴﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﺎ ( un )n ≥ nﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل nﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . n0
0
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℕ ( un )n∈ℕﺃﻭ ) ( un ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﻴﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﺎ
om
unﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺩﻝﻴﻠﻪ nﻭ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﻜﺫﺍﻝﻙ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ . u
un 0ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل nﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . n0
u0ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℕ
.c
• ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺤﻴﺙ un = −5n 2 + 2 :ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℕ ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ:
5
= vnﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℕ − {0ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ . ( vn )n≥1
ik
• ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ vﺤﻴﺙ :
n
n+3
. ( wn )n≥6 = wnﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل n ≥ 6ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ • ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ wﺤﻴﺙ :
aw n−5
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ n ، unﻫﻭ ﺩﻝﻴل ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﻭﻝﻴﺱ ﺭﺘﺒﺘﻪ . ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:
n+3
= wnﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل 6 ، n ≥ 6ﻫﻭ ﺩﻝﻴل ﺍﻝﺤﺩ w6ﻭﺃﻤﺎ ﺭﺘﺒﺘﻪ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل :ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ wﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ
n−5
af
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﻁﻰ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻓﺈﻨﻬﺎ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .ﻭ ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺤﺩ un 0ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ n
ﺒﺎﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ . n0
w
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺤﻴﺙ un = −n 2 + 3ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ .ﻭﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﻱ ﺤﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ .
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:
w
ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺒﻴﺭﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ ) un = f (nﺤﻴﺙ . f : x ֏ − x 2 + 3
• ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Dﻭﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل x ∈ Dﻓﺈﻥ . f ( x ) ∈ Dﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ
ﺍﻷﻭل un 0ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) un +1 = f (unﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ .ﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺒﺤﺴﺎﺏ un +1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻡ unأ آ n ≥ n0
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ fﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ . u
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0 = 1ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . un +1 = 3un : n
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ u0 = 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ u3 = 3u2 = 27 ، u2 = 3u1 = 9 ، u1 = 3u0 = 3ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ...
146
6 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
om
ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ . f (x ) = −3x 2 + 1 : x
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻜﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻭﺍﺴﺘﺨﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻝﺩﻝﻴل ﺍﻹﺴﺘﺨﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻝﺠﻴﺩ
ﺤــل:
.c
u3 = −3(3)2 + 1 = −26 ، u2 = −3(2) 2 + 1 = −11 ، u1 = −3(1) 2 + 1 = −2 ، u0 = −3(0) 2 + 1 = 1 (1
. u134 = −3(134)2 + 1 = −53867 ، u20 = −3(20) 2 + 1 = −1199
ik
u2 n = −3(2n)2 + 1 = −12n 2 + 1 ، un +1 = −3(n + 1)2 + 1 = −3n 2 − 6n − 2 (2
aw . u3n + 2 = −3(3n + 2) 2 + 1 = −27 n 2 − 36n − 11
3
= ) . f ( xﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ [ 0, +ﻭﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ u0 > 0ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ : x
2+ x
) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕ
w
ﺤــل:
w
= ، u2 = ، u1
3 3 33 3 3 12 3 3
= . u3 = = = = = (1
2 + u2 2 + 12 34 2 + u1 2 + 3 11 2 + u0 4
w
11 4
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺎﺕ ﺘﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ u11 ≈ 1 ، u10 ≈ 1ﻭ . u12 ≈ 1 (2
ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ) ( unﺘﺴﺘﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ 1ﺇﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ . n = 10
147
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 6
ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ.
.1ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ.
• ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . u n = (−2) n :
u1 u0 u2
om
-2 0 1 4
y • ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ) ﺘﺭﻓﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺒﺩﺍﻝﺔ .( f
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . u n = n 2 − 4n − 1 :
) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﺫﺍﻝﻙ ) u n = f (nﺤﻴﺙ f : x ֏ x 2 − 4 x − 1 :ﻨﻌﺭﻑ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
.c
[ ∞ [ 0 , +ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ .ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ) )( n , f (n
1
ik
( )
ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O , i , jﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ )) M (n , f (nﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ
aw ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . ( un
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ (un )n ≥ n 0ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ )ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ( ﺇﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺘﺒﺔ n0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ .1ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ:
.m
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ un +1 > un ) un +1 ≥ unﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ( ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . n0
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ (un )n ≥ n 0ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ )ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ(ﺇﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺘﺒﺔ n0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ .2ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ:
w
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ un +1 < un ) un +1 ≤ unﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ( ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . n0
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ (un )n ≥ n 0ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﺇﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺘﺒﺔ n0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ . un +1 = unﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل .3ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ:
w
)ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ( ﻫﻲ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Iﻤﻥ ℕ .4ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ:
)ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﻤﻥ ℕﺃﻭ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ )ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﻤﻥ
. ) ℕﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ( .
148
6 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 3
2 + un
= un+1ﺤﻴﺙ nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0 = 1ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ
un
• ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . ( O , I , J
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﺜﻡ ﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
. y = xﻷﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ) un +1 = f (unﻭﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻫﻭ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) . M (un , un +1
2+ x
ﺤــل (C f ) :ﻫﻭﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . (unﺃﻱ
y
= )f ( x
om
4
x
3 ) (CM 0
f )∆( ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ∞ (∆) . ] 0 , +ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . y = xﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
M M3
Mﻫﻲ ﺃﻭل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ .ﻨﺴﻘﻁ M 0ﻋﻠﻰ ) ∆( ﻭﻓﻕ
0
) M 0 (u0 , u1ﺃﻱ ) ( 1,3
2 2
) ( Oxﺜﻡ ﻨﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ) (C fﻭﻓﻕ) ( Oyﻭﺒﻬﺫﺍ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ
.c
M1
1
5
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) M 1 (u1 , u2ﺃﻱ . M 1 3, ﻨﻜﺭﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ M 2ﺜﻡ M 3ﺇﻝﻰ ﺁﺨﺭﻩ.
3
ik
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 4
0 1 2 3 4 x aw
y M3
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ (un ) n≥1ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u1 = 1
5
) (C f )∆(
1
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ . un+1 = un2 + un
2
4
• ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ
af
2
M1 1 2
= ) f ( xﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ (∆ ) . ] 0 , +ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
x +x
1 2
.m
= vn
n+3 3
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ:
w
149
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 6
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ.
. 1ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ :
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ rﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل
. un +1 = un + r ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ : n
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ rﺃﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . (un
om
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ r = 0ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻭ ﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل . u0 ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:
• ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ un = 3n + 5ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0 = 5ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . r = 3 ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ:
.c
• ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل 1ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . 2
ik
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ):1ﺘﻘﺒل ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ( ) (unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . r
ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ) (unﻫﻭ un = u0 + nrﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ : n
aw
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u1ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻫﻲ . un = u1 + ( n − 1) r ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ:
• ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u pﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل ) pﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﻥ ( nﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ
. un = u p + ( n − p ) r
af
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ (un ) :2ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0ﻭ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . rﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ S = u0 + u1 + ........ + un −1 + un :
.m
u + un
S = ( n + 1) 0 ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ : n
2
Sﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻀﺭﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﺨﻴﺭ .
w
150
6 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 5
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . un = −7 n + 12 :
• ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل .
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﻠﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻕ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺤﺩﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﻴﻥ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﻴﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ
ﺜﺎﺒﺕ ،ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﺒﺕ ﻫﻭ ﺃﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ .
ﺤــل:ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺇﺫﺍ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل . u0 = 12 ، u0ﻝﻨﺤﺴﺏ . un +1 − un
om
. un +1 − un = −7( n + 1) + 12 − ( −7 n + 12) = −7ﺇﺫﻥ un +1 − un = −7ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . n
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ r = −7ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل . u0 = 12
.c
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0 = −2ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ un +1 = un − 3n + 1 :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . n
ik
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ. vn = un +1 − un :
• ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل .
aw
ﺤــل:ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺇﺫﺍ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻫﻭ . v0 = u1 − u0 ، v0
u1 = u0 − 3(0) + 1 = −1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . v0 = u1 − u0 = −1 − (−2) = 1ﻝﻨﺤﺴﺏ . vn +1 − vn
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . un +1 − un = −3n + 1ﺇﺫﻥ vn = −3n + 1 :
af
. vn +1 − vn = −3(n + 1) + 1 − (−3n + 1) = −3ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . vn +1 − vn = −3 : n
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ r = −3ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل . v0 = 1
ot
.
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 7
.m
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ، ℕﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ، r = −2ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل . u0 = 204
• ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . S = u10 + u11 + ........ + u 216 + u 217
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺇﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ a :ﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ a < bﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ub ، . . . ، ua + 2 ، ua +1 ، ua
w
151
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 6
.
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ.
. 1ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ :
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ qﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ
. un +1 = un × q ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ : n
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ qﺃﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . (un
om
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ q = 1ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺤﺩﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ . u0 ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ q = 0ﻓﺈﻥ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﺇﺒﺘﺩﺍ ﺀَﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ.
.c
.2ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ :
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ):1ﺘﻘﺒل ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ( ) (unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . q
ik
ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ) un = u0 × q n (unﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . n
1− q
ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ • :ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ S ، q = 1ﻫﻭ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ n + 1ﻤﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ u0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . S = (n + 1)u0
w
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ . q ≠ 1
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ S = u0 + u1 + ........ + un −1 + un
w
152
6 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 8
1
= . un ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
2n
• ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل .
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﻠﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻨﺤﺎﻭل ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ un +1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل un +1 = un × qﺤﻴﺙ qﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ
un +1
ﻋﺩﺩ ﺜﺎﺒﺕ ،ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﺒﺕ ﻫﻭ ﺃﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ . ﻤﺴﺘﻘل ﻋﻥ nﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ unﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ
un
om
ﺤــل :ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺇﺫﻥ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻫﻭ . u0 = 1 ، u0
1 1 1 1
= un +1 n +1
× = n × = un
2 2 2 2
1
= qﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل . u0 = 1 ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ
.c
2
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 9
ik
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0 = 3ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ un +1 = 4un + 6 :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . n
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ. vn = un + 2 :
aw
• ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل .
ﺤــل :ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺇﺫﻥ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻫﻭ . v0 = u0 + 2 = 5
ﻨﻜﺘﺏ vn +1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . vn
af
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل10
1 1
= . u5 ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ، ℕﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ = ، qﻭ
w
32 2
• ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . u2007
• ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . S = u0 + u1 + ........ + u28 + u29
w
2002
2007 −5 1 1 1
. u2007 = u5 × q = × = 2007
ﺇﺫﺍ
32 2 2
1 1 − q n +1
S = u0 ﻭ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ S = 2 1 − 30 • ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ q ≠ 1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
2 1 − q
153
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 6
om
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ.
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ • :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ .
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺩﺓ ) ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺭﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ (.
.c
.2ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺩﺍﻝﺔ.
ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل [∞ [α , + ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :1ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ) . un = f (nﺤﻴﺙ f
ik
ﺤﻴﺙ αﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ lim f ( x) = lﻓﺈﻥ . lim un = l
∞n →+ ∞x →+
aw .3ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ.
ﺘﻌﺎﺭﻴﻑ ( un ) :ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ .
) ( un • ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺘﻘﺒل ∞ +ﻜﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻜل ﻤﺠﺎل ﻤﻔﺘﻭﺡ [∞ (α ∈ ℝ ) ]α , +ﻴﺸﻤل ﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
af
ﺇﺒﺘﺩﺀﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ .ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ. lim un = +∞ :
∞n →+
) ( un • ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺘﻘﺒل ∞ −ﻜﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻜل ﻤﺠﺎل ﻤﻔﺘﻭﺡ [ (α ∈ ℝ ) ]−∞, αﻴﺸﻤل ﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ot
ﻤﺜﺎل :1ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . un = n 2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ αﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .
n0ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ αﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ [ ∞ n 2 ∈ ] α , +ﺇﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀﺍ ﻤﻥ n ≥ n0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ∞. lim un = +
∞n →+
w
ﻤﺜﺎل :2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . un = − n 2 − 1ﻝﻴﻜﻥ αﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .
n0ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ αﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ [ (−n 2 − 1) ∈ ] − ∞ , αﺇﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀﺍ ﻤﻥ n ≥ n0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ∞. lim un = −
w
∞n →+
ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل [∞ [α , + ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ) . un = f ( nﺤﻴﺙ f
ﺤﻴﺙ αﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .
w
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺤﻭل ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ .
154
6 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل12
1
= . un ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ( un )n≥1ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
n
• ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ،ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ) ( unﻫﻲ . 0
ﺤــل:
ﻝﻨﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ .ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﻤﺠﺎل [ ]α , βﻴﺸﻤل . 0ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ pﺤﻴﺙ :
om
1 1
، p > −ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ( n ≥ p ) n > pﻭ
α β
1 1 1 1 1
< αﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺇﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺘﺒﺔ . α < un < β pﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ. ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ < α < −ﻭ < < βﺇﺫﺍ < β
n n p p n
.c
lim un = 0
∞n →+
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل13
ik
3n + 1
= . un ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
n+2
aw
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . ( un
ﺤــل:ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ) un = f (nﺤﻴﺙ fﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ [ 0 , +ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
3x + 1
= ) . f ( xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ lim f ( x) = 3ﺇﺫﺍ . lim un = 3ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ .
af
∞n →+ ∞x →+ x+2
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل14
ot
n 2 + 3n + 1
= . un ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
2n + 3
.m
2n + 3
3 1 3 1
n 2 1 + + 2 1+ + 2
w
un =
n n n n
×= n
3
2+
3
n2 +
w
155
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 6
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ:ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Dﻤﺠﺎﻻ ﻴﺸﻤل D ، lﻴﺸﻤل ﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ n1ﻭ Dﻴﺸﻤل ﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
) ( wnﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ . n2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ n3ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ n1ﻭ D ، n2ﻴﺸﻤل ﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ) ( vnﻭ ) ( wnﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ n3
om
ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ vn ≤ un ≤ wnﻓﺈﻥ Dﻴﺸﻤل ﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ . n3ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ . lim un = l
∞n →+
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ( un ) :2ﻭ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺘﺎﻥ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍ َﺀ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ un ≥ vn ، n0ﻭ ∞lim vn = +
∞n →+
.c
∞n →+
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ:ﻝﻴﻜﻥ [∞ ]α , +ﻤﺠﺎﻻ ]α , +∞[ .ﻴﺸﻤل ﺇﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ n0ﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ un0 ≥ vn0ﻓﺈﻥ
ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ ]α , +ﻴﺸﻤل ﺇﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ n0ﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ، pﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل un ≥ vn ، n ≥ n0ﻝﻴﻜﻥ qﺍﻷﻜﺒﺭ
ik
ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ pﻭ . n0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ n ≥ qﻓﺈﻥ [∞ vn ∈ ]α , +ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ∞. lim un = +
∞n →+
aw
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ( un ) :3ﻭ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺘﺎﻥ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍ َﺀ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ un ≤ vn ، n0ﻭ ∞lim vn = −
∞n →+
∞n →+
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ q > 1ﻭ u0 < 0ﻓﺈﻥ ∞ lim un = −ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺩﺓ .
∞n →+
ﻓﺈﻥ lim un = 0ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ . • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ −1 < q < 1
∞n →+
w
ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺩﺓ ) ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ (. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ q ≤ −1
n
1
ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ (1 :ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒـ un = 3 :ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ﻨﺤﻭ 0ﻷﻥ ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ
w
2
1
ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0 = 3ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ = qﻭ −1 < q < 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . lim un = 0
w
v0 = 1ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ q ' = 3ﻭ q ' > 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ∞. lim vn = +
∞n →+
(3ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( wnﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒـ wn = (−3) n :ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻷﻥ ) ( wnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ
ﺍﻷﻭل v0 = 1ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ q '' = −3ﻭ q ' < −1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ .
156
6 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل15
2n + 1 4n
. ≤ ≤ un ( un )n≥1ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
n 2n + 3
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ . ( un )n≥1
2n + 1 1
ﺤــل= lim 2 + = 2 :
4n 4
limﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . lim un = 2 = lim limﻭ = 2
n →+∞ 2n + 3 n →+∞ 3
∞n →+ ∞n →+ n ∞n →+
n
2+
n
om
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل16
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . un = n + sin(n) :
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . ( un
.c
ﺤــل:ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ −1 ≤ sin(n) ≤ 1 : nﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . sin(n) ≥ −1 : n
ﺇﺫﺍ un ≥ n − 1ﻭ ∞ lim n − 1 = +ﻭﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ∞lim un = +
ik
∞n →+ ∞n →+
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل17
aw
2
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0 = 2ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ . un +1 = 1 + un :
5
5
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ vn = un − :
af
3
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل .
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . ( un
ot
vn +1 = un +1 −
3
2 5
= 1 + un −
5 3
w
2
= vn
5
w
157
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 6
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ.
ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u1ﻭ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ r ) rﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ (. ( un )n≥1
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ . un +1 + un −1 = 2un
(2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ c ، b ، aﺜﻼﺙ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ . a + c = 2b
ﻓﻲ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺤﺩﻴﻥ ﻁﺭﻓﻴﻥ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻀﻌﻑ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ . ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ:
om
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ:ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺜﻼﺙ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ c ، b ، aﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ:
a + b + c = 15
a × b × c = 80
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ.
.c
( un )n≥1ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ( un )n≥1ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u1ﻭ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ q ) qﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ (.
ik
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ . un +1 × un −1 = un2
(2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ c ، b ، aﺜﻼﺙ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ . a × c = b 2
aw
ﻓﻲ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺤﺩﻴﻥ ﻁﺭﻓﻴﻥ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ . ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ:
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ:ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺜﻼﺙ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ c ، b ، aﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ:
a + b + c = 26
af
a × b × c = 216
∞n →+
u0
= . lim S n • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ −1 < q < 1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ
∞n →+ 1− q
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ q ≤ −1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ S nﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻪ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ .
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ α :ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ( un ) .ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u 0 = 3ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ
2
=. q
α
ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺘﺒﻌﺎ ﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ αﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ Snﺤﻴﺙ . S n = u 0 + u1 + ........ + u n −1 + u n
158
6 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ:
) . un = ( −2 ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل ( un ) :ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
n
om
. q=−
2
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻏﻴﺭ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ .
.c
1 2
= ). f ( x ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥx :
ik
2
( )
. O ; i , jﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (un ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ
aw
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل ،( a ∈ ℝ ) u0 = aﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ : n
1
. un +1 = un2
2
7
ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﻷﻭل :ﻨﻔﺭﺽ = . a
af
4
1 2
y
(1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ . x − x
ot
2 2
1 2
≤ .0 (2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ x ≤ x ≤ 2 ، ] 0, 2
2
.m
159
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 6
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i , jﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ 0 ,1ﺒـ:
( )
f ( x ) = 2 − 2 x 2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i , jﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ Aﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺢ
.ﻨﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺠـﺎل ] [ 0,1 ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ، ( C fﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﻴﻨﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ x = 0ﻭ x = 1
y 1
ﺇﻝﻰ nﺠﺯ ﺀَﺍ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ ﻜل ﺠﺯﻉ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ
.ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﺒﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل.
n
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Eﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ) ( C fﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭﻴﻥ .ﻨﺴﻤﻲ unﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ
) (C
om
f ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺘﻭﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ Eﻭﻨﺴﻤﻲ vnﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ
1 ﺘﺤﻭﻱ . Eﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ un ≤ A ≤ vnﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .
(1ﻋﻴﻥ unﻭ vnﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ lim unﻭ . lim vn
∞n →+ ∞n →+
.c
n
∑p
p =1
2
=
6
ﻴﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ (2ﺇﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ A
ik
0 1 x aw
2 1
(1ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺍﻷﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺘﻭﻯ ﻓﻲ Eﻫﻲ ، 1 − 2 ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺘﻭﻯ ﻓﻲ Eﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ
n n
2 (n − 1) 2
2 9 2 4
1 −ﻭﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ 2 ﻝﻪ ﻫﻲ ، 1 − 2 ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻫﻲ 1 − 2 ﻭﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺁﺨﺭ ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل
n n n n n n
af
2 1 2 4 2 9 2 (n − 1)2
= unﺃﻱ 1 − + 1 − + 1 − + ... + 1 −
n n2 n n2 n n2 n n2
ot
ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺍﻷﻭل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ،ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﻫﻲ ، 1 − 2 ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻫﻲ
n n n
2 (n − 1) 2 2 4
1 − 2 1 − 2 ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺁﺨﺭ ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ
n n n n
w
2 2 1 2 4 2 9 2 (n − 1) 2
vn = + 1 − 2 + 1 − 2 + 1 − 2 + ... + 1 −ﺃﻱ ﻭﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ
n n n n n n n n n2
w
160
3 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺃﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ .
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ:ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( v nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
un + 3 vn un + 2vn
= . vn +1 = un +1ﻭ v0 = 1 ، u0 = 12ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ : n
4 3
ﻨﻀﻊ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ wn = un − vn : nﻭ . tn = 3 un + 8 vn
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( wnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﻭﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل .ﺃﺤﺴﺏ wnﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( tnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ .
om
(3ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℕﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℕ
(4ﻋﻴﻥ unﻭ vnﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
(5ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ unﻭ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ . vn
.c
ﺤل (1 :ﻨﺤﺴﺏ wn +1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . wn
ik
un + 2vn un + 3vn 4un + 8vn − 3un − 9vn
= wn +1 = un +1 − vn +1 − =
3 4 12
1 1
aw
= ( un − vn ) = wn
12 12
n
1 1
= qﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل . w0 = 11ﻭﻤﻨﻪ wn = 11× ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( wnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ
12 12
af
(2ﻨﺤﺴﺏ tn +1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . tn
) 3 ( un + 2vn ) 8 ( un + 3vn
= tn +1 = 3un +1 + 8vn +1 + = un + 2vn + 2un + 6vn
ot
3 4
= 3un + 8vn = tn
tn = t0 = 3u0 + 8v0 = 44 ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( tnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℕﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n
.m
) ( vnﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℕ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ wn > 0 nﻓﺈﻥ vn +1 − vn > 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
1
n
w
un = 4 + 8
n
1
12 un − vn = 11×
n
ﻭﻤﻨﻪ 12 (4
1 3u + 8v = 44
un = 4 − 3 12 n n
n
1 1
lim un = 4ﻭ . lim vn = 4 lim = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ < −1ﺇﺫﺍ < 1 (5
∞n →+ ∞n →+
n →+∞ 12 12
161
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 6
om
2
ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔv n +1 = + 1 :
vn
.1ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ.
.2ﻋﻴﻥ u 55ﻭ v 55
.c
.3ﻀﻊ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﻭل ﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ.
ik
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ
aw
.1ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ Ti83plus
) (u nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ ℕﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u 1 = 2ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔu n +1 = 2u n + 1 :
ﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ MODEﺜﻡ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ . Seqﻨﺤﺠﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
af
W INDOWﻭ ﻹﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﻤﻊ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﺎﺌﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ = Y ﻓﻲ
GRAPH ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ 2nd ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ
ot
7 ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ 2nd ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺤﺠﺯ uﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ
ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺤﺠﺯ nﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ . x ,T ,θ , n
.m
5u n + 3
= u n +1
w
un + 2
ﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺠﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ Y 1ﻭ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﺎﺌﻁ
. TRACE ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ GRAPH ﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺩﻭﺩ u 29 ، u13ﻭ . u 46 •
ﻀﻊ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﻭل ﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻬﺎ. •
162
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 6
) ( unﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ِـ u0 = 5 :ﻭﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ un +1 = 5un − 7nﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . n
7 7
vn = un − n −ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . n ) ( vnﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ِـ:
4 16
om
.1ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﺇﻜﺴل ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺒﺭﻤﺠﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ) ( unﻭ ) . ( vn
.c
ﺴﺠل nﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ A1ﻭ 0ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ B1ﺜﻡ 1ﻓﻲ ، C1ﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺘﻴﻥ B1ﻭ C1ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺤﺏ ﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻝﻴﻤﻴﻥ.
ik
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ C2ﺜﻡ ﺴﺠل unﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ A2ﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺠﺯ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ u0ﺃﻱ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 5ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ B2؛ ﺃﺤﺠﺯ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ
ﺤﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺴﺤﺏ ﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻝﻴﻤﻴﻥ.
aw
ـ ـ ﺒﺭﻤﺞ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ vnﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ.
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ B3ﺜﻡ ﺤﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺴﺤﺏ ﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻝﻴﻤﻴﻥ. ﺴﺠل vnﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ A3ﻭﺃﺤﺠﺯ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ
af
ot
.m
vn +1
( .2ﻻﺤﻅ ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ،ﺃﻋﻁ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﻭل ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ) ( vnﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺴﻁﺭﺍ ﺃﺨﺭﺍ ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ
vn
w
.5ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﻴﻥ S nﻭ Tnﺤﻴﺙ Sn = v0 + v1 + ... + vn :ﻭ . Tn = u0 + u1 + ... + un
w
163
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 6
ﻭﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ webﻭ ﻨﺼﺎﺩﻕ. ZOOM ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ 2nd .2ﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ
om
= Y
ﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺜﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ TRACE .3ﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ
ﺍﻝﻨﺴﻴﺞ.
ﻤﺜﺎل:
.c
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻨﺸﺎﻫﺩ ﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل •
un + 3
= u n +1 u 0 = 2.5ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ
ik
2u n + 1
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻨﺸﺎﻫﺩ ﺘﺒﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل •
aw
1
v 0 = 0.5ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ v n +1 = v n + 1
2
) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u 0 = 3ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻀﻊ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﻭل ﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
af
u +4
. u n +1 = n ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ
2u n + 1
ot
2u n + 1
= u n +1
un + 2
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﺩﺍﻴﺔ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ PRGMﺜﻡ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ Newﺜﻡ ﻨﻌﻁﻲ ﺍﺴﻤﺎ ﻝﻠﺒﺭﻨﺎﻤﺞ.
w
PRGM
ﻨﺴﻤﻴﻪ ﻤﺜﻼ suite :ﺜﻡ ﻨﺩﺨل ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻨﺎﻤﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل.
w
164
6 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ
ﺴﻨﻭﻴﺎ ﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻴﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﻴﻌﺭﺽ ﺒﻨﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺒﻨﺎﺌﻪ ﻋﻘﺩﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺘﻭﻓﻴﺭ .ﻴﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﺍﻝﻌﻘﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل ) (1ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺌﺩ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺔ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻬﺎ 7%
ﻝﻠﻌﻘﺩ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ) ( 2ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺌﺩ ﻤﺭﻜﺒﺔ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻬﺎ 5%ﺴﻨﻭﻴﺎ.
ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺌﺩ ﺍﻝﺒﺴﻴﻁﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﺴﺏ ﻜل ﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻷﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺩﻉ ﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺘﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺌﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺒﺔ ﻜل ﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ
ﺭﺼﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﻓﺭ ﻝﻠﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﺒﻘﻬﺎ.
ﻓﻲ 01ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ 2006ﻭﻀﻌﺕ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺃﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺒﺸﺭﻯ ﻤﺒﻠﻎ 1000 DAﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻨﻙ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺍﺨﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺃﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻌﻘﺩ ) (1ﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ
om
ﺍﺨﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺒﺸﺭﻯ ﺍﻝﻌﻘﺩ ) . ( 2ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﹻ anﺇﻝﻰ ﺭﺼﻴﺩ ﺃﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺒﹻ b nﺇﻝﻰ ﺭﺼﻴﺩ ﺒﺸﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ . 2006 + n
.1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻜل ﻤﻥ a0ﻭ b0؟ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ a2 ، a1ﻭ a3ﺜﻡ b 2 ، b1ﻭ . b3
.2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ( anﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﻥ ) (b nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﺩﺩﺍ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺱ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ.
.c
.3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ anﻭ b nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
.4ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺘﻤﻡ ﻤﻠﺊ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻏﺎﻴﺔ . n = 19
ik
aw
af
ot
165
6
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ار ــد أ
ــ
أم ــ
ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﻁﺄ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ . 13
ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 14ﺇﻝﻰ . 19 ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻤﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل 1
) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n 1− n 2
14 . −
12
= ، unﻫﻭ : ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ
1 + n2
ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [ 0 ; + ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) un = f (nﺤﻴﺙ f 13
2ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n
3
ﺒﹻ f ( x) = − x 2 :ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ، un = n × 2nﻫﻲ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ .
om
4
(2ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ. . lim un = −
3
(1 ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒﹻ un = n 2 − 2 : 3
∞n →+ 4
ﻫﻲ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ .
(3ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ (4 .ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ .
) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n 4
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ 15
.c
n
ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ . un +1 = 4unﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ
ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ nﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ . un = + :ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
1 4
ﻜﺎﻥ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .
n 5
ik
(2ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ . (1ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ . ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ un +1 = un − 3 :ﻫﻲ 5
(3ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ . lim un = 1 (4 . ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ .
aw
) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
∞n →+
6
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ 16
ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ .
2 2
ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ nﻭﺘﺤﻘﻕ . 4 − ≤ un ≤ 4 + :ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ : ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ
n n 7
af
. un = (2
2
( un ) (1ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ . ) ، un = ( −1ﺘﻘﺒل ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻴﻥ −1 :ﻭ . 1 n
n
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ . Aﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍل ، AB 8
( un ) (4ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ . ( un ) (3ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ .
ot
4
( un ) (1ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ( un ) (2 .ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ. ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n 11
w
166
6
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
y
y = 2x + 1 y=x اـــت
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
20
fﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، un = f (n) ، n
ﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ .
n−2
= . un °2 . un = 3n − 4 °1
n+2
π
1 . u n = cos 3π n − °4 . un = n 2 − n °3
om
4
0
u0 u1 u2 u3 x
21ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
1
ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، un +1 = f (un ) ، nﺜﻡ
y
y=x ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ . u3 ، u2 ، u1
.c
y = x +1
4
1
= u0 u0 = −2
3
ik
u = u + 1
1 n +1 n
u0 = 4
u 0 = −5
-1 0 1 u22 u31 4 5 6 7
u80 x
aw
°4
2un °3
-1
u
n +1 = u 2
− 2u u + =
un + 1
n n n 1
) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ . un 24 22ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ un + 1 :؛ un + 1؛ u2n؛ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
af
؛ u2 n + 1؛ u2 n −1؛ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ un2 ، ℕﺜﻡ ﻤﺜل ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ .
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : . u n = n 2 − n °2 . u n = n + 1 °1
ot
8
) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n 26
ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ . un = n − 5n + 6n + 3 :
3 2
1
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ u0؛ u1؛ . u2ﻫل ) ( unﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ؟
0 1 x
(2ﺤﻠل un − 3ﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻭﺍﻤل . u1 u0
167
6
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ
n 5 ) (Cﻫﻭ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ، 27
= un ( un ) 29ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ + :
5 n ﻭ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = x
). (n ≥ 1
y
om
(4ﻫل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ؟
(5ﻫل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺘﻘﺒل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ؟ 1
.c
u3 = 1 + ، u2 = 1 + ، u1 = 1 +
1 1 2
1+ 1+
1 2
1+
ik
2 u0 = a
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . u3 ، u2 ، u1 . ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ :
) u n + 1 = f (u n
(2ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ u n + 1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . un
aw ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ u 1؛ u 2؛ u 3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ :
(3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . u6 ، u5 ، u4 a = 6 (3 a = −1 (2 a = −5 (1
(4ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ . ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻀﻠﻌﻪ u0 = 3ﺒﺘﻤﺩﻴﺩ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﺒﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺴﻬﺎ 1 28
af
A 31 ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻀﻠﻌﻪ ، u1ﺜﻡ ﻨﻤﺩﺩ u1ﺒﻘﻁﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﺴﻬﺎ 1
ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻀﻠﻌﻪ . . . ، u2ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل .
ot
.m
…
B0 B 1 B2 …
Bn
w
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ . u5 ، u4 ، u3
(4ﻤﻥ ﺍﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ nﻨﻀﻊ :
)n(n + 1
= vn
2
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . u3 ، u2 ، u1
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . v1 •
(2ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ u n + 1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . un
ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ v n + 1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ vnﻭ . nﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ . vn = un •
168
6 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل .ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻕ . v n + 1 − vn ( un ) 32ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺒﹻ :
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ . n 4 − 2n3 + 11n 2 + 14n + 24
= un
) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ 44 24
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ، u2 ، u1 ، u0
ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ nﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ . un = 2n3 − 30n 2 + 162
. u4 ، u3
(1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ :
ﺠﺩ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻤﺒﺴﻁﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺩ . un (2
. f ( x ) = 2 x 3 − 30 x 2 + 162
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . u7 ، u6 ، u5ﻫل ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﻙ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ؟ (3
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻝﻴل . 10
om
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺤﻴﺙ : 33
) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n 45
. un = (1, 01) − 1000 n
n
3n
= . un ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ (1ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﻤﺠﺩﻭﻝﺔ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ u0ﺇﻝﻰ u2007
n+2
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ )u n + 1 − un = 0, 01 × (1, 01n − 100000
.c
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ .
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻴﻜﻭﻥ . un > 0 ﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n0ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل : n ≥ n0
u n + 1 − un ≥ 0
ik
u n +1
. (3ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ − 1
un ا
(4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . ( un ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 34ﺇﻝﻰ 42ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ
aw
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [ 0 ; +ﺒﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . ( un
46
ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ : ) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒﹻ . un = −2n + 3 : 34
5
2 − 4n
) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒﹻ :
af
4 = . un 35
n+2
3
) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒﹻ . un = (n − 5)2 : 36
ot
2 2n
3
= . un ) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒﹻ : 37
1 2 3n
n2 + 1
.m
2n
ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ unﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
. un = − ) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒﹻ :
2
40
w
3
1 1
= . un − ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ nﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ : π
n n +1 ) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒﹻ . un = sin n : 42
2
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ u1 :؛ u2؛ u3؛ u4
(2ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ u n +1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n ) ( vnﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل n ≥ 6ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ : 43
un +1 n . vn = n − 12n − 5
2
169
6
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ
π
sin n ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [ 0 ; + ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f 48
4 °6 ( −1)n
= . un . u n = °5 ) sin(2π x
3n 2 n2 = ). f ( x ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ
n 1
5 x+
. un = . un = ( 0, 7 ) °7
n
°8 2
4
ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ . un = f (n) :
n +1 1
= . un °10 . un = n °9 ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
3n + 1 3
( un ) 52ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n
y
om
1
x +1
= ). f ( x ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ، un = f (n) :ﻤﻊ
2x − 1
(1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ) ∞. ( + 0 1 x
.c
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ (1ﻫل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ [ 0 ; +؟
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 53ﺇﻝﻰ ، 60ﺃﻜﱢﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ
(2ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ unﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
ik
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ .
(3ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ .
1
. un = − 3n 54 . un = 3n − 1
aw 53 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻨﻴﻥ 49ﻭ 50ﻴﻨﺼﺢ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ
2
. un = n 2 56 . un = 2n 2 + 3n 55 ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺎﺕ .
1 3 − 4n ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n 49
. un = n − 58 = . un + 2 57
af
n 5 5
. un = 1 − ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ :
u0 = −2 0
u = −3 n+3
. 60 . 59
u n + 1 = −4un u n + 1 = 2 + un (1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ u0 :؛ u1؛ u5؛
ot
170
6
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
y
u3
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺸﻜﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺜﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ. 67
y
u2
4
) (C f
3
u1 1 ا
4
om
2
ا
1
0 1 ) (C f x
1
u0
.c
-1 u00 u1
1 2 u2 3 u43 x
(1ﻫل ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ؟ -1
ik
(2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ y
ﺍﻷﻭل u0ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . r
) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . q
aw
68 ) (C f
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n
q = −3 ، u15 = 32 °1ﻭ . un = −82
af
u5 = −14 ، u10 = −64 °2ﻭ . un = −114 ا
2
u31 − u19 = 54 ، u6 + u24 = 138 °3ﻭ . un = 60
) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ :
ot
69 1
u10 = 16ﻭ . u15 = 41
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ S = u10 + u11 + u12 + . . . + u29 :
.m
4 y
= . u n +1 ﻭ u0 = −1
4 − un
w
1
= vn ﻭﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﺤﻴﺙ :
un − 2 2
w
-1
171
6
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ
u0 = −1 u0 = 1
. 2 (10 (9 ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒﹻ : 71
3u n + 1 = un 3u n + 1 − 2 un = 3
1 + un
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺸﻜﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ. . u n +1 = 1 − u0 = −1ﻭ
75 1 + 2 un
ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺸﻜﺎل ﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ .
un + 1
= . vn ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﺤﻴﺙ :
) (C f un
1
(1ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . ( un
ا
1
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل
om
u1
0
u3 u4 u2
1
u0
ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ .
(3ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ vnﺜﻡ unﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
(4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . ( un
.c
y
ik
0 1
u n + 2 = 2 u n + 1 − u n
u3 u2 u1 u0
om
1 5
. ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻭﻀﻊ = y = . un ( −3)n (4 . u n = 2 n (3
x −1 2 3
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺤﻴﺙ : 87 ) (
. u n = −4
n
(6 . un = − 3n (5
4 5
. u n +1 = 2 − u0 = −1ﻭ ( un ) 82ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . q
un + 3
.c
ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺤﻴﺙ : ﺃﻜﺘﺏ unﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
un − 1 1
u0 = −ﻭ . q = 7 (1
ik
= vn 4
un + 2
u1 = 3 (2ﻭ . q = 3
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . u3 ، u2 ، u1
aw 1
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻻ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻻ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ. u0 = 2 (3ﻭ . q = −
2
(3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ . ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ c ، b ، aﻫﻲ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ 83
(4ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ vnﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺘﺤﻘﻕ :
af
)3(n + 1 3 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ c ، b ، aﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻭﻁ 84
= . u n +1 = u1ﻭ un
4n 4 ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
.m
u
ﻭﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ ℕﺤﻴﺙ v n = n : c ، b ، aﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻫﻲ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ •
n
ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﺔ .
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل
a ، c ، bﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻫﻲ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ •
w
ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ .
ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ .
(2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ vnﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
. a + b + c = 18 •
w
173
6
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ
ﻤﺜﺎل ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 11ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻭﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ .
(1ﻋﻴﻥ αﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( Dﻭ )' . ( D
ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺴﻁﺭ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2007؟ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻭﺩ ؟
(2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ αﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل (1ﻨﻀﻊ:
ﻨﺭﻗﻡ ﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ ، nﺍﻝﺼﻔﺤﺔ 1ﺘﻜﻭﻥ 92 v n = un − α
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻴﻤﻴﻥ .ﺒﺠﻤﻊ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻨﺠﺩ 2007ﻭﻝﻜﻥ
• ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ .
ﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﻘﻴﺕ ﻤﻠﺘﺼﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻭﻝﻡ ﻴﺤﺴﺏ ﺭﻗﻤﺎﻫﻤﺎ .
• ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ vnﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ unﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻜﺘﺎﺏ ؟
(3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﻴﻥ :
(2ﻭﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻠﺘﺼﻘﺘﻴﻥ ؟
om
S1 = v0 + v1 + v2 + . . . + vn
)ﺃﻭﻝﻤﺒﻴﺎﺩ .(2003
S2 = u0 + u1 + u2 + . . . + un
ﻤـﺴـﺎﺌـل ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ ( C1 ) . 2ﺭﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ 90
ﺤﻴﺙ u0 = 1 :ﻭﻤﻥ ( un ) 93ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Bﻭﺘﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ . C
.c
u −1
. u n+ 1 = n ﺃﺠل ، n ≥ 1 B1ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] C1 ، [ BCﻭ E1ﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ CB1C1 E1
2
ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻭ ) ( C2ﺭﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ B1ﻭﺘﺤﺩﻫﺎ
ik
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . u3 ، u2 ، u1
αﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ (2 ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Cﻭ . C1
B2ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ B1C1ﻭﻨﺭﺴﻡ ) ( C3ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ . . .
ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻨﻀﻊ . v n = un + α :
aw
)ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل( .
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ αﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vn A B
ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ .
C2 E2
af
• ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ vnﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
)(C3
• ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ unﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n B1 C1
B2
(3ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . ( un
ot
)(C1
)(C2
(4ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ nﺒﺤﻴﺙ :
. | un + 1 | < 10−4
.m
S
(6ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ . lim n
n →+∞ n • ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ unﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
94ﻓﻲ ﺒﺩﺍﻴﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻭﺒﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻓﻭﺍﻨﺯﺓ ) une épidémie de (2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻁﻭل ﺍﻝﺨﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﺯﻭﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻭﻥ ﺒﹻ nﻤﺭﺒﻊ .
w
(grippeﻻﺤﻅ ﻋﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺼﺎﻝﺢ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺼﺎﺒﻴﻥ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ 91
w
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻴﻭﻡ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻤﻊ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻀﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ . ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ :
1
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻀﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﻭل 100ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻡ 2 3 4
ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ، 120ﻓﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ : 5 6 7 8 9
(1ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻀﻰ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﺒﻊ ؟ 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
(2ﻋﺩﺩ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻀﻰ ﺒﻌﺩ 7ﺃﻴﺎﻡ ؟ 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
(3ﻋﺩﺩ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻀﻰ ﺒﻌﺩ 15ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻡ ؟ ﻴﻌﺭﻑ ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺒﺎﻝﺴﻁﺭ ﻭﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻓﻴﻪ .
174
6
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
ﻝﻠﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭل ﺃﺩﻓﻊ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ،ﻝﻠﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ
95ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ
ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻭﻝﻠﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﺩﻨﺎﻨﻴﺭ . . .ﻭﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺤﺘﻰ
ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ، ( O ; i ; jﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ )A1 ( 2 ; 2 ) ، A0 (1 ; 1
ﻨﺼل ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺨﻴﺭ .ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺼﺎﻥ ؟
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻬﺎ ، 30 cm ، An ( xn ; yn ) . . .ﺤﻴﺙ xn = n + 1 :
99
ﻨﺭﺴﻡ "ﻴﻭﻨﺎﻨﻴﺔ" ﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍ ﺀ ﻤﻥ ﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﻭﺭﻗﺔ .ﻜل ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺘﺯﺩ n 2 + 3n + 4
= . yn ﻭ
4
ﺒﹻ 1 cmﻋﻥ ﺴﺎﺒﻘﺘﻬﺎ .
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺍﻝﺨﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻜﺴﺭ :
om
A0 A1 A2 . . . Anﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ
6
) ( An An + 1 ) ، . . . ، ( A1 A2 ) ، ( A0 A1ﺘﺸﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ
2 1
5 1 . ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ
2
.c
3
(1ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ . A4 ، A3 ، A2 ، A1 ، A0
4
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ n
ik
n +1
= . yn − yn − 1 ﻴﻜﻭﻥ :
2
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻁﻭل "ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻨﺎﻨﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺼﻑ 10؟
aw
(3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Anﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ) . ( Ρ
(2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻁﻭل "ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻨﺎﻨﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺼﻑ n؟
(4ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ) ( Ρﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، A1 ، A0
(3ﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍ ﺀ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺘﺨﺭﺝ "ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻨﺎﻨﻴﺔ"
. A4 ، A3 ، A2
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺭﻗﺔ .
af
) ( C0 ) ( C1 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻝﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ 1990ﻫﻭ 5,3
) ( C2
ﻤﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﻨﺴﻤﺔ ،ﻓﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ :
w
Ω0 A
Ω1 Ω2 ﺴﻨﺔ 2030؟ ﺴﻨﺔ 2007؟ ﺴﻨﺔ 2000؟
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﺭﻴﻜﻭﺭﺩ )(Robert Recorde 1510 – 1558 98
ﻤﺨﺘﺭﻉ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ " = " .
(1ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ln = AΩ nﻭ ﻋﻥ Rnﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
ﺃﺒﻴﻊ ﻝﻙ ﺤﺼﺎﻨﺎ ﻝﻪ 4ﺼﻔﺎﺌﺢ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ 6
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ) ( Cn (2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n
ﻤﺴﺎﻤﻴﺭ .
ﻭ ) ( Cn + 1ﻤﺘﻤﺎﺴﺘﻴﻥ ﺨﺎﺭﺠﻴﺎ .
175
6
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ
(3ﻨﻀﻊ unﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺒﺎﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) . ( Cn
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ 102
• ﺃﻜﺘﺏ unﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
• ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ.
(4ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Snﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺎﺕ . ( n ≥ 0 ) un
• ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ S nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . lim S n •
∞n →+
om
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻗﻁﻊ 101
ﺍﻝﺨﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻜﺴﺭ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺔ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ .
y
B3 A4
.c
.1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ .
.2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻫﻲ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ . y = ax + b
y=x
ik
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻀﻠﻌﺎﺕ ﻤﻨﺘﻅﻤﺔ . 103
B2 A3
aw
B1
A2
A1
af
1
α u u
ot
. . . h2 ، t2 ، h1ﻫﻲ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ . (3ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ unﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻭ αﺜﻡ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ a ، nﻭ . b
. hn = An Bn ، . . . ، h2 = A2 B2 ، h1 = A1 B1
176
7
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
om
ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ.
.c
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ.
ik
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﻨﻘﻁ
aw
ﺃﻭ ﺘﻼﻗﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ.
af
ﻭﻝﺩ ﺃﺭﺨﻤﻴﺩﺱ ﻋﺎﻡ 287ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﻤﻴﻼﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺠﺯﻴﺭﺓ ﺼﻘﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻝﺩﻩ ﻓﻠﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺸﻬﻴﺭﺍﹰ ،ﻭﻜﻤﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻝﺸﺒﺎﺏ
ot
ﺁﻨﺫﺍﻙ ﺴﺎﻓﺭ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻹﺴﻜﻨﺩﺭﻴﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻨﺎﻥ ﻁﻠﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻝﻠﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ،ﻭﻴﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺅﺭﺨﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻡ
ﺃﻥ ﺃﺭﺨﻤﻴﺩﺱ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻋﻅﻡ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﺼﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﺩﻴﻤﺔ .ﻤﻥ ﺃﺸﻬﺭ ﺍﻜﺘﺸﺎﻓﺎﺘﻪ ،ﻁﺭﻕ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ
.m
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺤﺠﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻝﺠﺎﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻸﺠﺴﺎﻡ ،ﻭﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻕ ﻝﻠﺠﺫﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ
ﻭﺃﺨﺘﺭﻉ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻝﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ.ﻭﻫﻭ ﻨﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺤﺩﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ π
w
ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ﺒﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻝﻴﺔ .
ﺃﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺠﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﻴﻜﺎﻨﻴﻙ ﻓﺄﺭﺨﻤﻴﺩﺱ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻜﺘﺸﻑ ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺴﺎﺴﻴﺔ ﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯ
w
ﻗﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﺃﺭﺨﻤﻴﺩﺱ .ﻭﻤﻥ ﺃﺒﺭﺯ ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺍﻨﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺍﻜﺘﺸﻔﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﻁﻔﻭ ﺍﻷﺠﺴﺎﻡ
ﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺼﺎﺭ ﻴﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﹻ "ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺃﺭﺨﻤﻴﺩﺱ ".
ﺃﺭﺨﻤﻴﺩﺱ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻗﺘل ﺃﺭﺨﻤﻴﺩﺱ ﻋﺎﻡ 212ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﻤﻴﻼﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﻭﻤﺎﻥ.
287ﻕ ﻡ 212 /ﻕ ﻡ
177
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 7
om
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ GAﻭ GBﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﺇﺘﺠﺎﻫﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﻴﻜﺘﺏ . mA GA = − mB GB :
ﺃﻱ mA GA + mB GB = 0ﻭﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻫﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺯﻭﺩﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻜﺘﻠﺘﻴﻥ mAﻭ . mB
ﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻜﺘل ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﻠﻭﻏﺭﺍﻡ ) ( kgﻭ ﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍل ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺭ ) . ( cm
.c
(1ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﻤﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ، mA = 6 kgﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ mBﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ GAﻭ . GB
(2ﻨﻀﻊ mA = 7 kgﻭ . mB = 3 kg
ik
• ﺃﻜﺘﺏ GAﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . GB
3
• ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) AG = ABﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻹﺴﺘﻌﺎﻨﺔ ﺒﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺸﺎل (.
aw 10
• ﺃﻨﺸﺊ Gﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ . AB = 20cm
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜﺘﻠﺘﻴﻥ mAﻭ mBﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻝـ G
A G B (b A G B (a
af
ot
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ . ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
.m
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . 2 IA + IB = 0 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Jﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . JB − 2 JC = 0 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . 2GA + GB − 2GC = 0 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ
w
178
7 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
A G B
ﻴﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﻤﻴﺯﺍﻥ ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﻔﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺼﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﻁﺭﻓﻲ ] ، [ ABﻜﻔﺔ
ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ Aﺘﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﺘﻠﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ . Mﻝﻭﺯﻥ ﺒﻀﺎﻋﺔ mﻨﻀﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ
M
ﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Gﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻴﺯﺍﻥ ﻝﻪ ﻤﻴﺯﺓ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻜﺘل ﻋﺩﻴﺩﺓ .
m
ﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻜﺘل ﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﻠﻭﻏﺭﺍﻡ ) . ( kg
om
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ . M = 2 kg
(1ﺃﻴﻥ ﻴﺠﺏ ﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ m = 4 kg؟
(2ﺃﻴﻥ ﻴﺠﺏ ﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ m = 3 kg؟
.c
(3ﺃﻴﻥ ﻴﺠﺏ ﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ m = 2 kg؟
2
(4ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . AG = AB :
ik
3
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻀﺎﻋﺔ m؟
aw
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻴﻌﻁﻲ ﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﺨﻼل ﻓﺼل ﺩﺭﺍﺴﻲ .
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺩ
af
179
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 7
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:2ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ABﻭ CDﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( CDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ .
om
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ 0ﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻤﻊ ﻜل ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
.2ﻁﻭﻴﻠﺔ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ.
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:ﻁﻭﻴﻠﺔ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﺤﻴﺙ u = ABﻫﻲ ﻁﻭل ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﺎ ABﻭﻨﻜﺘﺏ . u = AB = AB
.c
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ:
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) u = 1ﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺃﻁﻭﺍل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ(.
ik
AB = 0ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻤﻨﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . B
aw
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . ku = k × u
) M ∈ ( ABﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ k ) AM = k ABﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ(
.3ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ.
af
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :1ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( CDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ . AB = kCD
ot
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :2ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، Aﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ . AB = k AC
.m
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ( O , I , Jﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ) A( x , yﻭ ) ' . B ( x ', y
x '− x
w
x
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:3ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ( O , I , Jﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ . u
y
ﻁﻭﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﻫﻲ . u = x 2 + y 2 :
180
7 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ،ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﺤﻴﺙ 5BD = ACﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﺤﻴﺙ 6 BE = BC
om
B D ﺤــل :ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺸﺎل . EA = EC + CA
ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ 5BD = ACﻭﻤﻨﻪ . 5 DB = CAﻭﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ . 6 BE = BC
E
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ) BE + EC = 6 BEﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ( ﻭﻤﻨﻪ . EC = 5BE
EA = EC + CAﻭﻤﻨﻪ EA = 5BE + 5DBﺃﻱ
.c
( )
EA = 5DB + 5BEﻭﻤﻨﻪ EA = 5 DB + BE
ﺃﻱ EA = 5DE
ik
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ D ، E ، Aﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ .
aw
A C
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 2
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ α ،ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ﻭﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ E ، 1ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ
af
. AE = α ABﻝﺘﻜﻥ Fﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ . BF = (1 − α ) BCﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ADﻭ ﻴﺸﻤل Eﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
) ( CDﻓﻲ . Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻭ ﻴﺸﻤل Fﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ADﻓﻲ . Gﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( EHﻭ ) ( FG
ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Iﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( EF ) ، ( ACﻭ ) ( GHﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺔ .
ot
ﻤﺜﻨﻰ .
D H C
ﺤــل ) EF = EI + EB :ﻤﺤﺼﻠﺔ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ (
w
I
G F EF = EI + EB = BF + AB − AE
EF = (1 − α ) BC + AB − α AB
w
( )
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺒﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ A; AB, AD
181
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 7
ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ.
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ.
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ αﻭ βﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ . α + β ≠ 0
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ αﻭ βﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺤﻴﺙ α GA + β GB = 0 :
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ αﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) ( A , αﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ .
om
ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) {( A , α ) ; ( B , βﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺜﻘﻠﺘﻴﻥ)ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻭﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺠﻤﻠﺔ nﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ(.
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ }) . {( A , α ) ; ( B , β
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Aﻤﻨﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Bﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ (α + β ) GA = 0ﻭﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ α + β ≠ 0ﻓﺈﻥ GA = 0ﺃﻱ Gﻴﻨﻁﺒﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ A
.c
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ α + β = 0ﺃﻱ α = − βﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺘﺼﺒﺢ α (GA − GB ) = 0ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ α ≠ 0ﻭ A ≠ B
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ .ﻤﺜﻼ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ α = 2ﻭ β = −2ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ A ≠ Bﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) {( A, 2 ) ; ( B, −2ﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ.
ik
ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ:ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ α = βﻨﺤﺼل GA = −GBﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺘﻴﻥ
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ . Bﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻨﺄﺨﺫ . α = β = 1
aw
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ αﻭ βﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ.
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ α GA + β GB = 0 :ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ α GA + β GA + β AB = 0ﻭﻤﻨﻪ (α + β ) GA = − β ABﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ α + β ≠ 0
β
= A . AGﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺘﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ Gﻭﺤﻴﺩ . ﻓﺈﻥ AB
af
α +β
.ﻓﺈﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ ﺨﻭﺍﺹ i 1:ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ }) { ( A , α ) ; ( B , β
ot
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ:
α GA + β GB = 0 i 1ﺒﻀﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻓﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻝﻐﻴﺭﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ kﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ:
kα GA + k β GB = 0ﻭﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ α + β ≠ 0ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ k ≠ 0ﻓﺈﻥ kα + k β ≠ 0ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ .
w
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ αﻭ βﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل
ﻨﻘﻁﺔ . α MA + β MB = (α + β ) MG M
w
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ:
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ α MA + β MB = α MG + α GA + β MG + β GB : Mﻭﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ α GA + β GB = 0
ﻓﺈﻥ . α MA + β MB = (α + β ) MG
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ Gﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ . MA + MB = 2 MG M
182
7 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 3
Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ .
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ِ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 3ﻭ 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
(2ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ -4ﻭ 3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
β
).ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻹﺴﺘﻌﺎﻨﺔ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻁﺎﻝﻴﺱ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤل( ﺇﻝﻰ α + βﺠﺯﺀ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺇﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ Aﻨﻀﻊ Gﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻌﺩ
α +β
om
ﺤــل 3 + 1 = 4 (1 :ﻭ 4 ≠ 0ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ .ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ 3GA + GB = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
1
B AG = ABﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
4
) ( ABﻭﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ] [ AC
.c
ﻨﻘﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ 4ﺃﺠﺯﺍﺀ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺔ ﺜﻡ ﻨﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
ik
1
G
Dﻋﻠﻰ ) ( ACﺒﺤﻴﺙ AD = ACﺜﻡ ﻤﻥ Dﻨﻨﺸﺊ
4
A C ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ∆ ) . ( BCﻴﻘﻁﻊ
D
aw
) ( ABﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . G
3 − 4 = −1 (2ﻭ −1 ≠ 0ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ .ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ −4 HA + 3HB = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
AH = −3 ABﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻭﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ.
af
( )
8
ﺤــل AK = − AB (1:ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ 3 AK = −8 AK + KBﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ 11AK + 8 KB = 0ﻭ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ:
3
w
11KA − 8 KB = 0ﺇﺫﺍ Kﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 11ﻭ -8ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
(2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ MAﻭ ABﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﺎﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ αﺤﻴﺙ
w
( )
AM = α ABﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ AM = α AM + MBﻭﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ . (1 − α ) AM = α MBﻭ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ:
(1 − α ) AM − α MB = 0ﺒﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ . (1 − α ) MA + α MB = 0
(1 − α ) + α = 1ﻭ 1 ≠ 0ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 1 − αﻭ αﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻼﺼﺔ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻫﻭ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻤﺭﺍﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) . {( A,1 − α ) ; ( B, αﺤﻴﺙ αﻴﻤﺴﺢ . ℝ
183
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 7
ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ.
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ.
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ، B ، A :ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻭ β ، αﻭ γﺜﻼﺙ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ . α + β + γ ≠ 0
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، Aﻭ Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ β ، αﻭ γﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺤﻴﺙα GA + β GB + γ GC = 0 :
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، Aﻭ Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ β ، αﻭ γﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ.
om
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﺒﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ GB = GA + ABﻭ GC = GA + ACﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ (α + β + γ ) GA + β AB + γ AC = 0
β γ
( )
1
= AG = AGﺃﻱ β AB + γ AC AB + ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ AC
α + β +γ α + β +γ α + β +γ
.c
1
ﻭ β AB + γ AC = uﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ AG = λ uﻭﻤﻨﻪ Gﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ . ﺒﻭﻀﻊ = λ
α + β +γ
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، Aﻭ . Cﻭﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﻓﻲ
ik
ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﻤﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﻝـ ، 1ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ
2
aw
، ABCﺒﺎﻝﻔﻌل Gﺘﺤﻘﻕ GA + GB + GC = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ 3 AG = AB + ACﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ' . AG = AAﺤﻴﺙ ' A
3
ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻀﻠﻊ ] . [ BCﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻋﻠﻰ ﺜﻠﺜﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻌﺩ ﻤﻥ Aﻭ ﺜﻠﺙ ﺍﻝﺒﻌﺩ ﻤﻥ ' Aﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
.ﻓﺈﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ }) { ( A , α ) ; ( B , β ) ; ( C , γ
af
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، Aﻭ Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ β ، αﻭ γﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل
ot
ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ.
w
ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Dﻭ Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ α + βﻭ γﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ α GA + β GB + γ GC = 0ﻭ ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻝﺩﻴﻴﻨﺎ α MA + β MB = (α + β ) MD
w
184
7 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 5
، B ، Aﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، Aﻭ Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻭﺍﻤل 1 ، 2ﻭ 5ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
C ﺤــل 2 + 1 + 5 = 8 :ﻭ 8 ≠ 0ﺇﺫﻥ Gﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ
ﻭ ﻭﺤﻴﺩ .ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، Aﻭ C
J G
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻭﺍﻤل 1 ، 2ﻭ 5ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ
om
2 GA + GB + 5GC = 0ﻭ ﺒﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ
GB = GA + ABﻭ GC = GA + ACﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ
A B 1 5
I K 8GA = − AB − 5 ACﻭﻤﻨﻪ AG = AB + AC
.c
8 8
5 1 1 5
AG = AB + ACﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ Gﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ABﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Iﻭ Kﺤﻴﺙ ٍ AI = ABﻭ . AK = AB
8 8 8 8
ik
5
ﻤﻥ Kﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( BCﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ACﻓﻲ Jﺇﺫﺍ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻁﺎﻝﻴﺱ . AJ = AC
8
aw
ﻭﻤﻨﻪ AG = AI + AJﺃﻱ AGﻫﻲ ﻤﺤﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ AIﻭ . AJ
(2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒـ u = − MA + MB + 2 MCﺃﻜﺘﺏ uﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ MGﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ M
ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ u = 2
.m
185
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 7
.
om
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ α MA + β MB + γ MC = (α + β + γ ) MGﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺨﺫﻨﺎ Mﻋﻠﻰ Oﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ :
α β γ
= OG OA + OB + α OA + β OB + γ OC = (α + β + γ ) OGﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ OC
α + β +γ α + β +γ α + β +γ
α β γ
.c
= xG xA + xB + ﻭﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ x :
α +β +λ α +β +λ α +β +λ C
α β γ
= yG yA + xB +
ik
y
α +β +λ α +β +λ α +β +λ C
α y A + β yB + γ yC α x + β xB + γ xC
= . yG xG = Aﻭ ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ :
aw α + β +γ α + β +γ
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ αﻭ βﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.ﻭ ﻜﺎﻥ :
α y A + β yB α x + β xB
= yG xG = Aﻭ ) B ( xB ; yB ) ، A ( x A ; y Aﻭ ) G ( xG ; yGﻓﺈﻥ
α +β α +β
af
( )
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ O; i , jﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) B ( −3;5 ) ، A (1; 2ﻭ ) . C ( 0; 2
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ −1 ، −1ﻭ 4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ :
ot
3 3
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ n An ،....، A3 ، A2 ، A1ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ α n ،.....، α 3 ، α 2 ، α1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺤﻴﺙ.
α1 + α 2 + α 3 + .... + α n ≠ 0ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ An ،....، A3 ، A2 ، A1ﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ
α n ،.....، α 3 ، α 2 ، α1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺤﻴﺙα1 GA1 + α 2 GA2 + α 3 GA3 + .... + α n GAn = 0 :
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺍﻝﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
186
7 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 9
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O; i , jﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) B ( −1; 4 ) ، A (1; 2ﻭ ). C ( −3;3
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
. ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) {( A, −1) ; ( B, −3) ; ( C , 2 (3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ H
om
B ، Aﻭ Cﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( AC ﺤــل(1:ﻝﻠﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ
−4 −2
ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ .ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ AB ﻭ AC ﻫﻤﺎ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( ACﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
1 2
( −2 ) × ( 1 ) − ( −4 ) × ( 2 ) = 6ﻭ 6 ≠ 0ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( ACﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ .ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ
.c
B ، Aﻭ Cﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻭ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .
(2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABCﻨﻀﻊ ) . G ( xG ; yG
ik
2+4+3 1−1 − 3
= . yGﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ xG = −1ﻭ . yG = 3 = xGﻭ
3 3
aw ﺇﺫﻥ ). G ( −1;3
−1 − 3 + 2 = −2 (3ﻭ −2 ≠ 0ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ Hﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻭﺤﻴﺩ ﻨﻀﻊ ) . H ( xH ; yH
= yH
( −1) × 2 + ( −3) × 4 + 2 × 3 = xHﻭ
)( −1) ×1 + ( −3) × ( −1) + 2 × ( −3
af
−2 −2
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ xH = 2 :ﻭ yH = 4ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ H ( 2; 4 ) :
ot
D J ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤل 2ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Cﻭ Dﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤل .1ﺇﺫﻥ C
w
ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ Aﻭ Bﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﺭﺠﺤﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 2 ، 2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻭﻤﻨﻪ I
G ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻭ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ Cﻭ Dﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Jﻤﺭﺠﺤﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 1،1
w
187
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 7
om
k
= . MG .1ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ α MA + β MB + γ MCﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ MGﺜﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ
α + β +γ
.2ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺘﺒﻌﺎ ﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( Γ kﻤﺤﺩﺩﺍ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ .
.c
ik
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ:
ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ MA − 2MB + 3MC ABC .1ﻤﺜﻠﺙ .ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ = 6 :
aw ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ .
ABC .5ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ . AB = AC = BC = αﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) ( Γﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ M
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ MA − 4MB + MC = MA − 2MB + MC :
w
3
GM = αﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( Γﻤﺤﺩﺩﺍ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻴﺯﺓ. ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ
2
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) . ( Γ
188
7
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
om
1
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Kﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ . BK = BC
3
C (1ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺸﻜﻼ ﺘﻭﻀﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J ، Iﻭ Kﻤﻊ ﺇﻋﻁﺎﺀ ﺘﺒﺭﻴﺭ
ﺍ ﻝﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ .ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺒﺨﺼﻭﺹ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ، ( CI
.c
) ( BJﻭ ) . ( AK
K
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J ، Iﻭ Kﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ
ik
I
A B
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ .
(3ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( BJ ) ، ( CIﻭ ) ( AKﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ .
aw
ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻭﻻﺭ ) :( Euler
af
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘﻠﻪ .ﻭ Oﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻴﻁﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
ot
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ' Aﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] B ' ، [ BCﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] C ' ، [ ACﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AB
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ . OH = OA + OB + OC :
.m
(5ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ G ، Oﻭ Hﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .ﺤﺩﺩ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ .
ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ G ، Oﻭ Hﻤﻨﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ
w
ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ G ، Oﻭ Hﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻭﻻﺭ ) (Droite d' Eulerﻝﻠﻤﺜﻠﺙ
. ABC
189
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 7
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ .
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Q ، Pﻭ Rﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
• . 2 PB + PC = 0
1
• . AQ = AC
3
• Rﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AB
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( BQ ) ، ( APﻭ ) ( CRﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ .
om
A
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ 2 PB + PC = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﻫﻲ
ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Bﻭ Cﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 2ﻭ 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
.c
R Q 1
G
ﻭ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ . BP = BC
3
ik
1
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Qﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ AQ = ACﻭ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ
B C 3
P
. 2QA + QC = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Qﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ C
aw
ﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 2ﻭ 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Rﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Rﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 1ﻭ 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ B ، Aﻭ Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ 2 ، 2ﻭ 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . 2GA + 2GB + GC = 0
af
.ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( AP Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) {( P,3) ; ( A, 2 ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
Gﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( BQ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) . {( Q,3) ; ( B, 2ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
.m
2 GR + RA + 2 GR + RB + GC = 0
4GR + 2 RA + 2 RB + GC = 0
w
ﻭ ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ . 2 RA + 2 RB = 0
ﺇﺫﺍ 4GR + GC = 0ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }). {( R, 4 ) ; ( C ,1
w
190
7 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺇﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ .
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻝﻴﻜﻥ ] [ AHﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﻠﻕ ﺒﺎﻝﻀﻠﻊ ] [ BCﺤﻴﺙ . AH = 4cm
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ B ، Aﻭ Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ 1 ، 2ﻭ 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
M (2ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .ﻋﻴﻥ ﻁﻭﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﺤﻴﺙ . u = 2 MA − MB − MC :
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ . 2 MA + MB + MC = u :
.ﺤﻴﺙ nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ }) {( A, 2 ) ; ( B, n ) ; (C , n (4ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Gnﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ B ، Aﻭ C
om
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gnﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝـ . n
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ Gnﻴﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AH
(5ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ 2MA + nMB + nMC = n u :ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Γ n
.c
ﺘﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ .ﻨﺴﻤﻲ Γ nﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ .
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ AGnﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
ik
4x
= ) . f ( xﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ . [ 0, + (6ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺤﻴﺙ :
x +1
(7ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ . AGnﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ . Γ n
aw
Gﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AH 2 + 1 + 1 = 4 (1ﻭ 4 ≠ 0ﺇﺫﻥ Gﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻭﺤﻴﺩ 2GA + GB + GC = 0 .
( )
u = − AB + AC (2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . u = 8
af
A G0 ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ MG = 2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Gﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ .2
2 + n + n = 2 + 2n (4ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ Gn nﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻭﺤﻴﺩ .
( )
2Gn A + nGn B + nGnC = 0ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ( 2 + 2n ) Gn A + n AB + AC = 0
.m
n
< 0ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝـ . nﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ Gﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AH <1
1+ n
B H (5ﻨﺩﺨل Gﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ MB ، MAﻭ MCﻭ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ C ( 2 + 2n ) MG n = 8n :
w
(7ﻤﻥ lim f ( x ) = 4ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ . lim AGn = 4ﻭﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ Γ nﺘﺅﻭل ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Hﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 4
∞n →+ ∞x →+
191
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 7
om
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﺩﺭﺝ ) ∆ ( .ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺯﺭ
) ( ∆1ﻭ ) ( ∆ 2ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻴﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻴﻥ
ﻭ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﻴﻥ ﻤﺒﺩﺀﺍﻫﻤﺎ Aﻭ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ) ( Dﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( ∆1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ B ′ﻭ ﻴﻘﻁﻊ
.c
) ( ∆ 2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ′ﻴﺘﻡ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ A ′ﻭ B ′ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل
( .ﻨﺴﻤﻲ Gﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( D
ik
ﺍﻝﺯﺭ
ﻭ ) ∆ ( ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻭﺠﻭﺩﻫﺎ.ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﹻ aﺇﻝﻰ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
aw A ′ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( ∆ 2ﻭ ﺒﹻ bﺇﻝﻰ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ B ′ﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( ∆1
• .1ﻗﻡ ﺒﺘﺤﺭﻴﻙ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ A ′ﻭ B ′ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ ABﻭ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ:
af
AB ′ = 1ﻭ BA ′ = 2
GA 1
• ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ= :
ot
GB 2
• ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 2ﻭ .1
• .2ﻗﻡ ﺒﺘﺤﺭﻴﻙ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ A ′ﻭ B ′ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻻ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ ABﻭ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ:
.m
GB
• ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 1ﻭ .-3
.3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻤﺎ ﺴﺒﻕ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺜﻘﻠﺘﻴﻥ.
w
•
ﻻ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺇﻝﻰ ] [ ABﻭ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ Bﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ . A •
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺇﻝﻰ ] [ ABﻭ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ Aﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ . B •
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺇﻝﻰ ] [ ABﻭ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ Bﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ . A •
. Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }){ ( A , −2 ) , ( B ,3 ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
192
7 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﺃﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 10ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ 1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) {( A, 2); ( B,1ﻓﺈﻥ:
ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 11ﺇﻝﻰ 17 1
AG = AB
m 11ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .ﻤﺭﺠﺢ )( B,5m − 2) ، ( A,3m 3
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ] [ ABﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭ Cﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ 2
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ:
1 AC = 3 ABﻓﺈﻥ Aﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Bﻭ C
≠m (3 m ≠ 0 (2 m ≠ 1 (1
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 1ﻭ -3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
om
4
12ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) {( A, 2);( B,3ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺤﻴﺙ: ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘﻠﻪ Gﻭ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ I 3
3
5 AG = 3 AB (3 2GA = 3 AB (2 AG = AB (1 ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻓﺈﻥ Aﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ
2 }){(G,3);( I , 2
G 13ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) ، {( A,1); ( B,3ﺇﺫﻥ Aﻫﻭ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ
.c
4ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ABCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﻓﺈﻥ Aﻤﺭﺠﺢ
ﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ:
ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }){( B,1); ( D,1);(C , −1
}){( B,3);(G, −4)} (2 ، {( B, 4);(G, 3 (1
ik
B ، A 5ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ
{( B,3);(G, 4)} (3
ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ .ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ:
14
aw
4 AG − 7 BG − 3GC = 7 AB + 3 AC
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ،ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ 6ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ:
{( A, −1); (C , 4)} (2 ، {( A, −1); ( D,1)} (1 AG = AB + 3 ACﻓﺈﻥ Gﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ
}). {( A, −1); ( B,1);(C , −3
af
{( A, 2);( D,1)} (3
15ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) {( A, −2); ( B,3);(C , −1ﻫﻭ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ABCD 7ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻤﺤﺩﺏ ﻭ Oﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻗﻁﺭﻴﻪ.
Oﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، A
ot
}){( A, 6); ( B, −3); (C , 2 (2 G ، B ، A 10ﻭ ' Gﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ
193
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 7
ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ
1
2GA − 3GB = 3BA (6 BG = AB (5 [ AB] 18ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ AB = 8cm
5
A 22ﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ G .ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, αﻭ ) ( B, βﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ
ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ .ﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ αﻭ βﺤﻴﺙ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, αﻭ ) ( B, β 1 1
= αﻭ =β α = 4 (1ﻭ (2 β = 6
3 6
3GB − 2 AB = 0 (1
α = 3 (3ﻭ α = 3009 (4 β = −2ﻭ β = 2006
−2 AB + 3GA − 5GB = 0 (2
A 19ﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
om
2
2 AB = GB (3 ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
3
B (4ﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ Gﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ A }){(A , 4); (B ,5 (1
}){( A, 2); ( B, −3 23ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ Cﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ }){(A ,8);(B , −5 (2
.c
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺃﻱ ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ Aﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ ؟ Bﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ؟ }){(A , −6); (B , 2 (3
}){( A,3);(C ,1 24ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ Bﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ 1 1
A , − ; B , − (4
ik
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺃﻱ ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ Aﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ ؟ Cﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ؟ 2 3
3
(1 28ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A,1ﻭ B, −
2
(5
w
1
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, −1ﻭ B, −
2
( 2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ' GGﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ AB A 21ﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .ﺍﺫﻜﺭ ﺇﻥ
w
29ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ B' .ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, −2ﻭ )(C ,1 ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ ﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ
' Aﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, 2ﻭ )( B, −3 ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
' Cﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) (C , −1ﻭ )( B,3 5GA − 3GB = 0 (2 2GA + 2GB = 0 (1
3
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل. AG = − AB (4 3GA − 4GB = 2 AB (3
4
194
7 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﻭﻋﻥ Pﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ . C (2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻨﻪ ﻤﻬﻤﺎ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ:
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( NC ) ، ( AMﻭ )( BP − MA' − MB' + 2 MC' = 0
ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ. (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ' B' ، Aﻭ ' Cﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
34ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ I 30ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ G1 .ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, 2ﻭ )(C , −3
3 1 ﻭ G2ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A,1ﻭ )(C , −3
ﻭ Jﺤﻴﺙ Iﻤﺭﺠﺢ A, − ﻭ B,
2 2 (1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل.
ﻭ Jﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, 2ﻭ )( D, −3
(2ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ AG1ﻭ BG2ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ABﻭ AC
om
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل. (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) ( BG2ﻭ ) ( AG1ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ
1
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ CI = AB − BC :ﻭ CJ = 2 AD − DC 31ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ L .ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, 2ﻭ )(C ,1
2
(3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ I ، Cﻭ Jﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ. Mﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A,1ﻭ )( B, 2
.c
(4ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Kﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ DJﻭ Lﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ: Nﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) (C ,1ﻭ )( B, −4
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ Bﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) (C ,1ﻭ )( N ,3
AB = BL
ik
ﺃ -ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Cﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ]. [ KL (2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Mﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ LN
ﺏ -ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ( KLﻭ ) ( BDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ (3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Iﻭ Jﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺘﻴﻥ ][CL
aw
ABC 35ﻤﺜﻠﺙ. ﻭ ] [CNﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ Cﻤﺭﺠﺢ )( D,1 ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ LMJIﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ O
(4ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ E ، Dﻭ Fﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ. (2ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ Kﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Bﻭ . C
B ، A 36ﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ mﻋﺩﺩ ABC 33ﻤﺜﻠﺙ N ، M .ﻭ Pﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻤﻥ ] ، [ BC
ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ. ] [ ABﻭ ] [ ACﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﺒﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل
w
2
195
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 7
2 BA + 3BG − 5GC = 0 (2
ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ
BG = 2 BA − BC (3
B ، A 38ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ
2 AG = AB + AC (4
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺠﺩ( ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, β ) ، ( A, αﻭ ) (C , γﻓﻲ
1 2
CG = CA − CB (5 ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
3 3
B ، A 42ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ D .ﻨﻘﻁﺔ γ = 1 ، β = 6 ، α = 4 (1
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ. 1 1 1
γ = ، β = ، α = (2
om
2 3 6
ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ Aﺜﻡ ﻋﻥ Bﺜﻡ ﻋﻥ Cﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ
γ = −4 ، β = −2 ، α = −1 (3
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
γ = 3 ، β = 0 ، α = −1 (4
}){( A,1);( B,1); (C , −1 D (1ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
ABC 39ﻤﺜﻠﺙ.ﺍﺫﻜﺭ ﺇﻥ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ ﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
}){( A, 2);( B,3);(C , −6 D (2ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
.c
ﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
}){( A, −3);( B, 7);(C , −14 D (3ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
2GA + 2GB + 2GC = 0 (1
ik
1 1 5 5GA − 3GB − GC = 0 (2
D (4ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ A, ; B, ; C , −
2 4 8
3GA − 4GB = 2 AB + AC (3
}){( A, −3);( B,1);(C ,3
aw
D (5ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ 3 1
AG = − AB + AC (4
{( A, }
D (6ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ )2);( B, 2); (C , −3 2 4 2
1
ABC 43ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻭ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ BG = AB − AC (5
2
}){( A,1); ( B, 2);(C ,1
af
2GA − 3GB − 4GC = 3BA (6
(1ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺸﻜﻼ ﻤﺒﻴﻨﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . G B ،ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ A 40
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ β ، αﻭ γﺤﻴﺙ Aﺘﻜﻭﻥ
ot
(1
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝـ )( B, 2) ، ( A,1 Fﻤﺭﺠﺢ }){( A,1); ( B, −1);(C , −1 (2
ﻭ )(C , −4
Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ }){( A, 0);( B, 2);(C ,1 (3
w
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺸﻜﻼ.
ABC 41ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻭ Gﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ.
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J ، Iﻭ Gﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
ﺠﺩ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ β ، αﻭ γﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ
B ، A 46ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
) ( B, β) ، ( A, αﻭ ) (C , γﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, −3ﻭ ). ( B, 2
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
Hﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A,1ﻭ ). (C , −2
BG = −3BA + 2GC (1
196
7 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ BCﻴﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ). ( ML Kﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B,1) ، ( A, −1ﻭ )(C , −1
53ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﻭ Hﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒـ: (1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ H ، Gﻭ Kﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺌﻬﺎ.
2
AH = AB (2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ H ، Gﻭ Kﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ
3
ABC 47ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ BC
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Iﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }){( B,1); (C , 2
( )
1
ﻭ jﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }){( A,1); (C , 4 (1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ AI = AB + AC
2
ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) {( A,1); ( B, 2);(C , 4ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ (2ﻫل Aﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B,1) ، (C ,1ﻭ ) ( I , −2؟
om
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( BJ ) ، ( AIﻭ ) (CHﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ . G ABC 48ﻤﺜﻠﺙ .
ABC 54ﻤﺜﻠﺙ G .ﻤﺭﺠﺢ (1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Iﻭ Jﺤﻴﺙ:
ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }). {( A, 2); ( B,1);(C ,1 1 1
AI = AB + ACﻭ AJ = AB + AC
.c
2 2
(1ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ BC
(2ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ Iﺜﻡ Jﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ C
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ. GB + GC = 2GI :
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ.
ik
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Iﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ
49ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ، ABCﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ )، ( A,1
ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ .
) ( B, 4ﻭ )(C , −3
aw
(3ﺍﺴﺘﺨﻠﺹ.
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, 4ﻭ )(C , −3
ABC 55ﻤﺜﻠﺙ B ' .ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ ACﻭ ' C
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ AI
ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ]. [ AB
B ، A 50ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
af
Iﻭ Jﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
2 1 (1ﻫل ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺘﻴﻥ }){( A, 2); ( B, −1
BI = BCﻭ BJ = BC
3 3 ﻭ }) {( A, −3);(C , −1ﺘﻘﺒﻼﻥ ﻤﺭﺠﺤﻴﻥ؟ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ
ot
2 IA + IB = 0
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( AGﻭ ) ( BCﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ.
Gﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( ICﺤﻴﺙ . 3GI − 2GC = 0
ABC D 52ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل I .ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ ABﻭ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ
w
197
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 7
ABC 57ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘﻠﻪ G
(1ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) Hﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل Kﻭ .( L Hﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ Gﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ BC
(2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ Hﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Gﻭ Dﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ (1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ
ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ.
ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ]. [ HA
(3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ Hﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Jﻭ Kﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ . HG = HB + HC
ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ.
(3ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ HAﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ
(4ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ Hﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Iﻭ Lﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ
HBﻭ ، HCﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ
ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ.
om
Hﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ B ، Aﻭ Cﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ
(5ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ.
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ.
ABC 60ﻤﺜﻠﺙ.ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J ، Iﻭ Lﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
ABC 58ﻤﺜﻠﺙ I .ﻭ Gﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ:
(k ∈ ℝ) AL = k AB ، CJ = kCA ، BI = k BC 1 1
AI = ACﻭ . BG = BI
.c
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ Gﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABC 3 3
1 ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺸﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل = k
ik
3 ) ( B, 6) ، ( A, 2ﻭ ). (C ,1
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ GI + GJ + GL = 0 :
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Iﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, 2ﻭ ) (C ,1ﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
aw
(3ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺜﻠﺙ IJL؟
ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ . 2GA + GC
ABC 61ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘﻠﻪ . Gﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، I ، F ، E
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, 2ﻭ ) ، ( I ,1ﺜﻡ ﺃﻥ
K ، Jﻭ Lﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
. 2GB + GI = 0
1 2 1
af
، AE = AC ، AL = AB ، AK = AB (3ﺃ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ 2GA + 6GB + GC = 3GI + 6GB
3 3 3
2 1 2 ﺏ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ . 2GA + 6GB + GC = 0ﺍﺴﺘﺨﻠﺹ
BI = BC ، BJ = BC ، AF = AC
ot
198
7 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
MA + 2 MB = -MA + 4 MB ABC 62ﻤﺜﻠﺙ .ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ Iﻭ Jﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل.
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺤﻴﻥ Gﻭ Hﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺘﻴﻥ Gﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [CIﻴﻬﺩﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ
}) {( A,1); ( B, 2ﻭ }) {( A, −1); ( B, 4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ. ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ G ، Aﻭ Jﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ
om
B ، A 66ﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ
3 (1ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ Iﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ ، Bﺜﻡ ﻋﻥ J
. AB = 3cmﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Kﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ AK = − AB
2 ﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Bﻭ . C
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ Kﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ (2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Hﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, 2) ، ( A,1ﻭ )(C ,3
.c
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ. ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﺒﺘﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ Hﻫﻲ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ، E1ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ IC؟
ik
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ . 5MA − 3MB = AB ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ Gﻭ Hﻤﻨﻁﺒﻘﺘﺎﻥ.
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ، E2ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ (3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ G ، Aﻭ Jﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
aw ABC 63ﻤﺜﻠﺙ I .ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, −2ﻭ )( B, −1
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ . 5MA − 3MB = 2 MB
Jﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, −1ﻭ )(C , 2
B ، A 67ﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ
( B, −1) ، ( A, −2) Gﻭ )(C , 2
ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }). {( A, 2); ( B,1
af
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﺒﺎﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، A
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ . G
Jﻭ Gﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ I ، Cﻭ Gﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ؟
(2ﺃ -ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ، E1ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ
ot
199
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 7
B ، A 69ﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
5 3
= − MA + MB − MC
2 . AB = 10
ﺏ( ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ ACﻴﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) . ( E (1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }){( A,1); ( B, 4
ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) ( E ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }). {( A, 4); ( B,1
ABC 73ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ I . Aﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ BC (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ، Eﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
) (Γﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Aﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺸﻤل I ﺤﻴﺙ . MA + 4 MB = 10
Gﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) (Γﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻗﻁﺭﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ I
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ' ، Eﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
om
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, −1) ، ( A, 4ﻭ ). (C , −1
ﺤﻴﺙ . MA + 4 MB = 4MA + MB
(2ﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ αﻭ βﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ Aﻤﺭﺠﺢ
ABC 70ﻤﺜﻠﺙ G .ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
) ( B, β) ، (G , 2ﻭ ). (C , α
}). {( A,1); ( B, −2);(C ,3
.c
(3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
2 MG + MB + MC = 2 BC؟
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' Mﺤﻴﺙ MM ' = MA − 2 MB + 3MC
ik
74ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﺤﻴﺙ AB = 8cmﻭ BC = 4cm
(2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
ﻭ . AC = 6cm
ﻭ u = 2 MA − MB − MC
aw
(1ﺃ -ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Iﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }). {( A,1); ( B, 4
ﺃ -ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . I
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' Mﺤﻴﺙ ' . u = MM
ﺏ -ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Jﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }). {( B, 2); (C , −1
ﺏ -ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ، Eﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
af
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . J
. MA − 2 MB+3MC = u ﺤﻴﺙ:
(3ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ Gﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
ABC 71ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ Aﻭﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ
}){( A,1);( B, 4); (C , −2
ot
AB = 4cm
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﻫﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) (CIﻭ ) . ( AJ
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) ( Eﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
.m
(4ﻋﻴﻥ ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
MA − MB − 2 MC = 4
. MA + 4 MB = 5 2MB − MC
(1ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ Gﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ )( B, −1) ، ( A,1
(5ﻋﻴﻥ ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
ﻭ ) (C , −2ﻻﺴﺘﺨﻼﺹ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ MA − MB − 2 MC
w
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ E1ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ABC 72ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ .ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ 5cm
ﺤﻴﺙ3MA + 5MB + 2 MC = 6 MA + 4 MC : (1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B,1) ، ( A, −1ﻭ )، (C , −1
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ E2ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ABCGﻤﻌﻴﻥ.
ﺤﻴﺙ3MA + 5MB + 2 MC = 3 AC : (2ﺃ( ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﻹﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ، ( E
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ E3ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
200
7 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
2MA + MB+MC = - 2MA + MB+MC ﺤﻴﺙ3MA − 5MB + 2MC = 6 MA + 4 MC :
om
-ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ AG = 2k DB ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ
(3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Gﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ kﻴﻤﺴﺢ ℝ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ) u ( Mﻭ ) v ( Mﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﻭﻴﻠﺔ.
B ، A 80ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ B ، A 77ﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ I .ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ ABﻝﻜل
.c
][ −1;1 ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻨﺭﻓﻕ:
ik
] [ BC (1ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ I ، Cﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ '' Mﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }){( A,1); ( B,1);( M , −1
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ' Mﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Mﺒﺎﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ.
ﻭﺃﻨﺸﺊ G1ﻭ . G−1
aw
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ '' Mﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Mﺒﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][ −1;1 (2ﺒﺭﺭ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ Gﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ k
− k ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ.
. AGk = 2 ﻭ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ BC :
k +1 (3ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ A
af
(3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Nﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) . ( BC ﻭﺘﺸﻤل : I
ﻫل ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻨﻁﺒﻕ Nﻋﻠﻰ Gk؟ ﻋﻠل. ﺃ( ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺘﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' M؟
ot
(4ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ −1;1ﺒـ: ﺏ( ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺘﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ '' M؟
−x ABC 78ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ Aﺤﻴﺙ :
= ). f ( x
x2 + 1
.m
. AB = AC = 4cm
(5ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Gkﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﺴﺢ kﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][ −1;1
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
(1 81ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ABCﺤﻴﺙ AC = 15 ، AB = 9
}). {( A, 2); ( B,1);(C ,1
w
201
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 7
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ : ﺠـ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' Mﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺒﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ
(1ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ∆( ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . k
ﺤﻴﺙ MA + MB + MC = 4 MD − ME (3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ' Mﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﺒﺎﺴﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ B؟
(2ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) (Γﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
82ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, 2) ، ( A,1ﻭ )(C ,3
ﺤﻴﺙ MA − MB + MC = MD − ME
ﻭ Jﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A,1ﻭ ). ( B, 2
ABC 85ﻤﺜﻠﺙ I .ﻭ Jﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
om
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J ، Cﻭ Gﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺤﺩﺩ
1
AI = −2 ABﻭ CJ = CI ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (CJ
5
(2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ، Gﻋﻴﻥ ) ( Eﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ M
(1ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ Jﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ . C
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ MA + 2 MB + 3MC
.c
(2ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( BJﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ACﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ . G
ﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻤﻊ . MA + MC
ﺤﺩﺩ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ Gﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AC (3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ( Eﻭ ) ( ABﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ.
ik
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ . 83ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﺤﻴﺙ ، AC = 12cm
3MA − 2 MB = MA − MI
aw AB = 10cm
86ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﻭ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ . ﻭ . CB = 8cm
(1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻡ ﻝـ kﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ Gkﻝـ ) ، ( A, k (1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, 2) ، ( A,1ﻭ )(C ,1
(3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ABCG1ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ .
NA + 2 NB + NC = NA − 2 NB + NC
(4ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Gkﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺘﻐﻴﺭ kﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ﺃ( ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ Bﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) . ( E2
.m
202
7 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
(4ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ K ، C ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ
B ، A 88ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ Gﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭ Gﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ؟.ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ
ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ .ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ Gﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ 93 ، Aﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ) A(−1; 2ﻭ )B(2; −2
.1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝـ ) ( A,3ﻭ ). ( B, 7 Bﻭ ، Cﺜﻡ ﺠﺩ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ Gﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻰ.
.2ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ OGﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ OAﻭ . OB ، 2GA − 3GB − 5GC = 0 (1ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ( A; AB, AC
.3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) (O; i, j؟ ، −4GA + GB − 3GC = 0 (2ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ( B; BA, BC
(1 94ﻤﺜل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ )B(−3, 4) ، A(1, 2 1 7
om
، GA + GB − GC = 0 (3ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ )(C ; CA, CB
ﻭ ). C (−2,5 2 2
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 88ﺇﻝﻰ 96ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ
(2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, −2) ، ( A, −3ﻭ )(C , 4
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O; i, j
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . G
(1 89ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) A(4;3ﻭ )B(−1; −2
.c
(3ﻫل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( BGﻴﻤﺭ ﺒﻤﺒﺩﺃ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ O؟ ﻋﻠل.
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, −2ﻭ )( B, −3
(1 95ﻤﺜل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) (O; I, Jﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ )، A(2,1
(3ﺃ( ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ )C (5; 4
ik
5
) C (5, 7) ، B(−1,5ﻭ D 1, 1
2 ﺏ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ AC = − AB
aw
(1ﻋﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ
5
(4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ aﻭ bﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ Cﻤﺭﺠﺢ
ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Bﻭ C
ﻝـ ) ( A, aﻭ )( B, b
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
(1 90ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) A(1;3ﻭ )B(2;1
(3ﻫل ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﻤﺭﺠﺢ
af
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﺭﺠﺢ )( A,1
) ( A,1ﻭ ) ( B, x؟ ﻋﻠل.
ﻭ ) ( B, −3ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Nﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, −2ﻭ )( B,1
96ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، Aﻭ Dﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ
ot
203
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 7
ﻝﻠﻬﻴﺩﺭﻭﺠﻴﻥ . 1 97ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ
-ﻤﺜل ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻌﻁﺎﻝﺔ Gﺠﺯﻱﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺀ . ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ). (6;0) ، (2; 4ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ' Bﻭ Kﺤﻴﺙ ' B
-ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ . OG ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ACﻭ Kﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ]' . [OB
100ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ABCD (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ' Bﻭ . K
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ) ( A; i, jﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ( I (2ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ). (2; 0ﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ αﻭ β
ﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ Kﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝـ ) ( A, αﻭ ). ( I , β
om
(3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ Jﻤﺭﺠﺢ )(O, 2) ( A,1
(4ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ( IJﻭ ) ( ACﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ
ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻌﻁﺎﻝﺔ
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﻜﻭﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺠﺴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺴﻴﻥ ،
.c
ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻭﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﺜﻘل ﻫﺫﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﺴﻤﻴﻥ
ﻤﺭﻓﻘﻴﻥ ﺒﻜﺘﻠﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ )ﺃﻭ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ(ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
ik
98ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ،ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺠﺴﻡ Aﻜﺘﻠﺘﻪ M Aﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ
101ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ،ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻌﻁﺎﻝﺔ G
. 100g
aw
ﻝﻠﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺴﺔ ABCDEFﺤﻴﺙ
AB = AF = 3 AI = 3 AJ
ﻭ Oﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ IBCDﻭ Hﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ
af
ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ . AIEF
ot
ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ:
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ G :ﺘﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (OH
w
204
7 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
102ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ) :ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻌﺎﺕ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺔ(
om
ﻤﻨﺯﻭﻉ ﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ) OBCﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﻠﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ(
ﺼﻔﺎﺌﺢ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻁﻭل
ﻀﻠﻊ ﻜل ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻫﻭ 10cm
ﻤﺭﺍﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﻫﻲ K ، Jﻭ L
.c
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻭ ﻜﺘﻠﻬﺎ
m2 = 300 g ، m1 = 100 gﻭ m3 = 600 g
ik
ﺠـ( ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ Pﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﻫﻭ ﻗﻁﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ
aw
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . ( A; i, j
104ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ Pﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺴﺔ ﻭﻤﻜﻭﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ
ﺍﺘﺤﺎﺩ ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ABCﻭ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﻴﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ
af
AB = 6cmﻭ Oﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ BC
G1ﻭ G2ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻌﻴﻥ ﻭ G3ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ
ﺩ( ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﻜل ﺤﺭﻑ T
ot
ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ 8cmﻭ ﻨﻨﺯﻉ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ BIJKﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻁﻭل (1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ G2 ، G1ﻭ G3
ﻀﻠﻌﻪ 4 cmﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﺒﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل (2ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ Iﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) (OA؟
w
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ Pﺒﻁر (3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Iﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) (G1 , 2ﻭ ) (G2 , 2ﻭ )(G3 ,1
(4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ . OI
w
205
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 7
ﻤﺴــﺎﺌل 107ﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻌﺩﻨﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺴﺔ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺘﻬﺎ I
109ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ Ménélaüs ﺴﻤﻜﻬﺎ ﺜﺎﺒﺕ ،ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ Rﻤﺴﺘﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﻨﻬﺎ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ Q ، P . ABCﻭ Rﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ R
ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Cﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻩ = ' R
) ( AC ) ، ( BCﻭ ) ( ABﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ. 4
R
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ q ، pﻭ rﺤﻴﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ = OC
2
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ Pﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ ﻝـ ) ( B,1ﻭ ) (C , − p
ﻭ Qﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ ﻝـ ) (C ,1ﻭ )( A, − q
om
ﻭ Rﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ ﻝـ ) ( A,1ﻭ ) . ( B, −r
( )
(2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ، A; AB, ACﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ
Q، Pﻭ .R (1ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ Aﻭ ' Aﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺼﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻴﻥ
.c
(3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Q ، Pﻭ Rﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻁﺭﻴﻬﻤﺎ Rﻭ ' Rﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ . pqr = 1 ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ O :ﻤﺭﺠﺢ )' ( I , A − Aﻭ )' . (C , A
ik
(4ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ R :ﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ Bﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ Aﻭ Q (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ Iﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝـ Oﻭ . C
ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] ( RQ ) . [ ACﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( BCﻓﻲ ). Pﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل(. (3ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺸﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل R = 4 cmﻭ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ
aw
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( BC؟ ﺍﻝﻌﻁﺎﻝﺔ I
108ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﻴﺯﻴﺎﺀ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ'' :ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺘﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺠﺴﻤﻴﻥ ﺼﻠﺒﻴﻥ
S1ﻭ S 2ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ C1ﻭ C2ﻭ
af
ﻜﺘﻠﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ m1ﻭ . m2ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻌﻁﺎﻝﺔ Gﻝﻬﺫﻩ
ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ m1 GC1 + m2 GC2 = 0
ot
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . G ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﻜل ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل .ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ S1ﻭ S 2ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ
(1ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ . ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ C1ﻭ C2ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻠﻴﻥ.
w
(2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ(1) ....... GA + GB + GC = 0 : ﺃ( ﻨﺴﻤﻲ m1ﻜﺘﻠﺔ S1ﻭ m2ﻜﺘﻠﺔ S 2
(3ﺃ( ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Kﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B,1) ، ( A,1ﻭ )(C , −1 ﺇﺫﻥ ) × k aﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ m1 =( S1
w
ﺏ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ Kﻫﻲ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) (G ,3ﻭ )(C , −2 ﻭ ) × k aﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ . m2 = ( S2ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ ؟
(3ﺃ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) (1ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻤﺭﺠﺢ )، ( D,1 ﺏ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ، P
w
206
7 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﺏ( ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, −1) ، ( A, 2ﻭ ). (C , 2 (5ﺃ( ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻡ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ I m
ﺠـ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( BJ ﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) {( D, m);(G ,3); (C , −2ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﹰﺍ ؟
ﺩ( ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ' GMﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . GM ﺏ( ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ I mﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ،ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
ﻫـ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل M 1
= DI m DK
m +1
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' . M
1
(3ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ] . [ BC ֏ f : xﻭﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺠـ( ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
x +1
ﺃ( ﻤﺎ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( E1ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ' M ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ)ﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ(
om
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ k = −1؟ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ) ( E1 ﺩ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ I mﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﺴﺢ m
ﺏ( ﻤﺎ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( E2ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ' M ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ }ℝ − {−1
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ k = 2؟ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ) ( E2 ABC 111ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ،ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻕ ، mﻨﺭﻓﻕ
.c
) 113ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ( ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gmﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }). {( A, 2);( B, m);(C , −m
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ.ﻤﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
BACﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ BCﻓﻲ . I ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ BC
ik
ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝـ ] [ AIﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﺒـ Cﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( ABﻓﻲ . D (1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ،ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﺴﺢ mﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ، ℝ
(1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ADCﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ . ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝـ Gmﻫﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ∆ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ.
aw
IB AB (2ﺃ( ﺃﻨﺸﺊ G2ﻭ . G−2
= ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ :
IC AC
ﺏ( ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ m ≠ 2ﻭ . m ≠ −2ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Gmﻨﻘﻁﺔ
(2ﻨﻀﻊ AC = b ، AB = cﻭ BC = a
ﻤﻥ ∆ ﺘﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ G2 ، Aﻭ . G−2
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ
af
ﺒـ . J
) ( B, b) ، ( A, aﻭ ) (C , c
(3ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( A; AB, ACﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ mﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ I
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥaOA + bOB + cOC = aOA + (b + c)OJ :
.m
207
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 7
KB tan γɵ
= (1ﺃ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ : ) 114ﻤﺭﻜﺯﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻤﺔ ﺩﺍﺨل ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ،ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻼﻗﻲ
KC tan β
ﺍﻹﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ،ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ (
(C , tan γɵ ) ( B, tan β ﺏ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ Kﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ )
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ . AC = b ، BC = a AB = c
ﺠـ( ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ ACﻓﻲ L
Iﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻤﺔ ﺩﺍﺨل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻭ Hﻨﻘﻁﺔ
ﻭ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ ABﻓﻲ M
ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭ Oﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻴﻁﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ
-ﺃﻋﻁ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻤﻤﺎﺜﻠﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Lﻭ . M
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺇﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺩ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) Hﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ(ﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝـ :
β ، αﻭ γﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ) Iﺃﻭ Hﺃﻭ ( Oﻤﺭﺠﺤﹰﺎ
( B, tan βﻭ ) (C , tan γɵ
) ) ، ( A, tan α
om
ﻝـ ) ( B, β) ، ( A, αﻭ ) (C , γ
] [ AC ] ، [ BCﻭ ] [ AB N ، M (2ﻭ Pﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ
(Iﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻤﺔ ﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ . ﻤﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
BACﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ BCﻓﻲ ' ، Aﺇﺫﻥ ' A
ﺃ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻫﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ
ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) . ( ACﻨﺭﻤﺯ
.c
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . MNP
ﺇﻝﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒـ . d
ﺏ( ﻋﺒﺭ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻥ Oﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝـ N ، Mﻭ . P
hﻁﻭل ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A
) ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ (1ﺩ( (.
ik
ﺠـ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ Oﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻴﻁﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABC
ﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ B ، Aﻭ Cﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ.
aw
(I 115ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
3
f ( x) = x 2 − 6 x + 8
2
( )
ﻭ ) (C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O; i, j
af
ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ G1ﻭ G2ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﻥ AKL ﻝـ ) ( B , bﻭ ) . (C , c
ﻭ OAL ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ ACﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' B (2ﻤﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ABC
(1ﺃ( ﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻼﻥ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﻝـ Kﻭ Lﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ ABﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' C
ﻭ ﻤﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ACB
w
ﻭ . OAL ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ:
(3ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ OAKLﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺴﺔ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺘﻬﺎ . G ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ،ﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ABCﻜل ﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎﻩ ﺤﺎﺩﺓ.
ﺃ( ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ kﺍﺤﺩﺜﻴﻲ . G ﻭ ACB = γ
ABC = β ، BACﻨﻀﻊ = α
ﺏ( ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ BCﻓﻲ . K
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Gﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺘﻐﻴﺭ kﻓﻲ . I
208
8
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
om
ال
اص اوا ا
ت
اوا.
.c
أ"س زاو
.
$%د' ا&
) ا* ,-.ام
ik
aw و ./*/ )01 )2 34 ,-.
)2د5ت و 'ا &ت ./*/
af
ﻭﻝﺩ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﻓﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻭﺯﺠﺎﻨﻲ ﺒﺒﻭﺯﺠﺎﻥ ﻀﻭﺍﺤﻲ ﺨﺭﺍﺴﺎﻥ .ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻨﺘﻘل ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﺒﻐﺩﺍﺩ.
ot
ﻤﻥ ﺨﻼل ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ ﻓﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻀﺢ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﻓﺎ ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﺤﺭﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻤﺭ.
.m
ﻗﺩﻡ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﻓﺎ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻓﻲ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻭﻴﺔ .ﻗﺎﻡ
ﺒﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺠﺩﺍﻭل ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺴﺒﻘﻭﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺩﻡ ﺠﺩﺍﻭل ﺠﺩﻴﺩﺓ ﻤﺘﻌﻘﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺠﻴﻭﺏ ﺘﺴﻤﺢ
ﺒﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ sin 30°ﺇﻝﻰ .10−8ﻗﺎﻡ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﺘﻁﻭﻴﺭ ﻤﻔﻬﻭﻤﻲ
w
ﺍﻝﻅل ﻭ ﺍﻝﻅل ﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻤﻨﺠﺯﺍ ﺠﺩﻭﻝﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺃﻭل ﻤﻥ ﻋﺭﻑ ﻤﻘﻠﻭﺒﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﻴﺏ
w
ﻝﻘﺩ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﺩﺩﺍ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺌﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻭﺭ
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻁﺭﺓ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻁﺭﻗﺎ ﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ...
ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﻓﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻭﺯﺠﺎﻨﻲ ﻨﺫﻜﺭ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﻓﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺃﻭل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﺴﻭﺭ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍ.
940ﻡ 998 /ﻡ
209
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 8
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
om
19π 7π 7π 5π 3π
ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺍﺩﻴﺎﻥ
24 12 24 12 8
.c
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
ik
Jy
1 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ) ( Cﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ O
F E
aw ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 1ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻜﺱ ﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ
B A ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺔ x .ﻫﻭ ﻗﻴﺱ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺍﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
. IOA
ﺒﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ Aﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ.
x (1ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ A؟
af
O0 1I x
(2ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ A؟
(3ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ A؟
ot
G H
(6ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ E؟
(7ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ E؟
(8ﺃﻨﻘل ﻭ ﺃﻜﻤل ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻵﺘﻲ:
w
x− −x π +x −x −x +x π −x ﻗﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
2 2 2 2
w
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ
5
.π − (9ﻀﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺼﻭﺭﺓ x
2
210
8 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
l
) ( Cﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 1ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺏ
B A ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻜﺱ ﻹﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺔ .
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ) ( Cﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ( .ﺒﺘﺤﺭﻙ Aﻨﺤﻭ . B
ﻁﻭﻝﻪ . l
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺏ ) ﻝﻠﻤﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ( ﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻝﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ Aﻭ Bﻗﻭﺴﺎ AB
om
O
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ OAﻭ . OB ﺍﺼﻁﻼﺤﺎ ﻨﻘﻭل ﺍﻥ lﻗﻴﺱ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ AOB
ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ . OA, OB = l ( )
ﻀﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ) ( Cﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ F ، E ، D ، Cﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ :
.c
5π π π π
(
= . OE , OF
6
) (
= ، OD, OE = ، OC , OD
2
) 6
ﻥ، OA, OC = : (4
(1ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃ ) ( )
2π π 3π
( ) ( ) ( )
ik
= . OE , OF = ، OD, OE = ، OC , OD ﻥ: (2ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃ
3 2 4
π 3π 4π
( ) ( ) ( )
= . OE , OF = ، OD, OE
aw = ، OC , OD ﻥ: (3ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃ
3 2 3
17π 41π 9π
= . OE , OF (4
)
= ، OD, OE
6
(
= ، OC , OD
4
ﻥ: )
(4ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃ ( )
af
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
ot
l
) ( Cﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 1ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺏ
.m
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ OAﻭ . OB ﺍﺼﻁﻼﺤﺎ ﻨﻘﻭل ﺍﻥ −lﻗﻴﺱ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ AOB
ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ . OA, OB = −l ( )
w
211
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 8
ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ .
.1ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ .
ﻴﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭﺍ ) ﺃﻭ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺎ ( ﻭﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻵﺨﺭ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ)ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻝﺏ(.
ﺍﺼﻁﻼﺤﺎ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻜﺱ ﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺔ.
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻪ ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﻪ ﻜل ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 1
om
→
v ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻝﻴﻜﻥ uﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻤﻴﻥ .
→
u
(
ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ u , vﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﻝﺸﻊ ﺍﻋﻴﻥ . )
ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ: .2ﻗﻴﺱ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
.c
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ uﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) ( Cﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﻭ Nﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ
OM = uﻭ ON = vﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( OMﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( Cﻓﻲ Aﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ONﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( Cﻓﻲ ، Bﻗﻴﺱ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺍﺩﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ik
aw ( )
u , vﻫﻭ ﻜﺫﺍﻝﻙ ﻗﻴﺱ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺍﺩﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ . OM , ON ( )
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻝﻴﻜﻥ uﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ .
( ) ( )
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ xﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ u , vﻓﺈﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل x + 2kπﻫﻲ ﺃﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ . u , vﻤﻊ k ∈ ℤ
( ﺘﻌﺒﻴﺭ :ﻨﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺒﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﻌﺒﺭ ﺒﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﺱ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﻨﻘﻭل ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ )
af
u , vﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ . x
ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ :ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ) ( u , vﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻗﻴﺱ ﻭﺤﻴﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] ] − π , πﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ
ot
ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ) . ( u , v
ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ (1 :ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ) ( u , uﻫﻭ . 0
.m
(2ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ) ( u , − uﻫﻭ . π
π
. (3ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭﺓ ﻫﻭ
w
2
π
. − (4ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭﺓ ﻫﻭ
2
w
ﻓﺈﻥ xﻫﻭ ﻗﻴﺱ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻭﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ uﻭ . v ( )
(5ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ xﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ u , v
ﺸﺎل: .2ﻋﻼﻗﺔ
w
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ):ﺘﻘﺒل ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ( ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ v ، uﻭ wﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ .
( ) ( ) (
u,v + v,w = u,w )
( ) ( ) ( ( ) )
ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ u , − v = u , v + π • ، v , u = − u , v • :
(
. − u,− v = u,v • ، ( ) )
• − u ,v = u ,v +π ( ( ) )
212
8 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
( )
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) ( Cﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i , jﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺤﻴﺙ
3π π
= . OI , OB ( 4
)
= OI , OAﻭ( )
6
( ) ( ) ( )
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ . OA, OB (3 . OJ , OB (2 . OJ , OA (1 :
π π π
( ( ) ) ( ( )
OJ , OA = − OA, OJ = − OI , OJ − OI , OA = − + = −
) ﺤــل(1 :
om
2 6 3
3π π π
( ( ) ( )
= OJ , OB = OI , OB − OI , OJ ) = −
4 2 4
(2
3π π 7π
( ( ) ( )
= OA, OB = OI , OB − OI , OA ) = −
4 6 12
(3
.c
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 2
) (
ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ u , vﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻗﻴﺴﻬﺎ αﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ :
ik
. α = 2007 rad (1
189π
aw .α = − (2
4
65π
= .α (3
8
) (
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ αﻗﻴﺱ ﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ u , vﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺤﻴﺩ kﺤﻴﺙ :
af
) (
−π < α + 2kπ ≤ πﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﻴﺠﺎﺩ kﺇﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺤﺼﺭ ﻹﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ u , v
ot
−2007 − π < 2kπ ≤ π − 2007 ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺤــل−π < 2007 + 2kπ ≤ π (1 :
−2007 − π π − 2007
ﺇﺫﻥ −319,923 < k ≤ −318,923ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ k = −319 ≤<k ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ
2π 2π
.m
) (
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ u , vﻫﻭ 2007 + ( −319 × 2 × π ) = 2, 663rad
−189 189π
< −1 + 2k ≤ 1 −π < −ﺒﺎﺨﺘﺯﺍل πﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ + 2kπ ≤ π (2
w
4 4
185 193
23,125 < k ≤ 24,125ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ k = 24 ﺇﺫﻥ ≤<k ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ
8 8
w
65
< −1 −π < −ﺒﺎﻻﺨﺘﺯﺍل ﻓﻲ πﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ + 2k ≤ 1 + 2kπ ≤ π (3
8 8
73 57
− < k ≤ −ﺇﺫﻥ −4,5625 < k ≤ −3,5625ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ k = −4 ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ
16 16
65π 65π 64π π
.
8
= ) + ( −4 × 2 × π
8
−
8
=
8
) (
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ u , vﻫﻭ
213
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 8
ﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ .
.1ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺔ.
( ) ) (
ﻭ ' vﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ،ﻝﻴﻜﻥ αﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ u, vﻭ ' αﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ' u ', v ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔu ' ، v ، u :
ﻭ ' u ', vﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺘﻴﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ kﺤﻴﺙ . α ' = α + 2kπ( ) ( )ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﺎﻥ u, v
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ kﺤﻴﺙ α ' = α + 2kπﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ α '− αﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝـ . 2π
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ α ' = α + 2kπﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ αﻭ ' αﻗﻴﺴﺎﻥ ﻝﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺴﺎﻥ ﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﺘﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺘﻴﻥ.
om
.2ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺭﺘﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻝﺨﻁﻲ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ.
ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ. ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ u :ﻭ v
) ( ) (
ﻭ vﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﺎﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u , v = 2kπ :ﺃﻭ k ∈ ℤ . u , v = π + 2kπ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ u
.c
u, v = 2kπﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ . ) ( ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ
) (
ik
u, v = π + 2kπﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﺍﺘﺠﺎﻫﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﻴﻥ . ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ
ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ u :ﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .ﻝﻴﻜﻥ kﻭ ' kﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ .
aw
( ) ( )
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ kﻭ ' kﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻹﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﺈﻥ . ku , k ' v = u , v
( ) ( )
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ kﻭ ' kﻤﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ . ku , k ' v = u , v + π
O
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ B ، Aﻭ Mﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺓ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﻥ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ) ( C
α
ﻗﻴﺱ ( )
ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ αﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ . OA, OBﻓﺈﻥ
.m
2
( )
ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ . MA, MB
( ( ) )
M
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ:ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ) ( OABﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ،ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ AO, AMﻭ MO, MAﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ
w
om
8 8 8
9π 41π
ﻗﻴﺴﺎﻥ ﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ،ﺃﻭ ﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺘﻴﻥ . ﻭ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﺍﻥ
8 8
9π 41π
ﻗﻴﺴﺎﻥ ﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺘﻴﻥ ( ﻭ ) ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻜﺫﺍﻝﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ
8 8
.c
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 4
π
( )
ik
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ E . AB, AD = −ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ ABCDﺤﻴﺙ
2
ECDﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Fﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ ABCDﺤﻴﺙ AFDﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ
aw
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABFﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ . (1
( )
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ . FB, FA (2
( ) ( )
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ . DE , DFﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ . FD, FE (3
af
( )
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ . FB, FE (4
(5ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ F ، Eﻭ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .
ot
ﺤــل (1:ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ AFDﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﺇﺫﺍ AF = AD = FDﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ AB = AD
.m
2
ﻭ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ
(4
E
(5ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ( FB, FE ) = πﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ F ، Eﻭ Bﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
215
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 8
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ.
. 1ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ:
π
( )
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ = i , jﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O ; i , jﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ .
2
) (
π
( )
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ i , j = −ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O ; i , jﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ .
2
) (
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ
om
→ π → π
i − j
2 2
→ O →
O j i
. 2ﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺠﻴﺏ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ:
.c
ﺘﺫﻜﻴﺭ ﻭ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ( C ) :ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ، Oﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ
( )
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ O , OA , OBﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ .
ik
B
ﻨﻀﻊ OA = iﻭ ، OB = jﻝﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺼﻭﺭﺓ Mﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ
→
( )
j
aw
) ( Cﺤﻴﺙ xﻗﻴﺱ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ، i , OMﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻡ
cosx x
A
O →
i
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ xﻫﻭ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻭﻨﻜﺘﺏ cos xﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺠﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ xﻫﻭ
ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻭﻨﻜﺘﺏ . sin xﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ xﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
( )
af
sinx i , OMﻓﺈﻥ ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل x + 2kπﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻫﻭ ﻜﺫﺍﻝﻙ
M
( )
ﻗﻴﺱ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ i , OMﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ xﻭ x + 2kπﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ
ot
ﺍﻝﺼﻭﺭﺓ Mﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) . ( Cﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ cos ( x + 2kπ ) = cos x :ﻭ sin ( x + 2kπ ) = sin xﻤﻊ k ∈ ℤ
ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ 2πﺩﻭﺭ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ .
.m
cos 2 x + sin 2 x = 1 ، −1 ≤ sin x ≤ 1 ، ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ −1 ≤ cos x ≤ 1 : x
ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﻴﺭﺓ:
π π π π
w
3 2
cos x 1 0
2 2 2
) ( ) (
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ • :ﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ u , vﻫﻭ ﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺃﻗﻴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ . cos u , v
) ( ) (
• ﺠﻴﺏ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ u , vﻫﻭ ﺠﻴﺏ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺃﻗﻴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ . sin u , v
216
8 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
5 ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
:ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ
25π 9π
. sin (2 . cos (1
6 4
31π 11π
. cos − (4 . sin − (2
4 3
om
9π 8π + π π
cos = cos = cos + 2π (1 :ﺤــل
4 4 4
π 2
= cos =
4 2
.c
25π 24π + π π
sin = sin = sin + 4π (2
6 6 6
ik
π π 1
= sin + 2 × 2π = sin =
6 6 2
29π −30π + π π
aw
sin − = sin
= sin − 10π (3
3 3 3
π π 3
= sin + 2 × (−5)π = sin =
3 3 2
af
31π −32π + π π
cos − = cos = cos − 8π (4
4 4 4
π π
ot
2
= cos + 2 × (−4)π = cos =
4 4 2
6 ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
.m
π 3π 3
. <x< ﻭsin x = ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺕ ﺃﻥcos x ( ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﻝـ1
2 2 5
. 10−2 ﺇﻝﻰx ( ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺩﻭﺭ ﻝـ2
w
9 9 9 3
cos 2 x = 1 − ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ. + cos 2 x = 1 : ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪsin 2 x = ﻓﺈﻥsin x = ( ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ1
25 25 25 5
4 4 16
w
217
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 8
ﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺠﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ.
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ xﻗﻴﺱ ﻝﻬﺎ ،ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺃﻗﻴﺎﺴﻬﺎ :
π π
− x ، π + x ، π − x ، −x
. +x ،
2 2
( )
ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ﻨﺄﺨﺫ xﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎ ﻭ Mﺼﻭﺭﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O; i, j
om
( 3) ( 2 ) (1)
sin ( − x ) = − sin x sin (π − x ) = sin x sin (π + x ) = − sin x
M →
j M
→
j )( 3 ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ 'M →
j
M )( 2 ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ )(1 ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
.c
x
→
O i Mﻭ ' Mﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺘﺎﻥ O →
i Mﻭ ' Mﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺘﺎﻥ → Mﻭ ' Mﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺘﺎﻥ
-x O i
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺒﺩﺃ
ik
'M
'M
ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ) ( 3ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) cosﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻡ ( ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺯﻭﺠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) sinﺠﻴﺏ ( ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﺔ .
aw
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
π π
cos 2 − x = sin x cos 2 + x = − sin x
af
sin π − x = cos x sin π + x = cos x
2
2
ot
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ) M : (1ﻭ ' Mﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ M .ﻭ ' Mﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ
'M ( )
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻝﻠﻤﻌﻠﻡ .ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ Mﻫﻲ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ' Mﻭ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ' Mﻫﻲ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ i, OM = x . M
.m
→ M
π π π
j
ﻭ i, OM ' = − xﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ sin − x = cos xﻭ cos − x = sin x
2 2 2
( )
O →
i
w
π
x +ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ) :( 2ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' Mﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ
2
π
w
ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ) ( 1 " Mﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ،ﻭ " Mﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ − xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ،
2
'M "M
( )
ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ' Mﻭ " Mﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﺘﺎﻥ، i, OM = x .
w
→ M
j
π π π π
→ 2
2 2
(
sin + x = sin − x i, OM " = − x ، i, OM ' = + x )
2
( )
O i
π π π π
cos + x = − co s − x ﻭﻤﻨﻪ sin + x = cos xﻭ cos + x = − sin x
2 2 2 2
ﺍﻝﺸﻜل) ( 2
218
8 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
8 ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
: ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻴﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ
7π 11π
. sin − (2 . cos (1
3 6
11π 12π − π π
cos = cos = cos 2π − (1 :ﺤــل
6 6 6
π π 3
= cos − = cos =
om
6 6 2
π π 3 7π −6π − π π
= sin − = − sin = − ﺃﻱsin − = sin = sin − − 2π (2
3 3 2 3 3 3
9 ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
.c
: ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻴﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ
5π 5π 5π 5π
ik
. sin ﻭcos (2 . sin ﻭcos (1
6 6 4 4
5π π π 2
aw cos = cos π + = − cos = − (1 :ﺤــل
4 4 4 2
5π π π 2
sin = sin π + = − sin = −
4 4 4 2
af
5π π π 3
cos = cos π − = − cos = − (2
6 6 6 2
5π π π 1
= sin π − = sin =
ot
sin
6 6 6 2
10 ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
.m
13π 7π 7π 2− 6
cos ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞsin ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﻝـcos = ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ
12 12 12 4
π
w
cos − ﻭ
12
7π 3+2 7π 7π 7π 7π
= = 1 − cos 2 + sin 2 = 1 ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ:ﺤــل
w
219
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 8
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ.
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ aﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ . .1ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺠﻴﺏ:
sin a = sin bﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ a = b + 2kπﺃﻭ a = π − b + 2 kπ cos a = cos bﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ a = b + 2kπﺃﻭ a = −b + 2kπ
ﻤﻊ k ∈ ℤ ﻤﻊ k ∈ ℤ
om
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a < −1ﺃﻭ a > 1ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻻ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻭﻻ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ −1 ≤ a ≤ 1ﻴﻭﺠﺩﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ cﺤﻴﺙ a = cos cﻭ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻫﻲ ] x = c + 2kπﺃﻭ .[ x = −c + 2kπ
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل sin x = aﺤﻴﺙ aﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a < −1ﺃﻭ a > 1ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻻ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻭﻻ.
.c
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ −1 ≤ a ≤ 1ﻴﻭﺠﺩﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ cﺤﻴﺙ a = sin cﻭ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻫﻲ ] x = c + 2kπﺃﻭ .[ x = π − c + 2kπ
ik
ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ.
.1ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻲ
aw
( )
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ O ; i , jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) ( Cﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ . O
( )
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻨﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ، Oﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) ، ( r , θﺤﻴﺙ OM = rﻭ ، θ = i , OMﺘﺴﻤﻰ
af
ﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﺎﺕ ﻗﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ) r ) M ( r , θﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻭ θﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ (
) (
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺏ O; i ،ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻲ،ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ rﻫﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻲ ﻭ θﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ .
ot
→
j = i , OMﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻁﺔ Mﻫﻲ. 5; : ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل OM ' = 5ﻭ
'M → O0
i1 x 6 6
'r ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) M ( r , θﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ . M
w
ﻭ ﻜﺎﻨﺘﺈﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ) ( x ; yﻭ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ) ( r , θﻓﺈﻥ r = x 2 + y 2 :؛ x = r cos θ؛ y = r sin θ
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ:ﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( OMﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﻓﻲ Nﺤﻴﺙ OMﻭ
w
y ON
M r
1 ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻹﺘﺠﺎﻩ .ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ OM = rﻭ ON = 1ﻓﺈﻥ OM = rONﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ N
→
N j
→ O0
i 1 x
( ( ) )
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻭ i, ON = i, OMﻓﺈﻥ ) . N ( cos θ ;sin θﺇﺫﺍ
ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ) . M ( r cos θ ; r sin θﻭﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ cos 2 θ + sin 2 θ = 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
r 2 = x 2 + y 2ﺇﺫﺍ . r = x 2 + y 2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ .
220
8 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
1y ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل11
→ M1
j (3 ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻵﺘﻴﺘﻴﻥ
3
→
= . cos x (1
O0 i 1 x 2
1
M3 M2
. sin x = − (2
2
om
(3ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ .
π π 3
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M 1ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻭل ﺼﻭﺭﺓ = cos xﻭﻤﻨﻪ cos x = cosﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﺤــل(1:
6 6 2
π 1 π π
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ = ، sinﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M 1ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﺨﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ x = + 2kπﺃﻭ x = − + 2kπ
.c
6 2 6 6
1 π 1
ﻭ ﺇﺴﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ sin x = − (2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ sin x = − sinﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﻬﺎ
2 6 2
ik
π π
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ M 2 .ﺼﻭﺭﺓ −ﻫﻲ ﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ M 1 sin x = sin − ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ
6 6
7π
aw π
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ x = − + 2kπﺃﻭ x = π + + 2kπﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ،ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M 3ﺼﻭﺭﺓ
π
6 6 6
7π π
= xﻫﻲ ﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ M 1ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺒﺩﺃ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . ﻭ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ x = − + 2kπﺃﻭ + 2kπ
6 6
af
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل12
(
O ; i , jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ )
ot
( )
) (
.m
(2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ − 3 ; − 1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻲ . O ; i
19π 18π + π π
= ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺤــل= + 2 × 3π (1:
3 3 3
w
221
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 8
om
π π
cos 2 − x = sin x cos 2 + x = − sin x
ﻭ
sin π − x = cos x sin π + x = cos x
2
2
.c
ﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻨﻌﺘﻤﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﻴﺭﺓ .ﻨﺸﻴﺭ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﺄﺨﺫﻫﺎ k
2kπ
ﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ 0ﺇﻝﻰ k ) n − 1ﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ
ik
n
ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل . a cos x + b sin x = c :
aw
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ : x
. ( 1 )..... a cos x + b sin x = cﺤﻴﺙ c ، b ، aﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﺔ ﻭ ) . ( a ; b ) ≠ ( 0;0
2 2
af
a b
. + (1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
a 2
+ b 2
a 2
+ b 2
b a
ot
= . sin α = cos αﻭ (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ αﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ :
a +b
2 2
a + b2
2
c
= . cos x.cos α + sin x.sin α (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( 1ﺘﻜﺘﺏ
.m
a2 + b2
c
= ) . cos ( x − α (4ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) ( 1ﺘﻜﺘﺏ:
a2 + b2
w
b a
= . cos αﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ = sin αﻭ ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺒﺈﻤﻜﺎﻨﻨﺎ ﻭﻀﻊ
a2 + b2 a2 + b2
w
c
= ) . sin ( x + α ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻊ ﻝـ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻊ ،ﻨﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل :
a +b
2 2
w
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ :
. cos x + sin x = 1 (1
. 3 cos x + sin x = 1 (2
2 cos 2 x − 2 sin 2 x = −1 (3
) cos 3 x − 3 sin 3 x = m (4ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺘﺒﻌﺎ ﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ( m
222
8 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ:
. 1ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل.cos x < a :
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ :ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ [ [ 0, 2πﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ a ) (1) ... cos x < a : xﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ( .
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a ≤ −1ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ) (1ﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻬﺎ ﺤﻠﻭل ﻓﻲ [ . [ 0, 2π
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a ≥ 1ﻓﺈﻥ [ [ 0, 2πﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ). (1
(3ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ −1 < a < 1ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﺎﻥ αﻭ βﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ [ 0, 2πﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ
om
. cos α = cos β = aﻨﺴﻤﻲ Mﺼﻭﺭﺓ αﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ' Mﺼﻭﺭﺓ βﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ
ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ Mﻭ ' Mﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل.
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﻭﺍﺼﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﻥ . a
.c
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ) (1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ . [ 0, 2π
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل cos x ≤ aﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﺎﻥ a = −1ﻭ a = 1ﺘﺩﺭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺤﺩﻯ .
ik
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ [ [ 0, 2πﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺜﻡ ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ .
aw ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ:
. 2 cos 3x + 2 ≤ 0 (2 . 2 cos x < 1 (1
1
. cos 4 x − > 0 (4 . 2 cos 2 x − 3 ≥ 0 (3
2
af
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ b ≤ −1ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ) (1ﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻬﺎ ﺤﻠﻭل ﻓﻲ ] . ]−π , π
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ b ≥ 1ﻓﺈﻥ ] ]−π , πﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ). (1
.m
(3ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ −1 < b < 1ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ αﻭ βﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] ]−π , πﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ sin α = sin β = b
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ Mﺼﻭﺭﺓ αﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ' Mﺼﻭﺭﺓ βﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ
w
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ [ [ 0, 2πﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺜﻡ ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ .
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ :
1
. 2 sin 4 x − 1 ≤ 0 (2 . sin x < − (1
2
. 2sin 4 x − 2 > 0 (4 . 2sin 5 x + 3 ≥ 0 (3
223
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 8
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺇﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ .
1 3
.−
≤ ≤ sin x ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ] − π , πﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ
2 2
3 1
≤ . sin xﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺘﻴﻥ (1ﺤل ﻓﻲ [ ] − π , πﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺘﻴﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل sin x ≥ − : xﻭ
2 2
) (
(2ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) ( Cﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ sin xﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i , j
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( O ; i , j
om
3 1
= yﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ (3ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ∆ ( ﻭ )' ∆ ( ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ y = −ﻭ
2 2
1 3
.− ≤ ≤ sin x (4ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( Cﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ∆ ( ﻭ )' ∆ ( .ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ
2 2
.c
5π 1 π 1 1
. sin − sin − = −ﻭ = − . sin x ≥ − (1ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ
6 2 6 2 2
ik
→
j 5π π
−ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل A ،1ﻭ Bﺼﻭﺭﺘﺎ −ﻭ
6 6
O
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ
→
i
aw
5π π
B A ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ −π , − ∪ − , π ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل.
6 6
2π 3 π 3 3
af
ﺍﻝﺸﻜل1 . sin = = sinﻭ ≤ . sin xﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ
3 2 3 2 2
2π π
B A ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ .ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل A ،2ﻭ Bﺼﻭﺭﺘﻲ
ot
3 3
→
j ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺘﺤﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ
π 2π
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ −π , ∪ , π ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ
.m
O
→
i 3 3
5π π π 2π
ﺍﻝﺸﻜل2 − π , − ∪ − , ∪ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺘﻴﻥ ﻫﻲ, π :
6 6 3 3
w
C D
1 π 3 π 1 5π 1
C , ، B − ; − ، A − ; − (4
3 2 6 2 6 2
w
224
8 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
π
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ( O , I , J ) :ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ θ .ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 0; 2
ﻭ rﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻝﻬﺎ ) ( r ;θﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( O ; OI
π
= ) . ( AB , AC ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘﻠﻪ Oﺤﻴﺙ
3
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . r
( ( ) () () )
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ OI , OB ، OA , OC ، OA , OBﻭ OI , OC
om
( )
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ Bﻭ Cﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O , OI
2π 2π 2π 2π
. sin θ + sin θ −
+ sin θ +
cos θ + cos θ −ﻭ = 0
+ cos θ + (4ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ = 0
3 3 3 3
.c
y ﺤل O (1:ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ OA + OB + OC = O
A
2
'C = OAﺤﻴﺙ ' Aﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ BCﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻜﺫﺍﻝﻙ ' AA
π
ik
3
1
3 3 3
J AA ' = OAﻭ OA = rﺇﺫﻥ . A ' A = rﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ AA ' Bﻗﺎﺌﻡ
θ 2 2
B
aw ﻓﻲ ' Aﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ AB = A ' A + A ' B :ﺃﻱ AB − A ' B = A ' A
2 2 2 2 2 2
0 'I1 B x
ﺇﺫﻥ . AB = r 3
'A ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ . AB = AC = BC = r 3
( )
af
AOB (2ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ OA , OB
2π
(
= AOC . OA , OBﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ) ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ
ot
C 3
2π
(
. OA , OB = − ) 3
( )
ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ OA , OCﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ﻓﺈﻥ
.m
2π 2π
( ( ) ( )
OI , OC = OI , OA + OA , OC = θ − ) 3
( ( ) ( )
OI , OB = OI , OA + OA , OB = θ +ﻭ ) 3
2π 2π
2π
r cos θ +
; r sin θ + (
OI , OB = θ +ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻫﻲ ) OB = r (3ﻭ
w
2π 2π
C r cos θ −ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺒﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻭ ﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ : ; r sin θ −
3 3
2π 2π 2π 2π
cos θ + cos θ − + cos θ + = 0ﻭ . sin θ + sin θ − + sin θ + = 0
3 3 3 3
225
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 8
om
ﺜﻡ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﺩﻴﺎﻥ
ﻭ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ 5ﻭ ﻨﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺒﺎﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ6 APPS ﺜﻡ 2nd ﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ
.c
ﻨﺤﺠﺯ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺜﻡ ﻨﺼﺎﺩﻕ.
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) (1;1ﻫﻲ ) . (1, 41;45
ik
.2ﺍﻻﻨﺘﻘﺎل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ
aw
APPS ﺜﻡ 2nd ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻭ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ 7ﻭ ﻨﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺒﺎﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ .8ﻨﺤﺠﺯ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺜﻡ ﻨﺼﺎﺩﻕ.
ﻫﻲ ). (1;1 ( )
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ 2;45
af
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺠﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻅﻠﻬﺎ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻤﺤﺼﻭﺭﺍ ﺒﻴﻥ −90ﻭ 90ﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺠﻴﺏ
w
ﺘﻤﺎﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﺎﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻤﺤﺼﻭﺭﺍ ﺒﻴﻥ 0ﻭ .180
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( 7 : −2 ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ:
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) ( 4;60
226
8 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﺃﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
π
= ) (u, vﻓﺈﻥ (u, −v) = ... 11ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 8ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
5
π 4π π )ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴل (
π + (3 − (2 − (1
5 5 5 1ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻲ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻘﺎﻴﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻕ ﺒﻴﻥ
π
= ) (u, vﻓﺈﻥ (−u , −v) = ... 12ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺴﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝـ 2π
3
π 2π π ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ )' (u, v) = (u ', vﻓﺈﻥ uﻭ ' uﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ 2
− (3 (2 (1
3 3 3 ﻭ vﻭ ' vﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ.
om
π B ، Aﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 3
13ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ (u, v) = −ﻓﺈﻥ (2u , −3v) = ...
6 2π 7π π
5π π π C 4, − ، B 2, ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻫﻲ ، A 1, :
(3 (2 − (1 3 3 3
6 6 6
π 1 ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
< 0 < xﻓﺈﻥ sin 2 x = ... 14ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ = sin xﻭ
.c
2 2 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −π ; πﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ 2sin 2 x = 3ﺘﻘﺒل 4
3 1 ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﺤﻠﻭل ﻓﻘﻁ.
(3 (2 1 (1
ik
2 4
5ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ αﺤﻼ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ cos x = 0, 6ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ
π
ﻓﺈﻥ sin x = ... 15ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ cos x < 0ﻭ < x < π α + 105πﻫﻭ ﺤل ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ cos x = −0, 6
2
aw
(3ﻻ ﻨﻌﺭﻑ (2ﺴﺎﻝﺏ (1ﻤﻭﺠﺏ 5π 2007π
−ﻴﻌﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻭ 6ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﺍﻥ
ABCD 16ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﻤﺒﻠﺸﺭﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ . O 4 4
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ.
AB = aﻭ = π
. BAO
af
3 ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ: 7
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ OAB؟ cos 2 x + sin 2 x = 1ﻓﺈﻥ sin xﻭ cos xﻴﻜﻭﻥ
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ AC ، OAﻭ . AD ﺩﺍﺌﻤﺎ ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺎ.
ot
cos( BAOﻭ )
sin( BAO (3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) 8ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ cos 2 x ≤ 1ﻫﻲ ℝ
(4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) cos( AB, AOﻭ )sin( AB, AO ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
.m
u 17ﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ ﻭ xﻗﻴﺱ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 9ﺇﻝﻰ 15ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ
ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ). (u , v ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺭﺍﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺙ.
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ
w
227
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 8
23ﻝﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ) (Cﺍﻝﻘﻭﺱ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ 18ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، Aﻭ Eﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ xﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ BCDﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ .ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( EFﻴﻌﺎﻤﺩ
(
i, OMﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل: ) ) . ( AE
om
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 24ﺇﻝﻰ 26ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ xﻭ yﻫﻤﺎ
ﻗﻴﺴﺎﻥ ﻝﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
3π π
y=− = xﻭ 24
.c
2 2
5π 11π A 19ﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
y=− = xﻭ 25
4 4 (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺤﻴﺙ :
ik
2556π π
x = π 26ﻭ π
y=−
4 ( = BA, BC
6
) (
AB, AC = −ﻭ
3
)
aw
27ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ
(2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ BAC؟
ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﺴﻬﺎ α
A 20ﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
35π 14π
α =− (2 =α (1 (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ :
2 3
af
π π
=α
2007π
(4 =α
721π
(3 ( )
= AB, ACﻭ BA, BC = −
6
(
4
)
3 5
( )
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ CA, CB
ot
228
8 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
A = sin x + cos(π − x) + cos (π + x ) 36 DC = AD ﺸﺒﻪ ﻤﻨﺤﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﺤﻴﺙABCD 29
π AC = AB ﻭ
A = sin x + sin(π − x) + sin − x − cos x 37
2
3π π
A = sin − x + sin( x + 5π ) + cos − x 38
2 2
π 39
A = cos (π − x ) − cos x + sin(π + x ) + cos − x
2 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
π π (
AD, AC (2 ) ( )
BC , BA (1
om
A = sin (π + x ) + cos + x +cos(π − x )+sin x + 40
2 2
π
A = tan(π + x) + tan( 2 x − ) + co tan( 2 x) 41
(
BA, AD (4 ) ( )
DC , BA (3
2 π
ﻋﻴﻥ ( ﻫﻭu, v) ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ30
: ﻋﻥ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲsin x ﻭcos x ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ42 2
.c
π π :ﻗﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
2 cos x + (2 sin x − (1
4 4 (u, −3v) (3 (2u , v) (2 (u , − v ) ( 1
ik
π π (v, −u ) (5 (−u , −v) (4
sin x − (4 cos x + (3
6 6 π
5π π π ﻋﻴﻥ− ( ﻫﻭu, v) ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ31
= + :( ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ1 43
aw 3
12 4 6 :ﻗﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
5π 5π
sin ﻭcos ( ﺍﺤﺴﺏ2 (2v, −u ) (3 (5u ,3v) (2 (v, u ) (1
12 12
7π 7π (−6u, 4v ) (4 (2v, −u ) (3
af
sin ﻭcos ( ﺍﺤﺴﺏ3
12 12 sin x ، cos x ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ35 ﺇﻝﻰ32 ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ
11π π 2π
= + :( ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ1 44 tan x ﻭ
ot
12 4 3
5π π
11π 11π x=− (2 x= (1 32
sin ﻭcos ( ﺍﺤﺴﺏ2 6 6
12 12
433π 17π
.m
7π π 5π x= (4 x= (3
= − ( ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ1 45 6 6
24 2 24
2π π
π π 11π x= (2 x= (1 33
= − ( ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ2 3 3
w
24 2 24
29π 5π
:( ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ3 x= (4 x=− (3
6 3
π 5π 7π 11π 5π π
w
x= (4 x=− (3
: ﻴﻜﻭﻥx ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ 4 4
5π 21π 3π π
sin + x − 2 cos − x+ 46 x= (2 x= (1 35
2 2
2 2
945π 148π
3π x=− (4 x= (3
−3 sin ( x − 3π ) + sin + x = sin x 2 4
2
A ﺒﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ41 ﺇﻝﻰ36 ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ
229
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 8
π
= sin ( x + 7π ) − 2 sin x − 47
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ M؟ 2
ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ N؟ 13π 7π
= 2 sin − x − cos x +
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻜل ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﺒﺤﻴﺙ 2 2
2π 4π
(C ) 55ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ cos x + cos x + + cos x + = 0 48
3 3
y O(; OA , OB )
sin x + sin x +
2π 4π
+ cos x + = 0 49
1 B
3 3
π
om
N M
(k ∈ ℤ) ، k x 50ﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ
2
A sin 3 x cos 3 x
-1 0 1 x − =2
sin x cos x
(1 51ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺤﻴﺙ
.c
-1 π 3
= cos xﻭ x ∈ − ; 0
2 5
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ . M
ik
π π
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ، cos − x ، sin − x ، sin x
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ . N 2 2
1
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻜل ﻗﻴﻡ xﺤﻴﺙ = sin x
aw )sin(π − x) ، cos(π − x
2 π
56ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ) (Cﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ (3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ tan(π − x) ، tan − x ، tan x
2
ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ 0; 2πﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ: π 2
52ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ = sin xﻭ x ∈ ; π
af
2 3 2 3
cos x = − = (2 cos x (1
2 2 π
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ، cos − x ، cos(π − x) ، cos x
ot
I = [ 0; π ] 58
cos x = −0,3 (2 cos x = 0, 7 (1
0 x1
π π
I = − ; 59
2 2
N
sin x = −0, 4 (2 sin x = 0, 6 (1
230
8 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
I = [ −π ; π ] 60
ﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
M 67ﻭ N
27 43
1 3 sin x = − (2 = cos x (1
= OMﻭ ON = 2i + 2 j i− j 29 45
2 2
61ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ [ 0; 2πﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ:
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍل OMﻭ ON
(2ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ) ( i; OM 2 cos 2 x = sin x
62ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −π ; πﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ:
ﻭ ) . ( i; ON
cos 2 x + 2 sin x cos x = 0
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺘﻴﻥ ) ( j; OM
om
63ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ [ 0; πﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ:
ﻭ ) . ( j; ON cos 7 x = cos 2 x − sin 2 x
(4ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Mﻭ . N ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ
( )
.c
68ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ 64ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ O; i, jﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ
ﺒﺈﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ:
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ:
ik
B (0; −3) (2 A(−1;1) (1 π
C (1; π ) (3 B 1; (2 A (1;0 ) (1
(
D 3 2 ;3 2 ) (4 1
C ;−
2
3 (3
2
2
aw 5π 3π 3π
F 3; − (6 E 2; (5 D 1; (4
(
E − 1; 3 ) (6 3
E − ;−
3 3 (5
6
4 2
( )
2 2
65ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ O; i, jﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ
69ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ
af
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ:
ﺒﺈﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ:
−5π π
π ;B 2 (2 A 1; (1
B 2; (2 A(1;0) (1 6 6
ot
2
π π
3π (4 π D 4; (4 C 3; (3
D 5;− C 3 ; (3 6 6
4 6
.m
7 π (6 5π (5 (2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، Aﻭ Dﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ
E 4;− ;E2 2
6 4 ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺩﺃ . O
1 7
H ; 20π (8 G ; 345π (7 66ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ) ( r ,θﻤﻊ [ θ ∈ [ 0; 2π
4 4
w
(
O; i, j 70ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ. ) y ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
w
231
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 8
π π
sin (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
cosﻭ
π 12
12
sin 2 x = cos x + (6
6 π π 2
cos 2 = cosﺍﺤﺴﺏ (1 72ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ
78ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : 8 4 2
π π
sin 2 x − sin x − 6 = 0 (1ﻭ . I = ℝ sin cosﻭ (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
8 8
2 cos 2 x − 3cos x − 2 = 0 (2ﻭ [ . I = [ 0 , 2π (1 73ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ S1ﺤﻴﺙ
4 cos 2 x + 2(1 − 3) cos x − 3 = 0 (3 π 3π 5π 7π
S1 = cos 2 + cos 2 + cos 2 + cos 2
ﻭ ] . I = ]−π ; π 8 8 8 8
om
x 79ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ،ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺤﻴﺙ : (2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ S 2ﺤﻴﺙ
2π 4π 8
π 3π 5π 7π
. f ( x ) = cos x + cos x +
S2 = sin 2 + sin 2 + sin 2 + sin 2
+ cos x + 8 8 8 8
3 3
π
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ : x 74ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 0; ﺤﻴﺙ
.c
2
. f ( x) = 0
6+ 2
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' . f = cos x
ik
4
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ : (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . cos 2 x
2π 4π (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . x
. sin x + sin x + + sin x + =0
aw
3 3 π
( )
x 75ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 0; ﺤﻴﺙ
O ; i ; j 80ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻭﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ . 2
2π 5 −1
. ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Rﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻪ = sin x
af
3 4
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A1 (1 ; αﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺘﻴﻥ (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ cos 2 xﻭ sin 2 x
(2ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ cos 4 x = sin x
ot
3
(3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ . sin 2 x + = − (2
4 2
(4ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC cos x + sin x = 0 (3
(5ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ؟ cos 3 x = cos x (4
81ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) E ( xﺤﻴﺙ : cos 2 x = sin x (5
E ( x ) = cos x − cos x
2 4
232
8 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
π π
،ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ =2 ﺒﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ : 87 (1ﺤﻠل ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) E ( xﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ .
6 12
π π (2ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . E ( x ) = 0
sin cosﻭ
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ :
12 12 (3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ
O ; i ; jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻭﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ( ) 88
= )f ( x
sin 2 x − sin 4 x
:
π cos 2 x − cos 4 x
Aﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺘﻴﻥ . 2 ; • ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
3
π •
( )
ﺒﺴﻁ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ). f ( x
OABCﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺤﻴﺙ . OA , OC = −
om
2 (1ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ : 82
y
A
. 3x = x + 2 xﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ cos 3 xﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ cos xﺜﻡ
sin 3 xﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . sin xﺒﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ :
1
→ B sin 3 x cos 3 x sin 3 x cos 3 x
.c
j
= ) Bﺒﻌﺩ − = A؛ +
O0 →
i 1 x sin x cos x sin x cos x
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ(.
ik
C
π π ﺤﻠل ﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻭﺍﻤل ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : 83
. sin ، cos ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ
12 12 . A( x) = 1 + cos 2 x + cos x (1
(1ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ :
aw . B ( x) = 1 − cos 2 x + sin x (2
( ( ) ( )
، i , OC = i , OA + OA , OCﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ) . C ( x ) = 1 + cos x + cos
x
(3
) (
ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ . i , OC
2
x
. B ( x) = 1 − cos x + sin
af
(4
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺜﻡ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺘﻴﻥ 2
ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ . C 84ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ :
ot
233
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 8
، I = [ −π ; π ] (3
3
= . yﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺼل ﻨﻘﻁ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . 2sin x + 2 ≤ 0 . 2sin x + 2 = 0
2
ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( C fﻤﻊ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ) ( Dﻭ ) ∆ ( . π π
، I = − ; (4
2 2
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ : (3
tgx − 1 > 0 . tgx − 1 = 0
3
≥ cos 2 xﻫﻲ ﺇﺘﺤﺎﺩ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ . I = [ −π ; π ] (5
4
92ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ (1)....... sin 3 x = − sin 2 x π
. 1 − 2 cos x − = 0
om
(1ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺜﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] ]−π , πﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ )(1 3
π
ﻭ ﻤﺜل ﺼﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ. 1 − 2 cos x − ≤ 0
3
- (2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ:
I = [ 0 ; π ] (6
)sin 3 x = sin x ( 4 cos 2 x − 1
.c
π 1 π 1
= sin 2 x − < ، sin 2 x −
-ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (1ﻫﻲ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ﺤﻠﻭل 4 2 4 2
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ.
ik
I = [ 0 ; π ] (7
-ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ) (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ
π 1 π 1
aw
ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . 4 cos 2 x + 2 cos − 1 = 0 cos 2 x − = − ، cos 2 x − ≥ −
5 2 5 2
(3ﻨﻀﻊ X = cos x
f 90ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −π ; πﺤﻴﺙ :
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ 4 X 2 + 2 X − 1 = 0
f ( x ) = sin x
4π 2π
af
. cos cosﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ (1ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
5 5
1
(1 93ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻷﻗﻭﺍﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ : (2ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = −
ot
234
8 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ . I
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ (2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . OABﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
( () ()
. OA, OE ، OA, OD ، OA, OC ، OA, OB ( ) ) ( )
ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ . i, OI
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ . I
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ) (Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ: 3π 3π
. sin cosﻭ (4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ
8 8
( ) (
)
om
(k ∈ ℤ) ، 5 OA, OM = k .2πﻫﻲ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ O; OA, OB 95ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻭ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ.
.c
Pﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (OMﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ . A
ABCDEﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، A
ik
D ، Cﻭ Eﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ). (0 Aaw
(4ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (0 Bﻫﻭ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺨﻤﺎﺴﻲ
. ABCDE
af
-ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻭﻗﻊ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﺨﻤﺎﺴﻲ ABCDE؟
235
9
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
om
إ
ء و ر
و .
ر"! ا
ب ا
ا
ء .
.c
ا"
ل ا
*+, !%-ت (ازي $#
%و ا"
!#
ik
1+ث ./
aw
ا*8ه
ن 56أن أ 2 $ !%اي
af
ﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻹﻏﺭﻴﻘﻲ" ﻤﻨﻼﻭﺱ " ﺒﺠﺎﻤﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺴﻜﻨﺩﺭﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻀﻭﺍ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﺒل ﺃﻥ ﻴﺼﺒﺢ
ot
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻴﻌﻤﻡ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﺩﺱ ﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ
ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻭﻴﺔ ) ( spheriqueﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺨﺼﺹ ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻋﻠﻡ
w
MENELAUS d'Alexandrie
grec, vers 100
237
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 9
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ) ( Pﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ) ( P1ﻭ ) ( P2ﻭﻓﻕ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ) ( ∆1ﻭ ) . ( ∆ 2
om
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ ABCDEFGHﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ Iﻭ L
ﺤﻴﺙ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻭ Lﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ] [GHﺘﺤﻘﻕ:
1
GL = GH
4
.c
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺍﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ I ، Eﻭ Lﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ
ﻓﻬﻲ ﺘﺤﺩﺩ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ ﺒﹻ ) . ( EIL
ik
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ KLﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( EIL .1
ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ . DCGH
aw .2ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( EILﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ . A BCD
.3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( EILﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ . BCGF
.4ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( EILﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ . ABCDEFGH
af
ot
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
.m
ﺇﺩﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻴﻥ ) ( P1ﻭ ) ، ( P2ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( P1ﻭ ) . ( P2
w
238
9 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
ﻨﻘﺒل ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻤﺩﻴﺩ ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ.
ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ F ، Eﻭ Gﺤﻴﺙ Eﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] G ، [CDﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ
om
CDAﻭ Fﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ. FA = 2BF :
.c
.4ﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( BEﻭ ) ( FG؟
ik
aw ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
7
ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ LJﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ AEﻭ . EH
.m
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺨﺎﻤﺱ
w
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ABCDﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ Gﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕGA + GB + GC + GD = 0 :
w
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﻭ IJKLﺭﺒﺎﻋﻴﺎ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﺤﻴﺙ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ABCDﻭ G ′ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل . IJKL
w
.2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺎﻋﻴﻴﻥ ABCDﻭ IJKLﻨﻔﺱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺜﻘل ﺇ ﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇ ﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ:
AI + BJ + CK + DL = 0
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺭﺍﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺃﻭﺠﻪ ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ABCDﻫﻲ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘﻠﻪ ﻫﻭ ﻨﻔﺱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ . ABCD
239
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 9
om
ﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . IJK
) ( IJK ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ A BCDEFGHﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . IJK
ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ IJKﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻷﻥ:
.c
1
IJ = JK = KI = AHﺤﻴﺙ AHﻗﻁﺭ ﻷﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺠﻪ.
2
ik
.2ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ
aw
ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﺒﻤﺴﺘﻭ ) ( Pﻫﻭ:
ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( Pﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻷﺤﺩ ﺃﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ. •
af
ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺇﺩﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( Pﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻷﺤﺩ ﺃﺤﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ. •
ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ،ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ،ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ،ﺸﺒﻪ ﻤﻨﺤﺭﻑ ،ﺨﻤﺎﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺴﺩﺍﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ. •
ot
.3ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ
.m
w
w
w
ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJK ] [ BC ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( LIJﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ABFE
ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺨﻤﺎﺴﻲ IJKLM ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل IJKL ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ IJKL
240
9 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﺤﺭﻑ ] [ EF ] ، [ AB A BCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺏ J ، I .ﻭ K
ﻭ ] . [ FG
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻤﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺠﻪ ) ( EFGH ) ، ( ABFEﻭ ) . ( ABCD
.2ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ABCDEFGHﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( IJK
om
ﺤــل:
.1ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ Iﻭ Jﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻭ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ) . ( ABFE
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ) ( ABFEﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ IJ
ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ) ( EFGHﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ JK
.c
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ) ( EFGHﻭ ) ( ABCD
ﻭﻓﻕ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ .ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻤﺭ ﻤﻥ Iﻭﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( JK
ik
ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( BCﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Lﺇﺫﻥ ) ( IJKﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( ABCDﻭﻓﻕ ] . [ IL
aw
.2ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ) ( BCGFﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ KL
ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ A BCDEFGHﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ IJKL
af
3
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ABCDEFGHﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( ICH
.m
ﺤــل:
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ) ( ABFEﻭ ) ( DCGHﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
w
1
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ AJ = AE
3
w
241
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 9
om
ﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . IJK
) ( IJK ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ A BCDﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . IJK
.c
.2ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ
ik
ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﺒﻤﺴﺘﻭ ) ( Pﻫﻭ:
aw
ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( Pﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻷﺤﺩ ﺃﻭﺠﻪ ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ. •
ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ،ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ. •
af
.3ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ
ot
.m
L
w
w
w
242
9 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
ﺤــل:
om
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ) ( Pﻭ ) ( ABCﻴﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AB
ﻓﻬﻤﺎ ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻭﻓﻕ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( JKﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( AB
ﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( JKﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻤﻊ ] K ∈ [ BC
ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ ﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( IJﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﹻ ) (CD
.c
ﺤﻴﺙ Iﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ] . [ ADﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ A BCD
ik
ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( Pﻫﻭ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ . IJKL
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ) ( ILﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( KLﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) (CDﻓﺈﻥ
aw
ﺍﻝﻤﻘﻁﻊ IJKLﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ.
.2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( JKﻭ ) (CDﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻭ ﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( IMﻤﺤﺘﻭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ
) ( IJKﻭ ) . ( BCDﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ ABCDﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( IJK
.m
ﺤــل:
ﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ IJ .1ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ABC
w
243
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 9
.1ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ
ﻨﺭﻓﻕ ،ﻜﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ،ﺒﻜل ﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻨﻘﻁﻴﺔ ) ( A , Bﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ . AB
om
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ، A ≠ Bﻤﻨﺤﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ABﻫﻭ ﻤﻨﺤﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ، ( ABﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ABﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ Aﻨﺤﻭ B
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ، A = Bﻓﺈﻥ AAﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ . 0
.c
• ﻏﺎﻝﺒﺎ ﻤﺎ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺤﺭﻑ ﻤﺜل... ،w ،v ، u :
• ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ،ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ Mﺒﺤﻴﺙ . OM = u
ik
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ C ، B ، A :ﻭ Dﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ .ﺍﻝﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ:
aw ). AB = DC (1
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ
ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺸﺎل
.m
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ kﻭ k ′ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
( )
• k u + v = k u + k v • ( −1) u = −u
w
) (
• k k ′u = ( kk ′ ) u • ( k + k ′ ) u = k u + k ′u
w
ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ:
• ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ uﻭ vﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﺤﻴﺙ v = k u
• ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) (CDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ABﻭ CDﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ.
• ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ABﻭ ACﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ.
244
9 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
ABCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺏ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J ، Iﻭ Kﺤﻴﺙ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] 4FJ = 3FE ، [ FGﻭ 2DK = 3DC
.1ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ IJﻭ AKﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ FEﻭ . FG
.2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ IJﻭ AKﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﺎﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ .ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( IJﻭ ) ( AK؟
ﺤــل:
om
1 3
IJ = IF + FJ = − FG + FE .1
2 4
3
AK = AD + DK = AD + DCﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ:
2
3
AD = FGﻭ DC = − FEﻓﺈﻥAK = FG − FE :
.c
2
1
.2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻤﺎ ﺴﺒﻕ IJ = − AK :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﺎﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ
ik
2
IJﻭ AKﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﺎﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ.
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( IJﻭ ) ( AKﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ.
aw
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 2
af
ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ I .ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ BCﻭ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ . ABCﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Hﻭ Kﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﹻ:
ot
AH = AD + DH = AD + DG = AD + DA + AG .1
7 7
4 3
AH = AD + AG ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ:
w
7 7
( )
1 1
AK = AD + DK = AD + DI = AD + DA + AI
w
3 3
1 1 3 3
ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ AI = AG :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪAK = AD − AD + × AG :
3 3 2 2
2 1
AK = AD + AG ﻨﺠﺩ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ:
3 2
7
.2ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ AK = AH :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ AHﻭ AKﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﺎﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ .ﺇﺫﻥ H ، Aﻭ Kﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
6
245
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 9
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ v ، uﻭ wﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Oﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺤﻴﺙ:
om
ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، Aﻭ Dﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﺎﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل:
v ، uﻭ wﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﹻ AC ، AB :ﻭ ADﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
.c
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:
• ﻴﻌﻤﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻜﻴﻔﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ.
ik
•
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ v ، uﻭ wﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ v ، uﻭ wﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
aw
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ v ، u :ﻭ wﺜﻼﺙ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺤﻴﺙ uﻭ vﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ.
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ v ، uﻭ wﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ xﻭ yﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
w =xu +yv
af
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Oﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺤﻴﺙ OB = v ، OA = u :ﻭ OC = w
ot
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ v ، uﻭ wﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، A ، Oﻭ Cﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ) ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ (.
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، A ، Oﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎ ) (OAB
.m
( )
ﺤﻴﺙ O ;OA ;OBﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻪ.
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، A ، Oﻭ Cﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . (OABﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ
ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ xﻭ yﺒﺤﻴﺙOC = x OA + y OB :
w
( )
) ) ( x ; yﻫﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ .( O ;OA ;OB
w
ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ w = x u + y v
w
246
9 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
om
ﺤــل:
.1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺸﺎلMN = ME + EA + AN :
.c
3 3
( )
1 1 1
MN = DA + EA + ABﺃﻱ MN = EA + DA + AB
ik
3 3 3
1
ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﻨﺠﺩ MN = EA + DB
3
aw .2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺸﺎلDB = HB − HD :
( )
1
ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ HD = EAﻓﺈﻥ MN = EA + HB − EA
3
2 1
af
ﻨﺠﺩ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ MN = EA + HBﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﺎﻷﺸﻌﺔ EA ، MNﻭ HBﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
3 3
ot
( )
.3ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ DA + DB + DCﻤﺭﺓ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ DGﻭ ﻤﺭﺓ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ . DI + DJ
ﺤــل:
w
DA + DB + DC = 3DG
w
(
DA + DB + DC = 2 DI + DJ )
247
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 9
ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺓ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻭ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( AC ) ، ( AB ABC .1ﻤﺜﻠﺙ N ، M .ﻭ P
ﻭ ) ( BCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺎ ﺴﺒﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ N ، Mﻭ Pﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( .
om
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Q
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
QC PC PQ NC NQ QC
= = ﻭ = =
MB PB PM NA NM AM
.c
MA PB NC
× × ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ= 1 :
ik
aw MB PC NA
DEFG .2ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ T ، S ، R .ﻭ Uﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ
) ( FG ) ، ( EF ) ، ( DEﻭ ) . ( DG
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺎ ﺴﺒﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ T ، S ، Rﻭ Uﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
ﺃﻋﺩ ﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ .U
af
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ:
RD SE TF UG
× × × =1
w
RE SF TG UD
w
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ
w
248
9 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ
ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﺤﻴﺎﻨﺎ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﻫﻭ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻴﻴﻥ
ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Eﻭ Fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ AF = α AD :ﻭ BE = β BC
om
ﺤﻴﺙ αﻭ βﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ.
.1ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل
1 2
=β ﻨﻔﺭﺽ = αﻭ
.c
4 3
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ } ) { ( A ;1) , ( B ;3) , (C ;1) , ( D ; 2
ik
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ F ، Eﻭ Gﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . G
aw
.2ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ
af
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ α = β = k
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J ، Iﻭ Hﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [CD ] ، [ ABﻭ ] [ EFﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
ot
249
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 9
( )
1 1
. QR = AC + AH .1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ PQ = HA + ACﻭ ﺃﻥ
2 2
.2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ) ( PQRﻭ ) ( ACHﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ.
.3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ABCDEFGHﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( PQRﻫﻭ ﺴﺩﺍﺴﻲ ﻤﻨﺘﻅﻡ.
om
.1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺸﺎل PQ = PH + HA + AC + CB + BQﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ PH = BCﻓﺈﻥ:
2
1 1 1
. PQ = BC + HA + AC + CB + BQﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ BC = −CBﻭ ﺒﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ ACﺒﹻ AC + AC
2 2 2
( )
1 1 1 1
ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ BQ = BAﻓﺈﻥ . PQ = CB + HA + AC + AC + BAﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ AC + BA = BC
.c
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1
ﻓﺈﻥ . PQ = CB + HA + AC + BCﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ CB + BC = 0ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ:
ik
2 2 2 2 2
1
(1) PQ = HA + AC
2
aw
( ( ) )
1 1 1 1
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . QR = QR + QR = QA + AC + CR + QA + AH + HG + GRﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ:
2 2 2 2
( ( ) ) ( )
1 1 1 1 1 1
ﻓﺈﻥQR = AC + AH + BA + HG : QA + QA = BAﻭ CR + GR = 0
2 2 2 2 2 2
af
( )
1
ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ BA + HG = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ( 2 ) QR = AC + AH
2
.2ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) (1ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( PQﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( ACHﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ( 2ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
ot
) (QRﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( ACHﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﺘﻭﺍﺯﻯ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺤﺘﻭﻯ ﺃﺤﺩﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻴﻥ
ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻵﺨﺭ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ) ( PQRﻭ ) ( ACHﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ.
.m
1
= . QIﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ: ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ BCﻭ AC
2
Jﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [GHﻭ Kﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ AEﺤﻴﺙ:
w
1 1
= . KP JR = CHﻭ AH
2 2
w
250
9 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
ABCDEFGHﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ O .ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ EFGHﻭ Pﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ . ABCD
.1ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ OPﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ EDﻭ . GB
.2ﻨﻬﺘﻡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ﺒﺎﻝﻬﺭﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺭﺃﺴﻪ Oﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﻪ ABCDﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ L ، K ، Qﻭ Mﺤﻴﺙ:
4
Qﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ) K ، (ODCﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] M ، [ ABﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [CDﻭ . OL = OP
5
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Q ، P ، M ، K ، Oﻭ Lﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ. •
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ . 5KL − 3KQ = 0ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ ٍ K ، Qﻭ L؟ •
om
.1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ GC = FB = EA :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ GCAEﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ
.c
2 2
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺸﺎلOP = GC = GB + BF + FC :
ik
ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ BF = CG = −OP :ﻭ FC = EDﻓﺈﻥ:
OP = GB − OP + ED
aw
( )
1
ﻨﺠﺩ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ OP = GB + ED
2
.2
• ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Q ، P ، M ، K ، Oﻭ Lﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ
af
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﻤﺜﻼ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Q ، Pﻭ Lﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . (OKM
ot
251
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 9
om
.1ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﻤﻴﻜﻴﺔ
.c
ﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﻴﻥ Hﻭ Iﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺘﻴﻥ. ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﺯﺭ ﺃﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺯﺭ
ik
ﻭ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﺭ ( HICﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﺩﺍﻴﺔ ﺒﺈﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﻤﺜﻼ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ HIﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺯﺭ ) ﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ HIﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺩﻭﻥ ﺘﺤﺭﻴﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﺄﺭﺓ.
aw
ﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ABCDA ′B ′C ′D ′ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( HICﻨﻨﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺔ section par un plan
ﻀﻤﻥ ﻓﺌﺔ 3Dﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ ﺜﻡ ﻨﻨﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( HICﺒﻌﺩ ﺫﻝﻙ ﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺈﺨﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
) ( HICﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻴﻤﻥ ﻝﻠﻔﺄﺭﺓ .ﻨﺘﺤﺼل ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ.
af
ot
252
9 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
(3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) ∆ ( ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ Pﻻ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ
C ، B ، Hﻓﺈﻥ ) (Dﻻ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ∆ ( .
om
ABCDEFGH $#ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ (1ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎﻥ ) (SABﻭ ) (SCB
] . [ AE ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻭﻫﻲ . S
(2ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎﻥ ) (SABﻭ ) (SCBﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻭﻓﻕ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
ﻴﺸﻤل Sﻭﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . (SAB
.c
(3ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎﻥ ) (SABﻭ ) (SCBﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻭﻓﻕ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
ﻴﺸﻤل Sﻭ ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ.
ik
(D ) 2..ﻭ ) (D ′ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ .
(1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) (Dﻭ ) (D ′ﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﻴﺔ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ ،
aw ﻓﺈﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ.
(2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) (Dﻭ ) (D ′ﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﻴﺔ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ
ﻓﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻴﺸﻤﻠﻬﻤﺎ .
(1ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( GIﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( ABﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ . (3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) (Dﻭ ) (D ′ﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﻴﺔ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ
af
(2ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( GIﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( ABCﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﻫﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻓﺈﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ .
ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ . 3 .ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Pﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎ ﻭ ) (Dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ Pﻓﻲ
ot
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . H
(3ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( GIﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( ABC
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) (Dﺘﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ Hﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Bﻭ C
.m
253
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 9
. 6..
. 11 . 1 1
A , 0, 0 ﻭ B 0, , 0 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ
P ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( R ) , ( Q ) , ( P 2 2
ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ 1
ﻭ C 0, 0, ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ .
A ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ P 2
) ( ﻭ ) ( Dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ) . ( Q ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻫﻭ :
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﺃ(
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ
R ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﺏ(
om
) . ( R ) , (Q ) , ( P ﺍﻝﻀﻠﻊ ABﻫﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻀﻠﻊ . AC ﺕ(
.c
ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ .
B ) (P ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ] [ DC ] ، [ BC ﻨﺴﻤﻲ J ، Iﻭ Kﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ
ik
ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Q ﻭB ﻭ ] [ ABﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
R
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( R ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ( AID ) :ﻭ ) ( ABJﻭ
aw
. 13 . . ) ( ADIﻭ ) ( CDKﻭ ) ( ABJ
ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( R ) , ( Q ) , ( P . 8..
ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ Sﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ
af
P
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ P ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( ABC
A )(
ﻭ ) ( Dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ ) . ( Q ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ) ( SABﻭ ) ( SCDﺜﻡ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ
ot
R
ﻭﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( Dﻭ ) . ( D′
ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ، 0 ) ( Dﻭ ) ( D′ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
. 14..
)( D ﻭ Sﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻻ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ
) ( R ) , ( Q ) , ( Pﻫﻲ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ.
ﻭ ) ( D′
w
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﺭﻑ ABCD
ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ) (ABﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ
R ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ) ( SADﻭ ) ( SBCﺜﻡ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ
ـ ) ( Dﻭﻴﺸﻤل . A
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ) ( SABﻭ ) . ( SCD
ﺏ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( R
254
9 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
.15 .
.20 . ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Pﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) (Dﻭ ) (D ′ﻤﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ) (Pﻭ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ Iﻝﻠﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ AEﻭ ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( ABC
ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (Pﻓﻲ I ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ Pﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( EBG
،ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺃ( ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ) (Dﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) (D ′ .16 .
ﻭ ) ∆ ( ﻤﻌﺎ . ) (D ′′ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) (D ′ ) ، (D ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( ABCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻭ S
، ﺏ( ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ) (Dﻻ ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) (D ′
ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻻ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( ABCD
ﻭ ) ∆ ( ﻤﻌﺎ. ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻘﻁﻊ ) (D ′ ) ، (D ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Iﻭ Jﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ
om
.21 . ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Dﻭ ) (D ′ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ .O ) ، ( SABﻭ Kﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ
ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻻ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) (Dﻭ ) . (D ′ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( SDC
ﻜﻴﻑ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ Aﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎﻥ ) ( A, D ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻤﻊ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ
.c
ﻭ ) ( A, D ′ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻴﻥ؟ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( SDC ) ، ( SAD ) ، ( SAB ) ، ( SBCﻭ ) ( ABCDﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻝﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ.
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
ik
.22 .
.17 .
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Pﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎ ﻭ ) (Dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ ) . (P
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Dﻭ ) (D ′ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻴﻥ
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) (Pﻻ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) (Dﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻻ
aw
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . (P ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻭ A ′ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ) (D
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) (Dﻭ ) ( ABﻝﻴﺱ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ Bﻭ B ′ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ) (D ′
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ. ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( AA ′ﻭ ) (BB ′ﻫﻤﺎ ﺇﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻴﻥ
af
ﻭ ﺇﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ.
.ﺍﻝـﺘـﻌـﺎﻤــﺩ . .18 .
ot
ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ∆ ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) ( AMﻋﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎ ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ADﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (Pﻓﻲ . E
ﻋﻠﻰ ) ∆ ( . ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ E ،C ، Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ.
w
ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . (BCD ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ P ، N ، Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﺤﺭﻑ
ﺃ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (BHﻫﻭ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻀﻠﻊ ) ( AC ) ، ( ABﻭ ) ، ( ADﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ
] [CDﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . BCD ) (MP)، (PN ) ، (MNﺘﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (BCD
ﺏ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) (CDﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ. ﻓﻲ . N ′ ، M ′ ، P ′
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ’ P’,M’,Nﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ، (BC
) (CDﻭ ) (BDﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
255
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 9
.29 . .25 .
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﻫﻭ ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ. ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Pﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎ ﻭ Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ . P
eﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] [BC ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ Pﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻥ Aﻭ . B
)ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻭﻀﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ( ـ ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻓﻲ
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﻬﺎ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﻝﻠﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AB
ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (Pﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل eﻭﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻘــﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴــﺔ .
) ( ABﻭ ) . ( AD
om
.26 .
.30 . ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ABCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ .
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ. ﻝﺘﻜﻥ K ، J ، Iﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ I1ﻭ I 2ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﺤﺭﻑ
.c
J3
ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻓﻴﻥ ] [GCﻭ ] . [BC ] [ AB ] ، [EF ] ، [EH
J12
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J 3 ، J 2 ، J 1ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻭﻀﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل
ik
1 I2
J1
ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] ) [ AEﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻭﻀﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ
ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ( ABCDEFGHﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( IJK
aw
ﺃ( ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (I1I 2ﻤﻊ .27 .
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( ABFE ABCDEFGHﻫﻭ ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ.
ﺏ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﺒﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤ ﻌﻥ ﺒـ : ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Iﻤﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ
af
J 1 ، I 2 ، I1 ] [HGﻭ Jﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ
J 2 ، I 2 ، I1 ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] [ AB
ot
256
9 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
.32 .
.38 . ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺒﻴﻥ ABEFGHKLﻭ BCDEHIJK
ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O, I, J , K ﻫل ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﻴﺔ ﺘﻌﻥ ﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ؟
) A ( −2,3,1ﻭ ) B ( 3,1, m ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻫل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ؟
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﺒﺤﻴﺙ . AB = 38 ﺃ( ) ( A, C , F , G
.39 . ﺏ( ) ( A, C , D, F
ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O, I, J , K ﺝ( ) ( E , F , C , K
om
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) B ( −2, 0, 2 ) ، A (1, 2,3ﻭ )C ( 2, −1,1 .33 .
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺃﻁﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ] [BC ] ، [ AC ] ، [ AB ABCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺏ
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ. ﺃ( ﺃﺫﻜﺭ ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ ) ( A, B, D, E
.40 . ﻫﻭ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ؟
.c
ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O, I, J , K ﺏ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) B ( 2,1, −2 ) ، A ( 3, 0,1ﻭ ) C ( 4,3, m ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، A
ik
ﺃ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻴﻜﻭﻥ G ، F ، E ، D ،C ، B
ﻭ .H
aw
ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ.
ﺏ( ﻫل ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ـ mﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ
.34 .
ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ. ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺫﻜﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ . 33
ﺃ( ﺍﺫﻜﺭ ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ ) (D, A, C, Hﻫﻭ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ؟
.41 .
af
ﺏ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ , B, A,
ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O, I, J , K G , F, E, D, Cﻭ.H
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) C ( 6, 6, 2 ) ، B ( 5, 7, 2 ) ، A (1,1, 2
ot
257
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 9
om
A
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . (P ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺃ( ) A ( 3,5, 2
) . (DBC ﺏ( )A ( −2, 0, −3
.c
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ Hﻫﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺝ( )A ( −1, −2,1
DBC
.45 .
ik
51 .
ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O,I,J, K
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ
aw ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Sﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Eﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ
] [ AC ) A ( 2, −1, 2ﻭ Pﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . z = −2
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﺃ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ Pﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ.
ABCDﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ E
af
ﺏ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ Sﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ
A ﻭﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻓﻴﻥ ] [ ABﻭ ] [CD
Pﻭ S
.52 .
ot
ﺃﻥ C , B , Aﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺴﻁﻭﺍﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻩ ) ( zz ′ﻭﻴﺸﻤل
B
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) . A ( −3, 0, 2
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ C ′, B ′, A ′
.47 .
w
258
10
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
om
ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺃﻋﻁﻴﺕ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ.
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻭﺍﺯ ﻷﺤﺩ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ.
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻝﻪ.
.c
ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻭﺭﺱ ﻹﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ.
ik
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺩﺴﺘﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ
aw
ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﻤﺎ.
af
259
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 10
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
ABCDEFGHﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ ﺤﻴﺙ:
AD = 2 ، AB = 3ﻭ . AE = 4
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ J ، Iﻭ Kﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻷﺤﺭﻑ ] [ AE ] ، [ ABﻭ ] [ ADﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ. AI = AJ = AK = 1 :
ﻝﻠﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﻤﺜﻼ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺘﻨﻘل
ﺒﺜﻼﺙ ﻭﺤﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] [ ABﻓﻲ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ AI
om
ﺜﻡ ﺒﺄﺭﺒﻊ ﻭﺤﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] [ BFﻓﻲ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ AJ
ﻭ ﺃﺨﻴﺭﺍ ﺒﻭﺤﺩﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] [ FGﻓﻲ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ . AK
ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺒﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻓﻲ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ ABCDEFGHﺒﺜﻼﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ) . ( 3; 4; 2
.c
ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ( 3; 4; 2 ) :ﻫﻲ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( A ; I ; J ; K
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ ABCDEFGHﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( A ; I ; J ; K
ik
.2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J ، Iﻭ Kﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( A ; I ; J ; Kﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ؟
2
.3ﻋﻴﻥ ،ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ، ( A ; I ; J ; Kﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Lﻭ Mﺤﻴﺙ Lﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] [CGﻭ . HM = HG
aw
3
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
ABFCDGHEﻤﻜﻌﺏ.
af
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ:
• ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ GDE
• ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ABC
w
• ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ EHF
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AB
w
•
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AC •
w
260
10 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
) ( A ; I , J , Kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ.
ABCDEFGHﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ ﺤﻴﺙ:
AD = 4AJ ، AB = 3AIﻭ . AE = 2AK
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ.
om
.2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
AG 2 = AC 2 + AE 2ﻭ AG 2 = AB 2 + AD 2 + AE 2
.3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ AG 2ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ . AG
.c
.4ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻤﺯﻨﺎ ﺒﹻ ) ( x G , y G , z Gﺇﻝﻰ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻭ ﺒﹻ ) ( x A , y A , z Aﺇﻝﻰ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ A
ik
ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [GH .5ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ MNﺤﻴﺙ Mﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ EHﻭ N
aw
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
) (O ; I , J , Kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ.
af
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Γﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺭﺃﺴﻪ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ، Oﻤﺤﻭﺭﻩ ) (Ozﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﻪ
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( 0, 0, 4ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 3
ot
x 2 + y 2 −ﻤﻊ . 0 ≤ z ≤ 4
16
.2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) B ( 0, b, 0ﺤﻴﺙ bﻋﻨﺼﺭ ﻤﻥ ] [ −3;3ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Q
w
( )
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ B ;OK ,OIﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﹻ ) ( Σ′ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (Qﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻲ ) . ( Γ
4 2 16 2
= xﺤﻴﺙ . 0 ≤ z ≤ 4 • ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Σ′ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜلz − b :
3 9
• ﻤﺜل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( Σ′ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل . b = 1
261
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 10
ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ
.1ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻲ
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﺒﺩﺅﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻜل ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻨﻘﻁ ) (O ; I , J , Kﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
( )
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻀﻌﻨﺎ OJ = j ، OI = i :ﻭ OK = kﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ O ; i , j , k
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ:
• ﺘﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J ، I ، Oﻭ Kﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ.
om
• ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ j ، iﻭ kﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
• ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (OIﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (OJﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ
ﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (OKﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻭﺍﻗﻡ.
.c
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) (OJ ) ، (OIﻭ ) (OKﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺓ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) (O ; I , J , Kﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) (O ; I , J , Kﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻥ OI = OJ = OK = 1ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ) (O ; I , J , Kﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ.
ik
( ) ( )
• ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (OIJﺒﹻ P O ; i , jﻭ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (OJKﺒﹻ ... ، P O ; j , k
aw .2ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ
( )
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ O ; i , j , kﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﺜﻼﺜﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ
OM = x i + y j + z k ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ ) ( x , y , zﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
af
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻨﻀﻊ OJ = j ، OI = iﻭ OK = k
ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (OIJ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J ، I ، Oﻭ K
ot
ﻻ ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻤﺭ ﻤﻥ Mﻭ ﺤﻴﺙ kﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻝﻪ ﻓﻬﻤﺎ
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ M ′ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻬﻤﺎ.
.m
(
)
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M ′ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ O ; i , jﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ
xﻭ yﻭﺤﻴﺩﻴﻥ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ. OM ′ = x i + y j :
M Mﻭ kﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﺎﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺤﻴﺩ z ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ′
w
. M Mﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺸﺎل: ﺒﺤﻴﺙ′ = z k :
OM = x i + y j + z k ﻭﻤﻨﻪ: OM = OM ′ + M M ′
w
.3ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ
w
262
10 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
O ; i , j , kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺤﻴﺙ OJ = j ، OI = i :ﻭ . OK = k( )
ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ). ( 2,3, −3
om
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ:
ﻋﻠﻤﺕ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ) ( x , y , z ﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ M
( )
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ O ; i , j , k
ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ M 2 ، M 1 ، m 3 ، m 2 ، m1
.c
ﻭ M 3ﺜﻡ ﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ
ik
m 1 0 m 2 M 3 M 2 m 3 M 1M
ﺤﻴﺙ:
) m 3 ( 0, 0, z ) ، m 2 ( 0, y , 0 ) ، m1 ( x , 0, 0
aw
) M 3 ( x , y , 0 ) ، M 2 ( x , 0, z ) ، M 1 ( 0, y , z
af
) (O ; I , J , Kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ.
ﺒﻌﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ
.m
263
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 10
ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ
ﻴﺘﻡ ﺘﻤﺩﻴﺩ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺒﺎﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ. .1ﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ
(
ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ O ; i , j , k :ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ.
)
.1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) u ( x , y , zﻭ ) v ( x ′, y ′, z ′ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻥ αﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ:
u = 0 .1ﻴﻌﻨﻲ x = y = z = 0
u = v .2ﻴﻌﻨﻲ x = x ′ﻭ y = y ′ﻭ z = z ′
om
( )
.3ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ u + vﻫﻲ ) ( x + x ′, y + y ′, z + z ′ﻭ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ αuﻫﻲ ) (α x , α y , α z
.2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ) A ( x A , y A , z Aﻭ ) B ( x B , y B , z Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻓﺈﻥ:
.1ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ABﻫﻲ ) ( x B − x A , y B − y A , z B − z A
.c
xA +xB yA + yB zA +zB
, , .2ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ ABﻫﻲ
2 2 2
ik
.2ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
( )
O ; i , j , kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ v ( a ′, b ′, c ′ ) ، u ( a, b , c ) .ﻭ ) w ( a ′′, b ′′, c ′′ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ.
aw
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ v ، uﻭ wﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ xﻭ yﺒﺤﻴﺙ w = x u + y v
ax + a ′y = a ′′
ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ) ( x , yﻓﻲ . ℝ 2 bx + b ′y = b ′′ ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
af
cx + c ′y = c ′′
.3ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻝﻪ
ot
(
O ; i , j , kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ .ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( x A , y A , z Aﻭ ) u ( a, b , cﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻝﻪ.
)
) M ( x , y , z ) ∈ ( Dﻴﻌﻨﻲ (α ∈ ℝ ) AM = α uﺃﻱ x − x A = α aﻭ y − y A = α bﻭ z − z A = α c
.m
ﺃﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ b ، aﺃﻭ cﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﺜﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ : c = 0
z = z A
w
x = x A
ﻭ ﻴﺒﻘﻰ zﻜﻴﻔﻲ. ﺃﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ b ، aﻭ cﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﺜﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ : a = b = 0
y = y A
w
ﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ:ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﺒﹻ ) ، (Oxﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﹻ ) (Oyﻭﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻭﺍﻗﻡ ﺒﹻ ) (Ozﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻼﺯﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﺠﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺘﺤﻘﻘﻬﺎ ) ( x , y , zﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻝﻜﻲ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻨﻲ:
) (Oz ) (Oy ) (Ox ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ
x = y =0 z =x =0 y =z =0 ﻤﻤﻴﺯﺍﺘﻪ
264
10 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل3
15 17
(
O ; i , j , kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻲ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) C ( 4, 0, −2 ) ، B ( 2,5,1) ، A ( 2,1, −3ﻭ . H 5, − , −
2 2
)
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ A BCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ.
.2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ D ، Iﻭ Hﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻫﻲ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ AB
ﺤــل:
om
.1ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ABCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ) ﻤﺜﻼ ( . AD = BCﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ BCﻫﻲ )( 2, −5, −3
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺭﻀﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﻫﻲ ) ( x , y , zﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ADﻫﻲ ). ( x − 2, y − 1, z + 3
AD = BCﻴﻌﻨﻲ x − 2 = 2ﻭ y − 1 = −5ﻭ z + 3 = −3ﺃﻱ x = 4ﻭ y = −4ﻭ z = −6
ﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ) ( 4, −4, −6 ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ D
.c
21 15
.2ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻫﻲ ) ، ( 2,3, −1ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ IHﻫﻲ 3, − , − ﻭ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ IDﻫﻲ ) . ( 2, −7, −5
2 2
ik
3
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ IH = ID :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ D ، Iﻭ Hﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
2
aw
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 4
3
(
O ; i , j , kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻲ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) B 2, −1, ، A (1, −2, 2ﻭ ). C ( −1, −4,3 )
af
2
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( AC
ot
.1ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺍﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) AC ( −2, −2,1ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( AC
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) M ( x , y , zﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ACﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ αﺒﺤﻴﺙ AM = α AC
x −1 y + 2
= ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ x − 1 = −2αﻭ y + 2 = −2αﻭ z − 2 = αﺃﻱ = z − 2
w
−2 −2
x − y − 3 = 0
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( AC ﻝﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﺜﻼ:
w
x + 2 y = −1
−2 x − y = − 4 : ﺃﻱ ؟ x OA + y OB ﻫل ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ xﻭ yﻴﺤﻘﻘﺎﻥ ﻤﺜﻼ= OC :
3
2x + y = 3
2
ﻨﺠﺩ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤل ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ x = 3 :ﻭ . y = −2ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، A ، Oﻭ Cﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
265
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 10
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ
.1ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻝﻁﻭﻴﻠﺔ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ
(
O ; i , j , kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) u ( x , y , z )
ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ . OM = uﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ . u = OM
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ M 3 ، M 2 ، M 1ﻭ M ′ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
OM 3 = z k ، OM 2 = y j ، OM 1 = x iﻭ OM ′ = OM 1 + OM 2
om
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻭﺭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻡ OMM ′ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ:
OM 2 = OM ′2 + M Mﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ′ 2 = OM 32
M Mﻓﺈﻥ: ′ 2
OM 2 = OM ′2 + OM 32
.c
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻭﺭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻡ OM 1M ′ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ OM ′2 = OM 12 + M 1M ′2 :ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ:
M 1M ′2 = OM 2 2ﻓﺈﻥ OM ′2 = OM 12 + OM 2 2 :ﻨﺠﺩ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ OM 2 = OM 12 + OM 2 2 + OM 32 :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ:
ik
OM 2 = x 2 + y 2 + z 2ﺃﻱ u = x 2 + y 2 + z 2
aw
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﺘﺤﺴﺏ ﻁﻭﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) u ( x , y , zﺒﹻu = x 2 + y 2 + z 2 : ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:
ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ AB = ABﻭ ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ABﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﺘﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) A ( x A , y A , z Aﻭ ) B ( x B , y B , z Bﺒﹻ:
.m
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:
= AB ) (x B − x A ) + ( y B − y A ) + (z B − z A
2 2 2
w
= AB ) ( 0 − 1) + ( −2 + 1) + ( 3 − 2 ﻤﺜﺎل :ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) A (1, −1, 2ﻭ ) B ( 0, −2,3ﻫﻲ = 3
2 2 2
w
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻋﻨﺩ ﺇﺠﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻝﺒﺎ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻔﻀل ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ.
O ; i , j , kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ α .ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ( S ) .ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ( )
ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . αﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) M ( x , y , zﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ.
) M ∈ ( Sﻴﻌﻨﻲ OM = αﺃﻱ OM 2 = α 2ﻭ ﻩﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ x 2 + y 2 + z 2 = α 2
x 2 + y 2 + z 2 = α 2ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ) ( Sﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . α ﺇﺫﻥ
266
10 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 5
( )
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O ; i , j , kﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) B ( 4,8, 2 ) ، A ( 8,5, 2ﻭ ) . C ( 5,1, 2
.1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ AC ، ABﻭ . BC
.2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻭ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ.
ﺤــل:
om
AB = 5 ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ = AB ) ( 4 − 8) + (8 − 5) + ( 2 − 2 .1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
2 2 2
.c
= 52 + 52ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ A BCﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A 50 ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔAC 2 + AB 2 = BC 2 :
ik
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 6
aw
( ) ( )
ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i , j , kﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ( 4,3, 0 ) ، A 3, −2, 2 3ﻭ ) . C (1,5, 2
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ) ( Sﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻭ ﺘﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A
.2ﻫل ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ Bﻭ Cﺇﻝﻰ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ) ( S؟
af
.3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ) ( Sﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻭﺍﻗﻡ ) . (Oz
ot
ﺤــل:
.1ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺍﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ) ( Sﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ OAﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ. OA = 5 :
ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ) ( Sﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x , y , zﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ OM = OAﺃﻱ OM 2 = OA 2
.m
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ 12 + 52 + 22 = 30 :ﻭ . 30 ≠ 25ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Cﻻ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ) ( Sﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻻ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ) . ( S
w
x = 0
.3ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ) (Ozﻫﻲ:
y = 0
w
x 2 + y 2 + z 2 = 25
x = 0 ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ) M ( x , y , zﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ) ( Sﻭ ) (Ozﻴﻌﻨﻲ:
y = 0
ﺘﻘﺒل ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺤﻠﻴﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ ) ( 0, 0,5ﻭ ) . ( 0, 0, −5
ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ) ( Sﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻭﺍﻗﻡ ) (Ozﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) E ( 0, 0,5ﻭ ) . F ( 0, 0, −5
267
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 10
om
(
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ P O ; i , j )
( )
• ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ) M ( x , y , zﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ P O ; i , jﻓﺈﻥ . z = 0
( )
• ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺎ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) M ( x , y , zﺤﻴﺙ z = 0ﻫﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ . P O ; i , j
.c
( )
ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ z = 0ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ P O ; i , j
ik
(
P O ;k ,i ) (
P O; j ,k ) (
P O ;i , j ) ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺃﻨﻘل ﺜﻡ ﺃﻜﻤل ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ
aw
z =0 ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ
( )
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ) M ( x , y , zﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Γﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ AMﺜﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ . P A ; i , j
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ P A ; i , jﺒﻴﻥ ،ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ، OM = OA + AMﺃﻥ Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) . ( Γ ( )
.m
(
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻤﺎ ﺴﺒﻕ ﺃﻥ ( Γ ) = P A ; i , j )
(
• ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ) ( Γﻭ P O ; i , jﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ. )
w
ﺍﻝﺨﻼﺼﺔ :ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x , y , zﺤﻴﺙ z = aﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( 0, 0, aﻭ ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ
ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ . P O ; i , jﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ z = aﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻪ. ( )
w
.3ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
w
( )
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( P1ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﹻ P O ; i , jﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ). A (1, 0, −3
( )
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( P2ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﹻ P O ; j , kﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ). B ( 2, 2, −1
( )
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( P3ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﹻ P O ; k , iﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) . C ( 0,3, 0
ﺤﺩﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x , y , zﺤﻴﺙ x ) y = 3ﻭ zﻜﻴﻔﻴﺎﻥ (.
268
10 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺴﻁﻭﺍﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﺤﺩ ﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ
.1ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل (O ; I , J , K ) :ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) (Cﺍﻷﺴﻁﻭﺍﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻫﺎ ) (Oz
ﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﺎﻫﺎﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﻫﻤﺎ 2ﻭ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﺍﻫﻤﺎ Oﻭ ) . A ( 0, 0,5
• ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) M ( x , y , zﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) (Cﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻤﺴﻘﻁﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) . (Ozﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ
ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ Hﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ Mﺘﺤﻘﻕ x 2 + y 2 = 4 :ﻤﻊ . 0 ≤ z ≤ 5
• ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺎ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) M ( x , y , zﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ x 2 + y 2 = 4 :ﻤﻊ . 0 ≤ z ≤ 5ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
om
MH = 2ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﺴﻁﻭﺍﻨﺔ ) . (C
ﺍﻝﺨﻼﺼﺔ :ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻷﺴﻁﻭﺍﻨﺔ ) (Cﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ x 2 + y 2 = 4 :ﻤﻊ . 0 ≤ z ≤ 5
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﺔ :ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺴﻁﻭﺍﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻫﺎ ) (Ozﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ،
.c
ﻤﻘﻁﻌﻬﺎ ﺒﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋل ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ) R ، (Ozﻫﻲ x 2 + y 2 = R 2 :ﻤﻊ zﻜﻴﻔﻲ.
ik
x 2 + y 2 = R 2
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺃﺴﻁﻭﺍﻨﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻫﺎ ) (Ozﺒﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ z = aﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻬﺎ:
z = a
aw
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ • :ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻷﺴﻁﻭﺍﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻫﺎ ) (Oyﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻤﻘﻁﻌﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = 0
ﻫﻭ . 3
• ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x , y , zﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ z 2 + y 2 = 25 :ﻤﻊ . −2 ≤ x ≤ 3
af
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻩ ﺃﺤﺩ ﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﺃﺴﻪ o
ot
.1ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل (O ; I , J , K ) :ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ .ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻩ ) ، (Oz
ﺭﺃﺴﻪ Oﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ) A ( 0, 0, 4ﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ .2
.m
1
• ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺎ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) M ( x , y , zﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺘﺤﻘﻕx 2 + y 2 − z 2 = 0 :
4
ﻤﻊ . 0 ≤ z ≤ 4ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ) . (C
w
1
ﺍﻝﺨﻼﺼﺔ :ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ) (Cﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ x 2 + y 2 − z 2 = 0 :ﻤﻊ . 0 ≤ z ≤ 4
4
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﺔ :ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻩ ) ، (Ozﺭﺃﺴﻪ Oﻭ ﻗﻴﺱ ﻨﺼﻑ
ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻪ ﺭﺃﺴﻪ αﻫﻲx 2 + y 2 − tan 2 α × z 2 = 0 :
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻩ ) ، (Oyﺭﺃﺴﻪ ، Oﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﻪ 5ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﻪ.3
269
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 10
( )
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O ; i , j , kﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) A ( 3, 0, −3ﻭ ) . B ( 2, 0, −2
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺒﺤﻴﺙ . −2GA + 3GB = 0ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ B؟
.2ﻨﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) M ( x , y , zﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ) f ( Mﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﹻf ( M ) = −2MA 2 + 3MB 2 :
ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) ( Γ kﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ f ( M ) = k :ﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ.
ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ) f ( Mﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ y ، xﻭ zﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺘﻴﻥ ) ( Γ 4ﻭ ) . ( Γ −12 •
ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ kﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) . ( Γ k •
om
.1ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ .ﻨﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ Gﻫﻲ ) . ( x , y , z
ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ −2GA + 3GBﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ) ( −x , − y , −zﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ −2GA + 3GB = 0ﻴﻌﻨﻲ x = y = z = o
.c
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻤﺒﺩﺃ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ. ﺇﺫﻥG ( 0, 0, 0 ) :
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ } ). { ( A ; −2 ) , ( B ;3
ik
• .2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ MA 2 = ( x − 3) + ( y − 0 ) + ( z + 3) :ﻭ ) MB 2 = ( x − 2 ) + ( y − 0 ) + ( z + 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
) ( Γ −12ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x , y , zﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ f ( M ) = −12 :ﺃﻱx 2 + y 2 + z 2 − 12 = −12 :
} ( Γ −12 ) = { O ﻭﻤﻨﻪ x = y = z =o ﺃﻱ ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥx 2 + y 2 + z 2 = 0 :
ot
270
10 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
( )
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O ; i , j , kﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ )، B ( 0, 0, −4 ) ، A ( 0, 0, 2 ) ، E ( 0, 0, −1
. Dﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Sﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Eﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 3 ( )
Cﻭ 5, 0, −3 ( )
5, 0,1
.1ﻫل ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، Aﻭ Dﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ؟
.2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( S؟ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ C ، B ، Aﻭ Dﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) . ( Sﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( Sﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ.
.3ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ aﺍﻷﻭﻀﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺴﻁﺢ ) ( Sﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( Paﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . z = a
.4ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ) ( Sﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( P−2
om
.1ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، Aﻭ Dﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ AC ، ABﻭ ) ADﻤﺜﻼ( ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ
( ) ( )
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ) AC 5, 0, −1 ، AB ( 0, 0, −6ﻭ . AD 5, 0, −5
.c
ﻫل ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ xﻭ yﺒﺤﻴﺙ AB = x AC + y AD :؟
3 3 x 5 + y 5 = 0
= .y . ﻨﺠﺩ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤل ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ x = − :ﻭ AB = x AC + y ADﻴﻌﻨﻲ
ik
2 2 −x − 5 y = −6
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، Aﻭ Dﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
aw
.2ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Sﻫﻲx 2 + y 2 + ( z + 1) = 9 :
2
( ( ) )
ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺢ ) ( Sﻤﻊ ) (Oyﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ 0, 2 2, 0ﻭ 0, −2 2, 0ﻭ ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻤﻊ ) (Ozﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ . B
( )
.3ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( Paﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ . P O ; i , jﻨﻤﻴﺯ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺜﻼﺙ ﺤﺎﻻﺕ:
.m
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺢ ) ( Sﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( Paﻤﻨﻔﺼﻠﻴﻥ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ [∞a ∈ ]−∞; −4[ ∪ ]2; +
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ } a ∈ {−4; 2ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( Paﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺴﻁﺢ ) ( Sﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ . B
w
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ [ a ∈ ]−4; 2ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( Paﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ) ( Paﻭﻓﻕ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﻴﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ) . (Oz
[ ]−4; 2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( P−2ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ) (S ( −2 ) .4ﻴﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ
w
271
10
أــ اـ
ء
ﺃﺳـﺌـﻠﺔ ﻣﺘـﻌـﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺻﺤـﻴـﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺧـﻄـﺄ
ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﻁﺄ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 7
ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 8ﺇﻝﻰ ، 14ﻭﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻨﻔﺱ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ . ABCDEFGH
H G
ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ . ABCDEFGH
8ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ BHﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ : E F
ﺃ( . AB + AH
om
D C
ﺏ( . HG + BG
ﺝ( . BA + BG A B
Iﻭ Jﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎ ] [ ABﻭ ] [ DCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ . 9 1ﺃ ( AE ، AD ، ABﻫﻲ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
.c
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ . ﺏ ( EF ، DC ، ABﻫﻲ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ .
ﺃ ( . H، G، C، B ﺝ ( EH ، HC ، AHﻫﻲ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
ik
ﺏ ( . H، J، E، I 2ﺃ ( HG ، BG ، AHﻫﻲ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺔ .
ﺝ( . I ، H، G، F ﺏ ( CD ، EG ، ACﻫﻲ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺔ .
aw
ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .
10 ﺝ ( HG ، DC ، ADﻫﻲ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺔ .
ﺃ ( FH ، BGﻭ . FG ﺃ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( EGﻭ ) ( CAﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ . 3
ﺏ ( BC ، ACﻭ . BH ﺏ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( HFﻭ ) ( ACﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ .
af
ﺝ ( AD ، AEﻭ . GC ﺝ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( HDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ .
ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺎﻥ : 11 4ﺃ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( HDﻋﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( BCF
ot
272
10 ﺃﺸـﻌـﺔ ﺍﻝﻔـﻀﺎﺀ
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ 20
ا
ــ او
ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺠﺎﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺭﻴﻨﻴﻥ 15ﻭ ، 16ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، J ، I ، O
ﺃ ( . IA + AL + LO
Kﺤﻴﺙ Kﻫﻲ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( OIJ
ﺏ ( . AL + LF + FE
ﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ ICDOABEKﻭ ، G ، H
ﺝ ( . HB + BF + FG
L ، Jﻫﻲ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ] [OD ] ، [ IC ] ، [ ABﻭ ] [ KE
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ، 23 ، 22 ، 21ﻝﺘﻜﻥ K ، J ، I ، O
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺓ ﺤﻴﺙ Kﺘﻘﻊ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( OIJ
om
K L E
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎ ﻤﺒﺩﺅﻩ Oﻤﻤﺜﹼﻼ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ 21
A H B
ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : D
O J
ﺃ ( . 2OI + OJ G
I
.c
C
ﺏ ( . 2OI + OK
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ . LB ، ID ، LA ، IK 15
5
ﺝ ( . OJ + OK ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ . HD ، LC ، IL 16
ik
2
22ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎ ﻤﺒﺩﺅﻩ Oﻤﻤﺜﹼﻼ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ ﻭ ، J ، M ، L ، I 17ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDEFGH
N ، Kﻫﻲ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ] ، [ DC ] ، [ BC ] ، [ AB ] ، [ AD
ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
aw
ﺃ ( . OI + OJ + OK ] [ HG ] ، [ DHﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
H G
ﺏ ( . OI + 2OJ + OK
N
3 1 E
af
ﺝ ( . OI + OJ + OK K F
2 2
23ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎ ﻤﺒﺩﺅﻩ Oﻤﻤﺜﹼﻼ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ D J C
I M
ot
ﺏ ( . OI − OJ + OK
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ
18
ﺝ ( . 2OI + OJ − OK
. IL ، LC
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ 24 ـــع ا
ــ
w
273
10
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ . 31 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺠﺎﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : 26
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﻫل ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺏ( . SA − AB ﺃ( . AB + CB
ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ؟ ﺝ( . AO + OB + BS
ﺃ ( . BF ، FG ، FE ﻼ ﻤﺒﺩﺃﻩ B
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ،ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻤﺜ ﹰ 27
ﺏ ( . CG ، FD ، AB ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒِـ :
ﺝ ( . EG ، AD ، AB 1
ﺏ( . BD + DC ﺃ( . 2 BC
32ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ،ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﺒﺤﻴﺙ 2
om
1 1
. AE + 2 AD = 2 EC + 2 BD ﺝ( . CB + CA
2 3
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ AC ، AB ، AEﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ 28
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ، 35 ، 34 ، 33ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ
ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺠﺎﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
.c
ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ w ، v ، uﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .
ﺃ ( . BC + BD
33ﺃ ( . u = 2v + 3w
ﺏ ( . BC + BD + BA
ik
ﺏ ( u − 3v = 0ﻭ 2u − 5w = 0
ﺝ ( . DB + DC + DA
34ﺃ ( u = 2vﻭ . w = u + 3v
aw أ
ــ اي
ﺏ ( u = 0ﻭ . 2v − 3w = 0
35ﺃ ( 3u − 5v = 0ﻭ . w = 0 ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDEFGHﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ ﻭ ، I 29
ﺏ ( v = 0 ، u ≠ 0ﻭ. w = 0 L ، K ، Jﻫﻲ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ] [ HG ] ، [ EF ] ، [ AB
af
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 36ﺇﻝﻰ ، 41ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ k ، j ، i ﻭ ] [ DCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ . H K G
ot
A I
B
. w = j + k ، v = i + j + k ، u = i + k 37 ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ،ﻫل
. w = j + k ، v = i − k ، u = i + j − k 38 ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ؟
w
ﺃ ( AD ، EGﻭ . DI
، v = 3i + j ، u = i + j − k 39
ﺏ ( IJ ، IAﻭ . KL
. w = −5i − 2 j + 2k
w
274
10
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
1 3 1
ﺏ ( u ; − ; − ﻭ . v − ; ;
2 3 1 ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﻭ ' A ' B ' C ' Dﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﻤﻥ 43
15 5 5 3 2 2
ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﺍﻫﻤﺎ Oﻭ ' Oﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل 49
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ . AA ' + BB ' + CC ' + DD ' = 4OO ' :
ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ :
ا ــ اــ ،
ﺃ ( ) u ( 2;1;3ﻭ ) . v ( 3; − 1; 2
& ! "# $%
ﺏ ( ) u (1; − 2;3ﻭ ) . v (1;1; 2
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 46 ، 45 ، 44ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل
50 ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ، ( O ; OI : OJ ; OKﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، A
om
ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ :
. D، C
ﺃ ( ) u ( 0; 0; 6ﻭ ) . v ( 2;0; 2
ﺏ ( ) u ( −3;3;3ﻭ ). v ( 3;3;3
.c
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ، 53 ، 52 ، 51ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، A K
J
C ، Bﻫﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .
O
ik
B ( 3 ; 1 ; 2 ) ، A (1 ; 2 ; 3) 51ﻭ . C 2 ; ;
3 5 I
2 2
B ( −5 ; 2 ; 1) ، A ( 2 ; 1 ; 3) 52
aw
ﺃﻋﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ
ﻭ . C ; ;
13 2 11
3 3 3 ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ،ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ .
B (1 ; 3 ; 3) ، A ( 3 ; 2 ; 2 ) 53ﻭ . C ; ;
7 3 3 )، C ( 2;1;0 ) ، B (1; 2;0 ) ، A (1;1;1 44
af
2 2 2
) . D ( 0; 0; 2
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ، 56 ، 55 ، 54ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ
)، C (1;0;1) ، B ( −1;1;0 ) ، A (1; − 1;1 45
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( CDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ .
ot
) . D ( −1; − 1;0
) ، C (1;3; 2 ) ، B ( 2;1; 0 ) ، A (1;0; 2 54 ) ، C (1; − 2;1) ، B (1; 2; 2 ) ، A ( 2;1; 2 46
) . D ( 2; 4;0
.m
) . D (1;1; − 2
)، C ( −2; 2; 0 ) ، B (1;3; − 1) ، A ( 2; 2;3 55
ا
ااز
) . D ( −3;3; − 4
ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ( O ; i : j ; k
)، C (1; 2;0 ) ، B ( 0;1;3) ، A ( 2;0;1
w
56
47ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ
) . D ( 3;1; − 2
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ :
w
275
10
) B (1 ; 5 ; − 1) ، A ( 2 ; − 1 ; 3؛
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
71
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ، 62 ، 61 ، 60ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ
) C (1 ; − 17 ; 9ﻭ . u = −2OA + 3OB + OC
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ABCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ .
) B (1 ; − 2 ; 1) ، A ( −5 ; − 3 ; − 2؛ 72
) A ( 2 ; 3 ; 1؛ ) B (1 ; 0 ; 2؛ ) C ( 3 ; 5 ; 3؛ 60
) C ( 3 ; 7 ; 0ﻭ . u = OA + 2OB + OC
). D ( 4 ; 8 ; 2
ا%ت "#ا+ء ) A (1 ; 2 ; − 5؛ ) B ( 0 ; 3 ; 2؛ ) C (1 ; 1 ; 1؛ 61
73ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ )A ( 2 ; − 1 ; 1 ). D ( 2 ; 0 ; − 6
om
ﻭﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ). u ( 2 ; 3 ; − 1 ) A (1 ; − 1 ; − 1؛ ) B ( 3 ; − 2 ; 5؛ 62
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x ; y ; zﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ) C ( 7 ; 3 ; 1؛ ). D ( 5 ; 4 ; − 5
، AM = kuﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﻴﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ، ℝﻫﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ، 65 ، 64 ، 63ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D
.c
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ D ، C ، B ، Aﺘﺸﻜل
ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ Mﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . kﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺃ( ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ .
Mﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ kﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼ ﻭﺴﻴﻁﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D ) B ( 2 ; 5 ; − 3) ، A ( 3 ; 2 ; 1؛
ik
63
ﺏ ( ﺠﺩ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ ،ﺘﺭﺒﻁ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ، M ). C (7 ; − 1 ; 2
ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ . k
aw ) B ( 3 ; 2 ; − 5) ، A (1 ; 2 ; 3؛ 64
ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D ). C ( 0 ; − 1 ; − 3
74ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) B (1 ; 5 ; − 1) ، A ( 0 ; 1 ; 0؛
65
) A (1 ; − 3 ; 2ﻭﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) . u ( 3 ; − 2 ; 2 ) . C ( −3 ; 1 ; 2
af
ﺠﺩ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼ ﻭﺴﻴﻁﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D ﺃ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ، 68 ، 67 ، 66ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ
ﺏ ( ﺠﺩ ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
ot
ﺠﺩ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼ ﻭﺴﻴﻁﻴﺎ ،ﺜﻡ ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ 76 ). C ( 2 ; 0 ; 3
ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ) ' ( yy ') ، ( xxﻭ ) ' . ( zz
B ; − 1 ; 3 ، A ; ; 1؛
1 3 1
68
77ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ )A (1 ; 2 ; 1 2 2 2
w
ﻭﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ). u (1 ; 3 ; 1 ). C ( 2 ; − 1 ; 1
ﺃ ( ﺠﺩ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼ ﻭﺴﻴﻁﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 72 ، 71 ، 70 ، 69ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ
w
ﺏ ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، A ، O
Cﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .
w
276
10 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
1
ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Kﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] [ ADﺒﺤﻴﺙ AK = AD
4 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 82 ، 81 ، 80 ، 79ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻤﻌﺭﻑ
1
ﻭﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Jﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒـ . EJ = EH ﺒﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ ،ﻭﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻴﺸﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
4
) ( Dﻭﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D
ﺃ ( ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ IKﻭ FJﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ABﻭ . AD
x + y − 3 = 0
ﺏ ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ K ، I ، J ، Fﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ . ( D) : 79
y + z −1 = 0
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
x + y + z −1 = 0
. ( D) : 80
ABCDﻫﻭ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﻭ Sﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ 89 x + 3y − z + 2 = 0
om
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ . ABC x = 3
. ( D) : 81
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Iﻭ Jﻤﻥ ] [ SAﻭ ] [ SBﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ، y =1
1 1 x −1 = 0
ﺤﻴﺙ SI = SA؛ ، SJ = SBﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ K . ( D) : 82
3 3 z − 5 = 0
.c
1
ﻤﻥ ] [ BCﺒﺤﻴﺙ . CK = CB 0$ا./ة
3
ﻴﻨﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . ( O ; i ; j ; k
ﺃ ( ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻬﺭﻡ SABCDﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( IJK
ik
ﺏ ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ﻝﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ O 83
ﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ، Rﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ .
) . ( SCD
aw
D ، C ، B ، Aﻫﻲ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ 90 ﺏ( . R = 2 ﺃ ( . R=3
ﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ،ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﺤﻴﺙ : ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ Sﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 84
x − y = 1
. AE − 2 EB = 5 AD + 5DC . ، 3ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒِـ
af
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ AB ، AEﻭ ACﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ z=2
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻤﻊ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ . S
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .
ot
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ IJﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ . EG ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ Sﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 87
D ، C ، B ، Aﻫﻲ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ 93 ، 7ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ Pﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . z = 13
w
ﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ،ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Iﻭ Jﺤﻴﺙ : ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ Sﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ . P
AI = 2 AB + AC + AD؛ &ر
. AJ = AB + 3 AC + AD 88ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ ،ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﻥ
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( IJﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( ABC 3
ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] [ ABﺒﺤﻴﺙ . AI = AB
4
277
10
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
100ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A (1; − 1; 2 ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﻭ Eﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ :
94
ﻭﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) ، u (1; 2;1ﻭﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( 1
x + y + z − 6 = 0 . CE = AD
. ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒِـ : 3
x − y − 1 = 0
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ AC ، AEﻭ CDﻫﻲ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( Dﻤﻊ ) ∆ ( . 95
C ، B ، Aﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ .
101ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ )A ( −1; 2;1
om
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ،ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل
ﻭﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) ، u (1; − 1; 2ﻭﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ (
ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ،ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﻤﺴﺘﻘل ﻋﻥ . M
x − y + z − 10 = 0
. ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒِـ : ﺃ ( . u = MA + 2MB − 3MC
2 x + y − z + 4 = 0
.c
ﺏ ( . u = 3MA − MB − 2MC
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( Dﻤﻊ ) ∆ ( .
102 C ، B ، Aﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ 96
ik
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ .
ﻭﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) ، u ( 2;1; 2ﻭﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ )A ( −1; 2; −1
x = 1
aw ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺒﺤﻴﺙ . MA − MB + MC = 0 :
. ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒِـ :
z = 1 97
C ، B ، Aﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( Dﻤﻊ ) ∆ ( . ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ .
af
ﻋﺭﻑ ﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺎ ﺒﺈﻋﻁﺎﺀ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻭﺸﺭﻁ ،ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺢ 103
ﻫل ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺒﺤﻴﺙ MA − 2MB + MC = 0 :؟
ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺭﺃﺴﻪ Oﻭﻤﺤﻭ )' ( yyﻋﻠﻤﺎ 98
C ، B ، Aﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺔ E
ot
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﺫﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ x = 2ﻭ x = 5ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ.
ﺃ ( ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ MEﻭ MFﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻲ :
w
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ،ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﻪ ﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 3
. MA + MB + MC + MD
w
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺢ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻨﺘ ٍﻪ .
ﺏ ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﺒﺤﻴﺙ . IA + IB + IC + ID = 0
278
11
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
om
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ.
ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺘﺘﻌﻠﻕ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ.
.c
ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻪ ﻭ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻨﻪ.
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ.
ik
aw ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺃﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ.
U .V = AB .HK
af
ﻫﻭ ﻏﻴﺎﺙ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻥ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺴﻌﻭﺩ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺸﺎﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻋﻭ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺸﻲ .ﻭﻝﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺍﺨﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻥ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻤﻥ
ﺍﻝﻬﺠﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﻜﺎﺸﺎﻥ ) ﺇﻴﺭﺍﻥ ( .ﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺸﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﺤﻭ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺼﺭﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻔﻘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻁﻕ ،ﺜﻡ ﺩﺭﺱ
ot
ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺘﻔﻭﻕ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ .ﻭ ﻻ ﻏﺭﺍﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻝﻙ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺍﻝﺩﻩ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻔﻠﻙ.
ﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻋﺎﺵ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺸﻲ ﻤﻌﻅﻡ ﺤﻴﺎﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﺴﻤﺭﻗﻨﺩ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺒﻨﺎ ﻤﺭﺼﺩﺍ ﺴﻤﺎﻩ " ﻤﺭﺼﺩ ﺴﻤﺭﻗﻨﺩ ".
.m
ﻭ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﻪ " ﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ " ﻤﻨﻬﻼ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﻰ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻕ
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻐﺭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺤﺩ ﺴﻭﺍﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺩﻭﺍ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﺃﺒﻨﺎﺌﻬﻡ ﻓﻲ
w
279
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 11
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
ﻤﻥ ﻤﻤﻴﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ "" ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻭﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﻴﺭﺓ ""
om
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ AB 2 + AC 2 = BC 2ﻴﻌﻨﻲ AB 2 + AC 2 − BC 2 = 0
1
= w
2
( ﺴﻭﻑ ﻨﻬﺘﻡ ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺩﺩ wﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﹻAB 2 + AC 2 − BC 2 ) :
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺍﻀﺢ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ .w = 0ﻨﺘﺴﺎﺀل ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ wﺇﺫﺍ ﻝﻡ ﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ.
.c
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺫﻝﻙ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺎ A BCﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( AB
ﻨﻤﻴﺯ ﺜﻼﺙ ﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ . H
ik
aw
af
) w = ( AB 2 + HA 2 − HB 2
1
.m
2
• .2ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ :1ﺒﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ HB = AB − HAﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ :
w = AB × AH = AB × AC cos BAC
• ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ :2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ :
w = AB × AH = AB × AC cos BAC
w
( )
1 2 2 2
w
u = x2+y2
ﺒﻔﺭﺽ ) u ( x , yﻭ ) v ( x ′, y ′ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥw = xx ′ + yy ′ :
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ wﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ABﻭ AC
280
11 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
( )
2
.1ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ BC 2 = AC − ABﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ . BC
.2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ
cos ABCﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ
ﺇﻝﻰ 0.01ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
. ABC
om
.3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ 0.01ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
. BCA
.c
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
ik
) (O ; I , Jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ B
π π
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺼﻭﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ
aw 6 4
ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . O
( )
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺍﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ OB ,OAﺜﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
π
af
OA ⋅OB = cos
12
.2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ،ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻜل ﻤﻥ OAﻭ . OA ⋅OB ، OB
ot
π
. cos .3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻤﺎ ﺴﺒﻕ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ
12
.m
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
w
281
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 11
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ
.1ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ u ⋅vﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﹻ:
• u ⋅v = 0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u = 0ﺃﻭ v = 0
) (
• u ⋅v = u v cos u ,vﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u ≠ 0ﻭ v ≠ 0
) (
ﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ • :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ uﻭ vﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﻓﺈﻥ u ⋅v = u vﻷﻥ cos u ,v = 1
om
) (
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ uﻭ vﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻨﺎ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻫﺎﻫﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ u ⋅v = − u vﻷﻥ cos u ,v = −1
2 2 2
• ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ u ⋅uﺒﹻ uﻭ ﻨﺴﻤﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ u = uﻭ ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ
2 2
.c
ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ AB = AB = AB 2
( )
1
ik
2 2 2
ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ 48 = u ⋅v u + v − u −v ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ uﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ:
2 aw .2ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ
ﻲ ) ( x ′, y ′ﻓﺈﻥ:
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ،ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ،ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ uﻫﻲ ) ( x , yﻭ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ vﻫ ٍ
u ⋅v = xx ′ + yy ′
af
( )
ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ O ; i , jﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺴﺎ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻥ ) u ( x , yﻭ ) v ( x ′, y ′ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ:
2 2 2
v = x ′2 + y ′2 ٍ ، u = x 2 + y 2ﻭ u − v ( x − x ′, y − y ′ ) u −v = ( x − x ′ )2 + ( y − y ′ )2
ot
( )
1 2 2 2
= u ⋅vﻭ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺇﺠﺭﺍﺀ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﺎﺕ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺔ ﻨﺠﺩu ⋅v = xx ′ + yy ′ : u + v − u −v ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ ﻓﻲ
2
.m
.3ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺓ
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ:
AB = uﻭ AC = vﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( ACﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﻴﻥ.
w
w
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ . u ⋅v = 0
ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ • :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u = 0ﺃﻭ v = 0ﻓﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺍﻀﺢ ﺃﻥu ⋅v = 0 :
π
) (
) (
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u ≠ 0ﻭ v ≠ 0ﻓﺎﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ u ⋅v = 0ﻴﻌﻨﻲ cos u ,v = 0ﺃﻱ u ,v = + k πﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ
2
ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﺩل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ.
282
11 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﺤﻴﺙ AB = AC = BC = 3ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ′ ، A ′ﻭ C ′ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ AC ] ، [ BCﻭ ] [ ABﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ CC ′ ⋅ AB ، BC ⋅CA ٍ ، AB ⋅ AC :و . A ′B ′ ⋅ AB
ﺤــل:
om
.c
ik
= 3 × 3cos π = 9
AB ⋅ AC = AB × AC cos BAC
3 2
π
BC ⋅CA = CD ⋅CA = CD × CA cos π
aw 1 9
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﺤﻴﺙ BC = CDﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ − = 3 × 3 × − = −
3 2 2
) (CC ′ﻫﻭ ﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ A BCﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ) (CC ′ ) ⊥ ( ABﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻓﺈﻥ CC ′ ⋅ AB = 0
1
ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ A ′B ′ = − ABﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ A ′B ′ﻭ ABﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻫﺎﻫﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻓﺈﻥ:
af
2
3 9
A ′B ′ ⋅ AB = −A ′B ′ × AB = − × 3 = −
2 2
ot
ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) (CDﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ AB ⋅CD = 0 ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ:
w
. AJ ⋅ BIﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺫﻝﻙ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ( A ; B , D ﻝﻨﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ = 0
w
283
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 11
ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ
ﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ.1
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎλ ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲw ﻭv ، u ﻤﻥ ﺍﺠل ﻜل ﺜﻼﺙ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ:ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ
( ) ( )
u + v ⋅w = u ⋅w + v ⋅w ( 3) u ⋅ v + w = u ⋅v + u ⋅w ( 2 ) u ⋅v = v ⋅ u (1)
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
u ⋅ λv = λ u ⋅v ( 5) λu ⋅v = λ u ⋅v ( 4 )
om
w ( x ′′, y ′′ ) ﻭv ( x ′, y ′ ) ، u ( x , y ) ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ:ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ
u ⋅v = xx ′ + yy ′
u ⋅v = v ⋅ u ﻓﺈﻥyy ′ = y ′y ﻭxx ′ = x ′x ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ.1
.c
v ⋅ u = x ′
x + y ′
y
: ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ. ( x ′ + x ′′, y ′ + y ′′ ) ﻫﻲv + w ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ.2
ik
( )
u ⋅ v + w = x ( x ′ + x ′′ ) + y ( y ′ + y ′′ ) = xx ′ + xx ′′ + yy ′ + yy ′′
( )
u ⋅ v + w = u ⋅v + u ⋅w ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
u ⋅v + u ⋅w = xx ′ + yy ′ + xx ′′ + yy ′′ = xx ′ + xx ′′ + yy ′ + yy ′′
aw
: ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ. ( λ x , λ y ) ﻫﻲλu ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ.3
( ) ( )
λu ⋅v = ( λ x ) x ′ + ( λ y ) y ′ = λ ( xx ′ + yy ′ ) = λ u ⋅v
( )( ) ( )
1 1
2u ⋅ −3v + w = 2u ⋅ −3v + 2u w = −6u ⋅v + u ⋅w • :ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ
2 2
ot
( )( )
2 2 2 2
2u − v ⋅ u + 3v = 2u + 6u ⋅v − v ⋅u − 3v = 2u + 5u ⋅v − 3v •
.m
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻁﺎﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﻴﺭﺓ.2
(u +v ) = (u +v )(u +v ) = u + u ⋅v +v ⋅u +v = u + 2u ⋅v +v
2 2 2 2 2
:• ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
(u −v ) = (u −v )(u −v ) = u − u ⋅v −v ⋅u +v = u − 2u ⋅v +v
2
2 2 2 2
:• ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
w
( )( )
2 2 2 2
u + v u − v = u − u ⋅v + v ⋅ u − v = u −v :• ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
w
( ﺃﻭu + v ) = u + 2u ⋅v + v
2
2
2 2 2 2
u + v = u + 2u ⋅v + v
( ﺃﻭu −v ) = u − 2u ⋅v + v
2 2
2 2
w
2 2
u −v = u − 2u ⋅v + v
( ) ( ) : ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ
1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2
u ⋅v = u +v − u − v ﻭ u ⋅v = u + v − u −v
2 2
284
11 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل3
B ، A .1ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ .ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ AM ⋅ BC + BM ⋅CA + CM ⋅ AB = 0 : M
.2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ . H
ﺤــل:
.1ﻨﻀﻊα = AM ⋅ BC + BM ⋅CA + CM ⋅ AB :
( ( ) ) ( )
om
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ α = AM ⋅ BA + AC + BA + AM ⋅CA + CA + AM ⋅ AB :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ:
α = AM ⋅ BA + AM ⋅ AC + BA ⋅CA + AM ⋅CA + CA ⋅ AB + AM ⋅ AB
ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ AM ⋅ AC + AM ⋅CA = 0 ، AM ⋅ BA + AM ⋅ AB = 0 :ﻭ BA ⋅CA + CA ⋅ AB = 0ﻓﺈﻥ α = 0
.2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ A BCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ )ﻤﺜﻼ( ﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻠﺫﻴﻥ ﻴﺸﻤﻼﻥ Aﻭ Bﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻷﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ
.c
ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻴﻥ .ﻝﻨﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ٍﺔ Hﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . C
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل 1ﻭ ﺒﺄﺨﺫ AH ⋅ BC + BH ⋅CA + CH ⋅ AB = 0 : M = H
ik
ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ) ( AH ) ⊥ ( BCﻭ ) ( BH ) ⊥ ( ACﻓﺈﻥ AH ⋅ BC = 0ﻭ BH ⋅CA = 0
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ CH ⋅ AB = 0 :ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ) (CH ) ⊥ ( AB
aw
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . C
= BI ⋅ BC = BC ⋅ BC = BC
3 3 3
) (
1 1 a 2
w
285
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 11
om
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ uﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ u ≠ 0ﻭ ﻜﺎﻥ v ′ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ vﻋﻠﻰ uﻓﺈﻥ:
u ⋅v = u ⋅v ′
.c
( )
ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻨﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺒﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O ; i , jﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ
iﻭ uﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ.
ik
ﻨﻀﻊ u = OAﻭ v = OBﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ B ′ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﹻ Bﻋﻠﻰ ) . (OA
aw
ﺇﺫﻥ v ′ = OB ′ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ v = OBﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ u = OA
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ B ( x B , y B ) ، A ( x A , 0 ) ، O ( 0, 0 ) :ﻭ ) B ′ ( x B , 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
) OB ( x B , y B ) ، OA ( x A , 0ﻭ ) OB ′ ( x B , 0
OA ⋅OB = x A x B + 0 × y B = x A x B
af
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ OA ⋅OB = OA ⋅OB ′ﺃﻱu ⋅v = u ⋅v ′ : ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
OA ⋅OB ′ = x A x B + 0 × 0 = x A x B
ot
ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ABﻭ CDﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻨﺘﺎ
C ′ﻭ D ′ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Cﻭ D
.m
( )
2
w
• AB ⋅ BD = AB ⋅ BA = AB ⋅ − AB = − AB = − AB 2 = −25
ﻷﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ BDﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ABﻫﻭ BA
2
• BC ⋅ BD = BC ⋅ BC = BC = 3
ﻷﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ BDﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ BCﻫﻭ BC
286
11 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل5
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AC ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ A ′ . Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ ABﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﻤﻥ A ′
ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( BCﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . B ′
ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ AB ⋅ AB ′ﻭ . AB ⋅ A ′C
ﺤــل:
om
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ AB ′ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ABﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ AA ′ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
× AB ⋅ AB ′ = AB ⋅ AA ′ = AB AA ′
ﻷﻥ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ABﻭ AA ′ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ.
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ A ′Cﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ABﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ A ′Aﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
.c
AB ⋅ A ′C = AB ⋅ A ′A = −AB × AA ′
ﻷﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ABﻭ A ′Aﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﺎﻥ.
ik
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻤﺎ ﺴﺒﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ AB ⋅ AB ′ﻭ AB ⋅ A ′Cﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺃﻱ AB ⋅ AB ′ = − AB ⋅ A ′C
aw
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل6
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ AB = AC = 4ﻭ . BC = 5ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Hﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ BC
af
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔٍ HA ⋅CB ، CA ⋅CB :ﻭ . AB ⋅ BC
.2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Kﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( ACﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ . CK
ot
ﺤــل:
• .1ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﹻ CAﻋﻠﻰ CBﻫﻭ CHﻓﺈﻥ:
.m
AB ⋅ BC = HB ⋅ BC = − HB × BC = − × 5 = −
2 2
.2ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ CBﻋﻠﻰ CAﻫﻭ CKﻓﺈﻥCA ⋅CB = CA ⋅CK :
w
287
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 11
om
n
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل Aﻭ nﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻪ ( D ) .ﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ M
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ. AM ⋅ n = 0 :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺭﻀﻨﺎ ) M ( x , yﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ) AM ( x − x 0 , y − y 0
ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ) AM ⋅ n = a ( x − x 0 ) + b ( y − y 0
.c
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ) M ( x , yﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Dﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a ( x − x 0 ) + b ( y − y 0 ) = 0
ﺃﻱ ax + by − ( ax 0 + by 0 ) = 0ﺃﻭ ax + by + c = 0ﺒﻭﻀﻊ ) c = − ( ax 0 + by 0
ik
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻜل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺤﻴﺙ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ) n ( a , bﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻪ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ax + by + c = 0 :ﺤﻴﺙ cﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ.
aw
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ax + by + c = 0ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻓﺈﻥ ) u ( −b , aﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻝﻪ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) n ( a , b
ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻷﻥ ﻓﻌﻼ nﻭ uﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ ﻤﺎﺩﺍﻡ . n ⋅ u = 0
af
.3ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i , j
Ω
ot
ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ( r >0 ) rﻫﻲ: ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ) Ω ( x 0 , y 0
w
(x − x 0 ) + ( y − y 0 ) = r 2
2 2
w
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ] [ ABﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﺤﻴﺙ MA ⋅ MB = 0
288
11 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل7
( )
O ; i , jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﺤﻴﺙ B ( −2,3) ، A (1,1) :ﻭ ) . C ( 3, 2
om
5x − y + c = 0
ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻓﺈﻥ 5 (1) − 1 + c = 0 :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ c = −4
ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻼﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﻠﻕ ﺒﺎﻝﻀﻠﻊ ] . [ BC 5x − y − 4 = 0 ﺇﺫﻥ
.c
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل8
ik
( )
O ; i , jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ.
aw
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Cﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ) Ω ( −2,1ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 3
.2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (C ′ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ] [ ABﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ) A ( −2, −1ﻭ ) . B ( −3, 2
.3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x , yﺤﻴﺙ x 2 + y 2 − 2x − 3 = 0ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ.
af
.4ﻫل ) ( Γﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x , yﺤﻴﺙ x 2 + y 2 + 2x − 4 y + 8 = 0ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ؟
ﺤــل:
ot
M ( x , y ) ∈ (C ′ ) .2ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ MA ⋅ MB = 0ﺃﻱ( −2 − x )( −3 − x ) + ( −1 − y )( 2 − y ) = 0 :
.m
2 2
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ (C ′′ ) . ( x − 1) + y 2 = 22ﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) I (1, 0ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 2
2
w
(x 2
.4ﻨﻜﺘﺏ x 2 + y 2 + 2x − 4 y + 8 = 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل + 2x ) + ( y 2 − 4 y ) + 8 = 0
) ( x + 1) + ( y − 2 ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ x 2 + 2x = ( x + 1) − 1ﻭ y 2 − 4 y = ( y − 2 ) − 4ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ= −3 :
2 2 2 2
w
ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻁﺭﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﺴﺎﻝﺏ ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻻ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x , yﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ.
ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( Γﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺨﺎﻝﻴﺔ.
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻝﻜل ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل x 2 + y 2 + ax + by + c = 0ﻝﻜﻥ ﻝﻴﺱ ﻜل ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ
289
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 11
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﻁﻭﺍل ﻭ ﺃﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ
.4ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ
Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ I .ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] M . [ ABﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
( ( ) )
2 2 2 2
MA 2 + MB 2 = MA + MB = MI + IA + MI + IB ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
( )
2 2 2
MA 2 + MB 2 = 2MI + 2MI ⋅ IA + IB + IA + IB ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ:
om
2 2 1 1
ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ IA + IB = 0 :ﻭ IA = IB = ABﺃﻱ IA = IB = AB 2
4 2
1
ﻓﺈﻥMA 2 + MB 2 = 2MI 2 + AB 2 :
2
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ A :ﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ ABﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
.c
1
MA 2 + MB 2 = 2MI 2 + AB 2
2
ik
.5ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺜﻠﺙ
aw
=B
، CBA ، BAC
=A A BCﻤﺜﻠﺙ .ﻨﻀﻊ ، BC = a ، A C = b ، A B = c
=C
ACBﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Sﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺸﻲ
af
( )
2 2 2 2
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎBC 2 = BC = AC − AB = AC + AB − 2AC ⋅ AB :
a 2 = b 2 + c 2 − 2bc cos A AC 2 = b 2 ، AC ⋅ AB = AC × AB cos Aﻭ AB 2 = c 2ﻓﺈﻥ : ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ :
ot
c 2 = a 2 + b 2 − 2ab cos C b 2 = a 2 + c 2 − 2ac cos Bﻭ ﻭ ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ
.m
290
11 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل9
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ AC = 8 ، AB = 5 :ﻭ . BC = 7
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ) ( Γﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕMA + MC = 38 :
2 2
Bﻭ
.C Aﻭ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ 0.1ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ
.2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( AC .3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ BHﺤﻴﺙ Hﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ B
ﺤــل:
om
.1ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ ACﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
1 1
. MA 2 + MC 2 = 2MI 2 + AC 2ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Γﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ2MI 2 + AC 2 = 38 :
2 2
ﺃﻱ 2MI + 32 = 38ﺃﻭ . MI = 3ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻓﺈﻥ ) ( Γﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 3
.c
2 2
BC 2 = AB 2 + AC 2 − 2AB × AC cos A .2ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺸﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ A BCﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
ik
0< Aﻓﺈﻥ = 60 :
.A . cos Aﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ <180 49 = 64 + 25 − 2 × 5 × 8 × cos Aﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ = 1
ﺃﻱ
2
ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺸﻲ ﻭ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻨﺠﺩ = 1 :
.B
aw
cos Bﻭ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻨﻘﺭﺃ ≈ 81.2° :
7
Aﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . C ≈ 38.8° +B
+C ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ = 180°
1
.3ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ S = AC × BH
af
2
1 ﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ
S = AB × AC sin A
2
ot
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل10
Bﻭ . C = 70°
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ = 50° ، BC = 8 :
w
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
.A
.2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ABﻭ ACﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺩﻭﺭ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ . 10−2
w
ﺤــل:
w
Aﻨﺠﺩ = 60°
.A +B
+C
.1ﻤﻥ = 180°
AB AC BC
= = .2ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﻴﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
sin C sin B
sin A
BC sin B 8sin 50° BC sin C 8sin 70°
= AC = = ABﻭ = ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
sin A sin 60°
sin A sin 60°
ﻨﺠﺩ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺩﻭﺭ ABﺇﻝﻰ 10−2ﻫﻭ 8.68ﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻤﺩﻭﺭ ACﺇﻝﻰ 10−2ﻫﻭ . 7.08
291
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 11
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ AHﺒﻴﻥ Aﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻤﺴﻘﻁﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( D
ﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ) ( D ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O ; I , Jﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( x 0 , y 0
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ ax + by + c = 0ﺤﻴﺙ ) . ( a , b ) ≠ ( 0, 0
om
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ) ( Dﻭﻝﻴﻜﻥ nﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﺎﻩ ﻫﻤﺎ ) . ( a , b
.c
ik
aw
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ :ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ AHﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ x 0 ، c ، b ، aﻭ . y 0
)(1 n ⋅ AH = a 2 + b 2 × AH .1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ n ⋅ AH = n × AHﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ
af
.2ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻭ ﺒﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ) ( x , yﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
( 2 ) n ⋅ AH = ax 0 + by 0 + c
ot
ax 0 + by 0 + c
= AH .3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻥ ) (1ﻭ ) ( 2ﺃﻥ:
a2 + b 2
.m
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( x 0 , y 0ﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ ax + by + c = 0ﻫﻲ:
ax 0 + by 0 + c
w
a2 + b 2
w
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ:
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( 2,3ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻝﺔy = 2x + 1 :
w
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ) Ω ( −2,1ﻭ ﺘﻤﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔx + y − 2 = 0 :
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) (C ′ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x , yﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔx 2 + y 2 − 2x − 6 y − 3 = 0 :
• ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) (C ′ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ.
• ﻫل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( D ′ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ 3x + 2 y + 4 = 0ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (C ′؟
292
11 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻊ
.1ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) sin ( a − b ) ، cos ( a + b ) ، cos ( a − bﻭ ) sin ( a + b
) (O ; I , Jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ B
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
( ) ( )
OI ,OA = aﻭ OI ,OB = b
om
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ OAﻭ OBﺜﻡ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ
ﻝﻠﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﺃﺤﺴﺏOB .OA :
( ( ) ( ) )
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺸﺎل . OB ,OA = i ,OA − i ,OB :ﺒﻴﻥ،
.c
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻝﻠﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ،ﺃﻥOB .OA = cos ( a − b ) :
ik
)(1 ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻤﺎ ﺴﺒﻕ ﺃﻥcos ( a − b ) = cos a cos b + sin a sin b :
aw ﺒﺎﺴﺘﺒﺩﺍل ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ bﺒﹻ ) ( −bﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ) (1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
)( 2 cos ( a + b ) = cos a cos b − sin a sin b
π π
ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ sin x = cos − x ﻭ cos x = sin − x ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
af
2 2
)( 4 ( 3) sin ( a − b ) = sin a cos b − cos a sin bﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥsin ( a + b ) = sin a cos b + cos a sin b :
ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﻜل ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ
ot
sin cosﻭ ﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﻝﹻ = − ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ • :ﺘﺤﻕ ﺃﻥ
12 12 12 4 6
5π 5π
sin cosﻭ • ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﻝﹻ
12 12
w
π π
sin cosﻭ
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ • :ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﻝﹻ
8 8
1 − cos 2a 1 + cos 2a
= sin 2 a = cos 2 aﻭ • ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
2 2
293
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 11
( )
O ; i ; jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ( D ) .ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) B (1,1ﻭ ) n ( 2,1ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻪ.
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺜﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ) M ( x , yﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Dﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻴﻬﺎ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ:
ﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻜﻴﻔﻲ. y = 2k + 1 ﻭ x = −k + 1
.2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﺭﻯ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻf ( k ) = 5k 2 − 10k + 10 :
.3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) . A ( 2; 4ﺃﺤﺴﺏ AM 2ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ kﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D
om
.1ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل 2x + y + c = 0 :ﻷﻥ ) n ( 2,1ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻪ.
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) B (1,1ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) ( Dﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻴﻬﺎ ﺘﺤﺤﻕ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Dﺃﻱ 2 (1) + 1 + c = 0 :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪc = −3 :
.c
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ 2x + y − 3 = 0ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) M ( x , yﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ BMﻭ uﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﺎﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﺤﻴﺙ uﺸﻌﺎﻉ
ik
ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( Dﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﻤﺜﻼ ) . u ( −1, 2
x − 1 = −k
aw
BMﻭ uﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﺎﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﺒﺤﻴﺙ BM = k u :ﺃﻱ
y − 1 = 2k
x = −k + 1
ﻨﺠﺩ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) M ( x , yﺘﺤﻘﻕ
y = 2k + 1
af
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ f ′ﺘﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻤﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺔ 1ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺼﻐﺭﻯ ﻋﻨﺩ 1ﻫﻲ )f (1
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . f (1) = 5 (1) − 10 (1) + 10 = 5 :ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﺭﻯ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻫﻲ .5
2
w
.3ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎAM 2 = ( x − 2 ) + ( y − 4 ) :
2 2
w
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
294
11 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
=C
. ACB ، CBA
=B ، BAC
=A A BCﻤﺜﻠﺙ .ﻨﻀﻊ ، BC = a ، A C = b ، A B = c
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ Sﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ pﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻤﺤﻴﻁﻪ.
1 + cos Aﻭ ﺃﻥ ) = 2 ( p − b )( p − c
1 − cos A .1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) = 2 p ( p − a
bc bc
sin Aﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ b ، a ، pﻭ cﺜﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥS = p ( p − a )( p − b )( p − c ) :
.2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
om
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﹻ cm 2ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ Sﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻬﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ 0.01
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﹻ
Aﺇﻝﻰ 0.01 •
.c
2bc
2bc + b 2 + c 2 − a 2 (b + c ) − a
2 2
= 1 + cos A =
ik
2bc 2bc
ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
) 2bc − b − c + a = a − (b − c
2 2
2 2 2
1 − cos A ) = 2 ( p − b )( p − c 1 + cos Aﻭ ﻨﺠﺩ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ = 2 p ( p − a ) :
bc bc
( () )
ot
b 2c 2
1 S = 1 bc sin Aﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
S 2 = b 2c 2 sin 2 Aﺃﻱ ) S 2 = p ( p − a )( p − b )( p − c ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ
4 2
ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ p − b ، p − a ، pﻭ p − cﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ) S = p ( p − a )( p − b )( p − c
w
295
11
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O , A , Bﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) C ( 2;1ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Pﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭﺓ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ) . (O , A
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻫﻭ:
.1ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ) ( E 1ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﺭﻜﺯﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻴﻁﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ PBCﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ Pﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ) (O , A
.2ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ) ( E 2ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ PBCﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ Pﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ) (O , A
om
.1ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( E 1
ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﻤﻴﻜﻴﺔ:
.c
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﺩﺍﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O , A , Bﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ
ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺒﺎﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺔ
ik
po int ( x , yﻀﻤﻥ ﻓﺌﺔ créerﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ. )
aw
ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﻤﺘﺤﺭﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ) . (O , A ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺯﺭ
. ﻤﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺯﺭ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺯﺭ
ﺜﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ ﻀﻤﻥ ﻓﺌﺔ Diversﺃﻨﻘﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺔ
af
Lieu de pointsﻭ ﺃﻨﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﻭ ﺍﺴﺤﺏ ﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺩﻭﻥ ﺘﺤﺭﻴﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﺄﺭﺓ
ﺒﻌﺩ ﺫﻝﻙ ﻗﻡ ﺒﺘﺤﺭﻴﻙ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ) (O , Aﻭ ﻻﺤﻅ ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . M
ot
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ:
.m
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻤﺯﻨﺎ ﺒﹻ aﺇﻝﻰ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ] [ BCﻭ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ] [ BPﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . a
( x , yﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Mﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ aﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ. y − 1 ≤ 0 : • ﻋﻴﻥ ،ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ) ، a
.2ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( E 2
w
ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ:
w
• ﺒﻌﺩ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O , A , Bﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ P ،Cﻭ Hﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ.
• ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺨﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻗﻡ ﺒﺘﺤﺭﻴﻙ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ) (O , Aﻭ ﻻﺤﻅ ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . H
w
296
11 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻨﻘﻁ
) (Cﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ A . Rﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﻭ Pﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) . (C
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( APﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ .Qﻨﺴﻤﻲ Mﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ PQ
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻫﻭ:
ﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) . (C Mﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ PQ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ) ( Eﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ
om
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( E
ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﻤﻴﻜﻴﺔ:
ﺨﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻨﺠﺎﺯ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ ﺩﻴﻜﻠﻴﻙ ) ( Declic
.c
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Q ، P ، Aﻭ . M
ik
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ ﻀﻤﻥ ﻓﺌﺔ Diversﺃﻨﻘﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺔ
aw
Lieu de pointsﻭ ﺃﻨﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﻭ ﺍﺴﺤﺏ ﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺩﻭﻥ ﺘﺤﺭﻴﺭ
ﺯﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﺄﺭﺓ .ﺒﻌﺩ ﺫﻝﻙ ﻗﻡ ﺒﺘﺤﺭﻴﻙ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﻋﻠﻰ ) (Cﻭ ﻻﺤﻅ ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . M
ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﺠﻠﻴﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ PQﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ P
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) . (C ′ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (C ′ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﻠﻭﻡ.ﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺘﻪ
af
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (C ′ﺜﻡ ﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﻗﻁﻌﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ .ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻬﻤﺎ O ′ﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) . (C ′
ot
2R 2 − OA 2
). ( r > 0 = r O ′M = rﺤﻴﺙ
2
w
4
.2ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ:
w
2R 2 − OA 2
= r ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﺤﻘﻕ O ′M = rﻤﻊ
2
4
• ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ MA + MO = Rﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) . (C
2 2 2
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) (OMﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Pﻭ .Qﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Mﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ PQﻭ ﺃﻥ •
ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ APQﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Aﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) . (C ′
297
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 11
ﺃﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ .
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ . 1
ﺃﺴـﺌـﻠﺔ ﻤﺘـﻌـﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ uﻭ vﺸﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ : 2
ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺭﺍﺤﺎﺕ .
|| u . v = || u || × || v
ABCD 18ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ . 1 2
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ OBﻭ ODﻫﻭ : ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺸﻌﺎﻉ u = || u ||2 ، uﺇﺫﻥ || u = || u 3
1 1 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u . v = 0ﻓﺈﻥ u = 0ﺃﻭ . v = 0 4
ﺝ( . − ﺏ( ﺃ( 0
2π
= ) ( u , vﻓﺈﻥ
2
2
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ || u ||= 2 ، || u ||= 1ﻭ 5
om
19ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ DC.DBﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ : 3
ﺝ( 0 ﺏ( 2 ﺃ( 1 u . v = −1
ABC 20ﻤﺜﻠـــﺙ ﺤﻴـــﺙ BC = 2 ، AC = 1 π
π (u , v ) 4
= − ﻭ || u ||= 1 ، || u ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ||= 2 6
ﻭ = ) ( CA ; CBﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ CA.CB :ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ :
.c
3 ﻓﺈﻥ || u + v ||2 = 4
1
ﺝ( . 3 ﺏ( 1 ﺃ( − ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ، w ، v ، u
2
7
ik
21ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠـﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤـﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠـﺎﻨﺱ ﻝـﺩﻴﻨﺎ ) ، u (1 ; − 2 ( 2u − v ) .w = 2 ( u.w ) − v.w
) v ( 2 ; − 3؛ u . vﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ : ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ، v ، u 8
ﺝ( 4 ﺏ( 8
aw
ﺃ( −8 || u + v ||2 = || u ||2 +2u. v + || v ||2
22ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋـﺩﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u . v = u . wﻓﺈﻥ . v = w 9
sin θ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ AB . AC = AB 2ﻓﺈﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ
u ﻓﺈﻥ : ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ θ؛ 10
cosθ
af
ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﺭﺃﺴﻪ . A
ﺏ( | || u ||=| cos 2θ ﺃ( || u ||= 1
A 11ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭ uﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ M
ﺝ( | . || u ||=| sin 2θ
ﺤﻴﺙ AM . u = 0ﻫﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ .
ot
2 2
ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻭل : 23ﺍﻝﻘﻭل u = v
12ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ،ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ
ﺃ( u =vﺏ( )( u + v ) ⊥ ( u− v
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯ ) A (1; 2ﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺭ 2ﻫﻲ
.m
7
u ( −2;3) 25ﻫﻭ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ :
2 x 1 + cos x
ﺏ( −2 x + 3 y − 1 = 0 . cosﺃ( −3 x + 2 y + 2 = 0 = 14ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ، x
2 2
w
298
11 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ
] [ BC O . BC = 4cm ، AB = 3cmﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ
ABD 27ﻭ BCDﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺎ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ CA . CBﻭ OA . BC
ﺤﻴﺙ . BD = 4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
I (2ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ـ Bﻋﻠﻰ ) ( AC
، BA . BC ، AB . AD
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ . CI
DO . CDﻭ AD . CB
ABC 33ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ AB = 2ﻭ AC = 3
ﻭ . AB . AC = 4
) ( O; Iﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( dﺤﻴﺙ OI = 1 28
ﻫل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ A؟ ﻋﻠل.
om
ABC 34ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ AC = 3 ، AB = 2 D A O C B x
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ﻭ AB . AC = 4
AB . CD ، AD . CB ، AB . AC
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ . B
IA . DB ، OD . OI ، DC . AD
.c
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ CA . CBﺜﻡ ﻗﻴﺴﹰﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ
) Cﺒﺎﻝﺩﺭﺠﺎﺕ
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺤﻴﺙ AB = 6ﻭ Iﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ 29
ﻭ ﺒﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ .( 10−1
ﻗﻁﺭﻴﻪ.ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ik
35ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻤﻌﻴﻨﺎ ABCDﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﺤﻴﺙ
DI . BI ، IB . IC ، AB . CB ، AB . DC
AC = 10ﻭ . BD = 6
aw ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ Bﻭ ACD 30
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . AB . AD
ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ .ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ AC = 6
(2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Pﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( AB
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . AP
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ، AC . CD ، AB . AC
af
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ 5cm 36
DC . DB ، DC . DA
. ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ BC ﻭ I
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ DHﺤﻴﺙ H
ot
299
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 11
، uﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ u = v 47 ( 1ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ AJ . CI
5π (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
) JKIﺃﻋﻁ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ( 0,1
) (
2 3
u .v = − = u, vﻭ
3 6 ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ BC = 8 ، AB = 10 40
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . u ﻭ AC = 12
48ﻝﻴﻜﻥ uﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ . (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ AB . AC
) (
ﻨﻀﻊ u , v = θ (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
BACﻤﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻭﺤﺩﺓ.
) (
(1ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ u, −vﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . θ u 41ﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ u = 3ﻭ v = 2
om
) ( ) ( ) (
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥu . −v = − u . v = −u .v : ﻭ u . v = −3
.c
3
(3ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﻴﻌﻁﻰ AC = ، AB = 3
2 ﻭ u .v = 5
( () ( ) ( ) )
9 2
ik
ﻭ AB . AC = − ﺍﺤﺴﺏ u − v u + v ، u − v ، u + v
4
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ BACﻭ ﺍﻝﻁﻭل BC ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ 43ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ
aw
49ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ( O; I , Jﻴﻌﻁﻰ : ) . v ( 2; 4 ) u ( 3; −2
2
) (
1
ﺃ( . v ( 4, −1) ، u , −2 ﺍﺤﺴﺏ u . vﻭ cos u , v u ، v ، ﺍﺤﺴﺏ u .v
2
ABC 44ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ BC = 1,5 ، AB = 2
af
3 1
u . v = −1 ، u ﻭ u = v ﺏ( , 11
2 2 = AB . AC ﻭ
8
( )
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺭﻜﺒﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ v
ot
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ u . vﻭ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ u, v ﻭ BC = 1,5
( )
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ،ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ C ﺍﺤﺴﺏ CA . CBﺜﻡ cos AB, ACﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ
50
ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ) (3; 4) ، (5; 2ﻭ )(0;1 ﺍﻝﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﻝـ
BAC
w
) (
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ . AB. AC u 46ﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ .ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ ) u, v = αﺒﺎﻝﺭﺍﺩﻴﺎﻥ(
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻁﻭﻝﻴﻥ ABﻭ . AC
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ u . vﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
w
4
ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ) (3; 4) ، (1;1ﻭ )(3 − k ; −1 π 1 5
u = (2ﻭ = vﻭ = α
6 2 7
ﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .
2π 3
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABC =α u = 5 (3ﻭ = vﻭ
3 2
ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ . A 5π
=α u = 2 (4ﻭ v = 7ﻭ
(2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ . A 6
300
11 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ABCD 56ف AD = 2 ، AB = 4 ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ A ' . Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ 52
و DC = 5 )( AB ﻤﻥ ] . [ ACﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ' Aﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( BCﻓﻲ ' B
، AB.BC ، DC.DB
ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ' AC . ABﻭ ' AC . BA
AC.DB ، AD.BC
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . CA.CB ﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺭ ﻜﻭﺤﺩﺓ .
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ACB ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ABCﺤﻴﺙ : 53
ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ، ABCﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﻴﻥ ACEF
om
57 ﺃ( AC = 6 ، AB = 3ﻭ AB . AC = 9
ﻭ . BCDG ﺏ( AC = 5 ، AB = 4ﻭ AB . AC = −12
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ CA.CB = −CD.CE
ﺠـ( AC = 4 ، AB = 3ﻭ AB . AC = 0
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . BE. ADﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ؟
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ 4ﻭ ABIﻤﺜﻠﺙ 54
.c
(3ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ CE.CB
ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ .ﻨﺴﻤﻲ Jﻭ Kﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻴﻴﻥ ـ I
ﻭ ، CA.CDﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ BE = AD
ik
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﺤﻴﺙ . AB = 4 ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( ADﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
58
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ AB. ACﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل: (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ
(1ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ.
aw
، AD . AI ، IJ . IA
( )
5 cos AB, AC (2 . IJ . DC ، AI .CB
( )
1 (2ﺃ( ﺍﺤﺴﺏ AB . DIﻭ DA . DI
(3ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ A; i, jﺤﻴﺙ i = AB
af
4
1 ﺏ( ﺍﺤﺴﺏ DIﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ DKI
ﻭ j = AD
4 ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﻡ cos150ﻭ cos 750
ot
( )
2 2
(4ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ BC = AC − AB ) ﻻﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ADIﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ(
u 59ﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ. ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ AB . AC
.m
( )
2 2 2 2
u +v + u −v = 2 u + v ﻭ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ A .1ﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ـ OA = i :
w
301
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 11
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 60ﺇﻝﻰ 76ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ
( )
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O; i, j
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) B (2;1) ، A(−2;0ﻭ )C (−3;3 64 ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ K . 1ﻨﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ 61
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ـ Aﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
ﻭ Nﺍﻝﻤﻘﻁﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻝـ Kﻋﻠﻰ ) ( DC ] M . [ AC
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ BC ﻭ ) ( DAﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ 65ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( D
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( MN
om
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
2 ﻭ ) ( BKﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ
ﺃ( ) ( Dﻴﺸﻤل ) A(2; −1ﻭ n ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻪ.
3
( )
ﺏ( ) ( Dﻴﺸﻤل ) A(− 2;1ﻭ ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻨﺄﺨﺫ ) K ( x; xﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ A; AB, AD
.c
) ( BCﺤﻴﺙ ) B(−2;1ﻭ )C (5; 2 (2ﻫل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( BMﻭ ) (CNﻤﺘﻌﺎﺩﻴﻥ؟ﻋﻠل.
ﺠـ( ) ( Dﻴﺸﻤل Oﻭ ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ
( )
62ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O; i, jﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ
ik
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ 2 x + 3 y − 6 = 0
) A(−2; −2ﻭ ). B(1;1
D1 66ﻭ D2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ:
) (
x+3
aw ﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ O; i
y=− y = 2x +1ﻭ
2
) ( AMﻭ ) ( BMﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ.
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻴﺎ ِ n1ـ D1ﻭ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻴﺎ ِ n2ـ D2
) (
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Nﻤﻥ O; jﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . n1 . n2
af
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻼﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ِـ . B 3 1
ﻭ Jﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ AI = AD :ﻭ . BJ = BC
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ. 4 3
1 1
Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
w
AM . AB = 0؟ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ D ، C ، B ، Aﻭ . J
w
302
11 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) B(3;0) ، A(1;3ﻭ ). C (−5; −1 70
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( E؟ ﺃﻋﻁ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻴﺯﺓ
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻗﺎﺌﻡ.
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ 77
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺎﻁﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺘﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ.
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ . A
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ B ' ، A ' .ﻭ ' Cﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎ ﻗﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻴﺔ
) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = x − 1 71
ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﻋﻠﻰ ) ( AC ) ، ( BCﻭ ( AB
ﻭ Aﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻴﻬﺎ ). (2;3
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ H .ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ )' ( BBﻭ )' . (CC
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ Hﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( D
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
om
(1ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ AH؟
BH . ACﻭ . CH . AB
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . H
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . AH . BCﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
(3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ . AH
ABCDﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﻭ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ . 78 3
72ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B(−1;3) ، A − ; −1ﻭ )C (5; −1
.c
. ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥMD MC = MA + MB :
2 2 2 2
2
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ 79 Hﻫﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( BC
ik
OABﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ .ﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎ nﻨﺎﻅﻤﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( BC
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻌﻴﻥ ' OAA " Aﻭ ' OBB " B (2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ AB . nﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ.
aw
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Kﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ]' ) [ A ' Bﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل( (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ AH
9
73ﻝﺘﻜﻥ A 0; ﻭ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ
2
. 4x + 3 y −1 = 0
af
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل Oﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ' OA ' B ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (C
ﻫﻭ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل Oﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . OAB ﺃ( ) (Cﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ) A(−1; 2ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . R = 3
w
(4ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ )' ( ABﻭ ) ( A ' Bﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ ﺏ( ) (Cﺘﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A(4;1ﻭﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ). B(2;3
ABCDﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﻁﻭﻝﻪ Lﻭ ﻋﺭﻀﻪ . lﻝﺘﻜﻥ H 80 ﺠـ( ) (Cﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ] [ ABﺤﻴﺙ ) A(2;1ﻭ )B(4; −1
ﻭ Kﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻝـ Bﻭ Dﻋﻠﻰ ) ( ACﻋﻠﻰ ) ( Eﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x; yﺤﻴﺙ 76
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ. x 2 + y 2 − 10 x + 4 y + 23 = 0
303
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 11
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ J ، Iﻭ Kﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ HKﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ Lﻭ . l
83
] [ AC ] ، [ BCﻭ ] [ ABﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ . ) ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ( CA . BD
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ : (2ﻜﻴﻑ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ Lﻭ lﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ AC = 2 HK؟
ﻋﺒﺭ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ BHDKﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ
= AI 2 + BJ 2 + CK 2
3
4
) ( AB2 + AC 2 + BC 2
ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ABCD
ا
ا 81
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻭ dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻴﺸﻤل B ' . Aﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ .ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ 84
ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝـ Bﻋﻠﻰ C ' . dﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝـ C
om
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ AB. AM = AB. AC :؟
Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ . AB = 4 ﻋﻠﻰ B " . dﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝـ ' Bﻋﻠﻰ ) ( AC
85
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ " Cﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝـ ' Cﻋﻠﻰ )( AB
MA2 + MB 2 = 16؟ ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ )" ( B ' Bﻭ )" (C ' Cﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ
.c
Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ. ﻓﻲ ) . Iﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل(
86ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
ik
( )
ﺃ( 2 MA − 3MB . AB = 0؟
ﻭ A2ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺱ.
-ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ( Eﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( ABﻓﻲ . G
ﺃ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ A1ﻭ A2ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ )' (Cﺫﺍﺕ
w
304
11 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﻭ }' D ' = {M ∈ ( P ) / MA2 − 2MB 2 = k Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ 90
ﺤﻴﺙ k ' ∈ ℝ . AB = 1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
1
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ( Dﻭ )' ( Dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ . = AM . AB؟
2
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ )A(0;1 94 EFG 91ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ Eﺤﻴﺙ EF = 3
1 2 ﻭ EG = 4
) C (−1; 2) ، B(1; 0ﻭ D ; ﻭ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ) (Γﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ
3 3
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ Dﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( F ; 4ﻭ ) (G;3ﻭ Hﻤﺭﺠﺢ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x; yﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙMB = 2 MA :
om
) ( F ; 4ﻭ ). (G; −3
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) M ∈ (Γﻴﻜﺎﻓﺊ 3 x 2 + 3 y 2 + 2 x − 8 y + 3 = 0
(2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل Mﻤﻥ ) ، (Γﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ MCDﻗﺎﺌﻡ
( () )
4 MF + 3MG . 4 MF − 3MG = 0؟
ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ M
( 3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ.
.c
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ Aﺤﻴﺙ AB = 3ﻭ 95
. AC = 4ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻫﻭ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ، ξ Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ 92
. AB = 2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A;3ﻭ )( B;1
ik
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
MA2 − 2MB 2 + 3MC 2 = Kﺤﻴﺙ k ∈ ℝ (1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ Gﺜﻡ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ AGﻭ GB
aw
( Iﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ: (2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ :
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ξﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻝـ k . AB = 2ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺒﺤﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ) ( E
ﺠـ( k = −100 ،ﺏ( k = −60 ﺃ( k = 14 MA
ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ Mﺤﻴﺙ = 3
.m
MB
(4ﻋﻴﻥ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ξﺘﺒﻌﺎ ﻝﻘﻴﻡ k
ﺃ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) M ∈ ( Eﻴﻜﺎﻓﺊ MA2 − 9 MB 2 = 0
( IIﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ
1 1 ﺏ( ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A;1ﻭ ) ( B;3ﻭ Kﻤﺭﺠﺢ
w
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ C؟ ﺠـ( ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ MA2 − 9 MB 2ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ MGﻭ . MK
(2ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ ) ( x; yﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M ﺩ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ) ( E
w
ﺍﻜﺘﺏ MA2 − 2 MB 2 + 3MC 2ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ xﻭ . y ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ ) ( Pﻭ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻝـ k ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ )B(−1; 0) ، A(0; 2
305
π
= . A AC = 6 ، AB = 2ﻭ
3 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 11
2π ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗـﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﻴﺔ
= . A AC = 6 ، AB = 2ﻭ
3
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ BC = 5 ، AB = 6 : 96
π
.
=A AC = 3 ، AB = 2 2ﻭ ﻭ . AC = 7
4
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ ، AB = 2 : 104 ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺃﻁﻭﺍل ﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁﺎﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ .
ﻭ =π BC = 2 (1 +141 ABC 97ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ BC = 8 ، AB = 7 :
. B )3
6 1
ﻭ J . AC = 5ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒـ . CJ = CB :
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻁﻭل . AC
om
4
ﻭ
Cﻝﻠﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ A ﺃ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ . AJ
π ﺏ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . JA . JC
. cos
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝـ
12
.ﺝ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ AJC
ABC 105ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ BC = 8 ، AB = 7 :
.c
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ K ، J ، I ،ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ 98
104ﻭ . AC = 10
] [ AC ] ، [ BCﻭ ] . [ AB
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ) . ABCﺘﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻤﺩﻭﺭﺓ
ik
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ
ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭ( .
3
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC = AI 2 + BJ 2 + CK 2 ) ( AB 2 + AC 2 + BC 2
aw 4
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ ،ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻭﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤل ABCD 99ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ . I
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺸﻲ . ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
(1 105ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ Sﻝﻠﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﺘﻜﺘﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ . MA2 + MC 2 = MB 2 + MD 2
af
1
. S = AC × AB × sin ﺍﻝﺸﻜل A : ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ AB = 5 100
2
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭﻤﺜل ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ :
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺜﻠﺔ ﻝﻠﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ
ot
AC = 6 cm ، AB = 2 cmﻭ A = 45°
ﺝ ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ AC = 12 ، AB = 10,5ﻭ = 60°
Cﻓﻤﺎ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻁﻭل . BC
ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ؟ ﻭﻫل ﻫﻲ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺔ ؟ ﻤﻘﺩﺭﺓ
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻋﻠﻡ ABﻭ ACﻭﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ A 103
106ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻫﻲ 10 km 102
ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺍﺩﻴﺎﻥ .ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
ﻭﻴﻌﻁﻰ = 39, 6°
CABﻭ ABC = 65, 7° . BC ﺍﻝﻁﻭل
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻁﻭل AC
306
π π
11
× 2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ.
12
=
6
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ αﻭ βﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ: π 6+ 2
112 ، cos = ( 1107ﻴﻌﻁﻰ
cos (α + β ) .cos (α − β ) = cos α − sin β107
2 2
ﺃ( 12 4
π 6− 2
. cos (α + β ) .cos (α − β ) = cos 2 β − sin 2 α = . sin ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ
12 4
ﺏ( sin (α + β ) .sin (α − β ) = sin 2 α − sin 2 β
(2ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﺃﻤﻠﺊ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﺒﺎﺴـﺘﻌﻤﺎل
. sin (α + β ) .sin (α − β ) = cos 2 β − cos 2 α
ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ .
113ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ αﻭ βﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
2 cos (α + β ) .cos (α − β ) = sin 2α − sin 2210ﺃ( β A
B C
ﺏ( 2sin (α + β ) .sin (α − β ) = cos 2 β − cos 2α π
om
π 3
<0< x x 114ﻋــــﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘــــﻲ ﺤﻴــــﺙ π π
2
132 4 3
ﻭ . cos x = 6 + 2
4 6− 2 2 3 8
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ cos 2xﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . x
.c
ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل ﻓﻲ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ
115ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ sin 2xﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ :
π π 7π
( cos x + sin x )2؛ . ( cos x − sin x )2 ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ = + 108ﺒﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ
ik
π 3 4 12
x 116ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝـﺸﻜل k 7π 7π
2 . sin cosﻭ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ
sin 2 x cos 2 x 1
aw 12 12
. − = ﺤﻴﺙ . k ∈ ℤﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ : 5π 5π
sin x cos x cos x . sin cosﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
π 12 12
α 117ﻭ βﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 0 ; ﺤﻴﺙ: 11π 11π
2 . sin cosﻭ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
1 514
af
3 12 12
= cos αﻭ = . cos β
5 3 109ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ cos xﻭ sin xﻜل ﻤـﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺒـﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﺃ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻜل ﻤﻥ sin αﻭ . sin β ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ:
ot
π π
ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ cos 2α . sin x − ، cos x −
6 6
π π π
ﺏ( ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﺩﻻﻝـﺔ ، cos 2α + ﻋـﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺒـﺎﺭﺓ : . sin − x ، cos − x
3 3 3
w
π
ﺝ( ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ، cos 2α + ﻋـﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺒـﺎﺭﺓ : 2
3
π
π π . sin − x = cos x
. sin 2 α + sin 2 α + + sin 2 α +
w
2
6 3
119ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ : 111ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
ﺃ( . sin 4 x − cos 4 x − sin 2 x + cos 2 x = 0 2π 4π
sin x + sin x + + sin x + =0
ﺏ( . cos 4 x − sin 4 x = cos 2 x 3 3
π π
ﺝ( . cos 4 x + sin 4 x + 2sin 2 x.cos 2 x = 1 . sin cosﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ
12 12
307
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 11
) ( cﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 8 123 ﻤـﺴـﺎﺌـل
Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( cﺤﻴﺙ . OA = 5 ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﺭﺃﺴﻪ . A 120
Oﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] ، [ BCﻭ Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ
ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻝﻜﻭﺱ ، APQﻤﺜﺒﺕ ﻓﻲ
ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻋﻠﻰ ] I . [ ACﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [OH
ﻭ ) ( AQ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭﻴﺩﻭﺭ ﺤﻭﻝﻬﺎ .ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( AP
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( AIﻭ ) ( BHﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ .
ﻴﻘﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( cﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Eﻭ Fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
] [ ABﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻁﻭﻝﻬﺎ 6ﻭﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ . I 121
Mﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ EF ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ Γﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
om
Q ﺤﻴﺙ . MB = 2 MA
.c
M ﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ
O ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ .
ik
A (2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ MB = 2 MAﺘﻜﺎﻓﺊ :
)(c P
E . ( MB + 2 MA) . ( MB − 2 MA ) = 0
aw (3ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Rﻭ ، Sﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ Γ
ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺒﺤﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ . M ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺌﻬﺎ .
(1ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ، OEFﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﺠﺴﻡ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺘﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﻘﻭﻯ 122
af
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ . OM 2 + AM 2 = 64 ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺎ .
D
(1ﺠﺴﻡ Mﻤﺘﻌﺭﺽ
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺒﺔ .
ot
2 2N
→
ﺇﻝﻰ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻗﻭﻯ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ
F2
ﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ 124
135°
ﻤﺒﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل .
→
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ) ( C1ﻭ ) ( C2ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ( O100
) ;i ; j
F1 M
5N ﺃ( ﻫل ﺍﻝﺠﺴﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺘﻭﺍﺯﻥ ؟
.m
150°
→ 2 3N
F3
ﺒﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ : C ﺏ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤل ﻝﻤﺤﺼﻠﺔ
( C1 ) : x 2 + y 2 + 4 x − y − 2 = 0 ﺍﻝﻘﻭﻯ R = F1 + F2 + F3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﺴﻡ ﻴﺘﺤﺭﻙ ﻤﻥ
w
(2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ) ( C1ﻭ ) ( C2ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ FB FA ﻓﻲ ﺘﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﻱ :
، P + FA + FB = 0ﺤﻴﺙ
Aﻭ Bﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ.
ﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍ ﺍﻝﺨﻴﻁﻴﻥ P.
Pﻫﻭ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﺠﺴﻡ FB FA ،
(3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ
ﻴﻌﻁﻰ || FA ||= 35 ، || P ||= 50ﻭ . || FB ||= 40
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ) ( C1ﻭ ) ( C2ﻫﻤﺎ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ .
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABM
308
11 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
125
ﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ AHﺤﻴﺙ Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ) ( D
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ( O ; i ; jﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
)' ( D
.
) A ( −2 ; 5ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( dﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = −3 x + 1
A
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻫﻭ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
u ) ( dﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ .
)( D
ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ :
B
H ﻨﻌﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( d
om
ﺃ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺘﺭﺒﻁ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Hﺜﻡ
ﺃ( ﺒﺭﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ . BA . u = HA . u ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . H
ﺏ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺒﺔ ﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: ﺏ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ . AH
| | BA . u ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ :
= . AH
.c
|| || u ﺃ( ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) B (1 ; − 2ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( d
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻋﺩﺩﻱ :
ﺏ( ﻨﻀﻊ ) ، u (1 ; − 3ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ uﻫﻭ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ
ik
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ
ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( d
ﺃ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( 6 ; 4ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( D
ﺍﺸﺭﺡ ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) ( dﺭﺍﺠﻊ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺇﻴﺠﺎﺩ
ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . y = 2 x − 3
aw
ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﺤﻴﺙ . BM = k .u :
ﺏ( ﺘﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) F ( −1;1) ، E ( 2; 0ﻭ ) G ( 3; 4
ﺝ( ﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﺭﻯ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ
ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( FG
ﺒـ . f (k ) = 10k 2 + 48k + 58 :ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . AM 2
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ، EHﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ EFGﻫﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ
af
( IIﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ: ﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ 126
ot
ﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ،ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (O ; i ; j
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ax + by + c = 0ﺤﻴﺙ aﻭ b 3x − 2 y + 1 = 0ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ). A ( 2 ;1
.m
ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎ ،ﻭ ) B ( xB ; y Bﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) . ( D ﺃ ( ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻭﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ A
ﻨﻀﻊ ) u ( a ; bﻜﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ، ( D ﺏ ( ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )' ( Dﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( D
ﻭ ) A ( x A ; y Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ. ﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A
w
ﺃ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ || || uﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ aﻭ . b ﺝ ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ
ﺏ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ | . | BA . u | =| ax A + by A + c Aﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( D
w
ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ( D
ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D
( Iﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﺔ :
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻋﺩﺩﻱ :
) ( Dﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻭﻴﻘﺒل uﻜﺸﻌﺎﻉ
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A (1 ; 1ﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻴﻁﺔ
ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻪ .ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ
)ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻤﺔ ﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ( OIJﺤﻴﺙ ، O ( 0;0 ) :
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ، ( Dﺃﻱ
) I ( 2 + 2 ; 0ﻭ ) . J ( 0 ; 2 + 2
309
12
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
om
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﻨﻘﻁ.
.c
ﺘﻭﻅﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺤل ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ.
ik
aw ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺤل ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻲ.
ﺍﻹﺴﻜﻨﺩﺭﻴﺔ ﻝﻴﺘﻭﻝﻰ ﺘﺴﻴﻴﺭ ﻤﻜﺘﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ " ﻜﺎﻝﻴﻤﺎﻙ " ﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ
ﺤﻭﺍﻝﻲ 240ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﻤﻴﻼﺩ.
.m
311
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 12
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
OB = k OA ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ) kﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻭﺠﻭﺩﻩ ( ﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ
)(3 )(2 )(1
A A
om
O A B O
.c
GD = k GB ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ) kﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻭﺠﻭﺩﻩ ( ﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ
)(4 ) (3 )(2 ) (1
ik
aw D y B
D
1
H G
af
G
2 0 1 x
A
B
3
ot
)(5
312
12 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
om
2
-2ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ IB = IA :
3
G -3ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ D ، G ، Iﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ.
.c
ik
aw
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
1
af
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ M .ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ AM = AB
3
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝـ ) ( ACﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻡ ﻤﻥ Mﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( BCﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ N
ot
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﺤﻴﺙ M . AI = − AO :ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺘﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ Aﻭ ﻋﻥ M ′ ، Bﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ M
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺭﻜﺯ N ،ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( IMﻭ ). ( BM ′
w
313
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 12
-1ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ
Oﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ k ،ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﺎ hﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ ، kﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ ) ، h(O,kﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ M
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ OM ′ = k.OM
ﺃﻭ ' h → M ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' Mﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Mﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ M ' = h( M ) :
om
M
OM ′ = k .OM ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ M ' , M , Oﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ :
ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻨﻔﺴﻬﺎ ) Oﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺼﺎﻤﺩﺓ (
.c
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ
ik
hﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ A ، kﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ A’.ﻭ ’ Bﺼﻭﺭﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . h
aw
A′B′ = k AB ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :
h(A)= A′و h(B) = B ′
af
ﺃﻱ OA′ = k.OAو (1).... OB′ = k.OB
ﻝﻜﻥ A′B′ = OB′ - OA′ :
) (1ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ )A′B′ = k( OB - OA
ot
ﺃﻱ A′B′ = k AB
ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ :
.m
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ k ≠ 0ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Aﺘﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ Bﻓﺈﻥ A′ﺘﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ B ′ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ) (ABﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) ( A′B′
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻴﻜﻭﻥ A′B′ = k AB
w
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ } ) ( A , αﻭ ) { ( B , βﻓﺈﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺘﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻫﻲ G′ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
} ) ( A′ , αﻭ ) . { ( B ′ , β
w
314
12 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
N′ ، N ، Iﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ N′ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Nﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ) . h( I , -2
-1ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ .
A -2ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ) ( C , 1ﻭ ) ( B , -kﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ 1
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ Cﺼﻭﺭﺓ Bﺒﺘﺤﺎﻙ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻴﺯﺓ ) ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ (
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Bﺼﻭﺭﺓ Cﺒﺘﺤﺎﻙ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭﻩ .
om
ﺤــل:
I N′ = - 2 I N -1ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ :
.c
ﺍﻝﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ
ik
ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺒﺎﻝﻀﺭﻭﺭﺓ ﺘﺤﺎﻙ kﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻴﺤﻭل Bﺇﻝﻰ Cﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ A,B,Cﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ؟
ﻷﻥ :ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ kﻭﺤﻴﺩ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ k ) AC = k ABﻭﺤﻴﺩ h ،ﻭﺤﻴﺩ (
aw
A -2ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ) ( C , 1ﻭ ) ( B , -kﻴﻌﻨﻲ AC = k AB
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ hﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ . kﻨﻀﻊ ) B′ = h(Bﺃﻱ AB′ = k ABﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ B′ = C
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ Cﺼﻭﺭﺓ Bﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ hﻭ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ) Aﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﻼ ﻝﻠﺴﺅﺍل (
af
A′ ، A ، Oﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ h .ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Aﺍﻝﻰ . A′
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ M ′ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ :
.m
ﻝﻜﻥ ) A′M ′ = k AMﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻴﺯﺓ (
w
315
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 12
-1ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ :
ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( dﺒﺘﺤﺎﻙ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( d ′ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) ( d ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ
om
* ) ( dﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) ( A , 1-αﻭ ) ( B , αﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ αﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﻝﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻴﺤﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ h(M) = M ′ﻫﻭ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ) ( A′ , 1-αﻭ ) ( B′ , α
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ) ( d ′ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( dﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ M ′ﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ αﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ℝﻓﻬﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (A′B′
.c
* ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( dﻓﺈﻥ ) ( d ′ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝـ ) ( dﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯ ) ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺼﺎﻤﺩ ( ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ) ( d ′ﻫﻭ ) . ( d
ik
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ
رة
] [ A Bه
] ( AB // A′B′ ) [ A′ B′
ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ
:ﻤﻤﺎ ﺴﺒﻕ ] [ ABﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎﺕ ) ( A , 1-αﻭ ) ( B , αﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ αﻜل ﻗﻴﻡ
aw
ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ 0 , 1ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ] [ A′B′ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎﺕ ) ( A′ , 1-αﻭ ) ( ( B′ , αﻝﻤﺎ
) ( AB // A′B′ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ αﻜل ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ 0 , 1
ABCو ! AMNن ( AB ) #
$ M .
af
و * ( MN ) %& ( AC ) #
$ Nازي ) ( BC
ا,-آ hا1-ي 0آ A ./و *ّ,ل Bاّ,* M 4-ل آ C 5-1اN 4-
-2ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﺔ :
ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل Bﺇﻝﻰ Mﻴﺤﻭل
ot
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Cﻓﺈﻥ IM = rﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ h(M) = M ′ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ I'M ′ = k IMﺃﻱ I'M ′ = k r
w
316
12 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
om
2
ﺤــل:
ﺃﻱ h ( B ) = C , h ( A ) = B Bﻫﻭ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ AOﻭ Cﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ BO
)∆( 1 1
.c
M
ﻷﻥ OB= OAﻭ OC= OB
2 2
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( AMﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( dﻭ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( BMﻫﻭ ) ∆ (
ik
N 1
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻭﻤﻨﻪ M. ON= OMﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ) (AMﻭ)(BMﻭN
A 2
B C O
aw ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ)(dﻭ) ∆ (
)(d
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 2
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ :
af
) ( dﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ B ) ( Cﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭ ] [ ABﻗﻁﺭ ﻝﻬﺎ
317
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 12
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :
om
ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ k > 1ﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺒﺘﻜﺒﻴﺭ ﺍﻷﺸﻜﺎل ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ 1 > k > 0ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻴﺼﻐﺭ k ﻤﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ
1
. ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 3ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ
2
-ﻤﺤﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﻫﻭ 6πﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻬﻲ 9π
.c
1 3
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( C ′ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . hﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ) ( C ′ﻫﻭ = × 3
ik
2 2
9 2
ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﺤﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( C ′ﻫﻭ 3πﻭ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻬﺎ π
4
aw
.2ﺍﻝﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ :
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ B ، Aﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ B′ ، A′ﻭ C ′ﺼﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ
ﺘﺤﺎﻙ hﻓﺈﻥ B′ ، A′ﻭ C ′ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ.
af
ﺒﺎﻝﻔﻌل ،ﻷﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل B ، Aﻭ Cﻫﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻴﺸﻤل B′ ، A′ﻭ C ′
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( dﻭ ) ∆ ( ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺘﺤﺎﻙ hﻫﻤﺎ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( d ′ﻭ) ( ∆′ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ
.m
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻪ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﺼﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺒﺘﺤﺎﻙ hﻫﻲ B′ ، A′ﻭ C ′ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
( ( ) )
=B
BAC ﻭ ′A′C ′ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ A′B′, A′C ′ = AB, AC
w
318
12 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ ABCDﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Dﺍﻝﻰ D′
D′
D C D O D′ = D D C D C
O O
om
O
.c
ﺤــل:
ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻷﻭل :ﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ D ، Aﻭ Cﻤﺜﻼ ) 3ﻨﻘﻁ ( ﻷﻨﻨﺎ ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺒﺘﺤﺎﻙ
ik
ﻫﻭ ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ) ﺍﻝﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ (
* ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ C′ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ، ( COﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( DCﻫﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( D′C′
aw
ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) ( DCﻭ ﻴﺸﻤل D′ﻓﻬﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( A D′ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ C′ﺘﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( A D′ﻓﻬﻲ
ﺤــل:
1 1
ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Gﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Aﺍﻝﻰ A′ﻫﻲ ) ( −ﻷﻥ ) ( GA′ = - GA
2 2
w
319
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 12
om
ﺒﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ :ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) Gﺒﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ Gﺘﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺒﺘﻐﻴﺭ ( M
ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ :ﺍﻝﻌﻨﺎﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻫﻲ :ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯ . Oﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ Aﻭ Bﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ . I
ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻭ ﻨﺤﺩﺩ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺎﺕ Gﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ G5 ;G4 ;G3 ;G2 ;G1
.c
M2 ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .
ﺘﺒﺩﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( C ′ﺃﻭ ﺠﺯﺀ ﻤﻨﻬﺎ
ik
M3
M1
ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻕ :ﺘﻭﻅﻴﻑ ﺘﺤﻭﻴل ﻨﻘﻁﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻨﻘﻁ ) ﻤﺤل ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻲ ( ﻫﻭ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻤﺨﺘﺼﺭﺓ ﺇﺫ ﻴﺴﺘﻐﻨﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ
ﻋﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ .
w
320
12 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻲ
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ :
om
] [ AB K ،ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ] [ ACﻭ Lﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﻤﺭﺒﻊ IJKLﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ Iﻭ Jﻫﻤﺎ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ] [ BC
.c
ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴل :
ik
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺃُﻨﺠﺯ ،ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﻤﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﺔ ،ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻤﻤﻜﻥ .
aw ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ hﻝﻠﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل Lﺍﻝﻰ . B
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﻜﻴﺏ :
ot
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ BEDCﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Dﺘﻘﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺠﻬﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( BC
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AEﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ BCﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ADﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ BCﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ J
w
ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ Iﻋﻠﻰ ) ( BCﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( ABﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Lﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ Jﻋﻠﻰ ) ( BCﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( ACﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ K
w
321
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 12
D C ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ABCDﻭ MNPQﻤﺭﺒﻌﺎﻥ ﺃﻀﻼﻋﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ .
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ :ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( CP ) ، ( BN ) ، ( AMﻭ ) ( DQ
Q P ﺘﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .
ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻤﺤﺩﺏ ،ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﻩ ] [ ACﻭ ] [ BDﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ O
M
N
A B ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝـ ) ( DCﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻡ ﻤﻥ Oﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ ADﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ I
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝـ ) ( BCﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻡ ﻤﻥ Oﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ ABﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ J
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ :ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( IJﻭ ) ( BDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ
om
) (Cﻭ ) ( C′ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﺍﻫﻤﺎ O′ ، Oﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻔﻲ ﻗﻁﺭﻴﻬﻤﺎ r′ ، rﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ) ( r ≠ r′
ﻤﺘﻤﺎﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﺨﺎﺭﺠﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ A . Iﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺩﺍﺨل ) (d). (Cﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻴﻤﺭ ﻤﻥ Aﻭ ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) (Cﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Mﻭ . N
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( MIﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( C′ﻓﻲ M′ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( INﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( C′ﻓﻲ . N′
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ :ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( M ′N ′ﻴﻤﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( dﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ A
.c
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ MNPQﻫﻭ ﺘﺼﻐﻴﺭ ﻝﻠﻤﺭﺒﻊ ABCDﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻓﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﺎﻥ . ﺍﻝﺤل :
ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺘﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻴﺠﺏ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﺭﺍﻥ ﺒﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻵﺨﺭﻴﻥ
ik
* ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Oﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( AMﻭ ) ( DQ
aw
* ODAﻭ OQMﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﺎﻥ ،ﻝﻴﻜﻥ hﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل Aﺍﻝﻰ . M
ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ) ( PCﻴﻤﺭ ﻤﻥ Oﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ h ( C ) = P
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ C′ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Cﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ C′ ، hﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝـ ) ( DCﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻡ ﻤﻥ Qﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ
C′ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) . ( OCإذن C′ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( OCﻤﻊ ) ( QPﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ C′ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ P
af
QM QC′
ﺃﻱ . QM = QC′ﻭ ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) ( BNﻴﺸﻤل . O = ﻷﻥ
AD DC
ot
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺎ ﺒﺄﺨﺫ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ( A , AB, ADﻭ ﺃﺨﺫ ) M(a, bﺜﻡ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺍ .
.m
ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ،ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺤﺩﻫﻤﺎ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻝﻶﺨﺭ ﺒﺘﺤﺎﻙ . h
ﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﻤﺜﻼ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Oﺇﻝﻰ . Cﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ) h( I ) = Dﻷﻥ ) (IOﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) ( (DCﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ
ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ) h( J ) = Bﻷﻥ ) (JOﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) ( (BCﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻓﺈﻥ ) ( BDﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( IJﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h
w
ﺒﺘﺤﺎﻙ hﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ I؟ ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ،ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻝﻙ ؟
ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺒﺔ ﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ . Aﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ Aﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻰ ) ( MNﺇﺫﻥ ) h( A ) = A′ ∈( M′N′
w
A′ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺒﺔ .ﻤﺎﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Iﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل ) ( MNﺍﻝﻰ ) ( M′N′؟
M ، Nﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ) M′ ، N′ ،( Cﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ) ، ( C′ﻴﺒﺩﻭ ﺃﻥ hﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Iﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل ) ( Cﺇﻝﻰ ) ( C′
r′ r′ r′
* ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻫﻲ -؛ h( M ) = M′ﺤﻴﺙ IM′ = − IMﻭ h( N ) = N′ﺤﻴﺙ IN′ = − IN
r r r
* ﻨﻀﻊ h( A ) = A′ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ A′ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) ( M′N′ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( MNﻷﻥ Aﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) ( MN
A′ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻷﻥ Aﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ .
322
12 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ( O , i , jﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ) ( Cﻭ ) ( C′ﺍﻝﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ
x 2 + y 2 - 14x + 2y + 41 = 0 ﻭ x 2 + y 2 - 8x - 4y + 16 = 0 ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
-1ﻋﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻤﺭﻜﺯﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺜﻡ ﺤﺩﺩ ﻜل ﻤﻥ rﻭ r′ﻨﺼﻔﻲ ﻗﻁﺭﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
-2ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ) ( Cﻭ ) ( C′ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( O , i , j
3 3
− ﻭ -3ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺘﺤﺎﻙ hﻴﺤﻭل ) ( Cﺍﻝﻰ ) ، ( C′ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ kﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺘﻴﻥ
2 2
-4ﻭﺍﻀﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل -3-ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﻴﻥ h1ﻭ h 2ﻴﺤﻭﻻﻥ ) (Cﺍﻝﻰ ) ( C′ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ I1ﻭ I 2ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
om
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ I1ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A , -3ﻭ ) ( B , 2ﻭ ﺃﻥ I 2ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A , 3ﻭ ) ( B , 2ﺜﻡ ﻋﻠﱢﻡ I1ﻭ I 2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل
-5ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺎ ﺃﻥ ) ( C′ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺒﻜل ﻤﻥ h1ﻭ . h 2
I1 ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل : ﺍﻝﺤل :
.c
(C′) : ( x - 7 ) 2 + ( y +1 )2 = 9 ﻭ (C) : ( x - 4 ) 2 + ( y - 2 ) 2 = 4
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ) r = 2 ، B( 7 , -1 ) A( 4 , 2ﻭ r′ = 3
ik
A
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ hﺘﺤﺎﻙ ﻴﺤﻭل ) ( Cﺍﻝﻰ ) ( C′ﺇﺫﻥ hﻴﺤﻭل Aﺍﻝﻰ B
I2 3 3 3
ﻭ ) (− ﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ r′ = k .rﺃﻱ = kﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ kﻫﻤﺎ
B
aw2 2 2
3 3
ﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ h 2ﻫﻲ ) ( − ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﺎﻥ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭل h1ﻫﻲ
2 2
3 3
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ I1ﻤﺭﻜﺯ h1ﻭ I2ﻤﺭﻜﺯ h 2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ h 2 ( A )= B , h1 ( A )= B :ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ I1B = I1Aﻭ I2 B = − I2 A
af
2 2
ﻴﻌﻨﻲ 2 I1B - 3 I1A = 0 :ﻭ 2 I 2 B + 3 I 2 A = 0ﻭ ﻫﺎﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺘﺎﻥ ﺘﻭﻀﺤﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ I1ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A , -3
ﻭ ) ( B , 2ﻭ ﺃﻥ I 2ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A , 3ﻭ ) . ( B , 2
ot
5
3 3
I2 M′ = -ﻨﻀﻊ ) M′ ( x′ , y′ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) M( x , y I1M′ = I1Mﻭ I 2 M
2 2
w
26 4
( I2 ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ) A( 4 , 2ﻭ ) B( 7 , -1ﻴﻨﺘﺞ ) , ) , I1 ( -2 , 8
5 5
′ 3 ′ 3
w
323
ﺘﻜﻨﻭﻝﻭﺠﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺘﺼﺎل 12
ﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻭﺠﻪ ،ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ A . Oﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ) . ( Cﻨﺭﻓﻕ ﻴﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ) ( C
π
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Nﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ AMNﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻭ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ = ). ( AN, AM
3
-1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ) ( L1ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Nﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ Mﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( C؟
-2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ) ( L 2ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AN؟
om
ﺨﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻨﺠﺎﺯ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ ﺩﻴﻜﻠﻴﻙ) ِ: ( Declic
ﺒﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺯﺭ ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ
ﻭ ﺒﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺯﺭ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ
.c
ﺒﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺯﺭ ﺇﺨﺘﺭ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺘﺤﺭﻜﺔ Mﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (C
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Nﺍﻝﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺜﻠﺙ AMN
ik
π
) ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻪ ) ( -
3
aw ﺒﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺯﺭ (
ﺜﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ ﻀﻤﻥ ﻓﺌﺔ Diversﺃﻨﻘﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺔ Lieu de pointsﻭ ﺃﻨﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻭ ﺍﺴﺤﺏ ﻨﺤﻭ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Nﺩﻭﻥ ﺘﺤﺭﻴﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺫﻝﻙ ﻗﻡ ﺒﺘﺤﺭﻴﻙ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻻﺤﻅ ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ N؟
af
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ
π
ot
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) AM = AN ، ( Cﻭ =) ( AN,AMﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ Nﺼﻭﺭﺓ Mﺒﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ Rﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ A
3
π
ﻭ ﻗﻴﺱ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻪ ) M . ( -ﺘﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭ ) . ( Cﺇﺫﻥ Nﺘﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( C′ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺒﺎﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ . R
.m
3
π
(AO , AO′) =-ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻨﻔﺴﻪ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ) ( C ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ O′ﺃﻱ AO = AO′ﻭ
3
2
1
.ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ Nﺘﻤﺴﺢ ) ( C′ﻝﻤﺎ Mﺘﻤﺴﺢ ) ( Cﻓﺈﻥ Pﺘﻤﺴﺢ ) ( C′′ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( C′ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h Aﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ
2
w
324
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
12
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ( O , i , jﺘﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻬﺎ x 2 + y 2 - 2 x - 4 y + 4 = 0ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ
) A( - 1 , 0ﻭ ) M ، B( 3 , 0ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ) . ( C
-1ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﻭ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ . B
N -2ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ MANBﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( MNﻴﻤﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ Iﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Nﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﻭ ﺍﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ﻝﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل
om
P -3ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ MABPﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ .ﻤﺎﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ Mﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( C؟
-ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ﻝﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل .
ﺃﻭﻻ :ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎﻤﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻤﺜل Declicﺃﻭ Atelier de geometrieﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺭﻫﺎ
.c
-1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺤﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ B ، Aﻭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺤﻴﺙ r = 1ﻭ ) O( 1 , 2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل
ﺍﻝﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻝﻭﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ ﺩﻴﻜﻠﻴﻙ ) .ﻝﻠﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻨﻘﺭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻴﻤﻥ ﻝﻠﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﺜﻡ ﺍﻷﻴﺴﺭ (
ik
-2ﺇﺨﺘﺭ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺘﺤﺭﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﻭ ﺴﻤﻬﺎ Mﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺯﺭ
-3ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻴﺔ ﻀﻤﻥ ﻓﺌﺔ Construireﺇﺨﺘﺭ Polygonesﺜﻡ Parallelodgrammeﻭ ﺃﻨﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ
aw
B ، Mﺜﻡ Aﺒﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺴﺘﺠﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ
ﻗﺩ ﺃﻨﺸﺌﺕ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﻗﻡ ﺒﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺃﺱ
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻴﺩ N
af
ﺃﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Iﻭ ﻗﻴﺱ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻪ πﻭ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) (Cﺒﻜل ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴﻼﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( C′ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ، O′ﻨﺼﻑ
ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ r′ﺤﻴﺙ IO′ = − IOﺃﻱ ) O′ ( 1 , -2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( C′ﻫﻲ ( x - 1 ) 2 + ( y + 2 ) 2 = 1
w
325
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 12
* ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻝﻺﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ x′ = x + 4ﻭ y′ = y
ﺜﻡ ﺒﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ xﻭ yﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Cﻨﺠﺩ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) . ( C′′
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ P :ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Mﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻹﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ . ABﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ Pﺼﻭﺭﺓ Nﺒﺎﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ
ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Bﻷﻥ BP = − BNﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ Nﺼﻭﺭﺓ Mﺒﺎﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Iﺃﻱ IN = − IM
ﻓﺈﻥ Pﺼﻭﺭﺓ Mﺒﻤﺭﻜﺏ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻴﻴﻥ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ SBﻭ SIﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
om
) P = S S (Mﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ،ﻭﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ) P = T (Mﺇﺫﻥ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ = S S
TAB B I AB B I
ﺍﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ
.c
) ( dو )
( d′ن از*ن #
$ A ،ا F*0G-ا1-ي *09,ا =$ا
-ن) آ Jا( HIG-
- 1أ AMM′ ! LG$ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ Aﻭ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ
ik
ﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ Mﺘﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( dﻭ M ′ﺘﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( d′
) (d ) ( d′
A - 2ه COد ا!,-ل ؟
aw
, # T
,: - 3اG$Sء <>
>;P
Q0
π
- < 4!O 0
P-ه1ا ا/-ر ( d1 ) U;0$رة ) ( dﺒﺎﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ ﻗﻴﺱ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻪ
2
ot
XY
:
$ M′ $ا ( d1 ) #
-و ) ( d′
π
LGP$ا M
P-رة C-< M ′وران ا1-ي 0آ A ./و Zزاو*=
.m
2
أ LG$اAMM′ %! -
ﺍﻵﻥ ﺤﺭﻙ ﺒﺎﻝﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﻨﺎﺼﺭ ﺍﻷﺼﻠﻴﺔ ) ﻤﺜﻼ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ( A
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺒﺎﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل .
w
w
w
326
12 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
أ
أم
ABC 10ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ ABﻭ J ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 8ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ ACﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل Jﺇﻝﻰ Iﻫﻭ: ﻤﻌﻠﻼ ﺇﺠﺎﺒﺘﻙ:
1 1ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﺤﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ
. BC (1
2
ﺍﻨﺴﺤﺎﺒﺎ ﻭﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل ﺍﻝﻤﻁﺎﺒﻕ .
. BC (2
2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ MNPﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ
1
. CB (3
2 ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ، hﻓﺈﻥ ABCﻭ MNPﻤﺘﺸﺎﺒﻬﻴﻥ .
ABC 11ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ BCﻭ G MNP 3ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺤﻴﻁﻪ 36ﺤﻴﺙ MN = 7ﻭ ABC
om
ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ k . ABCﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺤﻴﻁﻪ 42ﺤﻴﺙ . AB = 8ﻫل ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h
Gﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Aﺇﻝﻰ Iﻫﻲ : ﺤﻴﺙ h ( C ) = P ، h ( B ) = N ، h ( A ) = M :؟
1 ﻜل ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﻫﻭ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ .
4
. k = − (1
.c
2
B ، A ، O 5ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺤﻴﺙ:
. k = −2 (2
2 AB = 2OA
ik
. k = − (3
3 ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ 2ﻴﺤﻭل Aﺇﻝﻰ . B
S 12ﺍﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) ( dﻭ )' ( dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ .ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ 6
aw
ﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Dﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
B ﻴﺤﻭل ) ( dﺇﻝﻰ )' . ( d
. BD = AC (1
ABC 7ﻤﺜﻠﺙ O ،ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] f . [ BCﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل
. BD = CA (2
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ
af
. AB = CD (3
Nﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙMN = 2MA + MB + MC :
C ، B ، A 13ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ :
][OA fﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ
ot
3 AC = 2 BC
ﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ . - 3
kﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭﻴﺤﻭل Bﺇﻝﻰ Cﻫﻲ :
1 hﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ kﺤﻴﺙ . k ≠ 1 8
.m
. k = − (1
2 ﻻ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺘﻨﻁﺒﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺼﻭﺭﺘﻬﺎ
. k = −2 (2 ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h
2 أ دة ا رات
. k = (3
w
1
( C ) 14ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 12cmﺘﺤﺎﻙ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ −ﻴﺤﻭل Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ 9
2
) ( Cﺇﻝﻰ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ' . ( C ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] k . [ ABﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ
w
327
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 12
ABCDEFGH 21ﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ 15ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﻤل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ .
H G ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ BF (1ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ A
E F (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، A 1
. − ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ
D ، C ، Bﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ 2
D C (2ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ 3
ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ AE
ﻴﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Q
A B (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ
1 (3ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Iﻭ Jﺼﻭﺭﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
Hﻭ Fﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Bﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ .
om
2 ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ −4
B ، A 22ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺤﻴﺙ B (4ﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ
. BA = 4 BC ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ . CD
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ABCD 16ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ.
.c
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ 4؟ (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ . DB
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ (2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ BA؟
ik
.
1
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Bﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ 17ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ
4 ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Mﺇﻝﻰ . N ﺍﻝﺫﻱ
(3ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ . 3CB = −CA
aw
. AN = −3 AM (1
(4ﻫل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Bﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ
. 4 AN = 5MN (2
ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Cﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ . -3
MN = AM (3
af
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ .ﺤﻴﺙ . BC = 3 23
2 AM + 3 AN = 0 (4
Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AB
ABDC 18ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ.
Nﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AC
ot
Cﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ . -1
(1ﻝﻴﻜﻥ h1ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭﻴﺤﻭل Mﺇﻝﻰ . B ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ AF
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h1؟
ABCD 19ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ.
w
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h2؟ ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h2؟ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . F
24ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ ) ( Dﻭ ) ' ( Dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ. AF = EC ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ:
w
328
12 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ N ، M ، B ، Aﻭ Oﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ.
ABCD 26ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ Iﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ:
1 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل M
. AI = AD ﺇﻝﻰ Nﻭ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ . O
3
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺼﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، Bﻭ Dﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ 25ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Gﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ
Iﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Aﺇﻝﻰ . D ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ :
27ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ 2 (1
D C
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' M
om
A M 'M
G
M A 'M
.c
A B
6
'M A M
ik
y
B (2
28ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ،ﺤﺩﺩ:
A C B D
aw
E
D
1
ﺃ( ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ .2 →
j
af
8 →
ﺏ( ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ . G 0 i 1 x
5
ـ( ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Bﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ.-1
ot
4
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Bﺇﻝﻰ . Cﻋﻴﻥ
w
(4
-ﻫل ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻴﺤﻭل Aﺇﻝﻰ Dﻭ Bﺇﻝﻰ C؟ A
329
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 12
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺘﺤﺎﻙ ،ﺍﺫﻜﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻤﺎ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺘﻜﺒﻴﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺼﻐﻴﺭﺍ 32ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ E ، D ، C ، B ، Aﻭ Fﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻵﺘﻲ:
ﻝﺼﻭﺭﺓ " ." L E
35ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ (C ) ،ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ O
ﻭ ) ( Dﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Qﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﺍﻝﺫﻱ A B
ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Bﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Qﺇﻝﻰ . P
C
A
)(C
)(D
F
om
D
P B O Q ﺃ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﺤﺎﻙ ﻴﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ B
ﻭﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ.
.c
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ: ﺏ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﺤﺎﻙ ﻴﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ B
ﺃ( ﺼﻭﺭﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Oﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . h ﻭﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Fﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ.
ﺏ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )' ( Dﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . h
ik
33ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، Aﻭ Dﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻵﺘﻲ:
ﺠـ( ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ )' (Cﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . h
(2ﺃ( ﺤﺩﺩ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )' ( Dﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ )' . (C A B
aw
ﺏ( ﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ) (Cﻭ )' (C C
4
ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﺎﻩ ] [ ABﻭ ] [ DC 37ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺸﺒﻪ ﻤﻨﺤﺭﻑ ABCD ﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Aﺇﻝﻰ . B ﺏ( ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ
3
ﺤﻴﺙ AB = 3ﻭ . DC = 5ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯ Oﻭ ﺝ( ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ -3ﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Dﺇﻝﻰ . C
ﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺭ 2ﺘﻤﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . B 34ﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ " " Lﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ
w
1 1
ﻭ ، 1ﺜﻡ -2 ، -1ﻭ − ،4،2
2 2
w
5
ﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل Aﺇﻝﻰ . D hﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ
3
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ B؟
-ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . h
-ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻨﺸﺎ ﺀ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . h O
330
12 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
D C
K ) [Oxﻭ ) [Oyﻨﺼﻔﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، A 38
I J F ، E ، D ، C ، Bﺤﻴﺙ ) ( AC ) // ( BD
ﻭ ) ) ( EC ) // ( FDﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل( .
A
x
B D
om
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ . h ( A ) = K O
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( BCﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . hﻭﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ A
E
B
. h(I ) = A F y
.c
(4ﻨﺴﻤﻲ kﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . h ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ hﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭﻴﺤﻭل Aﺇﻝﻰ . B
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﺃﻥ IA = k IJ :ﻭ IK = k JA ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ Fﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Eﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . h
ik
ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ . IA = IJ × IK :
2
331
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 12
D C :ر*
>: #
F ) ( O ; i ; jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ( C ) ، 45
G
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻬﺎ . x 2 + y 2 = 4 :ﻭ )' ( C
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻬﺎ . x 2 + y 2 − 6 x + 8 = 0 :
A B E I (1ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ) ( Cﻭ ) ' . ( C
. EBF
BACﻭ
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
(2ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ) ( Cﻭ ) ' ( Cﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﺴﺘﺎﻥ .
om
• ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ACﻭ ) ( BFﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ .
(3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Iﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻴﻥ ) . ( 2; 0
(2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ hﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Iﻭﻴﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ' ( Cﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ
Aﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Bﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ . h ( C ) = F
Iﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ kﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ .
.c
2
ﻫﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h؟ • ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ
3 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ) ( C1ﻭ ) ( C2ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻴﻬﻤﺎ 46
ik
(3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ I ، G ، Dﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ . O1ﻭ O2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ،ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺭ ،
ﻤﺘﻤﺎﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﺨﺎﺭﺠﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . I
ABCD 48ﻭ AEFGﻤﺭﺒﻌﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ :
aw
π
= ) ( AB ; AD ) = ( AE ; AGﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل . ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺍﻥ ﻴﺸﻤﻼﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ، Iﻴﻘﻁﻌﺎﻥ ) ( C1
2 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ M 1ﻭ N1ﻭﻴﻘﻁﻌﺎﻥ ) ( C2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ
M 2ﻭ N 2ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل .
af
F
E M1
N2
G P N
ot
D I
A O1
Q O2
M
.m
N1 M2
B C
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Sﺍﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ . I
G ، P ، N ، Mﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ] ، [ ED ] ، [ BD
w
] [GEﻭ ] [GBﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ . ﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( C1ﺒﺎﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ . S ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ( C2 (1
w
(1ﺒﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﻥ BEDﻭ BEGﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ : (2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ M 2ﻭ N 2ﻫﻤﺎ ﺼﻭﺭﺘﻲ
. MN = QP ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ M 1ﻭ N1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ . S
w
332
12 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
) ( Dﻭ ) ' ( Dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ M .ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻻ 52 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻴﻬﻤﺎ . ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A 49
Iﻭ Jﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺘﻴﻥ ] [ ABﻭ ] [ ACﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
M
Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( BC
)(D )'(D sﺍﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( IJ
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻭﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﻋﻠﻰ (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Aﺒﺎﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ . s
om
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ' ( Dﺤﻴﺙ : (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( AIﻭ ) ( AJﺒﺎﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ . s
N (1ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ MP (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( HIﻴﻌﺎﻤﺩ ) . ( HJ
M (2ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ NP ) ( d1ﻭ ) ( d 2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻭ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻻ
.c
50
( C ) 53ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ . O ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻫﺫﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ .
ik
Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺘﺎﻥ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) . ( C )(d2
A
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ) ( Cﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ
aw
ﺃﻀﻼﻉ . AMM ' B
M B
O )(d1
af
A
'M
)(C π
. ﻝﻴﻜﻥ rﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻪ
ot
) ∆ ( ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺜﺎﺒﺕ A .ﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺘﺎﻥ ﻻ 54 (2ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻤﻥ ) ( d1ﻭ Cﻤﻥ ) ( d 2ﺤﺘﻰ
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( .
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ .
w
)∆( 'M
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ C
A 51
ﻭ Dﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( Dﻭ ) ' ( Dﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
w
333
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 12
) ∆ ( ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺜﺎﺒﺕ A .ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻻ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ 55
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺤﻴﺩ xﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ C
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( .
ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Bﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ . x
(2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ : ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ) ∆ ( ﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ N
ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AM
• Bﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ AC
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Nﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M
• Aﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ BC
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ؟
Cﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ AB •
om
( C ) 56ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ] . [ AB
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻋﻠﻰ ) ∆ ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ :
Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺤﻴﺙ ) M ≠ A
]. x ∈ ]−∞ ; − 1 • ﻭ. ( M ≠ B
.c
• ﻝﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻨﻌﻴﻥ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABM
[∞ . x ∈ ]−1 ; 0[ ∪ [1 ; + • ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M
ik
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ M .ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ BC 60 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﻤﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ Aﻭ B؟
ﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﻥ ' BABﻭ ' CAC ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ . Aﻝﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ 57
aw
ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ Aﻭﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ )ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ( . ] [ BCﻨﻌﻴﻥ M 1ﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ Mﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AB
B
M C Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ α
w
α
ﻨﻀﻊ hﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Bﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ . 2 . − ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Gﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ
β
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Mﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ . h
(2ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ' Aﺼﻭﺭﺓ Aﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ، hﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ C ، B ، A 59ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ rﻴﺤﻭل Cﺇﻝﻰ ' Cﻭ ' Aﺇﻝﻰ ' . B )∆( .
334
12 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
h (2ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭﻴﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﺇﻝﻰ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ Oﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] I ، [ BCﻨﻘﻁﺔ 61
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . E ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ BO
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝـ ) ( OAﻭﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻴﻘﻁﻊ
5
، −ﻭﺃﻥ : • ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﻫﻲ : ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻓﻲ Jﻭﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻴﻡ ) ( ACﻓﻲ . K
5
. h (C ) = F ﻨﺴﻤﻲ h1ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Bﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ k1ﺤﻴﺙ :
• ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ Hﻭ Kﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻴﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ K ، h1 ( O ) = Iﻭ h2ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ C
Eﻭ Fﻋﻠﻰ ] . [ ABﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ EFKH
om
ﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ k2ﺤﻴﺙ . h2 ( O ) = I :
ﻤﺭﺒﻊ . A
.c
2
J
ﻝﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻨﺭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' Mﺤﻴﺙ M ' = h1 ( M ) : B C
ik
ﺜﻡ " Mﺤﻴﺙ . M " = h2 ( M ') : I O
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ) h1 ( Aﻭ ) . h2 ( A
(1ﻋﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ' Mﻭ " Mﺒﻌﻼﻗﺘﻴﻥ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺘﻴﻥ .
aw
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ BI = k1 BO :ﻭ . CI = k2 CO
(2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ . BM " = − AM + 2 BA :
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ . k1 + k2 = 2 :
(3ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ Mﺤﻴﺙ M " = M :
(3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ . IJ + IK = 2OA :
af
ﻨﺴﻤﻴﻬﺎ . Ω
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ ( c ) . aﻨﺼﻑ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ 62
(4ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Ωﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ B
ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ] [ ABﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ . O
ot
C
Mﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ K ، J ، Iﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ . )∆(
ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ] [ BQ ] ، [ APﻭ ] [CRﻝﻬﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ (1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ∆ ( ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻫﻭ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ O؛ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ /01 O ، G ، Mا ,-. ﻝﻠﺸﻜل .
وا#2ة.
• ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( DCﻭ ) ( EFﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ.
335
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 12
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ B ' ، A ' .ﻭ ' Cﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ 65 (1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﺤﺎﻙ h1ﻴﺤﻭل Aﺇﻝﻰ Iﻭ B
] [ AC ] ، [ BCﻭ ] [ ABﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ . ﺇﻝﻰ Jﻭ Cﺇﻝﻰ . K
H Aﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ] . [ BC (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h2ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل Iﺇﻝﻰ
H Bﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻋﻠﻰ ] . [ AC Pﻭ Jﺇﻝﻰ Qﻭ Kﺇﻝﻰ . R
H Cﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻋﻠﻰ ] . [ AB ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل [ (3ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ I
om
Gﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC (4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ .
.c
2
1 hBﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Bﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ . 3
. ' hﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Hﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ
ik
2 ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Jﺼﻭﺭﺓ Iﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . hA
ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺃﻭﻻﺭ )(EULER [ I
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Kﺼﻭﺭﺓ Jﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . hB
aw
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، Aﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h؟
ﻨﻀﻊ . AB = 10 cm
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺼﻭﺭ ﺃﻋﻤﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . h
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Jﻭ . K
(3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h؟
af
(2ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Jﻭ Kﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ
(4ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻤﻴﺯ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، O
B ، Aﻭ . I
Gﻭ. H
ot
ﺘﺸﻤل ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل .
336
13
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
om
ﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ.
ﺘﻔﺴﻴﺭ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ.
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻼﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻘﺔ،
.c
ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ،ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ.
ﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ
ik
) ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ،ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ (.
aw
ﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ
) ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ،ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻼﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﺎﺕ (.
ﺘﻭﻅﻴﻑ ﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ
af
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺤل ﻤﺴﺎﺌل.
ot
.m
w
w
w
337
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 13
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
ا 4 7 10 13 16 ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ا
ار 6 5 7 4 1 -1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
4,4,4,4,4,4,7,7,7,7,7,10,……. -2ﺃﻜﻤل ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻲ ﻤﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﺎ ﺘﺼﺎﻋﺩﻴﺎ
-3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
om
-4ﺃﺤﺴﺏ Q1ﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻭﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻹﺜﻨﻲ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ .
-ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ) ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻴﺔ ( ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻁﺒﻊ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ Q1؟
-5ﺃﺤﺴﺏ Q3ﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻭﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻹﺜﻨﻲ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺍﻷﺨﻴﺭﺓ .
-ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ) ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻴﺔ ( ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻁﺒﻊ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ Q3؟
.c
ik
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
ا ا
ا
ا ا ا ا ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﺒﻴﻥ ﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ
ا
ا
aw
ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩ ﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ
[[0،2 2 0,12 0,12
-1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻤﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺭﻱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩ
[[2، 4 4 0,15 0, 27 -2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺼل ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ
af
[[4،6 6 0,18 0,45 y = 0, 75 ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ y = 0, 25 ، y = 0,5ﻭ
[[6،8 8 0,24 0,69 ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻫﻲ Q1 ، Medﻭ Q3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
ot
[ [ 8 ، 10 10 0,14 0,83 -3ﻻﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩ 0,25ﻴﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﺌﺔ [ [ 2 , 4
[ [ 10 ، 12 12 0,10 0,93 ﺃﺤﺴﺏ X1 ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) A( 2 : 0,12ﻭ ) . B( 4 : 0,27
.m
[ [ 12 ، 14 14 0, 07 1 ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﻬﺎ 0,25
Q1 ﻻﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ X1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝـ
Q3 -4ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل (3ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ Medﻭ
w
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
w
xi ا 9,5 9,6 9,7 9,8 9,9 10 10,1 10,2
ا
ار n i 17 22 25 29 31 35 45 40
ا x i 10,3 10,4 10,5 10,6 10,7 10,8 10,9 11
ا
ار n i 25 14 12 10 10 8 5 2
338
13 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻤﻊ Nﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻲ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ | x i − Med | ،ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ xiﻭ | x i − X | ، Medﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ xiﻭ . Xﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ
om
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻊ x1 , x 2 , x 3 ,........, x kﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ 1
.c
k
n = ∑ ni ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ . n1 , n 2 , n 3 ,......., n kﻨﻀﻊ
i =1
k
ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺸﺘﺕ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ :
ik
d(x) = ∑ n i (x i − x) 2
i =1
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ dﺘﻘﺒل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺼﻐﺭﻯ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻝـ xﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩﻫﺎ .
aw k
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺨﺎﻤﺱ
ot
#ل ا !ن cm [[3,5 [[5،7 [[7,9 ﻜل ﺸﻬﺭﺃﻁﻭﺍل ﺴﻴﻘﺎﻨﻬﺎ .
ا اآx i $ 4 6 8 ﻓﻲ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻭل ﺴﺠل ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ni ا
ار 30 20 50 .1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ Xﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍل
w
3
1
= )s(x ∑ n (x i i − x) 2 .2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ
10 i =1
339
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 13
-1ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻴﺎﺕ
ﻤﺩﺨل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
4 , 4 ,4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 7 , 7 , 7 , 7 , 7 , 10 , 10 , 10 , 10 , 10 , 10 , 10 , 13 , 13 , 13 , 13 , 16
ﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻲ ﻤﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﺎ ﺘﺼﺎﻋﺩﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻜل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻜﺘﻭﺒﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺴﺎﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﻫﺎ
ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻲ Nﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ 23
N N
ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺩﺴﺔ ﻷﻥ = 5, 75 ﺃﻭل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺭﺘﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ
4 4
om
ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ ) Q1ﻫﻨﺎ ( Q1 = 4
3N 3N
ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﺸﺭ ﻷﻥ = 17, 25 ﺃﻭل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺭﺘﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ
4 4
ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ ) Q3ﻫﻨﺎ ( Q3 = 10
.c
25 %ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل 25 %ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل 25 %ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻠﺨﺹ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 7 , 7 , 7 , 7 , 7 ,1 0 ,1 0 ,1 0 ,1 0 ,1 0 ,1 0 , 1 0 ,1 3,1 3,1 3,1 3,1 6
ik
Q1 Med Q3
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:
aw
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻭل Q1ﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﻁﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻲ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ 25 %
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . Q1
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ Q3ﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﻁﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻲ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ 75%
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ Q3
af
Q1و !"#$ Q3ن ا ف ا Medا*ي & %#أن ' &%ن #$ا : ()*+
ot
ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻁﺒﻊ ﻜﻤﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻤﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻁﺒﻊ ﻜﻤﻲ ﻤﺘﻘﻁﻊ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﺎ ﺘﺼﺎﻋﺩﻴﺎ
ﻨﻁﺒﻕ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﺨﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ * Q1ﻫﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ )ﻤﻊ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﻜل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺒﻌﺩﺩ ﻤﺴﺎﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﻫﺎ(
3
ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﻬﺎ ≥n
ﻫﻭ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ 3N n
4 4
w
340
13 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
om
ﺤﻴﺙ minﻫﻭ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭ maxﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﻁﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻲ .
ﺤــل:
.c
xi 3 4 5 7 8 10 11 -2ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻲ N = 2 × 20 :
ni 5 7 3 8 8 6 ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ Medﻫﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ 3
تمص 5 12 15 23 31 37 40
ik
0,125م ص 0,3 0,375 0,575 0,775 0,925 1 ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﺫﻴﻥ ﺭﺘﺒﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ 20ﻭ 21
ﺃﻱ Med = 7
aw
ﺒﻘﺭﺍﺀﺓ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Q1ﺤﻴﺙ 25 %ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ *
ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ Q1ﻫﻲ 4ﻭ ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ Q3 = 8
-3ﻴﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] 21 ، [ Q1 ، Q3ﺤﺩﺍ ﺃﻱ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻌﺎﺩل ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﺎ 52,5 %ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ
af
ﻨﺴﺒﺘﺎ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻝﻴﻥ [ min ، Q1 ] ،ﻭ ] [ Q3 ، maxﻫﻤﺎ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﺎ 30 %ﻭ 42,5 %ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
ot
ﺇﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩ
A , B , C , D, E ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ
ﺤﻴﺙ X1 < X 2 < X 3 < ....... < X8 ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ X1 , X 2 , X 3 ,......., X8 :
w
2 2
ﺤــل:
8 X 4 + X5 8
Q3 = X 6 ﻭ Q3ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺭﺘﺒﺘﻪ × 3ﺃﻱ ﺃﻱ Q1 = X 2ﻭ Medﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ Q1ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺭﺘﺒﺘﻪ
4 2 4
ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻫﻭ ) ( E -
341
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 13
ﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻴﺎﺕ :
om
: 2 ()*+ﻓﻲ ﻤﻀﻠﻊ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻤﺴﺘﻤﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺘﻬﺎ x = Q3 ، x = Med ، x = Q1
ﺘﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﻠﻊ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺃﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺎﺕ
.c
– 2ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺏ :
ﻨﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺨﻁﻁﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ik
ﻨﻀﻊ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ) ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺸﺎﻗﻭﻝﻲ (
ﻨﻌﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ Med ، Q1 ، max ، minﻭ . Q3
aw
) ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﺭﻯ ،ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺒﺭﻯ ،ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ (
ﻨﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼ ) ﺍﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ( ﺒﺎﻝﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ) .ﻁﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﻫﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺭﻀﻪ ﻜﻴﻔﻲ (
ﻤﺜﺎل Med = 4 ، Q1 = 3 ، max = 9 ، min =1 :ﻭ . Q3 = 6
af
ot
ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺸﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺘﺸﺘﺕ ﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺴﻼﺴل ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ . : ()*+
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ : 1
Aﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) ( x i ، n iﻭﺴﻴﻁﻬﺎ Medﻭ ﺭﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻫﻤﺎ Q1و Q3
a >0
w
ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﺒـ Q1′و Q3′ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ Med′ = a.Med + bﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل a > 0
Q B = a.QA + b
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ Q1′ = a.Q 1 + b :و Q3′ = a.Q 3 + b
342
+
13 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
om
- 2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ .ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ؟
ﺤــل:
ﻤﺠﺎل ﺍﻝﺯﻤﻥ )(min [ [ 30 ، 50 [ [ 50 ، 80 [[ 80 ، 120 [[ 120،300
ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺭﻴﺎﺕ 14 18 20 8
.c
7 3 1 2
ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ
30 10 3 15
ik
ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻊ 7 8 13
1
ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩ 30 15 15
ا 2 ا >Q Q1 Q3 min -ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺏ ﻝﻬﺎﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺘﻴﻥ max
) !MR ( € 27,5 22,5 36,5 15 75
w
ا $ا8
) ﻨﺤﻭل ﻤﺜﻼ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺠﺯﺍﺌﺭ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭ .( €
!MR =y
x
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ xﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻷﻭﺭﻭ ﻫﻲ
12
ا $ا€ 8 29,1 20,8 35 16.6 79,1
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
343
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 13
ﺘﻤﻬﻴﺩ :
ﻋﺭﻓﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﻗﻊ ) ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻭﺍل ،ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ( ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺭ
ﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﻜﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺒل ﻻﺒ ﺩ ﻤﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺘﺸﺘﺕ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺤﻭل ﻤﺅﺸﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﻗﻊ .ﻭﻤﻥ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻨﺩﺭﺝ ﻫﺫﻩ
ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﻤﺎ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺒﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺸﺘﺕ ﻭﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻯ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻋﺭﻓﻨﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ .
om
i ∈ {1, 2,3,..., p ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ ﻤﻊ } ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ) (x i , n iﺤﻴﺙ x iﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻊ ﻭ n i ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:
n
fi = i ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ Vﻭﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ :
N
n1 ( x1 − X ) + n 2 ( x 2 − X ) + ... + n p ( x p − X )
p
1
= Vﻤﻊ N = ∑ n iﻭ Xﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
2 2 2
.c
V i =1 N
د p p
ik
bg+
=s ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻴﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ sﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ V
aw ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ V
إذا آ VMا !! I /ّ+ت ) ز x i [\]M ( (T+ 0آآ $ : ()*+
! ;/ه[ aا 2/رة ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ) (x i , n iﺤﻴﺙ x iﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻊ ﻭ n iﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ 2+ه: 2 T
af
دة !ب
ﻤﻊ } i ∈ {1, 2,3,..., pﻭ pﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ .1ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ Vﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل
دون !)Vب 1 1 n
=V (n1 x12 + n 2 x 2 2 + ... + n p x p p ) − X 2 = ∑ n i x i 2 − X 2
ot
1 p
∑ (x i − X) 2 = x i 2 − 2.x i X + X 2ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ) (n i x i 2 − 2.n i .x i X + n i .X 2 ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :
p p
=V
∑ a.x
i =1
i = a ∑ Xi
i =1
N i =1
i : ;!+ a 1 p p
1 p 2 p 1 p
=X ﻭ ∑ ni xi = Vﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ N = ∑ n i ∑ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ n i x i 2 − X ∑ n i x i + X 2 ∑ n i
:
0إ\ا;23 ig N i =1 i =1 N i =1 N i =1 N i =1
w
ا ∑ $+ =V
1 p
∑ ni xi2 − X2 ﺇﺫﻥ =V
1 p
∑ n i x i 2 − 2X2 + X 2 ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
N i =1 N i =1
w
إذا آ 3 x i VMا ^ 2ذات و)ات ) T/+أ#ال ،ز`R ( ... ، :+ن a[<I b!0 Vا )ات /I+ : 1 ()*+
) ، )!+ز ( ... ، I+ :+و `R K Iن و)ة s = Vه Kو)ة x i
w
;/!0 : 2 ()*+أ) !0 \d V. ef+ Mا > Qا !M* KIاRت ا ^ و ه ا /د ا em K
p
i ∈ {1, 2,3,..., p ا > Qا ! f i ، KIا اات و } X x i +ه 3 Kا ^، 2 e m = ∑ f i .x i − X )1
i =1
344
13 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 5
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
xi 3 5 7 9 11 13
fi
-1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
0,08 0,15 0,28 0,35 0,1 0,04
-2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻼﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻘﺔ
ﻨﻀﻴﻑ ﺴﻁﺭﺍ ﻝﻠﺠﺩﻭل ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ fi .x iﺜﻡ ﻨﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ fi .x i
ﺤــل:
0#
om
ﻨﻀﻴﻑ ﺴﻁﺭﺍ ﺁﺨﺭﺍ ﻝﻠﺠﺩﻭل ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ fi .x i 2ﺜﻡ ﻨﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ fi .x i 2 -1ﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ )(2
.c
s ≃ 2, 4086 fi .x i 2 0,72 3,75 13,72 28,35 12,1 6,76 65,4
-2ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ
ﺘﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺩﺓ ﻜﻤﺎﻴﻠﻲ :ﻋﻤﻭﺩ ﻝﻘﻴﻡ x iﻭ ﻋﻤﻭﺩ ﻝﻘﻴﻡ fiﺜﻡ ﻋﻤﻭﺩ x i − X
ik
6 0# ﻝﻺﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻘﺔ
ﺜﻡ ﻋﻤﻭﺩ fi x i − Xﻭ ﺃﺨﻴﺭﺍ ) e m = ∑ f i x i − Xﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ( X ﻨﻁﺒﻕ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ
i =1
aw
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 6
af
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ x i 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 ﺘﺤﺼل ﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﻗﺴﻤﻲ 2ﻉ 1ﻭ 2ﻉ 2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ .
2ﻉ 1
ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ n i 1 4 11 11 1 1 1 ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ) ، ( Ti 83+
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ x i 2 3 5 9 13 14 15 16 17 -ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ
ot
2ﻉ2
ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ n i 5 5 3 3 1 1 5 3 4 ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﻴﻥ.ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟
ﺤــل :ﺤﺴﺎﺏ Xﻭ sﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻘﺴﻡ 2ﻉ 1ﻨﺒﺩﺃ ﺒﺈﺩﺨﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ .
.m
ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :
ا ! 2ع 1ﺃﻓﻀل ﻤﻥ ﻨﺎﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﺍﻝﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ (
345
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 13
om
N i =1
p
∑n
i =1
i ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ Vﻤﻊ xiﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻊ ni ،ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ = N ،
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :
.c
1
= )g (a ) ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ gﻤﻊ aﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ( n1 ( x1 − a) 2 + n2 ( x2 − a ) 2 + ... + n p ( x p − a ) 2
n
−1
= ) g ′( a 2n1 ( x1 − a) + 2n2 ( x2 − a ) + ... + 2n p ( x p − a )
ik
N
−1
= 2n1 x1 + 2n2 x2 + ... + 2n p x p − 2(n1 + n2 + ... + n p )a
N
aw
−1 p p
= (2∑ ni xi − 2a ∑ ni ) = −2 X + 2a a X
N i =1 i =1 ) g ′(a - +
g ′( a ) = 0ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ ( g ( X ) = V ) a = X
af
) g (a
V
ot
ﻭ ( yi , ni ) Bﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ Vyﻭ ﺍﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ s yﻭ yi = a.xi + b
Vy = a 2 .Vxﻭ s y = a .sx ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ i ∈ {1, 2,3,..., p } ﻤﻊ a ∈ ℝ∗ , b ∈ ℝﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل
w
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ a.x + bﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ) ، yi = f (x iﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل a > 0ﺘﻜﻭﻥ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﺭﺘﺒﺔ x iﻓﻲ Aﻫﻲ ﻨﻔﺴﻬﺎ
ﺭﺘﺒﺔ yiﻓﻲ ) Bﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x i ≤ x i +1ﻓﺈﻥ ( yi ≤ yi +1ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ S y = a 2Vxﺃﻱ S y = a Vxﺃﻱ S y = a S x
346
13 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 7
.1ﻴﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﻤﺩﻴﺭ ﺸﺭﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﺎل ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺭ
* ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ :ﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻤﺒﻠﻎ 750 DAﻝﻠﺠﻤﻴﻊ * ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ :ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺭ ﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ5 %
ﻴﻔﻀل ﺍﻝﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺭ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ .ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻌﺩل ﺃﺠﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﺎل ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﻭ
15000 DAﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻭ . 5400 DAﻓﺄﻱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﺴﺏ ﻝﻠﻌﻤﺎل ؟
ﺤــل:
om
Y = 1, 05.X ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ Xﺍﻷﺠﺭ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ،ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺍﻷﺠﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻴﺩ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ : 1
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﻌﺩل ﺃﺠﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﺎل ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﻭ 15000 × 1,05 = 15750 DA
ﻭ ﺍﻹﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻴﺩ ﻫﻭ 5400 × 1,05 = 5670 DA
.c
ﻤﻌﺩل ﺃﺠﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﺎل ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﻭ 15000 + 750 = 15750 DA ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ : 2
ﻭ ﺍﻹﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻴﺩ ﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﻫﻭ ﻨﻔﺴﻪ 5400 DA
ik
ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﻨﺴﺏ ﻝﻠﻌﻤﺎل ﺇﺫ ﺒﻬﺎ ﺘﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺃﺠﻭﺭﻫﻡ ) ﺇﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ (
aw ﺍﻝﺨﻼﺼﺔ :
ا اب
1 = a .s x .......0 = aX + b 56ا34#هs y = a .s x : (4) 1
ot
ﺍﻷﺭﻭﻗﺔ .ﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺍﺀ Aﻓﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻤﻌﺩﻝﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺯﻤﻨﻲ ) ﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﺜﻭﺍﻨﻲ ( ﻭ ﺍﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ) ﺜﺎﻨﻴﺘـﺎﻥ ( ﺒﻴﻨﻤـﺎ ﺸـﺎﺭﻙ
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺍﺀ Bﻓﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻤﻌﺩﻝﻬﺎ ) ﺜﻤﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺜﻭﺍﻨﻲ ( ﻭ ﺍﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ) ﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ( .
w
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺯﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺍﺀ Aﻫﻭ ﻋﺸﺭﺓ ﺜﻭﺍﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺯﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺍﺀ Bﻫﻭ ﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﺜﻭﺍﻨﻲ .
-ﺃﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﺴﺭﻉ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﺱ ﺯﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺘﻪ ؟
w
347
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 13
ﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ
ﺘﻤﻬﻴﺩ :ﻤﺅﺸﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﻗﻊ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻜﺎﻑ ﻝﻠﺤﻜﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺇﺫ ﻻﺒﺩ ﻤﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺘﺸﺘﺕ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻊ ﺤﻭل .1
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ
ﻴﺘﻡ ﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺒﻤﺅﺸﺭﻴﻥ ) ﻤﺅﺸﺭ ﻤﻭﻗﻊ ﻭ ﻤﺅﺸﺭ ﺘﺸﺘﺕ (
ﻋﻤﻭﻤﺎ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ،ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻼﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻘﺔ ( ) ( Med ، em
ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ،ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ( ﺃﻱ ) ( X ، sx
ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻝﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻜﺎﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ،ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻯ ( ﻝﻜﻥ ﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻯ ﺘﺄﺜﺭﻩ
om
ﺒﺎﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺫﺓ .
ﺘﺴﺘﺨﺩﻡ ﺃﺤﻴﺎﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ،ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝ ﺭﺒﻌﻲ ( ﻝﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺘﺘﺄﺜﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺫﺓ
ﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻴﻤﻜﹼﻨﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺒﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻤﻠﺨﺼﺔ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ .
.c
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﺒﻴﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﻀﻴﻬﺎ ﺸﺨﺼﺎﻥ Aﻭ Bﺃﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻜل ﺸﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل:1
ﺃﺠﺭﻴﺕ ﺴﻨﺔ . 2003
ik
ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ﺍﻝﺸﺨﺹ A 68 60 61 43 41 51 51 60 60 126 108 110
ﺍﻝﺸﺨﺹ B 44 42 57 63
aw 77 79 76 92 92 97 79 60
-1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻜل ﺸﺨﺹ .
-2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻼﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻘﺔ ﻝﻜل ﺸﺨﺹ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ .
af
ﺍﻝﺤل :
( 1 ) qp ( 2 ) qp
ا efات X sx Med em
ot
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﺸﺨﺹ Bﺃﻜﺒﺭ .ﻓﻬﻭ ﻴﻘﻀﻲ ﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﺨﺹ Aﻝﻜﻨﹼﻪ ﻴﻘﻀﻴﻬﺎ ﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ
ﺍﻨﺘﻅﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ Aﻷﻥ ﺍﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ .
ﻤﺜﺎل :2ﻋﻭﻝﺠﺕ ﻋﻼﻤﺎﺕ 200ﻤﺘﺴﺎﺒﻘﺎ ﻻﺠﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﻤﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﺸﻔﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺠﺎﻤﻌﻲ ﻓﺄﻋﻁﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
w
ﺍﻝﺤل :
ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ ) ( Med ; Q3 -Q1 ) = ( 13 ; 9ﻭ )(m ; s) = (11,4 ; 5,2
w
ﻴﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﺒﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻘﺴﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻨﺠﺯﻩ ﺒﻘﻴﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ .
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﺜﻨﻴﻥ ﻋﻼﻤﺘﻪ 13ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻌﻼﻤﺎﺕ
ﻤﻭﺯﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ 9ﻨﻘﻁ .ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺎﺕ 11,4ﻭﻤﻌﺩل ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل
ﻫﻭ . 5,2ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺴﺎﺒﻘﻴﻥ ﻋﻼﻤﺎﺘﻬﻡ ﺘﻔﻭﻕ . 11,4
348
13 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل Excelﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ
ﻴﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﻗﻁﻌﹰﺎ ﻓﻀﻴﺔ ﻨﺴﺠل ﺴﻤﻜﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻠﻴﻤﺘﺭ) ( mmﻜﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ
[ [ 1,8; 1,85 [ [ 1,85; 1,9 [ [ 1,9; 1,95 [ [ 1,95; 2,0 [ [ 2,0; 2,05 [ [ 2,05; 2,1 [ [ 2,1; 2,3ﺍﻝﺴﻤﻙ )(mm
ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ n i 3 6 17 34 13 4 1
om
-1ﺍﻜﺘﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ Aﺒﺩﺍﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﺭﻯ ﻝﻠﻔﺌﺎﺕ
-2ﺍﻜﺘﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ Bﺒﺩﺍﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺒﺭﻯ ﻝﻠﻔﺌﺎﺕ
-3ﻨﺨﺼﺹ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ Cﻝﻤﺭﺍﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻜﺘﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻤﻨﻪ
.c
=(A1+B1)/2ﺜﻡ ﺍﻨﺴﺦ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺨﻼﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ
-4ﺃﻜﺘﺏ n iﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﻜل ﻓﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ D
ik
-5ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ n i .x iﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ Eﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ
=D1*C1ﺜﻡ ﺍﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺨﻼﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ .
aw -6ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ n i .x i 2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ Fﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ
=D1*C1^2ﺜﻡ ﺍﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺨﻼﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ
-7ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻼﻴﺎ D8ﻭ E8ﻭ F8ﻨﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﻗﻴﻡ ﻜل ﻋﻤﻭﺩ
af
ﺒﺎﻝﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ) =SOMME(D1:D7ﻭ ) =SOMME(E1:E7ﻭ ) =SOMME(F1:F7ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
-8ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ D10ﻨﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ =E8/D8ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺘﻬﺎ ) ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺩﻭل ( ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ E10ﻨﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ
ot
* ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺼﺎﻝﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﺠﺎل ﺍﻝﺼﻼﺤﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﺘﻭﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] . [ 1,9 ; 2ﻫل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ؟
ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﺼﻠﻴﺢ ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺤﺼﻠﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ :ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺼﻼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ .
[ [ 1,8; 1,85 [ [ 1,85; 1,9 [ [ 1,9; 1,95 [ [ 1,95; 2,0 [ [ 2,0; 2,05 [ [ 2,05; 2,1 [ [ 2,1; 2,3ﺍﻝﺴﻤﻙ )(mm
ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ n i 1 2 43 25 4 2 1
349
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 13
ﺘﺘﻨﺎﻓﺱ ﻗﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺤﻼﻗﺔ Aﻭ Bﻓﻲ ﺠﻠﺏ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺒﺎﺌﻥ .ﺘﺒﻨﹼﻰ ﺼﺎﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺔ Aﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍ ﻜﺘﺒﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﺏ ﻫﻭ:
" ﺍﻝﺤﻼﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ 40ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ) ".ﻜﻤﻌﺩل. (...
* ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻝﻠﺤﻼﻗﺔ ﻫﻭ 30ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺒﻭﻥ ﺴﻴﻨﺘﻅﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗل ﻤﻥ 10ﺩﻗﺎﺌﻕ .
( Iﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺼﺤﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﻓﺱ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺼﺎﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺔ Bﺒﺎﺤﺼﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺭﺍﺕ
ﺍﻹﻨﺘﻅﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻓﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺠﻪ ﻜﻤﺎﻴﻠﻲ :
om
ﻓﺘﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻨﺘﻅﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺯﺒﺎﺌﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺯﺒﺎﺌﻥ
ﺒﺎﻝﺩﻗﺎﺌﻕ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺔ A ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺔ B
[[0,2 29 0
[[2,5 48 1
.c
[ [ 5 , 10 54 69
[ [ 10 , 12 19 96
ik
[ [ 12 , 15 13 23
[ [ 15 , 20
aw 14 2
[ [ 20 , 30 11 0
[ [ 30 , 60 10 0
-1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ m1ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ s1ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻘﺎﻋﺔ . Aﻫل ﺸﻌﺎﺭ Aﺼﺎﺩﻕ ؟
af
-2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ m2ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ s2ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻘﺎﻋﺔ Bﺜﻡ ﻗﺎﺭﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ .
-3ﺍﻗﺘﺭﺡ ﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍ ﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺎ ﻝﻘﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻼﻗﺔ .B
ot
350
13 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﻴﻥ 2ﻉ 1ﻭ 2ﻉ2
ﺍﻝﻔﺌﺎﺕ [[ 0;8 [[8;9 [[9;10 [[10;12 [[12;13 [[13;14 [[14; 20
ﻋﺩﺩ ﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ 2ﻉ1 0 4 10 10 5 2 1
ﻋﺩﺩ ﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ 2ﻉ2 3 5 9 12 3 0 0
-1 (Iﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﻴﻥ ) ﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ (
-2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻹﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﻴﻥ
om
(IIﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻨﺘﻘﺎل ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻴﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﻤﻌﺩﻻ ﺴﻨﻭﻴﺎ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻴﻔﻭﻕ 10
-1ﻤﺎ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﺍﻝﺫﻴﻥ ﺴﻴﻨﺘﻘﻠﻭﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ ؟
-2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻗﺴﻡ ،ﺜﻡ ﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻷﺤﺴﻥ ؟
-3ﻋﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻤﺼﻁﻔﻰ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺍﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﻴﻥ 2ﻉ2 ، 1ﻉ 2ﻤﻌﺩﻻﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﻭﻴﺎﻥ 9,75 ، 10,5ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻴﺭﺓ
.c
ﻤﻌﺩﻝﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺎ ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﻙ ؟
ik
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ Mﻝﻠﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﺴﻨﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺭ ﻝﻠﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻭ ﺒـ Xﻝﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﻭﻱ ﻭ ﺒـ sﻝﻼﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
/+ل /+ل اMsاف -4ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﻲ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ
K ا ! ا /ري !
-ﻫل ﻋﻠﻲ ﻴﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﺃﻡ ﻴﺘﺄﺨﺭ ؟
af
ا 1 Kt*H 11 9 1
ا 2Kt*H 12.5 9.5 2 -ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻴﺭﺓ ﻤﻌﺩﻝﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺎ ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﻙ ؟
م رu0ت 0$Rء -5ﻤﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﻤﺼﻁﻔﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﻭﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺴﺎﺴﻴﺔ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ
ot
/+ل ^+ 9 8 10 -ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺃﺜﺭﺕ ﺴﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﻌﺩﻝﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ؟
/+ل ا ! 10 8 11
اMsاف -ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻴﺭﺓ ﻤﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ ،ﻤﺎ ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﻙ ؟
.m
351
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 13
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ : 1
ﻨﺩﺭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﺄﺜﺭ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻁﺒﻊ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻲ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ .
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ X1 , X 2 , X 3 ,......., X nﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ m 0ﻭﺴﻁﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ V0ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻨﻬﺎ .
Xﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻭ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ) m(Xﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻴﺩ ﻭ ) V(Xﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻴﺩ n +1 ﻨﻀﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ = X
) ﺃﻱ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ . ( X n +1
X + n.m 0
-2ﻜﻴﻑ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ Xﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ m(X) = m 0؟ = )m(X -1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ
n +1
om
n n.m 0 n.V0 n.m 0 2
= )V(X X − 2.X
2
+ + -3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ :
(n + 1) 2 (n + 1)2 n + 1 (n + 1) 2
-4ﻤﺎﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ) V(Xﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ؟
-5ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ mﻭ ) Vﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻫﻭ ( X
.c
15 13 11 12 10 9 -6ﻋﻼﻤﺎﺕ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﺼﻴﺎﺕ ﺨﻼل ﺴﻨﺔ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
-aﺃﺤﺴﺏ m 0ﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻭ s0ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ .
ik
-bﺘﻭﻀﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﻋﻼﻤﺔ xﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺴﻴﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻭﻙ ﻝﻜل ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻭ ﻴﺭﻴﺩ ﺍﻷﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ
aw
x 15 13 11 12 10 9 ﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺠﺎﻨﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﻲ .
-ﻤﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ xﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل m 0ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺎ ) ﺒﻌﺩ ﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ ( ؟
-ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ s 0ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺎ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ x
) ﺍﻝﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺎﺕ ( ﻓﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ؟
af
-ﻝﻭ ﺃﻀﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ . 14ﻤﺎ ﺘﺄﺜﻴﺭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﺒﺎﻝﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﺼﺎﻥ .ﻤﺎ ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﻙ ؟
ot
ﺤـل :
.m
352
13 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
1
ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ V = )m′(X -5ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ mﻤﻊ
n +1
X m0 X m0
n m0
V0 )m(X
)v(X n +1
m s 0 ≈ 2,16 ، m 0 ≈ 11, 66 - a (6
- bﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ Xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺎ ﻫﻲ X ≈ 11, 66
ﺒﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺎ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺒﻘﺎﺀ V0ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺎ ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻨﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ V(X) = V0ﻨﺠﺩ X ≈ 12, 61ﺃﻭ X ≈ 10, 70
om
ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ 14ﺘﻌﻨﻲ ﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻕ " ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﻲ ﻻ ﻴﺘﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻤﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻭﻙ "
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ : 2
ﺘﻤﺕ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺤﻭل ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ) 340ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺤﺎﺴﻭﺏ ( ﻝﺨﺼﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ :
.c
-1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ mﻤﻌﺩل ﻤﺩﺓ ﺼﻼﺤﻴﺔ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ -ﺍﺤﺴﺏ sﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
+ة -2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺜﻤﻥ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ) 5000 DAﻤﻊ ﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺴﻨﺔ( ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺯﺒﺎﺌﻥ ﻴﻔﻀﻠﻭﻥ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺜﻤﻥ
ik
ا
ار
ا *)
T! Iات ﺇﻀﺎﻓﻲ ﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﺍﻝﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﻝﻤﺩﺓ ﺴﻨﺘﻴﻥ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﻴﺘﻴﻥ .ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺍﻝﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ
[[0 ; 1 91
aw
ﻝﻠﺸﺭﻜﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻘﺘﺭﺤﻪ ﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﺍﻝﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺴﻨﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻹﻀﺎﻓﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺘﻔﺎﺩﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﺨﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺸﺎﺕ؟
[[1 ; 1,5 40
-3ﺒﻌﺩ ﻤﺩﺓ ﺘﺤﺴﻨﺕ ﻨﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺸﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺯﺩﺍﺩﺕ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻤﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﺼﻼﺤﻴﺔ ِـ 50 %
[[1,5 ; 2 47
[[2 ; 3 82 -aﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ m′ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ s′ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺴﻥ .
[[3 ; 4 62 -bﺍﺤﺴﺏ M ′ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺴﻨﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺘﻘﺘﺭﺤﻪ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻜﺔ
af
[[4 ; 5 18
-4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ Medﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ . Iﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟
ot
-1ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻨﺠﺩ m ≈ 2, 0022 :ﺃﻱ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻌﺎﺩل ﺴﻨﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ 13ﻴﻭﻤﺎ )ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻁﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ(
ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻨﺠﺩ s ≈ 1, 216ﺃﻱ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻌﺎﺩل ﺴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻭ 78ﻴﻭﻤﺎ
.m
1300000
=M ﺃﻱ ﺒﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ) ( 1300000 DAﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ≈ 3824DA
340
w
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺤل ﺁﺨﺭ ﺒﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻜﺔ ﻻ ﺘﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺸﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺩﺓ ﺼﻼﺤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻗل ﻤﻥ ﺴﻨﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺜﻤﻥ ﻀﻤﺎﻨﻬﺎ
ﻤﺩﻓﻭﻉ ) ﻀﻤﻥ ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﺍﺀ ( ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ M ≈ 2485DA :
w
(bﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺴﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻜﺔ 178 = 91 + 40 + 47 :ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ s′ = 1, 5 × s ، m′ = 1, 5× m (a -3
890000
= M ′ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ M ′ ≈ 2618DA ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ
340
ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻝﻡ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻠﻀﻤﺎﻥ ) ﺃﻱ ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻴﺱ ﻀﻤﻥ ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﺍﺀ (
(m'; s') = (3,03;1,81) ، (Med; I) = (2,9; 4) -4ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ 50 0 0ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺸﺎﺕ ﺘﺘﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻤﺩﺓ ﺼﻼﺤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺒﻴﻥ
1,4ﻭ 4,4ﻭ 50 0 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻝﻬﺎ ﻤﺩﺓ ﺼﻼﺤﻴﺔ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل.
353
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 13
-1.إ
ء
ل
و . ا
ء
ا
om
. 56ا4ت 12ا 12 L1
/0ا!7
,.1ل ا
.c
ik
8 .2ا
aw
( ل 8ا )أو 8 8 :; .3
+ا.1 CDر اAع ا?
af
ot
K .7أ!Rى )ا!ن أو ا
0ا!:ى أو ا
0ا!Sى(
! VWا5ا
, Oل أ C,اU 0A
354
13 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
#$ت:
S
Wإء
أ!Rى ? 12ان وه)ا CK 56ه)( ا
/K 12أ!Rى )،(4+ L2
و إXع ? ا
!ا -ا
.0 و و
ت CDاRر
إذا YZKا
!S 02!
0ارات ا
ا 56 ،02ا 12 C0إZ-ى ا0ا (4+ L1) C/وا!Sارت
(.
) Freq : 12 L2 6
/K 12أ!Rى ) Z CD ،(4+ L2اRر ا
+
.2إ *
ز
-آ
ة * )(ا&
ل
om
ا ^
X 1ل، 6ز آة ، ,اAع
،TIا
. وا اZ 8 ،/د 0و 1وا
)AX 1
:
.c
أ
, ،56ل ، ,-آة ر! 50 WZ0 K 1ة 6
X Mا!ف ZA Fر اbc
وا!ف ZA Pر ا.!G
,ع ^
X TI 83ل ،ا8 ،/ ــ!
:أن ا
ik
ل Zد 0وّS 1ن 9أرKم Zا
A2 ، 02 Fا
Z 8د ر 0و.10
aw
10 )A .1ا!:7
af
و ،اZ 8 ،/د 0 8 :; .2
و ! .10آ أرKم ه)ا اZد و^ أن آ ر CKزو1c
ot
) +
W (4+ا (P)!Gوآ ر!2 CKدي +
Wا.(F) bc
12ه)( ا اZد ا
ب ه 1,374504142و +
W
10 6رت FFFPFPPFPP :
.m
PFPFFPPPFF
FFFFFFPPFP
PFFFFPPPFP
355
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 13
ا ^
X 1ل، 6ز آة ، ,اAع
،TIا
. وا اZ 8 ،/د ر Zد Wآ ،وا
)AX 1
:
ل
،أ *
- 6آ
ة ر 4زه د 20ة.
ــ! :
; .1ا 0 8 jر Z CKا
, Fل ا
وا
om
)A .2ا!:7
)A .3ا!:7
.c
و ،اZ 8 ،/د 1k 8 :; .4
ik
aw 1و.6
S
W :#$ال !Iة 12 5 6 n 8إZ-ى Kا C/ا
, ,ل ا
ot
. ا
!:7
:ل
،أ *
- 6آ
ة ر 4زه د 120ة.
.m
ــ! :
)Aا!7
w
120
w
356
13 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
:) -3.د ات <;(ر * * )(ا&
- :آ
ة
•
ل
Zد !ات ر !6X 6ا Z /آة
,ا
. ا
!:7
om
)Aا!7
.c
!GXا 8 7/Aا.I
ik
. aw و
#$ت S
W -:اG,ر ا
L2
/0
-4.ا !Cا
() * B&
? 4ا&
- :آ
ة
ل
ا
!6X 7/ +ا Z /آة
, ، ،ا
w
!:7
w
(1ﻨﻌﺩ " ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻓﻭﺍﺼل" ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻨﺨﺯﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺤﺩﻯ ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺍﺌﻡ ) L4ﻤﺜﻼ( ﺒﺘﻨﻔﻴﺫ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻨﺎﻤﺞ:
(2ﻨﻨﻔﺫ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻨﺎﻤﺞ:
357
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 13
om
ﻤﻊ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ
.c
(5ﻨﻀﺒﻁ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺒﺎﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻝﻭﺤﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻼﺌﻤﺔ.
ik
aw
ﻭﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ. (6ﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ
4) 5 10 9 7 5 4 4 5 14 13 18 11
KLM 8 9 11 10 12 12 8 8 9 10 8 10
.m
ــ! :
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ
w
SENEQUANON
ﻨﺘﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل
w
ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ
w
ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺘﻴﻥ
MIN MAX
358
13 ر:0
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ .12 .ﺇﻝﻰ 15 .ﺃﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ..ﺃﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ..
ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ.
12ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺘﻴﻥ S1ﻭ S 2ﺤﻴﺙ ﻭﺴﻁ S1 ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ . 1 .ﺇﻝﻰ . 11 .
ﻫﻭ ، 5ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ S1ﻫﻭ 1ﻭﺴﻁ S 2ﻫﻭ ، 9ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ S 2ﻫﻭ 1 ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﻁﺄ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴل :
om
ٍ………=V
ﺘﺼﺎﻋﺩﻴﺎ ،ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺭﺘﺒﺔ . n
1 (1
1,5 (2
.2 .ﻓﻲ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ 50 %ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ
.c
(3ﻻ ﻴﺴﺘﻁﻴﻊ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) Vﻻ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ ﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ (
ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ .
.14ﻓﻲ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﻡ ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺘﺘﻀﻤﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ
ik
ﺍﻷﻗل 10ﻗﻴﻡ ،ﻨﻀﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ 1ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ:
3 .ﻓﻲ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ 25 %ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ
aw
(1ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﻻ ﻴﺘﻐﻴﺭ . ﻤﻥ ) Q3ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ( .
.15ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺘﺘﻀﻤﻥ 100ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺓ ،ﻤﺨﻁﻁ 6 .ﺇﺩﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻜل ﻗﻴﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ
ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ: ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ.
.m
Q1 Me Q3 7 .ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺯﺃﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﻴﻥ.
D1 D9 8 .ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﺌﻤﺎ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﻥ
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ .
w
10 20 30 40 9 .ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝ ﺭ ﺒﻴﻊ( ﺍﻷﻭل ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﺌﻤﺎ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﻥ
w
1 .
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ.
(1ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻬﺩﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻫﻭ .20
10 .ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝـ Q1ﻭ . Q3
w
(2ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﻫﻭ .18
11 .ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﻫﻭ . Q3
(3ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ D1ﻭ D 9ﻫﻭ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ.
359
ر:0 13
.16
20ﻓﻲ ﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻜﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻷﺠﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﻤﺎل ﻫﻲ:
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
.14485 DA
ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ 7_9_5_7_3_7_20_14:
ﺒﺎﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻴﻘﺩﺭ ِـ 6000 DAﻗﺭﺭ ﻤﺩﻴﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ
.17
ﻝﺸﺭﻜﺔ ﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ 1600 DAﻓﻲ ﺃﺠﻭﺭ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻌﻤﺎل ﻭ ﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﺘﻘﺩﺭ ِـ 3 %ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭﻱ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﻲ
ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻷﺠﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ؟ (1
8_4_1_13_0_1_3_7_7_2
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ (2
om
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ . (2
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ xﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ. 21 ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
. 738_734_731_743_730_731_733_737_737_732
4_7_13_14_5 x ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ
.c
(1ﻨﻀﻊ mﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﺔ ،ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ mﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ x
x k ....., x 2 , x 1
(2ﻨﻀﻊ vﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ،ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ vﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ x
ik
ﺒﺎﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺕ n k ....., n 2 , n1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
(3ﻫل ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻗﻴﻡ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ : ﻨﻌﻁﻲ :
aw k k
= v؟ ﻭ
3 ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ 7 %ﻝﻸﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺤﺫﻑ 1 Kgﻝﺘﻌﺩﻴل ﺍﻝﺨﻁﺄ
23ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ 1_3_4_x :
w
ﻫل ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻗﻴﻡ ﻝـ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ (1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺤﻜﻴﻤﺔ ؟
ﻭﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺎﻥ ؟
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ .
360
13 ر:0
.24
.28.ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻤﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ
[ [15, 20[ [ 20, 25[ [ 25,30[ [30, 40[ [40,50[ [50,70ﺍﻝﻔﺌﺎﺕ
ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻸﻗﺴﺎﻡ 2ﻉ2 ، 1ﻉ 2ﻭ2ﻉ 3ﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ :
x 10 22 12 7 10 6 ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ
6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 19ﺍﻝﻨﻘﺎﻁ
i
om
.29.ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﻤﺜل ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩ ﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ . ﻝﻜل ﻗﺴﻡ ؟ ﻋﻠل ﺇﺠﺎﺒﺘﻙ .
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ،ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻴﻴﻥ Q1ﻭ Q2ﻝﻬﺫﻩ (2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
.c
ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ . ﻝﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻸﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺙ .
ik
aw ..اـ
ت..
.25.
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻴﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺠﻤﺎﻝﻲ ﻝﻌﻴﻨﺔ .
ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﺎ ﺘﺼﺎﻋﺩﻴﺎ .
af
-ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻴﻊ ( ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ،ﺜﻡ ﺃﻭﺠﺩ
.30..ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ .
n=133 (1
ot
3-3-3-3-3-3-4-4-4-4 (2
1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10 (3
.26.
10-9-8-7-6-5-4-3-2-1 (4
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ
w
1-1-2-2-3-3-4-4-5-5 (5
xi 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8
.31..ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ
w
361
ر:0 13
.32ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩﺓ
.36.ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻨﻘﺎﻁ )ﻤﻥ 0ﺇﻝﻰ (20ﻭﺴﺎﺌﻁﻬﺎ ﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ
om
(1ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﺃﻀﺎﻑ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻜل ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ .ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ
ﻭﺴﺎﺌﻁ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻴﺩﺓ .
.c
.33.ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﺭﻯ،
(2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻴﺤﺫﻑ ﺍﻷﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﻝﻜل ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ 10%
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺒﺭﻯ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻴﻴﻥ Q1ﻭ Q3
ik
ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ .
ﻤﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻪ ،ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﻭﺴﺎﺌﻁ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ .
aw
.37.ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻫﻭ 5ﻭ ﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻌﺎﺕ ﻫﻭ
af
120 .34.ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺘﻴﻥ . A , B
ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ .
-ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ .
اD اD
ot
ﻫﻭ25
.35.ﻓﻲ ﺤﺼﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ،ﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﻗﺴﻡ ﺒﺎﻷﻓﻭﺍﺝ
w
362
13 ر:0
ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻤﺔ 147 150 151 152 155 160 161 165 .41.ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﻌﻁﻲ ﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﺩ ﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺴﻨﻬﻡ
)(cm
1 1 2 4 6 4 3 2 ا ا ا
ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ا
(1ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ .
(2ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ :
ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁﺔ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ
om
ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ
(3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
Q1 − 3 ( Q3 − Q1 ) ; Q3 + 3 ( Q3 − Q1 )؟ ا !:
2 2
.c
.44.ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻜﺒﻴﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ (1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﻝﻬﺩﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ .
ﻭﺍﻝﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻴﻴﻥ Q1و Q3
ik
ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺘﻌﻴﻥ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ.
ﻨﺄﺨﺫ 50ﻜﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺓ ; .42.ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﻤﺜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺴﺒﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ
aw ﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﻓﺭﺩ ﺃﻤﺎﻡ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻋﻤﺭﻩ .
ﻨﻀﻊ 0ﺇﺫﺍ ﺴﺤﺒﻨﺎ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ 1ﺇﺫﺍ ﺴﺤﺒﻨﺎ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ m1ﻝﻠﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻭ ﻝﻠﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﺒـ s1 ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ 14,6 15,9 23,3
ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ 1 2 3 4 5 (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﻝﻠﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻤﺎﻡ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻸﺸﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻋﻤﺭﻫﻡ ﻴﺘﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺒﻴﻥ 2ﻭ 17ﺴﻨﺔ
ot
ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ
ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ
16 20 18 16 25 (2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﻝﻠﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺴﺒﻭﻋﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ
ﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﺩ ﺃﻤﺎﻡ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻝﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ .
.m
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 .43.ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﻌﻁﻲ ﻗﺎﻤﺔ 30ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺴﻡ
15 22 21 21 22 17 11 21 21 15
)ﺒﺎﻝﺴﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺭ(
(3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ miﻭ siﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ
w
ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ M ′ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﻝﻠﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻜل
ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ .
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ S ′ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻝﻠﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﻜﻠﻬﺎ
(6ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ Mﻭ M ′ﺜﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ Sﻭ S ′ﻋﻠل. ﻗﺴﻡ ﺁﺨﺭ ﻤﻭﺯﻉ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﺎﻤﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
363
ر:0 13
.46ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻷﻴﻜﺴﺎل ) (Excelﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ .45.ﺴﺠﻠﺕ ﻤﺼﺎﻝﺢ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻴﺩ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻝﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻬﺎﺘﻔﻴﺔ
ﺃﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﻭﻁﻭل ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻤﺭﺍﻫﻘﻴﻥ . )ﺒﺎﻝﺜﻭﺍﻨﻲ( ﻝﻤﺸﺘﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺩﺓ ﺃﺴﺒﻭﻉ ،ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ :
ﺍﻝﻭﺯﻥ)xi (Kg 52 57 58 59 60 61 62 64 65 66 -181-210-6-57-3-93-134-67-224-37-68
ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ 1 2 1 1 7 5 3 7 3 5 -258-28-7-39-101-20-78-28-69-96-77
-111-12-118-88-87-12-89-45-32-9-1-123
)(Cm
ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻤﺔ
58-27-61-94
om
3 2 6 4 4 7 5 4
ﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺯﻥ ﻭ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﺒﺘﺩﺒﺩﺏ (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ،ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻭﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
.c
Sx ﺍﻝﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ
ﺤﻴﺙ x :ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ [[0, 20
ik
S xﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ [[ 20, 40
ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻷﻴﻜﺴﺎل) (Excelﺍﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺍﺤل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ [[ 40,60
aw
(1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ A2ﻭ A36ﻨﺩﺨل ﺍﻝﻭﺯﻥ .ﻨﺤﺴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ [[60,80
A38ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ A40ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ. [[80,100
[[100,120
af
A B [[120,160
1
xi ) ( xi − x [[160, 200
[[ 200, 260
ot
S
2 52 = ( A2 − A$38 ) / A$40
(3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ،ﺍﻝﺘﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ
3 57
.m
[[0,30
A B
[[30,60
w
[[60,90
37
[[90,120
38 )=Moyenne (A2:A36
w
[[120, 240
39
40 )=Eartype (A2:A36
(5ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ،ﺍﻝﺘﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ.
ﺃﻨﻘل ﺩﺴﺘﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ B2ﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻷﺴﻔل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ Bﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
(6ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻝﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻨﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ
ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﺒﺩﺒﺔ ﻝﻸﻭﺯﺍﻥ.
ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ؟
364
13 ر:0
.48 .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ : (2ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺨﻼﻴﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻗﺭﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﺭﻯ ،
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻴﻴﻥ Q1ﻭ Q 2ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺒﺭﻯ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
xi [[ 0,8[ [8,12[ [12, 20[ [ 20,30 ﺍﻝﻤﺩﺒﺩﺒﺔ.
ni 7 16 10 17 (3ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻨﺎﺕ Dﻭ Eﻝﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻌﻤل ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ
ﻝﻠﻘﺎﻤﺔ.
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩ.
(4ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﺒﺩﺒﺘﻴﻥ ﺜﻡ ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ
(2ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ Cﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩﺓ.
om
ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ.
(3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ Cﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ
.47 .
) f ( xﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . x
ﺸﺎﺭﻙ 5000ﻤﺘﺭﺸﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻤﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻀﻴﻔﺔ
(4ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ] u ∈ [ 0,1ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻴﺔ ) Q (uﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ،ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﻌﻁﻲ ﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻻﺕ
.c
ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ xﺤﻴﺙ ، f ( x ) = uﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) Q (u
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭ ﺸﺢ:
ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . u
ا:=#ل ;:د ا783"#
ik
(5ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . Q [[ 0, 2 198
[[ 2, 4 943
(6ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ، Qﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻭل Q1ﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ
aw
Q 3ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻭل D1ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﺴﻊ . D9 [[ 4, 6 1697
[[ 6,8 554
[[8,9 156
af
xi 1 2 4 5 6 9 14 [[11,12 234
ni 5 7 8 2 7 12 9 [[12,14 367
.m
[[14,16 121
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩ. [[16,18 54
(2ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ Cﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩﺓ. [[18, 20 17
w
365
14
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
om
ﻭﺼﻑ ﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺔ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ
ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﻨﺘﻪ.
ﻨﻤﺫﺠﺔ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺒﺴﻴﻁﺔ.
.c
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ،ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻝﻘﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل.
ik
ﻤﺤﺎﻜﺎﺓ ﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺔ.
aw
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺔ ﻭ ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﻤﺭﻜﺒﺔ.
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻓﻲ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ
ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺒﺔ.
af
367
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 14
ﺘﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﻨﺸﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﻬﻴﺩ ﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻷﻭل ﻤﺭﺓ .
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :ﻨﺭﻤﻲ Pﻤﺭﺓ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺴﺘﺔ ﺃﻭﺠﻪ ،ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺍﻝﻰ 6
ﻭ ﻨﻬﺘﻡ ﺒﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻭﺴﺎﺌﻁ .
ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ fnﻝﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 6ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل nﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ
om
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ mnﻝـ nﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻱ
ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ) nﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻅﻬﻭﺭﺍ ( ) ( n ≤ p
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺤﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ - :ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺎ
ﻜل ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻴﺭﻤﻲ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﺭﺩ 30ﻤﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻴﺴﺠل ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻱ .
.c
ﻴﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ .
ﺘﻭﻀﻊ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ) ﻝﻜل ﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ ( ﻓﻲ ﺠﺩﻭل ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻙ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ) nﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ 30
ik
ﺜﻡ 60ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ .....ﺤﺘﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﺍﻷﺨﻴﺭ (
N 30 60 90 .............
aw
ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 6
ﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 6 fn
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ mn
af
ot
(n, ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ ) mn ، ( n ,ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟ ﻨﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) fn
.m
ﻴﺸﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺇﻝﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( fnﺘﺅﻭل ﺇﻝﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻗﺭﻴﺏ ﻤﻥ ) 0,17ﺘﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﺭﺩ ﻴﺅﻜﺩ ﺃﻥ
1 1
) ( ≃ 0,17 ﻝﻠﺭﻗﻡ 6ﺤﻅﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺴﺘﺔ ﺤﻅﻭﻅ ﻝﻠﻅﻬﻭﺭ ( ﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 6ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ
6 6
w
ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻝﻕ ﺇﻝﻰ B2500ﻨﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ) 2500ﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻝﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﺭﺩ (
ﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ) 6ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻨﺔ (C1ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻁﻠﺒﻴﺔ = NB.SI($B$1:B1;6)/A1ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻝﻰ C2500 ﻨﺤﺴﺏ fn
w
368
14 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ xi 1 2 3 4 5 6 ﻋﻨﺩ ﺭﻤﻲ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 6
1 1 1 1 1 1 ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻫﻲ } E = { 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6
ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ) P( x i
6 6 6 6 6 6 -ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻤﻸ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
ﻭ ﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺃﻨﻨﺎ ﻋﺭﻓﻨﺎ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ) ﻜل ﺭﻗﻡ ﻝﻪ ﺤﻅ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺴﺘﺔ ﻝﻠﻅﻬﻭﺭ (
om
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Aﻜل ﺠﺯﺀ ﻤﻥ . E
ﻭﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Aﻜﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ Aﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ )P(A
2 1
ﻷﻥ } D ={ 3 , 6 ﻤﺜﻼ :ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ": Dﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝـ " 3ﻫﻭ =
6 3
.c
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ﺒﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻝﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﺭﺩ (
":ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ": Aﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ" ": Aﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ" ": Bﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ": B " 4ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﻝﻴﺱ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ C "4
ik
ﻴﻘﺴﻡ " 30
ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻴﺤﻭﻱ 4ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺨﻀﺭﺍﺀ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 4ﻭ 3ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ ) . 3ﻻ ﻨﻔﺭﻕ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ
aw ﺒﺎﻝﻠﻤﺱ ( .ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ.
-1ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل .
": Bﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ " 3 -2ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ ": Aﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ "
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
af
ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ :ﻴﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ 20ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﻭ ﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ) Nﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ (15ﺜﻡ ﻴﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺹ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺴﺘﻘﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻬﻡ
ot
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻬﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻴﺤﺼل ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺎﺌﺘﻲ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻤﺎ .
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻬﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻝﻠﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻴﺤﺼل ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺜﻼﺜﻴﻥ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﻤﻭﺍﺴﺎﺓ ﻝﻪ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ ﻻ ﻴﺤﺼل ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺸﻲﺀ ).ﺃﻱ ﻴﺨﺴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﻴﻥ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ(
.m
-2ﺍﺸﺭﺡ ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ Gﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻫﻲ ) + 180 , + 10 , - 20 :ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ) (-20ﺃﻱ ﺨﺴﺎﺭﺓ 20ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﹰﺍ(
-3ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ " * :ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ " – 20ﻨﻜﺘﺏ ) ( G = - 20
w
369
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 14
-1ﻤﺼﻁﻠﺤﺎﺕ
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﻜل ﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻭﻗﻊ ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﻏﻡ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ .
* ﻓﻲ ﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ،ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻴﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ . Ω
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Aﺠﺯﺀﹰﺍ ﻤﻥ ، Ωﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺃﻥ Aﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ .
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺤﺘﻭﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺌﻴﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺭ ﻭﺤﻴﺩ ﻓﺈﻨﻬﺎ ﺘﺩﻋﻰ ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﺃﻭﻝﻴﺔ .
Ωﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﺍﻷﻜﻴﺩﺓ ﻭ ∅ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻠﺔ ∅) .ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻝﻲ (
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Aﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﻤﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﺎ ﺒـ Aﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻭﻱ ﻜل ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ Ωﻤﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ A
om
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻭ Bﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ .ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ A ∩ Bﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ " Aﻭ " Bﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻌﻨﺎﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ Aﻭ B
* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ A ∩ Bﺨﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ∅ = A ∩ Bﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻼﺌﻤﺘﻴﻥ .
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ A ∪ Bﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ " Aﺃﻭ " Bﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻭﻱ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ Aﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ Bﺃﻴﻀﺎ .
.c
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺴﺘﺔ ﺃﻭﺠﻪ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ . 6ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﻤﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ Ω={ 1,2,3,4,5,6 } :
ik
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ": Aﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ ".ﺃﻱ } A={ 2,4,6
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ": Bﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ". 3ﺃﻱ } B={ 3,4,5,6
aw
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﺎﻥ Aﻭ Bﻫﻤﺎ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﺠﺯﺌﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ . Ω
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ": Cﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ". 6ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﺃﻭﻝﻴﺔ ﻷﻥ } C={ 6
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ A ∩ Bﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ":ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ". 3ﺃﻱ } A ∩ B ={ 4,6
af
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ A ∪ Bﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ":ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ". 3ﺃﻱ } A ∪ B ={ 2,3,4,5,6
-2ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل
ot
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل Pﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻜل ﻤﺨﺭﺝ eiﺒﻌﺩﺩ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ piﻤﻊ } i ∈{ 1,2,3,…,n
ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ
.m
'0 1(2 34$ا -. /إر '( )*+إ$%ت Ωو *'$ن ا6ل Ω 8 P
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ piﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﺝ ei
w
:1أن آ د piﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﻓﻬﻭ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ 0 ≤ pi ≤ 1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل 1 iا n
w
:2ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Aﻴﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒـ ) P(Aﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ . A
w
370
14 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
om
7 15 12
2 4 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ A ∩ Bﻭ Aﻭ Bﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ A ∩ Bﻭ A ∩ B -4
ﺤﻴﺙ Aﻭ Bﻭ A ∩ Bﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ Aﻭ Bﻭ A ∩ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ 3 5 1
ﺤــل:
.c
Ω -1ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺃﻱ } Ω={ 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15
-2ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 5ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺒﻴﻥ 1ﻭ 15ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺸﻜل Aﺃﻱ } A={ 5,10,15
ik
-3ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 3ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺒﻴﻥ 1ﻭ 15ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺸﻜل Bﺃﻱ } B={ 3,6,9,12,15
B = { 1,2,4,5,7,8,10,11,13,14 } ، A = { 1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9,11,12,13,14 } ، A ∩ B = { 15 } -4
aw
} A ∩ B = { 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14, } ، A ∩ B = { 1,2,4,7,8,11,13,14
1
= p 2ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭ p 4 , p3 , p 2 , p1 ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ piﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ iﻤﻊ } . i ∈{ 1,2,3,4ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ
5
ﺘﺸﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺒﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
.m
ﺤــل:
w
371
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 14
C-2ﻴﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻤﻥ ﺨﻼل ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺘﺘﻀﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻨﺼﻭﺹ ﻭﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻤﺜل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻘﺎل " ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ
ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ " " ،ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻨﺔ " " ،ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻻ ﻨﻔﺭﻕ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺱ " .....
om
1
) ﻜل ﻭﺠﻪ ﻝﻪ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺤﻅ ﻝﻠﻅﻬﻭﺭ ( ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺠﻪ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺭﻤﻲ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻭ
6
1 1
ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻅﻬﻭﺭ " ﻅﻬﺭ" ﻫﻭ ﺃﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻨﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻅﻬﻭﺭ " ﻭﺠﻪ " ﻫﻭ
2 2
.c
1
ﻭﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ،ﻓﻠﻭ ﻓﺭﻀﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻴﺤﻭﻱ nﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺃﻴﺔ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻫﻭ
n
ik
ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻴﺘﻌﻠﻕ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﻤﻠﺔ ) ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺒﺎﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻝﻤﻁﺭﻭﺡ (
:
aw
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻴﺤﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ 5ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ) 3ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﻭﻴﻥ ( ] ﻻ ﻨﻔﺭﻕ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻠﻤﺱ [
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺠل ﻝﻭﻨﻬﺎ ] Bﺃﺒﻴﺽ N ،ﺃﺴﻭﺩ [
* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺨﺫﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﻤﻠﺔ } Ω = { B,Nﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﺠﻴﻥ Bﻭ Nﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻷﻥ
af
2 3
= )' ; . p(Aا ?,O-ا /-;NاΩ = {B1 , B2 , B3 , N1 , N 2 } /M = )27 p(B
5 5
و ذ >P,7 Qا ,ت ROJ+اCرج
و /ا'(ل .
ot
-2ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :
.m
+ /( 9وي ا'(ل
1
= pi آ,C Dج } 4 { eiا(ل H( pi
n
w
1
× P(A) = m إذا آ? Iاد;+ A /%ي ,J2- mا ;ن ا(< )H( P(A
n
أي أن
w
و ∅) = 0 <D$
∅(p ﻓﺈﻥ Ω) = 1
p(Ω أن p1 + p 2 + p 3 + ..... + pn = 1
:
372
14 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 3
ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻨﺔ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ": Aﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﻬﺭﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻭﺠﻪ ) ".ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻜﺎﻥ ( ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻠﻅﻬﺭ
ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ Pﻭ ﻝﻠﻭﺠﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ F
-1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺨﻁﻁﺎ ﻴﻭﻀﺢ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ .
-2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ . A
om
P ﺤــل:
P
F - -1ﻫﻨﺎﻙ 8ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﻨﻬﺎ 3ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﻼﺌﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ A
P P ﻭ ﻫﻲ PPF - PFP – FPP
F
.c
F
P P
F -2ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ A
F
ik
P
F
ا 1 F 3 د ا @Gت ا
G8 /دA c
= )P(A ﺃﻱ ﻫﻭ :
اQو
ا 1
aw 8 د ا @Gت ا -%
ا $b ا 1
ا b b
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 4
af
'G.ي -Eوق 5آ.1ت 1 *1إ 1I$ @ 5ق - )-ا 8 JG?$ . H8ا '6ا 3آ.1ت Kر3ع
] أي آ <31$ GNا .1%ا ? 'Gإ ا J216 (?$ . [ H%اQر*م ا )8G2 6ا 1%ات ا ?'G
) 3 /* 8 SG$أر*م ?1D Yورة 'VW I86Xذة . ( 1,2,3,4,5
ot
-1ه' د ا 'Aا ]/ا -%؟ ) أي د ا @Gت ا ( -%
2 4 ؟ ( 'Aا]/ ا ) -% ا @Gت ا د ه' ، ?'G $ -2ا 1(6ه a4ا ّ1ة %دون إر3ع ا .1%ا
3 5 1 )
+ :ه a4ا ّ1ة '%2ن ا 'Aا ]/ذات 3أر*م ( -b -b I86X
.m
-ه' إ6ل ا Gد ": A cا .1%ا $bا ? G2 'Gا ". 4 ]*1
ﺤــل:
3 $V 2 $V 1 $V
-1ﻝﺘﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﻤﻸ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻨﺎﺕ
w
373
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 14
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Ωﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﻤﻠﺔ ) ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ( ﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ .،ﻨﺯﻭﺩ Ωﺒﺎﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل . P
-1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Aﻓﺈﻥ 0 ≤ P(A) ≤ 1
P(∅) = 0 P(Ω) = 1 -2ﻭ
om
)P(A ∪ B) = P(A) + P(B) − P(A ∩ B -3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Aﻭ Bﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ :
)P(A ∪ B) = P(A) + P(B -4ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Aﻭ Bﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻼﺌﻤﺘﻴﻥ ) ∅ = ( A ∩ Bﻓﺈﻥ
P(A) = 1 − P(A) -5ﺤﻴﺙ Aﺍﻝﺤﺎﺜﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ A
.c
-6ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Aﺠﺯﺀﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ( A ⊂ B ) Bﻓﺈﻥ )P(A) ≤ P(B
ik
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻋﻨﺩ ﺭﻤﻲ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭﺠﻬﻬﺎ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ . 6
":Bا 'SGل 8ر*] ;Dـ ". 3 ، ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ":Aﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ ".
} A∩B = { 6 ،
aw
A ∪ B = { 2,3,4,6 } ، } B = { 3,6 } ، A = { 2,4,6
2 1 1 1
= )P(A ∪ B = P(A) + P(B) − P(A ∩ B) = + −
3 2 3 6
1
A } = { 1,3,5 )P(A) = = 1 − P(A ": Aﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ".
2
af
2ر;.
ot
} Ω = {e1 , e2 ,e 3 , .....,en '( Ω %6ا e/6-ا '0 1(6 -%ا 16$ ) /ه a4ا e/6-أادا ( AA
) p i = P(ei P %ا p i g1 g1$ ، Ω 8 @6ﻝﻼﺤﺘﻤﺎل
.m
n
ﺃﻤل ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ Eﺤﻴﺙ E = ∑ ei p i
i=1
n
ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ Vﺤﻴﺙ V = ∑ (ei - E)2 p i
w
i =1
i =1
w
374
14 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 5
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ 100.000ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 100.000ﻤﻭﻀﻭﻋﺔ ﺩﺍﺨل ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ .
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺠل ﺭﻗﻤﻬﺎ ) . xﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻔﺭﻴﻕ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻠﻤﺱ (
-ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ؟
x ": Bﻝﻴﺱ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 3ﺃﻭ ﻝﻴﺱ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ " 5 x ": Aﻝﻴﺱ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ". 3
ﺤــل:
-1ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻜﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺸﺎﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ 100.000ﻜﺭﻴﺔ .ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻓﺭﻀﺎ ) ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﺹ
om
ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﻤﻊ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﻴﻴﺯ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺒﺎﻝﻠﻤﺱ ( ﺇﺫﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺤﻅ ﻝﻠﻅﻬﻭﺭ .
ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) P(Aﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺘﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻜل ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 3ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ 100.000ﻜﺭﻴﺔ
ﻭﻝﻬﺫﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻀل ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) P(Aﻤﻊ Aﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Aﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ x ": Aﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ". 3
.c
99999
* ﺃﻭل ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻫﻭ 3ﻭ ﺁﺨﺭ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻫﻭ 99999ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ 3ﻫﻭ = 33333
3
33333
= ) P(Aﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ )P(A) = 1 - P(A ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
ik
100000
x ":ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ". 15 ﺃﻱ B -2ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ x ":ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 3ﻭ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ". 5
aw
) ﻨﻘﺒل ﺃﻥ ﻜل ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻙ ﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺃﻭﻝﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ aﻭ bﻫﻭ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﻫﻤﺎ ( ab
3333 6666 99990
P(B) = 1 - P(B) = 1 -ﺃﻱ ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ * ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ 15ﻫﻭ = 6666
50000 100000 15
af
ﺤــل:
1 4 1 1 2 4
=a ﻭﻤﻨﻪ + + + + +a=1 -1ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ
w
375
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 14
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ :
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻨﺔ 3ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺠل ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ " ﻭﺠﻪ = " ، " Fﻅﻬﺭ = " P
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻫﻲ } E = { PPP,PPF,PFP,PFF,FPP,FPF,FFP,FFF
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﻅﻬﺭ ) ﻭﺠﻪ ( Fﻭ ﻴﺨﺴﺭ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﻅﻬﺭ ) ﻅﻬﺭ ( P
om
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ Xﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ E
PFF 1
FPF 3
FFP
FFF
.c
Ωا (' ا '0 1(6 80ا1l6 ?$ . /ا '0ا /آ دا دΩ 8 +1 . :1;.12
ik
aw ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ :
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﺎل ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﻨﺒﺤﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ":ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ".ﻤﺜﻼ ،ﻨﻌﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ) ( X=1
3
= )P(A ﺘﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Aﺤﻴﺙ } A = { PFF,FFP,FPFﻝﻜﻥ
8
3
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ x -3 - 1 1 3 = )P(X = 1 ﻨﻜﺘﺏ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ
af
8
)P(X = x 1 3 3 1 ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﻤﺜل ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ X
8 8 8 8
ﻋﻤﻭﻤﺎ :
ot
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ piﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ X ":ﻴﺄﺨﺫ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ." x iﺃﻱ ) . ( X = x iﻨﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ p1 + p 2 + p3 + ..... + p n = 1
:2;.12
w
*'$ن إ6ل '0 1l6ا X /ه' ا ا ا ( X ]* '( ) I 8 +1و ا % m+12 6
* I x iا د ) p(X=x i
w
n :3;.12
ا Qا X 1l68 2n.1ه' ا د )E(X) = ∑ x i pi o E(X
w
i =1
n
ا X 1l68 .6ه' ا د V(X) = ∑ (xi − E(X)) 2 pi
i =1
376
14 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 9
ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ 3ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ 4 ،ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ 10ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﻻ ﻨﻤﻴﺯ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻠﻤﺱ .
14 14
ﺘﹸﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻓﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺤﺏ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ،
ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺩﻨﺎﻨﻴﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ ﻋﺸﺭﺓ ﺩﻨﺎﻨﻴﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ .
13 ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ Xﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺘﻤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ
7 15
-2-ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ X -1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ X
om
2
1 -4-ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ X -3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ X
ﺤــل:
-1ﻗﻴﻡ Xﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻫﻲ 10 ، 3 ، 1 :
.c
-2ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ " " X=1ﻫﻲ " ﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ " ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ 10ﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ 17
10
= )
+ /( ) P(X = 1وي ا(ل ( ﻭﻤﻨﻪ
ik
17
3 4
= )P(X = 10 = ) P(X = 3و WX27ا: N? /U,V
aw 17 17
Xi 1 3 10 ﺘﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ :
10 4 3
) P(X = X i
17 17 17
af
10 4 3 52
= ) E(Xو b.ه4ا ا د jN'6ا + q1ا 8 = × + 3 × + 10 ≃ 3, 06 -3
17 17 17 17
ot
2
10 4 3 52 3178
= V(X) = 1 × + 32 × + 102 × −
2
-4
17 17 17 17 289
.m
3178
= )σ (X و ≃ 3, 32 : 7
17
ﻨﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :ﻴﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ Mﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﺜﻡ ﻴﺭﻤﻲ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ 12ﻭﺠﻬﺎ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺍﻝﻰ 12
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ ﻴﺤﺼل ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﺜﻨﻴﻥ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ 11 ، 9 ، 7ﻴﺤﺼل ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺜﻤﺎﻨﻴﺔ
w
ﺩﻨﺎﻨﻴﺭ ﺃﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ 5 ، 3 ، 1ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻴﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺩﻨﺎﻨﻴﺭ .
-1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Mﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ (
w
377
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 14
om
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺜﻼﺙ ﺴﻼﺕ C 2 ، C1و C3ﺒﺎﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﺘﺩﻴﺭ ﻗﺭﺼﺎ ﻤﻭﺯﻋﺎ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻗﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ
ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺍﻝﻰ 3ﻭ ﺤﻴﺙ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻬﻡ
ﻓﺈﻨﻬﺎ ﺘﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ
.c
) ﺃﻱ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﺴﻬﻡ ( .
ik
] ﺘﹸﺩﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺹ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺒﻴﻀﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺘﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ [
ﻨﻘﺒل ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ BﻓﺈﻥP( A ∩ B) = P ( A) × P( B ) :
aw
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ Vkﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ":ﻓﻲ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺽ ﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺔ Ckﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ".ﻤﻊ } k ∈ { 1 , 2 , 3
n
2
ﺤﻴﺙ ) P( Vkﻴﺭﻤﺯ ﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Vk -1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ P( V1 ) = P( V2 ) = P(V3 ) =
3
af
-4ﻨﻘﺒل ﺃﻥ :
.m
-5ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ": Mﻜل ﺴﻠﺔ ﺘﺤﻭﻱ ﺒﻴﻀﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ".
2n -1
w
. P(M) = 1 - 3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ) P(Mﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل nﺍﻝﻰ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ؟ -ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ :
3n
378
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 14
om
ﻭ ﻻ ﻴﻨﺘﻅﺭ ﺍﻵﺨﺭ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺭﺒﻊ ﺴﺎﻋﺔ.
.c
]?A$ا ? إ @( 4nز -و G$آ و* A u( 6و 6 66 6G? B
و Kر3ع -Eوق 'G.ي آ.1ت *1آ : 8.
ik
4n ………. 3 2 1
ه-ك إذن ) 31X ( 4n
2
aw
إذا آن aو bر* ? 16$ ، 'Gا Gد6c
و ” G: “ | a – b | ≤ n ”F: “ | a – b | ≤ n-1
و x n = P(F) %ﻭ ) y n = P(Gﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎﻝﻲ ﻭﻗﻭﻋﻬﻤﺎ
af
-1ا1sح ذا mAG2ا Gدg86?. F cم Aء Aﻭ .Bا e6-6Nأن x n ≤ p
ot
-3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﻼﺌﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Fﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ 2n - 2 ; ..... ; n + 1 ; nﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ aﻋﻠﻰ
w
-ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ n ≤ a ≤ 3n + 1ﺜﻡ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ aﻤﺴﺎﻭﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ
w
15n − 7
= xn -4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ :
16n
-6ﺇﻋﻁ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻰ 10-2ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ pﺜﻡ ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﺎﻜﺎﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ .
379
14 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ : 1
ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ 90ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ :
ﺃﻝﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ :ﺍﻷﺤﻤﺭ ،ﺍﻷﺴﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺒﻴﺽ .
30ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ .
ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﻤﻌﺎ ﻫﻭ 60ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل
ﻴﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﺸﺨﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻝﻌﺒﺘﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺒﺩﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻴﺔ ﻝﻌﺒﺔ ﻴﺨﻴﺭ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﻴﻥ :
ا 8ا $b ا 8اQو
om
JG?.ا
Jآ .1واة و ?)$' J JG?.ا
Jآ .1واة و ?)$' J
و ا Aة ا 6Xرة q1.ا
: J و ا Aة ا 6Xرة q1.ا
: J
آ.1 آ.1 آ.1 آ.1 آ.1 آ.1
1اء Dء 'Nداء 1اء Dء 'Nداء
ا Aة 100 ا Aة 100
.c
100DA 0 DA 0 DA 0 DA
C DA A DA
ا Aة 100 100 ا Aة
0 DA 0 DA 100DA 0 DA
D DA DA B
ik
-1ﻤﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺢ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ؟
aw
-2ﻤﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺢ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ؟
ﺍﻝﺤل :
af
ﻋﻤﻭﻤﺎ ﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺎﺭﻜﻭﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ Aﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ D
ﺒﺘﻭﻅﻴﻑ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻴﺘﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ !
ot
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﻭﺯ ) P(N) , P(Rو ) P(Bﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ،ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﻭ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
.m
2 1
ﻭ P(R) + P(N) + P(B) = 1 ≥ )P(R) + P(N ≥ ) P(Rﻭ
3 3
8 ?-ا $b 8 ?-اQو
? y1 ,Oﻭ y 2ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﻴﻥ ? x1 ,Oﻭ x 2ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﻴﻥ
w
ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺢ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺩﺘﻴﻥ Cﻭ Dﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺢ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺩﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
200 100
w
380
14 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ : 2
ﻓﻲ ﻝﻌﺒﺔ ﻴﺭﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ ) ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻨﺔ ( ،ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ " ﻭﺠﻪ " ﻓﺴﻴﺭﺒﺢ
2ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺘﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺇﻻ ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻴﻌﻴﺩ ﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻤﺭﺓ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ " ﻭﺠﻪ " ﻓﺴﻴﺭﺒﺢ
22ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﻭ ﺘﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺇﻻ ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻴﻌﻴﺩ ﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ....
-1ﻨﻘﺩﻡ ﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﺇﻗﺘﺭﺍﺤﻴﻥ :
ﺭﺒﺢ 10.000.000ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺎﺭﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ) ﺃﻱ ﺭﺒﺢ 2nﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﺒﻌﺩ nﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻀﺭﻭﺭﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ " ﻭﺠﻪ " (
om
-ﺃﻱ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺭﺍﺤﻴﻥ ﺃﻓﻀل ﻝﻼﻋﺏ ؟
-2ﻨﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :ﻴﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻤﺒﻠﻐﺎ ﻤﺎﻝﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻴﺭﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ :
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ " ﻅﻬﺭ " ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﻤﺜل ﻤﺎ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻭ ﺇﻻ ﺨﺴﺭ ﻤﺎ ﺩﻓﻊ .
ﻴﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﻻﻋﺏ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :ﻴﺩﻓﻊ 10ﺩﻨﺎﻨﻴﺭ ﻭ ﻴﺭﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ " ﻅﻬﺭ " ﺘﻭﻗﻑ ﻭ ﺇﻻ ﺩﻓﻊ 20ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ
.c
ﻭ ﺃﻋﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ " ﻅﻬﺭ " ﺘﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺏ ﻭ ﺇﻻ ﺩﻓﻊ 40ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﻭ ﺃﻋﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ...
) ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﺒﺢ ﺘﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺏ ﻭ ﺇﻻ ﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﻓﻊ ﻭ ﺃﻋﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺏ (
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Yﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻼﺯﻤﺔ ﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻝﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ
ik
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ) P( Y = nﻴﺌﻭل ﺇﻝﻰ 0ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺌﻭل nﺇﻝﻰ∞ +
ﻫل ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﺃﻜﻴﺩ ) ﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎ /ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺎ ( ؟
aw
ﺍﻝﺤـل :
-1ﻨﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ) E(Xﺒﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ Xﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ .ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل :
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ nﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻴﻅﻬﺭ " ﻅﻬﺭ " ﻷﻭل ﻤﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻗﺩ ﺨﺴﺭ ﻤﻥ
ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺔ ) ( n-1ﻤﺒﻠﻐﺎ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ :
w
381
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 14
om
.c
ik
aw
af
ot
.m
w
w
w
382
14
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
om
.c
ik
aw
ﺤــل
af
ot
.m
w
w
w
383
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
14
om
.c
ik
aw
af
ot
.m
w
w
w
384
14
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
om
.c
ik
aw
af
ot
.m
w
w
w
385
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
14
ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻭﻋﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ 4ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ،ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻭ ﻨﻬﺘﻡ ﺒﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺤﻤﺭ
.ﺃﻱ ﻨﻤﻭﺫﺝ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎﻝﻲ ،ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ ،ﺘﺭﺍﻩ ﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺎ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ؟
om
ا '-ذج ا o b ا '-ذج ا $b ا '-ذج اQول
ei آ1ة 1اء @ 3'2آ1ة ei آ1ة 1اء @ 3'2آ1ة ei آ1ة 1اء @ 3'2آ1ة
واة 1اء واة 1اء واة 1اء
0,3 0,7 0,4 0,6 0,5 0,5
.c
pi pi pi
ik
ﺃﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻨﻤﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎﻝﻲ ﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻜل ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺒﻌﺩﺩ
ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﺤﺼﻭﺭ ﺒﻴﻥ 0ﻭ . 1
aw
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺍﻀﺢ ﺃ ،ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺘﺸﻤل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ ﺇﻤﺎ ﻁﻬﻭﺭ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺇﻤﺎ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺃﻴﺔ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ
.ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ p 0إ $ا(ل -م [<;ر آ,ة (,اء و p1 ],7إ $ا(ل [<;ر آ,ة (,اء وا(ة .
اي - 4;Pا;ز^ ا
وي ;?Uن ا'(ل اول أي ا;2ذج اول ؟
ه ,J( Dا'cر 9ا;2ذ bا ?aو ا Ha؟
af
;? Rb,ذج ,be7 2P ، ,cd $-اء آة < fا;7 /7,NاN /Vول آ,ر? ا, k /7,Nة و (
2Oا;اfk ,+
;<gر آ,ة (,اء ،وذ Qأ
k Dbوي hi? I? 9 1000 >% 100 >% 10ا;ا,+ات 2- ,Mت آU Dس
اUت ا /%jaآ ه Vة 9اNول ا;ا
.m
f10 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,3 0,8 0,3 0,2 0,4 0,2
f100 0,42 0,39 0,47 0,44 0,37 0,37 0,50 0,36 0,37 0,44
w
f1000 0,412 0,409 0,395 0,400 0,402 0,404 0,414 0,397 0,402 0,386
w
ﺃ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻜل ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ fkو >b,+ذ. Q
-ﻤﺎﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎﻝﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺒﺩﻭ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﻤﻼﺀﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺎﻫﺩﺓ ؟
w
ﺏ( ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺏ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﻼﺴل ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻝﻨﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﻝﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻐﺭﺽ .
386
14 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺤــل :
-1ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻤﻘﺎﺒل 4ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﻨﺎﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻜﺜﺭ ﺤﻅﺎ
ﺃﻱ ﺍﻷﻜﺒﺭﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻ .ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﻝﻨﺎ ﺒﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻷﻭل ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻝﻺﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ .
ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍ ،ﻫﺫﺍ ﻻ ﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﻝﻨﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻔﺼل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺠﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻴﻴﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻨﺠﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ . p 0 ≻ p1
om
-2ﻨﻠﺨﺹ ﺍﻹﺠﺎﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ :
.c
K = 100 0,50 – 0,36 = 0,14 f100 = 0, 413 σf100 = 0, 05
K = 1000 0,414 – 0,386 = 0,028 f1000 = 0, 402 σf1000 = 0, 01
ik
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ :
aw
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ 0,3 ≺ f10 ≺ 0, 4ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻝﻴﺱ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻤﺎ ﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﻝﻨﺎ ﺒﺘﻔﻀﻴل ﺃﻱ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ 0,3ﻭ 0,4ﻝﻼﺤﺘﻤﺎل ، p1ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ .ﻓﺘﺭﺠﻴﺢ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺠﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻤﻜﻥ ﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻵﻥ .
-1ﺘﺫﺒﺫﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻴﻘل ﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻘﺎﺴﻬﺎ ،ﺇﺫ ﻴﺘﻀﺎﺀل ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻯ ﻤﻥ ، 0,700ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻘﺎﺴﻬﺎ ، 10ﺍﻝﻰ 0,028ﻓﻲ
ot
-2ﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻘﺎﺴﻬﺎ 100ﻤﻊ ﺘﻠﻙ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻘﺎﺴﻬﺎ ، 1000ﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻓﻲ
.m
-3ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺘﻀﺎﺀل ﺍﻹﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺼﻐﺭ 10ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﻜﺒﺭ
1000ﺃﻱ σf10 ≻ σf100 ≻ σf1000
w
ﺘﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻅﺎﻫﺭ ،ﺒﺎﻹﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻝﻰ ﻜﻭﻥ ، σf1000 = 0, 01ﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﻴﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ ﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻹﺴﺘﻘﺭﺍﺭﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ
w
ﺨﻼﺼﺔ :
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻷﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻼﺌﻤﺔ ﻝﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺘﺒﻨﺎﻩ ﻜﻨﻤﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎﻝﻲ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ .
387
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 14
-3ﺏ( ﺘﻌﻁﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ TI83+ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺏ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﻭﻀﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺸﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ :
ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺘﺒﺩﻱ ﺒﻭﻀﻭﺡ ﺴﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ ،ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻨﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ) ( Loi des grand no,bresﻭ
ﺘﺅﻴﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻭﺼﻠﻨﺎ ﺇﻝﻴﻬﺎ .
• ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺤﻴﺙ k = 10ﻨﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ :
om
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ
ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
.c
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺤﻴﺙ k = 100ﻨﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ : •
ik
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ
aw
ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
af
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺤﻴﺙ k = 1000ﻨﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ : •
ot
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ
ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
.m
w
388
14 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
أ دة ا رات أ
أم
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 7ﺇﻝﻰ 9ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 6ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ :
ﻤﻌﻠﻼ ﺇﺠﺎﺒﺘﻙ:
7ﻝﺘﻜﻥ B ، Aﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺎﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ Ω
ﻨﺸﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﹰﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ، 3 ، 2 ، 1
ﺤﻴﺙ p (C ) = 0, 7 ، p ( B) = 0, 4 ، p ( A) = 0,3
5،4
، p ( A ∪ B) = 0, 7 ، p ( A ∩ B) = 0, 2
ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ:
p ( A ∩ C ) = 0, 2 ، p ( B ∪ C ) = 0, 7
om
1ﻋﺩﺩ ﺒﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻫﻭ 0,48
p ( B ∩ C ) = ... (1
ﻋﺩﺩ ﻴﺸﻤل 3ﻫﻭ 0,78 2
)•( 0,5 ، )•( 0,4 )•( ، 0,35
3ﻋﺩﺩ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﻫﻭ 0,52
p ( A ∪ C ) = ... (2
b ، a 4ﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ 0;1ﻭﻫﻲ ﺒﻬﺫﺍ
.c
)•( 0,75 )•( ، 0,09 )•( ، 0,8
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ.ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ
( )
p A ∩ C = ... (3
ﺤﻴﺙ:
ik
)•( 1,02 )•( ، 0,5 )•( ، 0,3 p (1) = p(2) = a
ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ 5ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 8 p (3) = p (4) = b
aw
.5ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺠل ﺭﻗﻤﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻨﻌﻴﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ ﺜﻡ p (5) = p (6) = c
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺠل ﺭﻗﻤﻬﺎ.ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Xﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ 1
ﺇﺫﻥ = b
ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ . 6
af
ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ Xﻫﻭ 5ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﺸﺭ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ.
1
5,5 (4 ، 7 (3 ، 6 (2 ، 5 (1 =p ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺸﺭ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ "ﻭﺠﻪ" ﻫﻭ
1000
ot
389
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 14
Aﻭ Bﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ ، p ( A ) = 0,3 11
18ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ 3ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ 4 ،ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺨﻀﺭﺍﺀ
. p ( A ∩ B ) = 0, 2 ، p ( A ∪ B ) = 0, 7ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) . p ( B
ﻭ 3ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺼﻔﺭﺍﺀ .ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ.
A 12ﻭ Bﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ ، p ( A) = 0, 45
ﻫل ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ Ω
ﻫﻲ: p ( A ∪ B ) = 0,82 ، p ( B ) = 0,37
ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻭﺠﻪ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻤﺭﻗﻡ ، 1ﻭﺠﻬﻴﻥ 19 13ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻭﺠﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ ، 6ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل
ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﺕ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ:
om
ﻤﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ، 2ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ. 3
(1ﻫل ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ؟ )p (1) = p(2) = 2 p (3) = 3 p (4) = p(5) = p (6
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻜل ﻭﺠﻪ.
.c
20ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﻨﺭﺩﻴﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﺃﺴﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻵﺨﺭ ﺃﺨﻀﺭ .ﻨﺴﻤﻲ n ﻝﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻁﺭﻨﺞ.ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺒﻴﻥ B ، Aﻭ Cﻝﻬﻡ ﻨﻔﺱ
ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﺭﺩ ﺍﻷﺴﻭﺩ ﻭ ℓﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﺭﺩ ﺍﻷﺨﻀﺭ. ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺢ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺒﻴﻥ Dﻭ Eﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل
ik
Bﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ" ℓ ≤ 3 " : Aﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ." n ≤ 3 " : ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺢ ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ Aﻝﻪ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﺤﻅﻭﻅ ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺢ
Cﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ n + ℓ < 3 " :ﺃﻭ " ℓ > 2 ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻼﻋﺏ . D
aw (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺢ ﻝﻜل ﻻﻋﺏ.
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) p ( B ) ، p ( Aﻭ ) p ( C
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﺭﺒﺢ Dﺃﻭ . E
21ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﻤﺜل ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻤﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻝﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﻤﺅﺴﺴﺔ ﻤﺎ
(3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺭﺒﺢ Aﺃﻭ Bﺃﻭ . C
ﺤﺴﺏ ﺼﻔﺘﻬﻡ ﺩﺍﺨﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺨﺎﺭﺠﻲ
af
(4ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ Bﻻ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ.
ﺨﺎﺭﺠﻲ ﺩﺍﺨﻠﻲ
195 212 15ﺘﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻁﻔﻠﺔ ﻫﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻭﻑ D ، H ، I ، Nﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ
ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺠﺤﻭﻥ
ot
ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ:
ﻨﺎﺠﺤﺎﹰ؟
(3ﻗﻠﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺸﺎﺏ ؟ (2ﺒﻨﺕ ؟ (1ﻋﺩﺩ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ؟
(3ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﹰﺎ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺍ ﺭﺍﺴﺒﺎ.ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ
w
390
14 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
23ﺃﻋﺩ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﻭ ﻝﻜﻥ ﻻ ﻨﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺔ
(2ﻴﺴﻜﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺔ ؟
ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ.
(3ﻴﺫﻫﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻯ؟
24ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ 7ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ
ﻼ ﻴﺴﻜﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ.ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻠﺘﺤﻕ
(4ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻤ ﹰ
ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ 3 ، 2 ، 1ﻭ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ، 1
ﻤﺎﺸﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻼ ﺍﻷﻗﺩﺍﻡ؟
.4 ، 3 ، 2ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ
29ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻡ ﺒﻪ 45ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﹰﺍ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ 14ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻨﺎﺩﻱ
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺴﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ 10ﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﻓﻲ ﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﻭ 5ﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﻓﻲ ﻜﻼ
": Aﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ"": B .ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ".
ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺩﻴﻴﻥ.ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﹰﺎ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﹰﺍ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ .ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل
om
" : Cﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﺎ"
ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ (1 :ﻤﻥ ﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺴﻴﻘﻰ ؟
(2ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺩﻴﻴﻥ؟ (2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ، A ∩ C ، A ∩ B :
. B ∪C ، A∪C ، A∪ B ، B ∩C
(3ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﹰﺍ ﻤﻥ ﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ.ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ
) (
.c
ﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺴﻴﻘﻰ؟ A 25ﻭ Bﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ، p A = 0, 44 :
30ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ ﻤﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .ﻨﺴﻤﻲ P ( )
p B = 0, 63ﻭ . p A ∪ B = 0,52ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) P ( A ∩ B ) (
ik
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺙ " ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﻬﺭ " ﻭ Fﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺙ " ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل 26ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻻﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺤﻅﻭﻅ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺠﻪ". ﺒﻨﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻝﺩ .
aw
(1ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﻭ (1ﺒﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﻻﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻌﺎﺌﻠﺔ
= )، p ( Pﺍﺤﺴﺏ = ) . p ( F
1 ﺒﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﻁﻔﺎل.
3
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﺌﻠﺔ ﺒﺜﻼﺙ ﺃﻁﻔﺎل ﺘﺘﻀﻤﻥ
(2ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ
af
ﺒﻨﺘﻴﻥ.
ﺃ( ﻀﻊ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﹰﺎ ﺘﻭﻀﺢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ
27ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ 4ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ 7 ، 5 ، 2 ، 1
ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ.
ot
+
Rh 80 0 0 85 0 0 83 0 90 0 0
0
ﺤﺎﻓﻠﺔ ﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻤﺸﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺩﺍﻡ
Rh − 20 0 0 15 0 0 17 0 0 10 0 0
ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ 23 34 20
ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﺸﺨﺼﺎ ﻤﻥ . Pﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ
ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺔ 56 18 5
(2ﻤﻥ ﻓﺼﻴﻠﺔ . B (1ﻤﻥ ﻓﺼﻴﻠﺔ . O +
+ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻤل ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﺴﺴﺔ .ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ:
(4ﻤﻥ Rhﻭ . O (3ﻤﻥ . Rh −
(1ﻴﺴﻜﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﻴﻠﺘﺤﻕ ﺒﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﻤﺸﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺩﺍﻡ؟
391
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 14
(1ﺒﻨﺘﹰﺎ (2ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﹰﺍ ﻗﺎﺼﺭﹰﺍ (3 .ﺒﻨﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻝﺩﺍ ﺭﺍﺸﺩﺍ. 32ﻓﻲ ﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﻔﺭ ﻷﺤﻤﺩ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺴﺭﻭﺍﻻﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﺃﺒﻴﺽ
35ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺘﺘﻀﻤﻥ 50ﺤﺒﺔ ﺤﻠﻭﻯ ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺇﻤﺎ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻭﺍﻵﺨﺭ ﺃﺴﻭﺩ ،ﻤﻌﻁﻔﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﺃﺒﻴﺽ ﻭﺍﻵﺨﺭ ﺃﺴﻭﺩ ﻭﺜﻼﺜﺔ
ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻭ ﺇﻤﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻜﻭﻻﻁﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻰ. ﺃﻗﻤﺼﺔ ،ﺍﺜﻨﺎﻥ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻵﺨﺭﺃﺴﻭﺩ.ﺃﺨﺫ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ
30 0ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻜﻭﻻﻁﺔ ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ 10ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل 0
ﻻ ﻭ ﻤﻌﻁﻔﹰﺎ ﻭ ﻗﻤﻴﺼﹰﺎ.
ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﺴﺭﻭﺍ ﹰ
ﻭ 60 0 0ﻤﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭﻯ ﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل. (1ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﻷﺤﻤﺩ
(1ﺃﻤﻠﺊ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
ﺒﺎﺭﺘﺩﺍﺀ ﺴﺭﻭﺍل ﻭ ﻤﻌﻁﻑ ﻭ ﻗﻤﻴﺹ.
ﺩﺍﺌﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ (2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ":ﻝﺒﺎﺱ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﺃﺴﻭﺩ"
ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻜﻭﻻﻁﺔ
om
1
= )P( A -ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ
ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺭﺒﻰ 12
ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ (3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﻤﺭﺘﺩﻴﺎ ﺴﺭﻭﺍﻻ ﻭﻤﻌﻁﻔﺎ
(2ﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻁﻔل ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﹰﺎ ﺤﺒﺔ ﺤﻠﻭﻯ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ.ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﻥ ﻝﻭﻨﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻥ.
ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻷﺤﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: (4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻻ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﻤﺭﺘﺩﻴﺎ ﻗﻤﻴﺼﺎ ﺃﺴﻭﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻻ
.c
" Aﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺤﺒﺔ ﺤﻠﻭﻯ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل " ﻤﻌﻁﻔﺎ ﺃﺒﻴﻀﺎ.
" Bﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺤﺒﺔ ﺤﻠﻭﻯ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺭﺒﻰ " 33ﻓﻲ ﺸﺭﻜﺔ ﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﻋﻘﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻥ ﻤﻭﺯﻋﺔ ﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ:
ik
" Cﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺤﺒﺔ ﺤﻠﻭﻯ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺭﺒﻰ " 72 0 0ﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻓﻲ ﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
" Dﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺤﺒﺔ ﺤﻠﻭﻯ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺃﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺭﺒﻰ " 54 0 0ﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻓﻲ ﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﻥ
aw 30 0 0ﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﻴﺎﺓ.
(3ﺍﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻁﻔل ﺤﺒﺔ ﺤﻠﻭﻯ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل .
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻜﻭﻻﻁﺔ. 7 0 0ﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﺄﻤﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺙ.
36ﻨﻀﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻜﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻭﻑ . T ، H ، M ، Aﻨﺴﺤﺏ 25 0 0ﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻥ ﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ.
31 0 0ﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻥ ﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ .
af
ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻭ ﻨﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ
14 0 0ﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻥ ﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ.
ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ1 ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ2 ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ3 ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ4 (1ﻤﺜل ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺒﻤﺨﻁﻁ.
ot
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻤﺔ " ." MATH (2ﺘﺭﺴل ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻜﺔ ﻤﺭﺍﺴﻠﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻴﻕ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻴﺩ ﻷﺤﺩ ﺯﺒﺎﺌﻨﻬﺎ
37ﺘﺴﻴﺭ ﻨﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﺭﺤﻠﺔ ﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ،ﻨﻀﻊ:
.m
y ﺘﺘﺤﺭﻙ ﺒﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻴﻤﻴﻥ " Aﺍﻝﻤﺅﻤﻥ ﻤﺴﺠل ﻓﻲ ﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ "
ﺃﻭ ﺒﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﻤﺜﺎل " Hﺍﻝﻤﺅﻤﻥ ﻤﺴﺠل ﻓﻲ ﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﻥ "
1
C B
ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻴﻤﻴﻥ ،ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ،ﻴﻤﻴﻥ ، " Vﺍﻝﻤﺅﻤﻥ ﻤﺴﺠل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﻴﺎﺓ "
→
w
j
ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ،ﻴﻤﻴﻥ ،ﻴﻤﻴﻥ( ﻨﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﺃ -ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻷﺤﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ، A ∪ H ، A ∩ V :
→ A0
i1 x
( )
A ∪V ، A ∪ H ، A ∩V ∩ H ، A ∪ H
ﺒـ . i, j , i, j , i, i
(2ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ H ، Aﻭ Vﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺤﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
w
392
14 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
(1ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺠﺩﻭل ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ.
X -1 0 1 2 3 4
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﺄﺨﺫ :
)P ( X = x
1 1 1 1
α α • ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل 5DA • ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل . 10 DA
8 6 10 3
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . α 39ﺴﺅﺍﻻﻥ ﻤﻁﺭﻭﺤﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺘﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺨﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) E ( Xﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝـ . X ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ "ﻨﻌﻡ" ﺃﻭ "ﻻ" ﻝﻜﻼ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍﻝﻴﻥ.ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻔﺘﺎﺀ ﻤﻭﺯﻋﺔ
(3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) V ( Xﺍﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﻝـ Xﻭ ) σ ( Xﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ . X ﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ 65 0 0 :ﺃﺠﺎﺒﻭﺍ "ﻨﻌﻡ" ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻷﻭل.
44ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Xﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ 51 0 0ﺃﺠﺎﺒﻭﺍ "ﻨﻌﻡ" ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ.
om
7 ، 4 ، 3 ، - 8ﻭ9 46 0 0ﺃﺠﺎﺒﻭﺍ "ﻨﻌﻡ" ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍﻝﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ.
ﻨﻀﻊ u2 = P ( X = 3) ، u1 = P ( X = −8 ) : ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﹰﺎ ﻨﺎﺨﺒﹰﺎ.ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺨﺏ
.c
(1ﻋﻠﻤ ﹰﺎ ﺃﻥ u4 ، u3 ، u2 ، u1ﻭ u5ﻫﻲ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ
1 ﻴﻀﻌﻭﻥ ﻨﻅﺎﺭﺍﺕ " " Lﻭﺍﻷﺸﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻝﺫﻴﻥ ﻴﻀﻌﻭﻥ ﺭﺒﻁﺔ
ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل . X
ﻋﻨﻕ" 150 ."Cﺸﺨﺼ ﹰﺎ ﻻ ﻴﻀﻌﻭﻥ ﻨﻅﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻻ ﺭﺒﻁﺔ ﻋﻨﻕ.
ik
2
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﹰﺎ ﺸﺨﺼﹰﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﺴﺴﺔ.
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
aw (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ " . " L ∪ C
45ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ،ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻴﻥ ﻭ (2ﻋﻠﻤ ﹰﺎ ﺃﻥ P ( L ) = 0,5ﻭ ، P ( C ) = 0, 4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ
ﺜﻼﺙ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ .ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﹰﺎ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺸﺨﺼﹰﺎ ﻴﻀﻊ ﻨﻅﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺭﺒﻁﺔ ﻋﻨﻕ.
ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ.ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Xﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺴﺤﺏ 41ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ 50ﻜﺭﺓ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 50
af
ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ. .ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﹰﺎ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻷﺤﺩﺍﺙ:
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X ": Aﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ" 30
ot
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X ": Bﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ n ) " nﻋﺩﺩ
(3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]( [1;30
.m
ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ 4ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 6 ، 3 ، 2 46 (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) . P ( A ∪ Bﻤﺎ ﺫﺍ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ
ﻭ . 9ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺜﻡ ﻨﻌﻴﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ ﺜﻡ
A∪ B؟
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Xﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ
(2ﻋﻠﻤ ﹰﺎ ﺃﻥ ، P ( A ∩ B ) = 0,15ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ
w
ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ
)P ( X = x 0,2 0,35 0,1 0,15 0,2
2
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝـ . X
3
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ . X
6
، Xﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎﻝﻪ ﻤﻭﺯﻉ ﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ: 43
9
393
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 14
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺘﻴﻥ.
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ، P ( X = 12 ) :
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ ' . Ω
) P ( X < 9 ) ، P ( X = 36ﻭ ) . P ( X ≥ 27
(2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝـ Y؟
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل . Y
(3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ X
(4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . Y
(5ﻋﻴﻥ ). P (Y ≤ 1 47ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ 3ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ،ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺼﻔﺭﺍﻭﻴﻥ
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ Ω '' ،ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻜل ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ. Xﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ
om
Zﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﻭ Yﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل
ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺘﻴﻥ. ﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ.
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ '' . Ω (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝـ . X
.c
(2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝـ Z؟ (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل . Z (3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
ik
(4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . Z (4ﺃﺠﺏ ﻋﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻷﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . Y
7 (5ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ Zﺤﻴﺙ ، Z = X + Yﻭﻝﻴﻜﻥ
(5ﻋﻴﻥ . P Z ≥
2
aw Nﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ
49ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﻤﺤﺼﻭﺭﺍ ﺒﻴﻥ 1ﻭ X ،99ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ
ﺍﻝﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ.
ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ.
• ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ Zﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ • . Nﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل . Z
(1ﺃﻤﻸ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
af
• ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) E ( Zﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ـ Zﻭ ) σ ( Zﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ . Z
ﺍﻵﺤﺎﺩ
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ــ
ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﺍﺕ
ﻨﻀﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻜﻴﺱ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ،1 48
ot
0
ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﺘﺤﻤﻼﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ 2ﻭﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ.3
1
ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ: 1
.m
2
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﹰﺎ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ )ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ(،
3
ﻨﻀﻊ Ωﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ X ،ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ
4
ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺘﻴﻥ.
w
5
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ . Ω
6
w
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ) . P ( X ≥ 5 ﻨﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ
(4ﻴﻠﻌﺏ ﻋﻤﺭ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ X ≥ 5ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ' Ωﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻜل ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ Yﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ
394
14 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
53ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﻁﻭل ﺤﺭﻓﻪ 3 cmﻤﻠﻭﻥ ﺒﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ. Yﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﻋﻤﺭ .
ﻨﻘﺴﻤﻪ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺇﻝﻰ 27ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ ﻁﻭل ﺤﺭﻓﻪ 1 cm ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ . Y
(5ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) E (Yﻭ ) . σ (Yﻫل ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻝﺔ؟
50ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﻤﺤﺼﻭﺭﺍ ﺒﻴﻥ 0ﻭ . 60ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
Xﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻵﺤﺎﺩ ﻭ Yﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ
ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﺍﺕ.
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل Xﻭ . Y
om
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) . P ( X = Y
(3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) . P ( XY > 17
(4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ). P ( 2 X + Y = 13
ﻨﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻝـ 27ﻓﻲ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ.
51ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ 8ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ :ﺨﻤﺱ ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ
.c
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ
ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ 5 ،4 ،3 ،2 ،1ﻭﺜﻼﺙ ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ،2 ،1
ﺍﻝﻤﻠﻭﻨﺔ.
. 3ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻜﺭﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻻ ﻨﺭﺠﻊ
ik
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ .ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Sﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻜﺒﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ.
aw
54ﻓﻲ ﺍﻤﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻴﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩﺓ
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ . S
ﺍﻻﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﻭ ﻝﻜل ﺴﺅﺍل ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ (2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ
ﺃﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻘﻁ. ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ . S
( )
af
ﻝﻜل ﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻴﺤﺼل ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ +1ﻭ ﻝﻜل ﺠﻭﺍﺏ 52ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O; i, j
1
ﺨﺎﻁﺊ ﻴﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ −ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﺠﺎﺒﺔ ﻴﺤﺼل ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) B (1;0 ) ، A ( 0;1ﻭ ) . C ( −1; 0
2
ot
ﻋﻠﻰ . 0ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻴﺠﻴﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ. ﻨﺭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ β ، 1ﻭ δﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ) βﻭ δﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ( G .ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
(1ﻤﺜل ﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ.
ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ }) {( A,1) ; ( B, β ) ; ( C , δ
.m
(1) .......
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Xﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ Xﺴﺎﻝﺒ ﹰﺎ
ﻴﺤﺼل ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ .0 (1ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ βﻭ δﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . G
-ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ . G
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝـ X
w
395
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 14
ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻤﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻨﻬﺘﻡ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻩ . 1,7
ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻱ. (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻤﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺒﺎﺕ.
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ . p1 = 0,1 (2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
-ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ . p6 ، p5 ، p4 ، p3 M " : Aﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل "
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: M " : Bﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭﻨﺼﻑ
" : Aﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺘﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ". ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ. " 1
" : Bﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺘﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﹰﺎ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ." 3 X (3ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ
om
" : Cﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺘﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 2ﺃﻭ ." 5 . x2 + y 2
. " A∩C " : D • ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل . X
. " A∪C " : E • ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
.c
" A" : F 4
.• ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺇﻝﻰ ) ( Dﻫﻭ
(3ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﻝﻌﺒﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﺭﺩ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ 9
56ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ nﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ) nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ
ik
40 DAﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ، 4ﻴﺨﺴﺭ 10 DAﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ
ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، (7ﻤﻨﻬﺎ 7ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ .
ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻴﺨﺴﺭ 100 DAﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 2ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ . 6
aw ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ )ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ(.
Xﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻌﻁﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺨﺴﺎﺭﺓ.
(1ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺃﻥ. n = 10 :
ﺃ -ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﺄﺨﺫﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﺏ -ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
" : Aﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ".
af
ﺠـ -ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
" : Bﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ".
ﺩ -ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻝﺔ ؟ )ﺃﻤل
" : Cﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺘﺎﻥ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﺍﻥ " .
ot
ﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ(
" : Dﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻠﻭﻥ " .
58ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ) ( Sﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﻁﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭﻝﻴﻥ
(2ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻜﻴﻔﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ
x− y =3
.m
ﻭﺠﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ . 6ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻴﻌﻁﻲ a = Pn -ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ
n2 − n
،ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﻴﻌﻁﻲ bﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻴﻌﻁﻲ . c -ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻪ ﻝـ Pnﻗﻴﻤﺔ
w
ﻼ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﹰﺍ ".
ـ( " : Cﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ) ( Sﺘﻘﺒل ﺤ ﹰ ﻭ . p4 = 2 p3 p2 = 0,15
ﻼ ﻝﻬﺎ ".
ﺩ( " : Dﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ) ( Sﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) (3;0ﺤ ﹰ
396